for current pricing visit our website

Transcription

1 PLASTIS FOR TODAY S INDUSTRY HEMKOR WELD-ON AQUAMETRIX BLUE-WHITE INSTADU GEORGE FISHER SIMONA HARVEL ROYAL PIPE SYSTEM SEAL HF FANS SPEARS STRONGWELL NIBO-HEMTRO NET ONTAIN-IT SNYDER TRIPAKS HAYWARD KURI-T PREISIONEERING PARKER PENGUIN HEMKOR WELD-O AQUAMETRIX BLUE-WHITE INSTADUT GEORGE FISHER NA HARVEL ROYAL PIPE SYSTEMS FUSEAL HF FANS SP STRONGWELL NIBO-HEMTROL SIGNET ONTAIN-IT SN TRIPAKS HAYWARD KURI-TE PREISIONEERING PAR PENGUIN HEMKOR WELD-ON AQUAMETRIX BLUE-WHIT STADUT GEORGE FISHER SIMONA HARVEL ROYAL PIP SYSTEMS FUSEAL HF FANS SPEARS STRONGWELL NIB HEMTROL SIGNET ONTAIN-IT SNYDER TRIPAKS HA KURI-TE PREISIONEERING PARKER PENGUIN HEMK WELD-ON AQUAMETRIX BLUE-WHITE INSTADUT GEORG HER SIMONA HARVEL ROYAL PIPE SYSTEMS FUSEAL H SPEARS STRONGWELL NIBO-HEMTROL SIGNET ONT IT SNYDER TRIPAKS HAYWARD KURI-TE PREISION PARKER PENGUIN HEMKOR WELD-ON AQUAMETRIX BL WHITE INSTADUT GEORGE FISHER SIMONA HARVEL for current pricing visit our website

2 TESTON RD. MAJOR MAKENZIE HWY. 27 HWY. 400 JANE ST. KEELE ST. MAPLE, ONT. HWY. 7 HWY. 11 HWY. 401 OUR ORPORATE HEAD OFFIE 2175A TESTON ROAD, MAPLE, ONTARIO, ANADA L6A 1T3 Tel:(905) Toll Free Tel: (800) Fax:(905) Toll Free Fax:(800) Web Site: info@fabcoplastics.com Terms Price Prices are subject to change without notice. Please contact your Fabco representative for current pricing on all stock and nonstock items. All are based on standard domestic packaging and do not include special overseas packaging or other requirements. Dealer, ontractor, and OEM discounts for volume orders available for most products. Placing Orders To expedite handling of your order, please use the combination of part number, size and brief description. Our minimum order size is $25 net. Shipping All shipments are FOB shipping point except those qualified materials which carry mill shipment freight allowances. The term FOB shipping point means that the carrier accepts all responsibility upon accepting the shipment at our dock. Therefore, any claim for damage or loss must be settled between you and the carrier without delay. Billing Terms Prior credit approval and nondelinquent status are necessary before shipping on open account. Our open account terms are net 30 days. A 2% per month (24% per annum) charge is made on accounts exceeding 30 days. All taxes required by law are computed and added to your invoice. Our minimum billing is $25 net. Export Shipments FABO will be happy to handle your export order. We will offer prompt replies on your inquiry including Pro Forma Invoice, IF port of unloading, and export crating on all our products. The terms are letter of credit drawn on a anadian Bank for orders in excess of $5000. All orders under $5000 are advance wire transfer. Address your inquiry to Export Department at our Maple, Ontario office. laims & Returns laims for shortages or inaccurate filling of orders must be made to FABO within 10 days after receipt of goods. Include a copy of the invoice or shipper on which the goods were purchased. You will then receive a returned Goods Authorization (RGA) number. There is a 25% restocking charge on any standard goods that are returned for credit or exchange, when the error is not ours, providing that such goods that are returned are in new and saleable condition, are returned on a prepaid basis and the returned goods do not exceed 10% of the original order quantities. Goods returned without the RGA will be refused. Any custom fabrication, hand fabricated or specialty ordered products are non returnable. ONDITIONS OF SALES Notice to Buyer Information FABO will endeavour to supply such advice as it may be able to supply with reference to the use by buyer of any material purchased, but FABO makes no guarantees and assumes no obligation or liability for advice given verbally or in print or the results obtained. Buyer assumes all risk and liability which may result from the use of any material, whether used singly or in combination with other products. No suggestion for product use shall be construed as a recomendation for its use in infringement on any existing patent. Product Warranty All products carry the original manufacturer s warranty. opies are available upon request. FABO reserves the right of product substitution to meet market shortage.

3 TABLE OF ONTENTS PV, PV, POLYPROPYLENE, PVDF PROESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 ENGINEEREDED PIPING SYSTEMS 2 VALVES AND AESSORIES 3 PLASTI SHEET, ROD, FRP STRUTURAL SHAPES, GRATING 4 FLOWMETERS, ONTROLLER ERS, PROBES, LEVEL TRANSITTERS 5 PUMPS, METERING PUMPS, FILTERS, STRAINERS 6 POLYETHYLENE TANKS AND AESSO SORIES 7 FLEXIBLE TUBING, HOSE, FITTINGS 8 VENTILATION DUT, FITTINGS, PAKING, FAN ANS, SRUB UBBER OMPONENTS 9 SPEIFIATIONS AND ENGINEERINGNG REFEREN ENES 10

4 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 PIPE PV is the most frequently specified of all plastic piping materials. It has been used successfully for over 60 years. PV is characterized by distinctive physical properties and is resistant to corrosion and chemical attack by acids, alkalies, salt solutions and many other chemicals. It is attacked, however, by polar solvents such as ketones and aromatics. Of the various types and grades of PV used in plastic piping, Type 1, Grade 1 PV (ell lassification B) conforming to ASTM D1784, is the most common. The maximum service temperature for PV is 140 F. 1 With a design stress of 2,000 psi, PV has the highest long-term hydrostatic strength (at 73 F) of any other major thermoplastic material used for piping. Applications Swimming Pools and Spas hemical Feed Systems Industrial Water Treatment Systems Municipal Water Treatment Systems Turn-key Treatment Skids ooling Towers Metallic Plating Lines Features Stocked in 20 lengths, plain end Available in custom lengths as a special Bell end joints also available Lightweight for quick and easy installation Smooth interior walls reduce friction Reduced friction limits energy requirements Low maintenance reduces operating costs MM Nominal Pipe Size (inches) Part Number rate Qty (Feet) Outside Diameter (IN) Max. Inside Diameter (IN) Min. Wall Thickness (IN) Weight per 100 Feet (LB) Pressure Rating at 73.4 F psi 6 1/4 x 20 ft /8 x 20 ft /2 x 20 ft /4 x 20 ft x 20 ft /4 x 20 ft /2 x 20 ft x 20 ft /2 x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft Notes: Pressure Rating at 73.4 F (23 ). HEMKOR pressure pipe conforms to SA Standard B137.3 and ASTM D1784, D1785. Schedule 80 pipe is recommended for threading. Not recommended for compressed air or gas service. 1-1

5 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS SOKET TEES THREAD TEES 90 SOKET ELBOW 90 THREAD ELBOW 45 SOKET ELBOW 45 THREAD ELBOW MALE ADAPTER FEMALE ADAPTER NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / / / / / (F) (F) F F (F) F F (F) (F) (F) (F) F F (F) (F) F F F F F F F F F F F F Notes: 150 Series (150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73.4 F (23 )) Moulded. PV Schedule 80 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2467 (Soc Fittings), ASTM D2464 (Threaded Fittings). Flanges are 150 lb. ANSI B16.5 dimensioned. Threaded crosses, wyes, reducing wyes, 30 elbows, 22 elbows, threaded fittings, line couplings, repair couplings and many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. All 1/2-16 Molded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). All Fabricated flanges have a 50 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All Socket Unions have a 235 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). 1-2

6 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS LB SOKET FLANGES 150 LB THREADED FLANGES 150 LB BLIND FLANGES SOKET VANSTONE FLANGES SPIGOT VANSTONE FLANGES SOKET APS THREADED APS SOKET ROSSES NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / / / / / F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F Notes: 150 Series (150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73.4 F (23 ) Moulded. PV Schedule 80 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2467 (Soc Fittings), ASTM D2464 (Threaded Fittings). Flanges are 150 lb. ANSI B16.5 dimensioned. Threaded crosses, wyes, reducing wyes, 30 elbows, 22 elbows, threaded fittings, line couplings, repair couplings and many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. All 1/2-16 Molded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). All Fabricated flanges have a 50 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All Socket Unions have a 235 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). 1-3

7 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS SOKET OUPLINGS THREADED OUPLINGS THREADED PLUGS SOKET UNIONS (EPDM O-RINGS) SOKET UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (EPDM O-RINGS) NO LEAK FLANGES NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / NLF005 3/ NLF NLF / NLF / NLF NLF / NLF NLF NLF (F) NLF F NLF F 8NLF (F) F 8NLF (F) 8NLF (F) 8NLF F 8NLF F 8NLF F 8NLF F 8NLF240 Notes: 150 Series (150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73.4 F (23 )) Moulded. PV Schedule 80 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2467 (Soc Fittings), ASTM D2464 (Threaded Fittings). Flanges are 150 lb. ANSI B16.5 dimensioned. Threaded crosses, wyes, reducing wyes, 30 elbows, 22 elbows, threaded fittings, line couplings, repair couplings and many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. All 1/2-16 Molded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). All Fabricated flanges have a 50 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All Socket Unions have a 235 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). Please note that different bre not interchangeable, please specify if you are requesting a specific brand. 1-4

8 REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS REDUER BUSHINGS SLIP x FPT REDUER BUSHINGS FPT X MPT SOKET REDUING OUPLINGS THREADED REDUING OUPLINGS THREAD- ED NIPPLES SOKET REDU- ING TEES 1 NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/8 x 1/ /2 x 1/ /2 x 3/ /4 x 1/ /4 x 1/ x 1/ x 1/ x 3/ /4 x 1/ /4 x 3/ /4 x /2 x 1/ /2 x 3/ /2 x /2 x 1 1/ x 1/ x 3/ x x 1 1/ x 1 1/ /2 x /2 x 1 1/ /2 x 1 1/ /2 x x x 1 1/ x 1 1/ x x 2 1/ x x 2 1/ x x x x x x F F 10 x F F 10 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 14 x F F 14 x F F 14 x F F 14 x F F 16 x F F 16 x F F 16 x F F 16 x F F Notes: 150 Series (150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73.4 F (23 )) Moulded. PV Schedule 80 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2467 (Soc Fittings), ASTM D2464 (Threaded Fittings). Threaded crosses, wyes, reducing wyes, 30 elbows, 22 elbows, threaded fittings, line couplings, repair couplings and many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated NOMINAL PIPE SIZE Length (inches) 1/4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / /8 LOSE /8 SHORT / / / / /2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / / / /4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / LOSE SHORT /4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / /2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / / / LOSE SHORT /2 LOSE / / / / LOSE LOSE NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 3/4 x 1/ x 1 x 1/ x 1 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x x 2 x 1/ x 2 x 3/ x 2 x x 2 x 1 1/ x 3 x x 4 x /4 x 3/4 x 1/ x 1 x 1/ x 1 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x x 2 x 1/ x 2 x 3/ x 2 x x 2 x 1 1/ x 3 x x 4 x x 4 x x 6 x x 10 x x 10 x x 12 x x 12 x x 14 x x 14 x x 16 x x 16 x No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All 1/2-16 Moulded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). All Fabricated flanges have a 50 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). 1-5

9 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 40 GRAY PIPE For more than a quarter of a century PV Type I, Grade I, Schedule 40 piping systems have been successfully used for pressure and drainage systems in industrial, residential, commercial and agricultural installations. PV Schedule 40 is ideal for applications where transmission of liquids or materials does not exceed 140 F. The life expectancy of plastic systems far exceeds that of metal systems and required maintenance is less complicated and cost effective. Systems are not adversely affected by environmental agents and buried systems are not adversely affected by normal soil contaminants. The inherent insulating qualities of PV Schedule 40 provides substantial benefits in temperature control, and in commercial installations, sound transmission is greatly reduced. Joining is accomplished through solvent cementing, threading or flanging, insulation is generally not required, and extensive material handling and fabricating equipment is not necessary. Applications Swimming Pools and Spas hemical Feed Systems Refrigeration Drainage Municipal Water Treatment Systems ooling Towers Metallic Plating Lines Features Stocked in 10 or 20 lengths, bell or plain end Available in various lengths as a special Bell end joints also available Lightweight for quick and easy installation Smooth interior walls reduce friction Reduced friction limits energy requirements Low maintenance reduces operating costs MM Nominal Pipe Size (IN) Part Number rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter (IN) Max. Inside Diameter (IN) Min. Wall Thickness (IN) Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 12 1/2 x 10 ft BS 3, /4 x 10 ft BS 2, x 10 ft BS 1, /4 x 10 ft BS 1, /2 x 10 ft BS 1, x 10 ft BS 1, /2 x 10 ft BS x 10 ft BS x 20 ft B 1, x 20 ft B x 20 ft B x 20 ft B x 20 ft B x 20 ft B x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft Notes: Pressure Rating at 73.4 F (23 ). HEMKOR pressure pipe conforms to SA Standard B137.3 and ASTM D1784, D1785. Schedule 40 pipe is not recommended for threading. Schedule 80 pipe is recommended for threading. Not recommended for compressed air or gas service. 1-6

10 HEMKOR SHEDULE 40 GRAY FITTINGS 1 SOKET TEES 90 SOKET ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS SOKET OUPLINGS FEMALE ADAPTERS MALE ADAPTERS FITTING ADAPTER SPGT X FPT SOKET APS 45 SOKET LATERALS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/4 3/ / / / / / W W W W W W F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F Notes: PV Schedule 40 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. All 8 fittings available in white PV material only. All Schedule 40 reducing tees are standard tees with a reducer bushing. PV Schedule 40 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. 1-7

11 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 40 GRAY FITTINGS REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP REDUER BUSHINGS SLIP x FPT SOKET REDUING OUPLING SOKET REDUING TEES SOKET 45 REDUING LATERAL NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/ x 1/ x 3/ /4 x 1/ /4 x 3/ /4 x /2 x 1/ /2 x 3/ /2 x /2 x 1 1/ x 1/ x 3/ x x 1 1/ x 1 1/ /2 x x 1 1/ x x 2 1/ x x x x F 8 x F 8 x F 10 x F F 10 x F F 10 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 14 x F F 14 x F F 14 x F F 14 x F F 16 x F F 16 x F F 16 x F F 16 x F F 18 x F F 18 x F F 18 x F F 18 x F F 18 x F F 20 x F F 20 x F F 20 x F F 20 x F F 24 x F F 24 x F F 24 x F F NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 3/4 x 1/ x 3/4 x 3/ x 1 x 1/ x 1 x 3/ /4 x 1 1/4 x 1/ /4 x 1 1/4 x 3/ /4 x 1 1/4 x /2 x 1 1/2 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x x 2 x 3/ x 2 x x 2 x 1 1/ x 3 x 3/ x 3 x x 3 x 1 1/ x 3 x x 4 x 3/ x 4 x x 4 x x 4 x x 10 x x 10 x x 10 x x 12 x x 12 x x 12 x x 12 x x 14 x x 14 x x 14 x x 14 x x 16 x x 16 x x 16 x x 16 x x 18 x x 18 x x 18 x x 18 x x 18 x x 20 x x 20 x x 20 x x 20 x x 24 x x 24 x x 24 x x 24 x x F F Notes: PV Schedule 40 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. All 8 fittings available in white PV material only. Some Schedule 40 reducing tees are standard tees with a reducer bushing. PV Schedule 40 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F (23 ). No provisions have been made forpressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. 1-8

12 HEMKOR SHEDULE 40 WHITE PIPE For more than a quarter of a century PV Type I, Grade I, Schedule 40 piping systems have been successfully used for pressure and drainage systems in industrial, residential, commercial and agricultural installations. PV Schedule 40 is ideal for applications where transmission of liquids or materials does not exceed 140 F. The life expectancy of plastic systems far exceeds that of metal systems and required maintenance is simpler and less costly. Systems are not adversely affected by environmental agents and buried systems are not adversely affected by normal soil contaminants. The inherent insulating qualities of PV Schedule 40 provides substantial benefits in temperature control, and in commercial installations, sound transmission is greatly reduced. Joining is accomplished through solvent cementing, threading or flanging, insulation is generally not required, and extensive material handling and fabricating equipment is not necessary. Many fitting configurations available up to 24 in diameter upon request. 1 Applications Swimming Pools and Spas Marine Refrigeration Drainage Mobile Homes ooling Towers Metallic Plating Lines Features Stocked in 10 or 20 lengths, bell or plain end Available in various lengths as a special Bell end joints also available Lightweight for quick and easy installation Smooth interior walls reduce friction Reduced friction limits energy requirements Low maintenance reduces operating costs MM Nominal Pipe Size (IN) Part Number rate Qty (Feet) Outside Diameter (IN) Max. Inside Diameter (IN) Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 12 1/2 x 10 ft WS 3, /4 x 10 ft WS 2, x 10 ft WS 1, /4 x 10 ft WS 1, /2 x 10 ft WS 1, x 10 ft WS 1, /2 x 10 ft WS x 10 ft WS x 20 ft WB 1, x 20 ft WB x 20 ft WB x 20 ft WB x 20 ft WB x 20 ft WB x 20 ft W x 20 ft W x 20 ft W x 20 ft W x 20 ft W Notes: Pressure Rating at 73.4 F (23 ). ertain configurations not available. HEMKOR pressure pipe conforms to SA Standard B137.3 and ASTM D1784, D1785. Schedule 40 pipe is not recommended for threading. Schedule 80 pipe is recommended for threading. Not recommended for compressed air or gas service. 1-9

13 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 40 WHITE FITTINGS 45º SOKET ELBOWS 90º SOKET ELBOWS 90º ELBOWS (FPT X MPT) 90º ELBOWS (FPT X FPT) 90º ELBOWS (SO X FPT) 90º ELBOWS (SO X MPT) 90º ELBOWS (SPG X MALE SLIP) SOKET TEES THREADED TEES NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/2" W W W W W W W W 40005W 3/4" W W W W W W W W W 1" W W W W W W W W W 1-1/4" W W W W W W W W W 1-1/2" W W W W W W W W W 2" W W W W W W W W W 2-1/2" W W W W 3" W W W W 4" W W W W 6" W W W 8" W W W SOKET OUPLINGS THREADED OUPLINGS SOKET APS THREADED APS MALE ADAPTERS FEMALE ADAPTERS SOKET ROSSES TEES (SO X SO X FPT) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ W W W W W W W W 3/ W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W 1-1/ W W W W W W W W 1-1/ W W W W W W W W W W W W W W 2-1/ W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W Notes: PV Schedule 40 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. Many other fittings are available on request. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. 1-10

14 HEMKOR SHEDULE 40 WHITE FITTINGS SOKET REDUING TEES TEES (SO X SO X RED. FPT) SOKET RE- DUING TEES (SO X SO X IN. SO) ADAPTERS FPT X RED. SLIP 1 NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 3/4 x 1/ W 1 x 1 x 1/ W 1 x 1 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x 1-1/ W x 1/2 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x W 1-1/2 x 1-1/ W x 1/2 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 3/ W 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x W 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x W 1-1/4 2 x 2 x 1/ W 2 x 2 x 3/ W 2 x 2 x W 2 x 2 x 1-1/ W 2 x 2 x 1-1/ W 2-1/2 x 2-1/ W x 3/4 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x W 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x W 1-1/4 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 1-1/ W 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x W 3 x 3 x 3/ W 3 x 3 x W 3 x 3 x 1-1/ W 3 x 3 x 1-1/ W 3 x 3 x W 4 x 4 x 3/ W 4 x 4 x W 4 x 4 x 1-1/ W 4 x 4 x 1-1/ W 4 x 4 x W 4 x 4 x W 6 x 6 x W 6 x 6 x W 6 x 6 x W 8 x 8 x W 8 x 8 x W 8 x 8 x W NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 3/4 x 1/ W 1 x 1 x 1/ W 1 x 1 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x 1-1/ W x 1/2 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 3/4 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 1 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/2 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 3/4 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x W W W W W 2 x 2 x 1/ W 2 x 2 x 3/ W 2 x 2 x W 2 x 2 x 1-1/ W 2 x 2 x 1-1/ W 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x W 1-1/2 3 x 3 x 3/ W 3 x 3 x W 3 x 3 x 1-1/ W 3 x 3 x 1-1/ W 4 x 4 x W 4 x 4 x W TEES (SLIP X RED SLIP X RED SLIP) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/2 x 1/ W 1 x 3/4 x 1/ W 1 x 3/4 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x 1 x 1/ W 1-1/4 x 1 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x 1 x W 1-1/2 x 1-1/ W x 1/2 2 x 1-1/2 x W 2 x 1-1/2 x W 1-1/2 NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1 x 1 x 1 1/ W 1 x 1 x 1 1/ W REDUER OUPLINGS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/ W 1 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x W TEES (SLIP X RED. SLIP X RED. FPT) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/2 x 1/ W 3/4 x 1/2 x 3/ W 1 x 3/4 x 1/ W 1 x 3/4 x 3/ W 1 1/2 x 1 1/ W x 1/2 2 x 1/ W NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/ W 1 x 3/ W 1-1/4 x W 90º REDUING ELBOWS (SO X SLIP) TEES (SO X SO X RED. FPT) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/2 x 3/ W 1 x 3/4 x W 90º REDUING ELBOWS (SO X FPT) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/ W W 1 x 1/ W W 1 x 3/ W W 1 1/4 x 1/ W 1 1/2 x 1 1/ W 2 x 1/ W Notes: PV Schedule 40 Fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F (23 ). No proviions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. 1-11

15 1 LEAR PV PIPE Fabco lear Rigid PV piping provides a versatile, cost-effective alternative for many piping applications, particularly those where visual monitoring of processes is critical. The benefits of rigid PV piping are well recognized: exceptional corrosion resistance; smooth interior walls for unimpeded flow and reduced sediment buildup; non-contaminating for purity applications; fast, reliable solvent-welded connections; good pressurebearing capability; and ease of handling and installation, to name a few. All of these important benefits are now available in a unique product with optimum clarity. This clarity provides the all-round visibility that specialized applications demand whether it be clean room applications, sight glass, dual-containment or various other processing applications where continuous monitoring is necessary. Applications Sight Glass Dual ontainment Food Processing hemical Processing Medical use osmetics Visual Testing Equipment Features Available in SH 40 and 80 dimensions Available in ¼ to 8 diameters Available in 10 lengths, plain end Joined using simple solvent weld joining Fully compatible with standard PV pipe and fittings orrosion resistant and lightweight Packaged in bags and boxes on line to eliminate scratching Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) rate Qty (Feet) OD (in.) ID (in.) Min. Wall Thickness (IN) Weight per Foot Pressure Rating at 73.4 F Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) rate Qty (Feet) OD (in.) ID (in.) Min. Wall Thickness (IN) Weight per Foot Pressure Rating at 73.4 F lear PV Schedule 80 Pipe (10 ft lengths) lear PV Schedule 40 Pipe (10 ft lengths) R /4 x 10 ft R /4 x 10 ft R /8 x 10 ft R /8 x 10 ft R /2 x 10 ft R /2 x 10 ft R /4 x 10 ft R /4 x 10 ft R x 10 ft R x 10 ft /4 x R /4 x R /2 x R /2 x R x 10 ft R x 10 ft R x 10 ft R /2 X 10 ft R x 10 ft R x 10 ft R x 10 ft R /2 x 10 ft Notes: This size does not comply with Schedule 40 as to I.D. and Wall Thick ness. For water at 73.4 F (23 ) with solvent cemented joints. Working pressure decreases by approximately 1.29% per degree F over 73.4 F (23 ). omplies with title 21 food & drug, part #121 paragraph & Threading not recommended. Schedule 40 type II grade I. Per ASTM D 1784 cell classification 12454B. Schedule 40 pipe also available in 20 ft lengths upon request. R x 10 ft R x 10 ft R * 6 x 1/8 x 10 ft R x 10 ft R x 10 ft x 10 ft

16 SHEDULE 40 LEAR PV FITTING 1 SIZE MALE ADAPTER FEMALE ADAPTER SOKET OUPLING 45º STREET ELBOWS (SLIPXSO) 45º SOKET ELBOWS 90º STREET ELBOW (SPG X SLP) 90º SOKET ELBOW SOKET TEES SOKET WYE SOKET AP 1/4" /8" /2" /4" " /4" /2" " /2" " " " " Notes: For water at 73.4 F (23 ) with solvent cemented joints. Working pressure decreases by approximately 1.29% per degree F over 73.4 F. omplies with title 21 food & drug, part #121 paragraph & Threading not recommended. Schedule 40 type II grade I. Per ASTM D 1784 cell classification 12454B. Fittings are not a standard stock item/made to order or on special request. REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4X1/ X3/ /4X /2X /2X1-1/ X1-1/ /2X X X2-1/ X X X

17 1 GF METRI PV FITTINGS A large number of machines, skids and fluid processing systems enter this country every year from Europe and other metric countries. When they require maintenance, we have the parts you need. Manufactured to strict DIN standards, these Georg Fischer fittings will meet your requirements. SOKET REDUING TEES NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 25X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X REDUER BUSHINGS (SO. X SO.) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 12X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X º BEND 90º SOKET ELBOW 90º SOKET ELBOW 45º SOKET ELBOW SOKET TEE WYE LATERAL SOKET ROSSES SOKET OUPLINGS BARRELL NIPPLES SOKET APS SOKET UNION (EPDM) SOKET UNION (VITON) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 6 MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

18 HEMKOR PV PIPE Fabco PV pipe is produced from a specialty blend of orzan PV material with unique physical properties desirable for piping applications (i.e., improved impact resistance and good fire resistance capabilities). PV piping systems can handle more than 75% of the temperature/pressure requirements of today s typical process plants. PV pressure pipe has an upper working temperature limit of 200 F (93 ). As with all thermoplastic piping systems, PV s ability to withstand pressure varies with pipe diameter, wall thickness, and temperature. For pressure piping applications it is recommended for temperatures as high as 200 F (93 ) when appropriate temperature de-rating factors are applied. As the pipe diameter and temperature increases, the pressure rating of the product decreases. 1 Schedule 80- Plain End MM Nominal Pipe Size (IN) Part Number rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter (IN) Max. Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness (IN) Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 6 1/4 x 20' /2 x 20' /4 x 20' x 20' /4 x 20' /2 x 20' x 20' /2 x 20' x 20' x 20' x 20' x 20' x 20' x 20' x 20' x 20' Schedule 40 - Plain End MM Nominal Pipe Size (IN) Part Number rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter (IN) Max. Inside Diameter (IN) Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 12 1/2 x 10 ft , /4 x 10 ft , x 10 ft , /4 x 10 ft , /2 x 10 ft , x 10 ft , /2 x 10 ft x 10 ft x 20 ft , x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft Notes: Pressure Rating at 73.4 F(23 F). hemkor pressure pipe conforms to ASTM D1784 and F441. We do not recommend schedule 40 pipe for threading. Schedule 80 pipe is recommended for threading. Not recommended for compressed air or gas service. Pipe also available up to 24 diameter upon request. 1-15

19 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 PV FITTINGS SOKET TEES THREADED TEES 90 SOKET ELBOWS 90 THREADED ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS 45 THREAD ELBOWS MALE ADAPTERS FEMALE ADAPTERS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / / / / / F F (F) (F) F (F) (F) (F) (F) F F (F) (F) (F) F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F Specify Fabco PV Piping for ommercial and Residential Water Applications Use PV Schedule 80 Piping Systems instead of opper for Hot and old water. Fabco PV Pipe Meets 25/50 Flame- Smoke Development Standards. (AN/UL-S102.2). Sweating copper is time-consuming and Expensive. opper prices, along with higher installation costs can put opper expenses to almost triple the installed cost of Fabco s PV System. For Hot and old water, Specify PV Schedule 80 from Fabco for your next ommercial or Residential project (See notes) PV benefits over opper include: 50% less material cost 66% less labor cost Less attractive to jobsite theft Lower heat-loss Easier to handle Easy transition to copper/pex orrosion free Notes: Applicable pressure de-ratings at elevated temperatures apply. All Plastic Piping systems must be designed for potential Hydraulic Shock (water hammer), see Section 10, Engineering Data. PV SH 80 fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards: ASTM D1784, ASTM F-439 (socket fittings), ASTM F-437 (threaded fittings). Flanges are 150 lb. ANSI B.16.5 dimensioned. Heavy duty wyes are produced from PV according to ASTM D1784, ell lass 23447B and are pressure rated to 217 PSI. Fabricated fittings, custom manufactured and/or modified FABO products (FRP products, machined products, modified standard products, etc.) cannot be returned for credit or with restocking charge. Many other fittings are available on request. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F( 23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. 1-16

20 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 PV FITTINGS LB SOKET FLANGES 150 LB THREADED FLANGES 150 LB BLIND FLANGES SOKET VANSTONE FLANGES SPIGOT VANSTONE FLANGES SOKET APS THREADED APS SOKET ROSSES 45 SOKET LATERALS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / / / / / F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F Notes: PV SH 80 fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards: ASTM D1784, ASTM F-439 (socket fittings), ASTM F-437 (threaded fittings). Flanges are 150 lb. ANSI B.16.5 dimensioned. Heavy duty wyes are produced from PV according to ASTM D1784, ell lass 23447B and are pressure rated to 217 PSI. Fabricated fittings, custom manufactured and/or modified FABO products (FRP products, machined products, modified standard products, etc.) cannot be returned for credit or with restocking charge. Many other fittings are available on request. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F(23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available molded or fabricated. 1-17

21 1 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 PV FITTINGS SOKET OUPLINGS THREADED OUPLINGS THREADED PLUGS SOKET UNIONS (EPDM O-RINGS) SOKET UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (EPDM O-RINGS) HEAVY DUTY WYES SOKET REDUING TEES NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / / / / / F F (F) F F F F NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 3/4 x 1/ x 1 x 1/ x 1 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x 3/ /2 x 1 1/2 x x 2 x 1/ x 2 x 3/ x 2 x x 2 x 1 1/ x 3 x x 4 x x 4 x x 6 x x 10 x F 10 x 10 x F 12 x 12 x F 12 x 12 x F Notes: PV SH 80 fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards: ASTM D1784, ASTM F-439 (socket fittings), ASTM F-437 (threaded fittings). Flanges are 150 lb. ANSI B.16.5 dimensioned. Heavy duty wyes are produced from PV according to ASTM D1784, ell lass 23447B and are pressure rated to 217 PSI. Fabricated fittings, custom manufactured and/or modified FABO products (FRP products, machined products, modified standard products, etc.) and are not subject to return or cancellation. Many other fittings are available on request. Some Schedule 40 reducing tees are standard tees with a reducer bushing. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F(23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. All custom fabricated fittings are not subject to return. Many other fittings are available on request. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available moulded or fabricated. 1-18

22 HEMKOR SHEDULE 80 PV FITTINGS 1 REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP REDUER BUSHINGS SLIP X FPT REDUER BUSHINGS FPT X MPT SOKET REDUING OUPLINGS THREADED REDUING OUPLINGS LENGTH (INHES) PART # NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/8 x 1/4 1/2 x 1/ /2 x 3/ /4 x 1/ /4 x 1/ x 1/ x 3/ /4 x 1/2 5' /4 x 3/ /4 x /2 x 1/ /2 x 3/ /2 x /2 x 1 1/ x 1/ x 3/ x x 1 1/ x 1 1/ /2 x 1 1/ /2 x x 1 1/ x x 2 1/ x x 2 1/ x x x x x F F 10 x F F 10 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 12 x F F 14 x F 14 x F 14 x F 18 x F F EF 18 x F F EF 18 x F F EF 18 x F F EF 18 x F F EF 20 x F F EF 20 x F F EF 20 x F F EF 20 x F F EF 24 x F F EF 24 x F F EF 24 x F F EF 24 x F F EF Notes: PV SH 80 fittings are produced in accordance with the following standards: ASTM D1784, ASTM F-439 (socket fittings), ASTM F-437 (threaded fittings). Fabricated fittings, custom manufactured and/or modified FABO products (FRP products, machined products, modified standard products, etc.) cannot be returned for credit or with restocking charge. The maximum continuous working pressure of the fittings is equal to 150 PSI at 73.4 F(23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available moulded or fabricated. Diameter (Inches) 1/4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / /8 LOSE /8 SHORT / / / / /2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / / / /4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / LOSE SHORT /4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / /2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / / / LOSE SHORT /2 LOSE / / / / LOSE LOSE

23 1 PV SDR PRESSURE PIPE Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) PV is the most frequently specified of all plastic piping materials. It has been used successfully for over 60 years. PV is characterized by distinctive physical properties and is resistant to corrosion and chemical attack by acids, alkalies, salt solutions and many other chemicals. It is attacked, however, by polar solvents such as ketones and aromatics. Of the various types and grades of PV used in plastic piping, SDR conforming to ASTM D1784, is the most common. The maximum service temperature for PV is 140 F. Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F MM Series 160 (SDR-26) Pressure Pipe, 20 foot length, Plain End /2 x 20 ft x 20 ft /2 x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft Series 100 (SDR-41) Pressure Pipe, 20 foot length, Plain End /2 x 10 ft /4 x 10 ft x 10 ft Series 200 (SDR-21) Pressure Pipe, 20 foot length, Plain End /2 x 20 ft /4 x 20 ft x 20 ft /4 x 20 ft /2 x 20 ft x 20 ft /2 x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft Notes: Pressure Rating at 73.4 F(23 ). FABO Pressure Pipe conforms to SA standard B and ASTM D Pipe can be supplied on request as bell end or roll grooved (SDR21 and SDR 26). 1-20

24 SOLVENT EMENT AND PRIMER IPS offers the most complete line of solvent cements commercially available. Each WELD-ON formulation has been developed for a specific application, as dictated by the marketplace. WELD-ON cements are conceived and continually checked by qualified chemists and technicians in a modern, well equipped laboratory. WELD-ON solvent cements are used in such diverse fields as construction, agriculture, furniture, automotive, aerospace and general manufacturing. A complete line of low VO ements also available. 1 Product ode Product Type PV PV PV PV PV PV PV olour lear Gray Gray Gray Aqua Blue Blue (fades to lear) lear maximum Recommended Pipe Size 4" (Sch. 80), 6" (All Other) 4" (Sch. 80), 6" (All Other) 12" 30" 4" (Sch. 80), 6" (All Other) 4" (Sch. 80), 6" (All Other) 3" (Sch. 80), 6" (All Other) Relative Set Time Fast Fast Medium Slow Extremely Fast Extremely Fast Fast ASTM Designation D-2564 D-2564 D-2564 D-2564 D-2564 D-2564 N/A Industry Listings NSF, UP NSF, UP, SA NSF, UP, SA NSF, UP, SA NSF, UP, SA UP lasses, Schedules and Types All Rigid All Rigid All Rigid All Rigid Rigid/Flex Rigid/Flex Flex/Flex, Flex/Rigid Minimum Shelf Life 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years Gallon # Quart # Pint # /2 Pint # /4 Pint # Product ode P-70 P-70 Product Type PV PV PV/PV PV/PV leaner Primer Primer olour Gray Orange Gray lear lear Purple lear maximum Recommended Pipe Size 12" 12" 12" 4" (Sch. 80), 6" (All Other) All All All Relative Set Time Medium Medium Medium Fast N/A N/A N/A ASTM Designation D-2846 & F-493 D-2846 & F-493 F-493 ASTM D-2564, D-2235, F-493 SAQMD1168. ASTM F-656, SAQMD1168 ASTM F-656, SAQMD1168 Industry Listings NSF NSF, UP NSF N/A N/A NSF, UP NSF lasses, Schedules All Rigid All Rigid All Rigid All Rigid All All All and Types Minimum Shelf Life 2 Years 2 Years 2 Years 3 Years Unlimited 3 Years 3 Years Gallon # Quart # Pint # /2 Pint # /4 Pint # /4 Ounce #

25 1 SOLVENT EMENT AND PRIMER AVERAGE INITIAL SET TIMES FOR WELD-ON PV/PV SOLVENT EMENTS Pipe Sizes Pipe Sizes Pipe Sizes Pipe Sizes Pipe Sizes Temperature Range 1/2" to 11/4" 11/2" to 2" 21/2" to 8" 10" to 15" 15" F 2 min 5 min 30 min 2 hrs 4 hrs F 5 min 10 min 2 hrs 8 hrs 16 hrs 0-40 F 10 min 15 min 12 hrs 24 hrs 48 hrs Notes: In damp or humid weather allow 50% more set time; extended set times are required for chemical applications. Initial set schedule is the necessary time needed before the joint can be carefully handled. Relative Humidity 60% or Less AVERAGE JOINT URE SHEDULE FOR WELD-ON PV/PV SOLVENT EMENTS ure Time ure Time ure Time Pipe Sizes Pipe Sizes Pipe Sizes ure Time Pipe Sizes 10" to 15" ure Time Pipe Sizes 15"+ 1/2" to 11/4" 11/2" to 2" 21/2" to 8" Temperature Range During Assembly up to 160 psi psi up to 160 psi psi up to psi up to 100 psi up to 100 psi and ure Periods F 15 min 6 hrs 30 min 12 hrs 11/2 hrs 24 hrs 48 hrs 72 hrs F 20 min 12 hrs 45 min 24 hrs 4 hrs 48 hrs 96 hrs 6 days 0-40 F 30 min 48 hrs 1 hr 96 hrs 72 hrs 8 days 8 days 14 days Notes: In damp or humid weather allow 50% more cure time; extended cure times are required for chemical applications. Joint cure schedule is the necessary time needed before pressurizing system. AVERAGE NUMBER OF JOINTS PER QUART OF WELD-ON EMENT/PRIMER Pipe Diameter 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 15" 18" Number of Joints /3 1/2 3/4 1/2 Notes: For Primer: Double the number of joints shown for cement. These figures are estimates based on our laboratory tests. Due to the many variables in the field, these figures should be used as a general guide only. PV Specialty ements offer less set & cure times. IPS weld-on solvent cements must never be used in a pvc or cpvc system using or being tested by compressed air or gases. 1-22

26 LAMP-IT TM PV TAPPING SADDLES The lamp-it Tapping saddles allow you to tap into existing piping systems without having to cut out and insert a tee. The O-ring and O-ring groove are designed so that there is no gap between the installed saddle and the pipe. When pressure is applied the pipe compression is replaced by the fluid pressure without increasing the pressure on the saddle. The hinge design eliminates the need for two clamping wedges. The clamping wedge equally distributes the pressure over the entire width of the saddle. It locks and aligns the saddle top and bottom into proper position. 1 Applications: Variable grade pressure sewer systems Pressure water systems Golf club irrigation Mobile home parks Part # IPS Pipe Size Tap Size Part # IPS Pipe Size Tap Size Part # IPS Pipe Size Tap Size " 3/4" IPS SLIP " 3/4" IPS SLIP " 3/4" IPS SLIP " 1" IPS SLIP " 1" IPS SLIP " 1" IPS SLIP " 1 1/4" IPS SLIP " 1 1/4" IPS SLIP " 1 1/4" IPS SLIP " 1 1/2" IPS SLIP " 1 1/2" IPS SLIP " 1 1/2" IPS SLIP " 2" IPS SLIP " 2" IPS SLIP " 3/4" IPS FIPT " 1" IPS FIPT " 3/4" IPS FIPT " 3/4" IPS FIPT Notes: Meets ASTM D-1784 cell classification 12454B and ASTM D-2241; D-2466 and 1599 for dimensions and testing performance " 1 1/4" IPS FIPT " 1" IPS FIPT " 1" IPS FIPT " 1 1/2" IPS FIPT " 1 1/4" IPS FIPT " 1 1/4" IPS FIPT " 1 1/2" IPS FIPT " 1 1/2" IPS FIPT /2" 3/4" IPS SLIP " 2" IPS FIPT " 2" IPS FIPT /2" 1" IPS SLIP /2" 1 1/4" IPS SLIP " 3/4" IPS SLIP " 3/4" IPS SLIP /2" 1 1/2" IPS SLIP " 1" IPS SLIP " 1" IPS SLIP /2" 2" IPS SLIP " 1 1/4" IPS SLIP " 1 1/4" IPS SLIP " 1 1/2" IPS SLIP " 1 1/2" IPS SLIP /2" 3/4" IPS FIPT " 2" IPS SLIP " 2" IPS SLIP /2" 1" IPS FIPT /2" 1 1/4" IPS FIPT " 3/4" IPS FIPT " 3/4" IPS FIPT /2" 2" IPS FIPT " 1" IPS FIPT " 1" IPS FIPT " 1 1/4" IPS FIPT " 1 1/4" IPS FIPT " 1 1/2" IPS FIPT " 1 1/2" IPS FIPT " 2" IPS FIPT " 2" IPS FIPT TRANSITION UNIONS Threaded Metal Insert and Stainless Steel ollar are molded-in-place as an Integral part of each fitting for superior strength. Secondary O-ring seal compensates for expansion and contraction variation between materials. Low Profile design. Available in sizes from 1/2 to 2 IPS. Manufactured from high quality PV and PV materials for superior chemical resistance. Metal Inserts 316 Stainless Steel or Brass Patented Design omputer engineered design minimizes stress problems normally associated with metal-to-plastic piping system transitions. Patented design is backed by over twenty-five years of research and fitting development. Superior Metal -to- Plastic Transition Strong Industrial grade metal-to plastic Schedule 80 Transition Fittings feature molded-in-place metal threads with form compressed O-ring for optimum expansion and contraction barrier. ASTM Schedule 80 slip sockets and ANSI spec tapered pipe threads for leak-tight connections. 1-23

27 1 PV AND PV S80 EXPANSION JOINTS These expansion joints are fabricated from either PV or PV and are available for Iron pipe sizes from 1/2 to as high as 12. They contain multi O-ring Viton Seals with Wiper O-ring and requires no repair or replacement. SIZE PSI F PV 6" TRAVEL PART # PV 12" TRAVEL PART # PV 6" TRAVEL PART # PV 12" TRAVEL PART # 1/ X X X X12 3/ X X X X X X X X12 1 1/ X X X X12 1 1/ X X X X X X X X12 2 1/ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X12 FLANGE GASKETS TYPE FLANGE GASKETS LOW TORQUE FLANGE GASKETS SIZE FLEX PV 1/8" (PUNHED) NEO- PRENE 1/8" (PUNHED) EPDM (MOULDED) VITON TEFLON BONDED/ EPDM (MOULDED) 1/2" P E V T /4" P E V T " P E V T /4" P E V T /2" P E V T " P E V T /2" P E V T " P E V T " P E V T " P E V T " P E V T " P E V T " P E V T Notes: Moulded Gaskets available in other materials on request.: SBR - Styrene Butadiene Rubber; NBR - Nitrile Butadiene Rubber. 1-24

28 NATURAL POLYPROPYLENE PIPE Rigid Natural non-pigmented polypropylene used in the manufacture of industrial piping components conform to the requirements in ASTM D All components are manufactured from a high purity, unpigmented compound. 1 Fittings are industrial, heavy duty, Schedule 80 hub style. Fitting components that utilize socket type heat fusion welded connections have socket lengths and wall thicknesses conforming to ASTM D 2467 and socket diameters are in accordance with the manufacturer s printed recommendations to provide an interference fit with the pipe. omponents utilizing taper pipe threads are to have thread lengths, diameters, and configurations in conformance with ASTM D Unions are the Viton O ring seal type. Applications Semi-conductor Pharmaceutical hemical processing Pulp and paper Electronic Biotechnology Healthcare Universities Features Stocked in 20 lengths, plain end Extremely corrosion resistant Ideal for applications up to 180 F Joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging MM Nominal Pipe Size (inches) Part Number Outside Diameter (IN) Min. Wall Thickness (IN) Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 12 1/2 x 20 ft /4 x 20 ft x 20 ft /2 x x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft Notes: Pipe sold in 100 foot bundles to 6. Pipe is 20 feet long in plain ends. For other lengths and pipe ends, please consult our customer service department. Threading polypropylene schedule 80 pipe reduces working pressure to approximately 20 psi (drainage). Threading polypropylene schedule 40 pipe is not recommended. Larger diameter pipe is available on request. Please consult our customer service department. These products are not recommended for compressed air or gas systems. Black Polypropylene socket and threaded systems available on request. Please consult our customer service department. 1-25

29 1 NATURAL POLYPROPYLENE SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS SOKET TEES 90 SOKET ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS 150 LB SOKET FLANGES 150 LB BLIND FLANGES SOKET APS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / FEMALE ADAPTERS 150 LB THREADED FLANGES THREADED TEES 90 THREADED ELBOWS 45 THREAD ELBOWS THREADED APS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / SOKET OUPLINGS THREADED OUPLINGS THREADED PLUGS SOKET UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / Notes: Socket valves, flanges, and unions, regardless of size are rated at 150 psi for water service at 73 F. F indicates a fabricated fitting. Some fabricated fittings may be fiberglass reinforced. (F) indicates fitting is available moulded or fabricated. All 1/2-4 Moulded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. 1-26

30 NATURAL POLYPROPYLENE SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS 1 LENGTH (INHES) PART # REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP REDUER BUSHINGS FPT x MPT DIAMETER (INHES) 1/2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / / / /4 LOSE /4 SHORT / / / / LOSE SHORT /2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / / / LOSE SHORT LOSE LOSE NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/ x 1/ x 3/ /2 x x x 1 1/ x x Notes: Socket valves, flanges, and unions, regardless of size are rated at 150 psi for water service at 73.4 F(23 ). Other fittings are available on request. All 1/2-4 Moulded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ) No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. We recommend back welding for all 6 socket connections. 1-27

31 1 PVDF SHEDULE 80 PIPE (Polyvinylidene Floride) PVDF is a strong, tough, and abrasion resistant fluorocarbon material. It resists distortion and retains most of its strength to 280 F. It is chemically resistant to most acids, bases and organic solvents and is ideally suited for handling wet or dry chlorine, bromine and other halogens. No other solid thermoplastic piping components can approach the combination of strength, chemical resistance and working temperatures of PVDF. PVDF is joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging. The great versatility of the material, with its unique combination of physical and chemical properties, as well as the simple installation process of pipe, fittings and valves, make it the piping system of choice for applications in industries like semiconductor, pharmaceutical, chemical processing, metal finishing, pulp and paper. Applications Semi-conductor Pharmaceutical hemical processing Pulp and paper Electronic Biotechnology Healthcare Universities Features Stocked in 20 lengths, plain end Available in Red Kynar or natural Extremely corrosion resistant Ideal for applications up to 280 F Joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging. MM Nominal Pipe Size (inches) Part Number Red Part Number Natural Feet per bundle Outside Diameter (IN) Inside Diameter (IN) Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 12 1/2 x 20 ft /4 x 20 ft x 20 ft /2 x x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft x 20 ft N.R. Notes: Threaded pipe and fittings shall be rated at 50% of the values given for socket. Valves, unions and flanges (either socket or threaded) shall be pressure rated at 150 psi service at 73.4 F(23 ), non-shock and have a minimum burst requirement of 3.3 times the rated pressure. Pipe is 20 feet long in plain ends. For other lengths and pipe ends, please consult our customer service department. Red Kynar pipe is pigmented to resist ultra-violet attack when handling high concentrations of halogens. The pipe is completely compatible to Fabco s line of Kynar fittings and valves. Larger diameter pipe is available upon request. Please consult customer service. These products are not recommended for compressed air or gas systems. N.R. = Not recommended for pressure applications. Schedule 40 pipe available upon request. 1-28

32 RED PVDF FITTINGS 1 SOKET TEES 90 SOKET ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS 150 LB SOKET FLANGES 150 LB BLIND FLANGES SOKET APS SOKET OUPLINGS THREADED OUPLINGS THREADED PLUGS Nominal Pipe Size 1/ / / THREADED TEES 90 THREADED ELBOWS 45 THREAD ELBOWS 150 LB THREADED FLANGES THREADED APS FEMALE ADAPTERS SOKET UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) Nominal Pipe Size 1/ / / LENGTH (INHES) PART # LENGTH (INHES) PART # REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP REDUER BUSHINGS FPT X MPT DIAMETER (INHES) DIAMETER (INHES) 1/2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / /2 LOSE / /2 SHORT / / /4 LOSE / /4 SHORT / / / / LOSE / SHORT / LOSE SHORT DIAMETER (INHES) 3/4 x 1/ x 1/ x 3/ /2 x x x 1 1/ x x x Notes: Other fittings are available on request. All 1/2-6 Molded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. Webbed Honeycomb style flanges/blind flanges/vanstone flanges are available. For threaded one end nipples or other length nipples, please call Fabco. 1-29

33 1 NATURAL PVDF FITTINGS SOKET TEES 90 SOKET ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS 150 LB SOKET FLANGES 150 LB BLIND FLANGES SOKET APS SOKET OUPLINGS THREADED OUPLINGS THREADED PLUGS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / THREADED TEES 90 THREADED ELBOWS 45 THREAD ELBOWS 150 LB THREADED FLANGES THREADED APS FEMALE ADAPTERS SOKET UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) THREADED UNIONS (VITON O-RINGS) NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ / / DIAMETER (INHES) LENGTH (INHES) PART # DIAMETER (INHES) LENGTH (INHES) PART # 1/2 LOSE /2 SHORT / / /2 LOSE / /2 SHORT / / /4 LOSE / /4 SHORT / / / / LOSE / SHORT / LOSE SHORT REDUER BUSHINGS SOKET X SLIP REDUER BUSHINGS SO FPT X MPT NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 x 1/ x 1/ x 3/ /2 x x x 1 1/ x x x Notes: Other fittings are available on request. All 1/2-12 Molded flanges have a 150 psi Maximum Internal Pressure 73 F (23 ). No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. Webbed Honeycomb style flanges/blind flanges/vanstone flanges are available. For threaded one end nipples or other length nipples, please call Fabco. 1-30

34 GVS-65 GAS VENTING SYSTEM The GVS-65 is a complete PV pipe system designed for use as BH, lass II gas vent with a maximum operating temperature of 65 o. The GVS-65 gas appliance system has been third party certified UL S This system included pipe, fittings, solvent cement and primer. Only GVS-65 components may be used as part of the system. Do not use fittings, pipe, solvent cement or primer from any other manufacturer with the GVS-65 Gas Venting System. 2 Applications Furnaces Fireplaces Boilers Water Heaters Features ertified under UL S omplete system includes pipe, fittings, cement and primer Available from 1 1/2 to 4 diameter All pipe, fittings and cement are labeled as certified Product Product Description ase Qty GVS /2" PV GAS VENT PIPE 10 FT LENGTHS GVS GVS " PV GAS VENT PIPE 10 FT LENGTHS GVS GVS /2" PV GAS VENT PIPE 10 FT LENGTHS GVS GVS " PV GAS VENT PIPE 10 FT LENGTHS GVS GVS " PV GAS VENT PIPE 10 FT LENGTHS GVS GVS PV GAS VENT SOLVENT EMENT 950 ML QUART 12 GVS PV GAS VENT SOLVENT EMENT 475 ML PINT 12 GVS PV & PV GAS VENT PRIMER 950 ML QUART 12 GVS PV & PV GAS VENT PRIMER 475 ML PINT 12 GVS PV/ABS GAS VENT TRANSISTION EMENT 950 ML QTS 12 GVS PV/ABS GAS VENT TRANSISTION EMENT 475 ML PNT 12 GVS " PV GAS VENT TEE GVS65 35 GVS " X 90 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW GVS65 50 GVS L 2" X 90 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW LONG RAD GVS65 55 GVS " X 90 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW GVS65 25 GVS L 3" X 90 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW LONG RAD GVS65 23 GVS " X 90 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW GVS65 20 GVS " X 45 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW GVS GVS " X 45 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW GVS65 25 GVS " X 45 DEG PV GAS VENT ELBOW GVS65 20 GVS /2" PV GAS VENT OUPLING GVS65 25 GVS " PV GAS VENT OUPLING GVS65 70 GVS /2" PV GAS VENT OUPLING GVS65 20 GVS " PV GAS VENT OUPLING GVS65 60 GVS " PV GAS VENT OUPLING GVS65 30 GVS " X 2" PV GAS VENT INREASER GVS65 45 GVS " X 3" PV GAS VENT INREASER GVS65 30 GVS " X 1-1/2" PV GAS VENT RED BUSHING GVS65 80 GVS " X 2-1/2" PV GAS VENT RED BUSHING GVS65 20 GVS65VS020 2" GAS VENT TERMINATION VENT SREEN 250 GVS65VS030 3" GAS VENT TERMINATION VENT SREEN

35 LXT SHEDULE 80 PIPE Ultra-Pure Piping, Ultra-Pure Water 2 Ultra-pure water demands an ultra-pure piping system. To make sure your high-purity water piping meets the highest clean pipe requirements, the Harvel LXT ultra-pure water system has been engineered to ensure cost-effective performance across multiindustry UPW, deionized, reverse osmosis, and distilled high-purity water applications. Ideal for the semiconductor, electronic, biotechnology, healthcare, university, and laboratory industries, Harvel LXT low-extractable piping is made from an innovative clean PV compound that offers a number of advantages over other high-purity piping created using traditional construction materials, including polypropylene (PP) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF): Extremely low extractable contaminants, particularly trace metals and Total Oxidizable arbon (TO) Fast, reliable installation with simple inexpensive joining methods Specialty one-step fast-setting solvent-cement joining system rinses up quickly Unique blue translucency allows visual joint integrity inspection Ultra-smooth interior pipe surface minimizes the potential for bacterial growth and particle generation Rigid Schedule 80 dimensions for pressure service requires fewer supports than flexible plastic systems In addition to superior performance, lower material costs and fast, reliable installation, the Harvel LXT water system offers an array of unique benefits for use in critical ultra-pure water systems (UPW, DI, R/O, distilled, USP): Non-contaminating materials designed specifically for use in aggressive UPW, DI, R/O and USP water piping applications omplete line of high-purity water pipe, fittings and valves (IPS Sizes 1/2-6 diameters) lean pipe double-bagged, sealed and boxed on-line to maintain cleanliness for use in high-purity environments High-impact strength and low thermal conductivity ideal for various ambient temperature UPW grades including DI, R/O and USP water Lower overall installed costs and improved life-cycle economics MM Nominal Pipe Size (IN) Part Number arton Qty Feet Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F 12 1/2 x 15 ft LXT /4 x 15 ft LXT x 15 ft LXT /4 x 15 ft LXT /2 x 15 ft LXT x 15 ft LXT x 15 ft LXT x 15 ft LXT x 15 ft LXT Notes: PSI water, 73.4 F(23 ) with Solvent Welded onnections. All pipe is double bagged and boxed on-line for high purity environments. Harvel LXT piping is produced to Schedule 80 dimensions in strict accordance with ASTM D1785, and exhibits a Type II pressure rating. Harvel LXT fittings are produced to Schedule 80 dimensions per ASTM D2467. Harvel LXT is joined using the one step solvent cement (part # 07LXT200). The pint size comes complete with a dauber which is suitable for pipe size 1/2 to 3. For pipe sizes 4 thru 6 use a roller equal in size to 1/2 the pipe diameter. 7.5 ft lengths available upon request. 2-2

36 LXT SHEDULE 80 FITTINGS 90 SOKET ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS 90 SWEEP ELBOWS SOKET TEES MALE ADAPTERS FEMALE ADAPTERS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ BL BL SBL BL BL SRBL 3/ BL BL SBL BL BL SRBL BL BL SBL BL BL SRBL 1 1/ BL BL SBL BL BL SRBL 1 1/ BL BL SBL BL BL SRBL BL BL SBL BL BL SRBL BL BL BL BL SRBL BL BL BL BL SRBL BL BL BL UNION SLIP EPDM UNION SLIP VITON 150 LB. VANSTONE FLANGE SLIP SOKET AP OUPLINGS TANK ADAPTERS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/ BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-005BL 3/ BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-007BL BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-010BL 1 1/ BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-012BL 1 1/ BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-015BL BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-020BL BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-030BL BL BL BL BL BL 8170E-040BL BL BL BL Notes: For water at 73.4 F(23 ) with solvent cemented joints. Working pressure decreases by approximately 1.29% per degree F over 73.4 F. omplies with title 21 food & drug, part #121 paragraph & Threading not recommended Per ASTM D 1784 cell classification 12454B. Fittings are not a standard stocked item. No provisions have been made for pressure surges, water hammer, or other conditions which should be considered. REDUER BUSHINGS SPG x SLP SOKET REDUER OUPLINGS REDUER BUSHING SPIG x FPT REDUER FEMALE ADAPTER SPIG NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/2X1/4" BL SRBL 1/2X3/8" BL 3/4X1/4" BL SRBL 3/4X1/2" BL BL BL 1X1/4" SRBL 1X3/8" BL 1X1/2" BL BL 1X3/4" BL BL BL 1-1/4X1/2" BL 1-1/4X1" BL BL 1-1/2X3/4" BL BL 1-1/2X1" BL BL 1-1/2-X1-1/4" BL BL 2X1" BL BL 2X1-1/2" BL BL 3X2" BL BL 4x BL 4X3" BL BL 6X4" BL BL NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1x1x3/4 1-1/2x1-1/2x1 2x2x1 2x2x1-1/2 3x3x2 4x4x3 6x6x3 6x6x4 SOKET REDUING TEES BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL 2 lear One-Step ement LXT EMENT PT LXT EMENT QT 07LXT300 07LXT

37 LXT VALVES AND AESSORIES 2 TU BALL HEK VALVE SLP/THR TU BALL VALVE SKT/ THRD EPDM TU BALL VALVE SLIP/ THRD VITON TU BALL HEK VALVE SLIP/FPT DIAPHRAGM VALVE SKT/THRD NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/2" BL BL BL BL 2729T-005BL 3/4" BL BL BL BL 2729T-007BL 1" BL BL BL BL 2729T-010BL 1-1/4" BL BL BL BL 2729T-012BL 1-1/2" BL BL BL BL 2729T-015BL 2" BL BL BL BL 2729T-020BL 3" BL BL BL BL 4" BL BL BL BL GAUGE GUARD EPDM DIAPHRAGM 1/4" INLET GAUGE GUARD PTFE DIAPHRAGM 1/4" INLET GAUGE GUARD EPDM DIAPHRAGM 1/2" INLET GAUGE GUARD PTFE DIAPHRAGM 1/2" INLET NOMINAL PIPE SIZE NO GAUGE G BL G BL G BL G B 0-15 PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL 0-30 PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL 0-60 PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL PSI G BL G BL G BL G BL 0-30 IN HG G30V2-002BL G30V4-002BL G30V2-005BL G30V4-005BL ANGLE PATTERN NEEDLE VALVE ANGLE PATTERN NEEDLE VALVE GLOBE PATTERN NEEDLE VALVE GLOBE PATTERN NEEDLE VALVE GOOSENEK DEK MOUNT LAB FIXTURE TURRET -PANEL MOUNT LAB FIXTURE Notes: IN HG refers to inches of mercury. NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/4" BL BL BL BL 3/8" BL BL BL BL LF1002-BL LF3002-BL 1/2" BLSR BL BLSR BL 2-4

38 FUSEAL SHEDULE 40 POLYPRO PIPE FLAME RETARDANT, AID RESISTANT AID WASTE SYSTEM FOR NON-PRESSURE APPLIATIONS Fuseal, the proven resistance coil fusion method of joining polypropylene drain piping systems. Used primarily for acid waste drain lines. Fuseal has been utilized in thousands of institutional and industrial projects that demand strong, leak-proof, safe pipe joints. 2 The Fuseal heat fusion process joins pipe and fitting into one complete homogenous unit. A low voltage Fuseal power unit is connected to an electrical resistance coil imbedded in the Fuseal fitting. When power is applied the coil heat completely fuses the interface between the pipe and fitting socket. The complete line of fittings include all standard DWV configuration from 1 1/2 through 12 pipe sizes. Pipe is readily available in flame-retardant Schedule 40/80, non-flame retardant Schedule 40/80. The Fuseal heat fusion method should be used in inaccessible places where a completely homogenous structure of pipe and fitting is essential. The mechanical system can be used under bench where speed of installation, future disassembly or modular design is desired. Fittings 1 1/2 through 6 are manufactured of flame retardant material but 8 and above are manufactured of non-flame retardant material. Made of polypropylene and PVDF, the Fuseal II system combines to provide a complete, easy to install corrosive and chemical waste drainage system. Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. Applications orrosive waste drainage system. hemical plants Industrial plants Applications Hospitals University laboratories Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F Schedule 40 Fire Retardant Pipe F AA 1-1/2" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 10' 1, F AA 2" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 10' 1, F AA 3" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 10' F AA 4" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 10' 1, F AA 6" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 10' F AB 8" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' F AB 10" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' F AB 12" PPFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' Schedule 40 Non Fire Retardant Pipe P AB 1-1/2" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' 1, P AB 2" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' 1, P AB 3" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' P AB 4" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' 1, P AB 6" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' P AB 8" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' P AB 10" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' P AB 12" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20'

39 FUSEAL SHEDULE 80 POLYPRO PIPE FLAME RETARDANT, AID RESISTANT AID WASTE SYSTEM FOR NON-PRESSURE APPLIATIONS 2 Fuseal, the proven resistance coil fusion method of joining polypropylene drain piping systems. Used primarily for acid waste drain lines. Fuseal has been utilized in thousands of institutional and industrial projects that demand strong, leak-proof, safe pipe joints. The Fuseal heat fusion process joins pipe and fitting into one complete homogenous unit. A low voltage Fuseal power unit is connected to an electrical resistance coil imbedded in the Fuseal fitting. When power is applied the coil heat completely fuses the interface between the pipe and fitting socket. The complete line of fittings include all standard DWV configuration in 1 1/2 through 12 pipe sizes. Pipe is readily available in flame-retardant Schedule 40/80, non-flame retardant Schedule 40/80. The Fuseal heat fusion method should be used in inaccessible places where a completely homogenous structure of pipe and fitting is essential. The mechanical system can be used under bench where speed of installation, future disassembly or modular design is desired. Fittings 1 1/2 through 6 are manufactured of flame retardant material but 8 and above are manufactured of non-flame retardant material. Made of polypropylene and PVDF, the Fuseal II system combines to provide a complete, easy to install corrosive and chemical waste drainage system. Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. Applications orrosive waste drainage system. hemical plants Industrial plants Applications Hospitals University laboratories Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F Schedule 80 Fire Retardant Pipe F AA 1-1/2" PPFR Sch.80 Pipe x 10' F AA 2" PPFR Sch.80 Pipe x 10' F AA 3" PPFR Sch.80 Pipe x 10' F AA 4" PPFR Sch.80 Pipe x 10' F AA 6" PPFR Sch.80 Pipe x 10' Schedule 80 Non Fire Retardant Pipe P AB 1-1/2" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 2" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 3" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 4" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 6" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 8" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 10" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 12" PPNFR Sch.80 Pipe x 20' P AB 8" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' P AB 10" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20' P AB 12" PPNFR Sch.40 Pipe x 20'

40 FUSEAL SHEDULE 40 25/50 PVDF PIPE FLAME RETARDANT, AID RESISTANT WASTE SYSTEM FOR NON-PRESSURE APPLIATIONS Fuseal, the proven resistance coil fusion method of joining polypropylene drain piping systems. Used primarily for acid waste drain lines. Fuseal has been utilized in thousands of institutional and industrial projects that demand strong, leak-proof, safe pipe joints. It meets the UL 25/50 flame and smoke spread rating. 2 The Fuseal heat fusion process joins pipe and fitting into one complete homogenous unit. A low voltage Fuseal power unit is connected to an electrical resistance coil imbedded in the Fuseal fitting. When power is applied the coil imbedded in the Fuseal fitting. When power is applied the coil heat completely fuses the interface between the pipe and fitting socket. The complete line of fittings include all standard DWV configuration in 1 1/2 through 12 pipe sizes. Pipe is readily available in flame-retardant Schedule 40, non-flame retardant Schedule 40. The Fuseal heat fusion method should be used in inaccessible places where a completely homogenous structure of pipe and fitting is essential. The mechanical system can be used under bench where speed of installation, future disassembly or modular design is desired. Fittings 1 1/2 through 6 are manufactured of flame retardant material but 8 and above are manufactured of non-flame retardant material. Made of polypropylene and PVDF, the Fuseal II system combines to provide a complete, easy to install corrosive and chemical waste drainage system. Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet Pressure Rating at 73.4 F Schedule 40 25/50 PVDF Pipe V AA 1-1/2" Sch.40 Pipe x 10' V AA 2" Sch.40 Pipe x 10' V AA 3" Sch.40 Pipe x 10' V AA 4" Sch.40 Pipe x 10' V AA 6" Sch.40 Pipe x 10' Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. FUSEAL SQUARED DOUBLE ONTAINMENT PIPE DOUBLE ONTAINMENT POLYPRO ORROSIVE WASTE PIPING SYSTEM With standard, non-flame Fuseal utilized for both the primary and containment pipe and fittings, the Fuseal Squared system offers the performance and reliability of the Fuseal II drainage system. Five advantages are realized. The pipe and fittings are easily joined with our state of the art fusion technologies, Fuseal Squared joins to the standard Fuseal II system without the need for special fittings or tools, added protection with polypropylene material for both the primary and containment pipe, custom fittings and sizes can be quickly designed and manufactured to meet customer needs, all standard primary fitting joints are butt-welded and factory tested. The standard wall thickness of Fuseal II makes Fuseal Squared ideal for buried applications. Truly a complete acid waste drainage system! ontact customer service for a complete list of available pipe and fittings. 2-7

41 +GF+ ONTAIN-IT 2 RELIABLE SEONDARY ONTAINMENT PIPING SYSTEM The retrofit capability and chemical resistance of GF ontain-it make this an ideal choice for containment piping of chemical process lines. With pipe split along its length, the ontain-it piping system can be installed over virtually any tested carrier system. The carrier system can be tested without interference from the containment piping. Any leaks found during testing can be easily repaired. Leak detection cable can be installed as the split components are assembled, eliminating the need for time consuming cable pulling or the inclusion of lines to pull the cable. ontainment piping can be retrofitted over plastic and metallic systems above and below ground, protecting employees, equipment and the environment. Split Pipe and Fittings are available in 4 and 6. Solid pipe may be combined with split fittings in installations which do not require retrofit capability or where it is preferred to pull a leak detection cable. Solid Pipe is available in 4 and 6. Flexible adapters allow connection to metal or chemical resistant plastic carrier systems other than PV. entralizers center and support the carrier pipe. They are available for IPS and metric, for one or more carrier pipes. The clear construction allows for total inspection of the annular space which, in above ground installations, may eliminate the need for expensive leak detection systems. Polyvinyl hloride s chemical resistance, high tensile strength and good impact resistance provides a material that is suitable for a broad range of applications. ontain-it PV secondary containment system is suitable for the intermittent and short term exposure found in containment piping. ontain-it requires fewer and less expensive tools than other containment piping systems. With ontain-it, there is no fusion welding, eliminating the need for fusion tools which simplifies the installation procedures. Except for the common pipe preparation tools, all you ll need for ontain-it are the Fitting lips, Pipe lamp, the Drill and ounterbore Drill Bit, and the glue kit. The Injection Bonding System provides a controlled application of the bonding media, eliminating the mess usually associated with brush applied resins and solvent cements. Futhermore, fusion welding is eliminated allowing installation using less expensive tools. The bonding media is injected into the length of the split pipe using the injection gun to provide a pressure rated leak free seal. Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. FEATURES Split pipe and fittings Fits over virtually any carrier system Lightweight, easy to install lear construction Interlocking construction FEATURES Engineered bonding media channels and flanges Pre-drilled bonding media injection ports Quick and easy fitting clips Predetermined fitting clip locators Part Number Nominal Pipe Size (inches) Description rate Qty Feet Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Min. Wall Thickness Weight per 100 Feet AA 4" 4" ontainment Pipe, Split x 10' AA 6" 6" ontainment Pipe, Split x 10' AB 4" 4" ontainment Pipe, Solid x 20' AB 6" 6" ontainment Pipe, Solid x 20'

42 HDPE PIPE Pressure Design Pipe manufactured to the ISO (metric) or Ductile Iron dimensions noted in ASTM Standard F is available by special order. Internal Pressure Ratings (psi) Global Pipe PE3408 at 23 for 50 years: SDR Pressure Rating Desirable Properties Global Poly Systems PE3408 polyethylene piping system provides many desirable properties for piping: Heat fusion joining for strong, lifetime leak free joints Flexibility, fatigue resistance, toughness, light weight and impact resistance for easy, low cost installation Resistance to environmental stress cracking Resistant to surges and durable performance under temperature extremes High strength and stiffness to withstand internal pressure and external loads orrosion and hemical resistant Hazen Williams Factor is 150 and doesn t change over time Global pipe meets or exceeds these standards: NSF 14 and 61 NSF c ASTM F-714 Polyethylene Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) based on outside diameter ASTM D1248 PE3408 materials ASTM D-3350 PE ell classification (black) Materials Material used for the manufacturing of polyethylene pipe shall be PE3408 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) prime resin as listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). It complies with ASTM D1248 as a Type 111, lass, ategory 5, Grade P34 and with ASTM D3350 as a cell class material. In addition, materials used for the manufacture of the HDPE pipe shall meet the following physical property requirements. Nominal Physical Properties of Global PE3408 Pipe Material Property ASTM Reference Nominal Value Density, black gm/cc Density, natural D gm/cc Melt flow D 1238 (cond.e) 0.10 gm/10min Vicat softening temperature D F Brittleness temperature D F Environmental stress cracking D 1693 (cond.) 5000 hrs Tensile, yield (2"/min)* D psi Tensile, break (2"/min)* D psi Elongation (2"/min)* D % Stiffness D ,000 psi Modulus of elasticity D ,000 psi Modulus of elasticity-long term 30,000 psi Flexural modulus D ,000 psi Impact strength, 0.25" D 256 (method A) 12 Impact strength, 0.125" D 256 (method A) Non-break Hardness, shore D D Thermal conductivity Btu-in/ft_/ hr/f Thermal expansion, coefficient D 696 9x10(-5)in/in/F Long term hydro, strength D psi Hydrostatic design basis D psi Hydrostatic design stress D psi Material cell classification D 3350 PE

43 HDPE PIPE 2 IPS Pipe Size Actual OD (IN) SDR Nominal ID (IN) Minimum Wall (IN) lb per Foot lb per Meter 3/4" " /4" /2" " /2" IPS Pipe Size Actual OD (IN) SDR Nominal ID (IN) Minimum Wall (IN) lb per Foot lb per Meter 3" " " Notes: The data contained herein is a guide to the use of Global s polyethylene pipe and is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, general data does not adequately cover specific applications, and it s suitabilty in particular applications should be independently verified. In all cases, the user should assume that additional safety measures may be required in the safe installation or operation of the project. Due to a wide variation in service conditions, quality of installation, etc., no warranty expressed or implied, is given in conjunction with the use of this material, other than that stated in our Terms and onditons of Sale. Pipe manufactured to the ISO (metric) dimensions in ASTM F714/D3035 is available by special order. 2-10

44 HDPE PIPE IPS Pipe Size Actual OD (IN) SDR Nominal ID (IN) Minimum Wall (IN) lb per Foot lb per Meter 6" " " IPS Pipe Size Actual OD (IN) SDR Nominal ID (IN) Minimum Wall (IN) lb per Foot lb per Meter 10" " " Notes: The data contained herein is a guide to the use of Global s polyethylene pipe and is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, general data does not adequately cover specific applications, and it s suitabilty in particular applications should be independently verified. In all cases, the user should assume that additional safety measures may be required in the safe installation or operation of the project. Due to a wide variation in service conditions, quality of installation, etc., no warranty expressed or implied, is given in conjunction with the use of this material, other than that stated in our Terms and onditons of Sale. Pipe manufactured to the ISO (metric) dimensions in ASTM F714/D3035 is available by special order. 2-11

45 HDPE PIPE 2 IPS Pipe Size Actual OD (IN) SDR Nominal ID (IN) Minimum Wall (IN) lb per Foot lb per Meter 16" " " IPS Pipe Size Actual OD (IN) SDR Nominal ID (IN) Minimum Wall (IN) lb per Foot lb per Meter 22" " Notes: The data contained herein is a guide to the use of Global s polyethylene pipe and is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, general data does not adequately cover specific applications, and it s suitabilty in particular applications should be independently verified. In all cases, the user should assume that additional safety measures may be required in the safe installation or operation of the project. Due to a wide variation in service conditions, quality of installation, etc., no warranty expressed or implied, is given in conjunction with the use of this material, other than that stated in our Terms and onditons of Sale. Pipe manufactured to the ISO (metric) dimensions in ASTM F714/D3035 is available by special order. 2-12

46 PLASTI LINER / ORE SAMPLING PIPE Fabco High Impact ABS pipe is used extensively in oil sand applications as a liner in core barrels to contain exploration sampling cores. Pipe compound is precisely defined for both physical and chemical requirements under ASTM A. As specified, print, directional arrows, and holes along printline. ustom pipe size and lengths on request 2 Fabco PV Type 1, Grade 1, Pipe is used for smaller diameter coring in oil sands applications as a liner in core barrels. Pipe compound conforms to SA Standard B137.3 and ASTM D ompany information and directional arrows along printline. ustom pipe sizing is available on request. High impact polyethylene aps are used to prevent loss of the core sample. aps are available in different colors, sizes, and can be custom molded. Some standard cap sizes will have top and bottom integrally molded in. Notes: ustom sizes availavle, quantities permitted. ABS resin is designed for high impact resistance and rigidity in hot and cold conditions. Order information: most core line is a not stock custom order, call for order details and delivery. 2-13

47 PROGEF STD (BETA PP) PIPING SYSTEM 2 Progef Standard features the Beta PP technology and is ideally suited for the industrial water and chemical market. Beta PP provides a robust and valuable piping system solution because of its excellent impact strength, product breadth and homogeneous structure. It features high impact strength, excellent chemical resistance, and high stress crack resistance. It is available in sizes ranging from 3/8 to 16 and has a pressure rating of F. It is joined by using IR Butt Fusion technology for sizes up to 9 and by using ontact Butt Fusion technology for sizes 10 and up. Applications Low-grade DI water Process cooling water (PW) hemical distribution Vacuum Applications High impact strength Excellent chemical resistance High stress crack resistance Part Number Diameter MM losest inch size Min. Wall Thickness mm rate Quantity lbs /M / ½ ¾ ¼ ½ ½ Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. 2-14

48 PROGEF NATURAL PP PIPING SYSTEM Progef Natural Polypropylene is ideal for life science, pure water and semiconductor chemical slurry applications, PROGEF Natural provides a superior unpigmented PP piping system because of its Bead and revice Free (BF) fusion capability, pristine appearance and chemical resistance. Progef is joined using Socket Fusion technology or IR Plus/BF Plus Fusion. 2 Applications Purified Water (PW) De-Ionized Water (DIW) Slurry distribution Features Translucent appearance No corrosion or rouging Outstanding surface quality Excellent chemical resistance High impact strength Part Number Diameter MM losest inch size Min. Wall Thickness mm lbs /M rate Quantity PN ½ ¾ ¼ ½ ½ Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. Notes: Federal Register, FR Title 21. Pressure Rating of 150 PSI (PN 68 F for 20mm through 90mm utilizing Socket fusion technology. Pressure Rating of 150 PSI (PN 68 F for 20mm through 63mm utilizing IR Plus/BF Plus fusion technology. Pressure Rating of 90 PSI (PN 68 F for 75mm through 110mm utilizing IR Plus/BF Plus fusion technology. 2-15

49 SYGEF STD PVDF PIPING SYSTEM 2 For the industrial water and chemical market, SYGEF Standard provides a premier piping system solution because of its purity characteristics, chemical resistance and extensive product and fusion offerings. It is joined using BF Plus (20mm - 110mm), Socket Fusion (16mm - 110mm), or IR Plus Fusion (20mm - 315mm). Applications Ultra-Pure Water (UPW) Return Purified Water (PW) hemical distribution Features Virgin Kynar 700 Series Resin Surface finish Ra < 0.5 μm Ozone resistant 100% traceability to the raw material Durable packaging to ensure product integrity Min. Wall Part Number Diameter MM losest inch size Thickness mm Kg /M PN / ½ ¾ ¼ ½ ½ Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. Notes: Pressure Rating of 232 PSI (PN 68 F for 16mm through 110mm. Pressure Rating of 150 PSI (PN 68 F for 160mm through 315mm. ASME BPE approved. FM 4910 approved. Federal Register, FR Title 21. USP 25 lass VI approved. Pipe only in dimensions 250mm (10 ) and 315mm (12 ). 2-16

50 SYGEF PLUS PVDF PIPING SYSTEM Applications Ultra-pure Water (UPW) High purity acid distribution Notes: Pressure Rating of 232 PSI (PN 68 F for 20mm through 110mm. Pressure Rating of 150 PSI (PN 68 F for 160mm through 315mm. Meets the requirements of ASME BPE. Meets the requirements of Semi F57. Meets the requirements of FM Federal Register, FR Title 21. Meets the requirements of USP 25 lass VI. Part Number SYGEF Plus is the most recognized brand in the high purity water market because of its industry leading purity characteristics, manufacturing excellence, vast product range, and proven performance with foremost semiconductor and life science corporations. Please contact customer service for a complete list of available fittings. Features Virgin Kynar 700 Series Resin Technologically advanced cleanroom manufacturing Surface finish < 225mm Ra < 0.2μm; >225mm Ra < 0.3 μm Ozone resistant Extensive industry validated QA/Q protocol 100% traceability to the raw material Durable packaging to ensure product integrity Min. Wall Thickness mm Kg /M PN losest inch Diameter MM size ½ ¾ ¼ ½ ½ PV ORROSIVE WASTE DRAINAGE SYSTEM SPEARS LabWaste TM PV orrosive Waste Drainage System is a proven solvent cement joined system which eliminates troublesome fusion equipment, mechanical joints & elastomer problems. It is NSF ertified for corrosive waste use and meets IAPMO IG 210 and I-ES A252. It is a complete system of pipe, fittings & adapters avaialble from 1 1/2 to 16. Features All PV onstruction in Full Assortment of Standard DWV Patterns ustom Fabricated Accessories-Drains, Neutralization Tanks & Pump Stations Special One-Step Solvent ement Provides hemical Resistance Equal to System Pipe & Fittings UL Flame & Smoke Rated Non-Pressure Drainage Service to 220 F 2-17

51 SG 110 SOKET FUSION MAHINE 2 Straightforward and swift procedure Extremely high weld strength Excellent solution for field welds and system tie-ins Available in MSE hand tool form. For use with Beta PP (16mm - 110mm), PROGEF Natural (20mm - 90mm, SYGEF Standard (20mm - 63mm) IR PLUS FUSION MAHINE High weld strength with small uniform beads Utilizes non-contact radiant heat to support high purity applications ontrolled and repeatable process 100% traceability Available in three sizes: IR 63 Plus machine (20mm - 63mm), IR 225 Plus (63mm - 225mm) and IR 315 Plus (250mm - 315mm) For use with Beta PP (20mm - 225mm), PROGEF Natural (20mm - 110mm), SYGEF Standard and SYGEF Plus (20mm - 315mm), and PFA FuseBond (¼ - 2 ) BF PLUS FUSION MAHINE Seamless weld without beads or crevices ontrolled and repeatable process with 100% traceability Remote capability to support difficult field welds Available in two sizes BF Plus Standard (20mm - 63mm) and BF Plus Large Dimension Package (75mm - 110mm) For use with PROGEF Natural (20mm - 110mm) and SYGEF Standard and SYGEF Plus (20mm - 110mm) ELETRO PLUS FUSION MAHINE The machine is designed to simplify and speed the electrofusion joining process. Designed to join Fuseal, Fuseal Squared Double ontainment, Fuseal 25/50 PVDF, and PPro-Seal Natural PP Advanced transformer technology for network or generator operation Hand-held user interface for simple operation Multiple joint fusion capability and calibration reminder feature Real time continuity detection of fusion coils and automatic temperature compensation Display of the input line voltage and Hz during fusion Integral carrying case for ease of transportation Integrated error detection system for reliable operation 2-18

52 MSA250-SE ELETROFUSION MAHINE Network and generator compatible Barcode fusion parameter input Multiple joint capability Advanced transformer technology Built in fail-safe mode For use with Fuseal PPFR & PPNFR (1½ 12 ), Fuseal Squared PPFR & PPNFR (1½ x 4 8 x 12 ), Fuseal 25/50 PVDF (1½ 6 ) and PPro-Seal PPn (½ 3 ) 2 ONVENTIONAL BUTT FUSION MAHINE Processor controlled Hydraulically operated Program directs operator at each step and controls the applied pressure Repeatable butt fusion joints Available in GF 250 N, GF 315 N, GF 500 versions For use with Beta PP (32mm - 400mm) and SYGEF Standard (32mm - 315mm) HAND HELD 1/2 TO 4 FUSION TOOL Each kit contains all of the components required for joining all sizes of socket fusion connections specified for that kit, including heating tool, male and female heat face sets with bolts, depth gages, cold ring pipe clamp with inserts, pipe cutter, beveling tool, timer, thermal blanket, auxiliary handle, hex key wrenches, thermostat adjustment tool, joining instructions and rugged heavy duty tool box. Model is for pipe sizes 1/2-2 and is for pipe size 3 to 4. Both models are 110 volts, single phase. MODEL 75 1/2-2 FUSION TOOL The Model 75 Socket Fusion Tool is designed to join Polypropylene and PVDF (Kynar ) pipe, valves and fittings in 1/2-2 sizes. Two clamps hold the pipe and one clamp, with an insertion stop, holds the corresponding fitting or valve in the precise position for socket fusion. The basic machine comes in a steel carrying case with the heating tool, wrench, fixtures, clamping unit and joining instructions. The Socket Heat Face Sets are ordered separately. This tool weighs less that 75 lbs and is 110 volts, single phase, and 630 Watts. Model 3500 is available for pipe sizes from 1/2 to 4 and Model 3600 is available for pipe sizes from 4 to

53 MELROY 824 FUSION MAHINE 2 Four or three jaw capable for improved in-ditch fusion For confined spaces can be converted to top-loading heater & facer DataLogger compatible Rugged outriggers for stability Removable 3 or 4 jaw carriage for in-ditch use Hydraulic pipe lifts Available in High, Medium or Low cylinder force Patented enterline guidance for equal distribution of force around the joint Serrated jaw & inserts to keep pipe from slipping during fusion Hydraulic facer for facing the heaviest wall pipe with ease Advance Blade Design for smooth face and long life Heater and facer can be easily converted to top loading for confined spaces Original industry standard for hydraulic control systems ISO compliant industrial Teflon coated plates Model No. ylinder Force Input Voltage Requirements Minimum Power Requirements Plug Type A High 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 3Ph 29.8KVA/28.1KW I A Medium 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 3Ph 29.8KVA/28.1KW I A Low 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 3Ph 29.8KVA/28.1KW I TRASTAR 630 FUSION MAHINE Track mounted, self-contained, self-propelled, all-terrain On-board generator for powering heater and other devices arriage can be easily removed for in-ditch use On-board generator for powering heater and other devices Also available as an Automated fusion machine Four or three jaw capable for improved in-ditch fusion For confined spaces can be converted to top-loading heater & facer Dual Speed Tracks and dual hydraulic pipe lifts Automated version available and DataLogger compatible Self locking brakes 17+ hours operational fuel tank capacity Patented enterline guidance for equal distribution of force around the joint Serrated jaw & inserts to keep pipe from slipping during fusion Hydraulic facer for facing the heaviest wall pipe with ease Advance Blade Design for smooth face and long life Wireless Remote ontrol ensures safe efficient working environment and precise machine placement Model No. ylinder Force Input Voltage Requirements Minimum Power Requirements Plug Type AT High N/A, On-Board Generator N/A, Self ontained Diesel N/A AT Medium N/A, On-Board Generator N/A, Self ontained Diesel N/A AT Low N/A, On-Board Generator N/A, Self ontained Diesel N/A 2-20

54 HEMKOR SUPER BLO TRUE UNION BALL VALVES The hemkor Super Bloc true union ball valve features a unique double union/double block design for easier maintenance. It contains blocks in both the upstream and downstream directions. These valves are available in PV, PV, and Polypropylene construction. All ball valves are available with either a Viton or EPDM O-ring, Teflon seats, and double stem O-rings. The full port design ensures minimal flow restriction. These valves have an external adjustment for seat wear. hemkor True Union Ball Valves with Viton Seals PV PV Polypropylene Size Soc/Thd Thd Flange Soc/Thd Thd Flange Soc/Thd Thd Flange 1/ N/A N/A N/A / N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A / N/A N/A N/A / N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A / N/A N/A N/A hemkor True Union Ball Valves with EPDM Seals PV PV Size Soc/Thd Thd Flange Soc/Thd Thd Flange 1/ N/A N/A / N/A N/A N/A N/A / N/A N/A / N/A N/A N/A N/A / Notes: 150 psi rating for PV, PV, PVDF 2 1/2 valves are fabricated with 3 valves and bushings. 2 1/2 flanged valves are nonstock. In PV, PV, and PP, 1/2 to 2 are supplied with both socket and threaded ends. PVDF valves are also available with metric fusion sockets on request. Threaded part numbers apply to 3 and 4 valves only. Vacuum resistant to 29.9 of mercury. HEMKOR SINGLE UNION BALL VALVES The hemkor single union ball valve is manufacturered from white PV with EPDM O-rings and is available in 1 1/2 and 2 with socket ends. It is ideal for pool and spa applications and is rated to 140 F. SIZE Part # 1 1/2 WPSUB015 2 WPSUB020 Notes: 150 psi rating for PV and PV. Temperature rated to 140 F. Vacuum resistant to 29.9 of mercury. 3-1

55 +GF+ 375 TRUE UNION BALL VALVES The +GF+ 375 true union ball valve is a manual, 2-way full port ball valve with both solvent cement socket and female threaded end connectors provided through 2. True union permits radial installation or removal. Sizes range from 3/8 to 6 (6 venturied from 4 ). It is available in PV and PV with solvent cement, threaded, or flanged end connections. It is available with either EPDM or FPM seals and PTFE ball seats. This valve is NSF61 approved. 3 EPDM Seals FPM Seals/Viton PV PV PV PV Size Soc/Thd Flange Soc/Thd Flange Soc/Thd Flange Soc/Thd Flange 3/ / / / / / Notes: 225 psi rating for PV or PV. ASTM compliant end connections. Silicone and oil free versions available. an be actuated after installation 2½, 3, 4, and 6 have socket ends only; NPT available upon request. HEMTROL TRUE UNION BALL VALVES These manually operated valves, with an easy-to-turn handle, indicates open or closed position at-a-glance. Also available in pneumatic or electrically operated versions, the hemtrol True Union ball valve meets a wide range of application requirements. Excellent corrosion resistance is another advantage of hemtrol True Union valves. All engineered plastic construction assures long life and reliable operation in chemical and fluid applications such as acids, alkalies, salt solutions and DI water. These valves are pressure rated to 150 psi and temperature rated to at least 140 F. These valves are available in PV, PV, black and natural PP, natural and red PVDF in sizes ranging from 1/2 to 4 with either viton or EPDM Orings. Please contact customer service for more details. 3-2

56 +GF+ 546 True Union Ball Valves The +GF+ 546 is a manual, 2-way, full port ball valve which provides long working life and maintenance-free performance. The True union permits radial installation or removal. Access to all components (ball, stem, seats and seals) is provided by removal of the left hand threaded seat carrier. The ergonomic handle has a molded-in wrench to engage the seat carrier. It is available in sizes ranging from 3/8 to 4 and is available in PV and PV with solvent cement, threaded, and flanged end connections standard and in PP and PVDF with threaded, spigot, fusion socket, and flanged end connections standard. It is available with either EPDM and FPM seals and PTFE ball seats. The union nuts have strong buttress threads to reduce the likelyhood of backout. +GF+ EPDM +GF+ FPM/VITON PV PV PV PV Size Soc/Thd Flange Soc/Thd Flange Soc/Thd Flange Soc/Thd Flange 3/ / / / / / Notes: 232 psi rating for PV and PV. ASTM compliant end connections. Silicone and oil free versions available, can be actuated after installation, and vented ball valves can be supplied for use with Sodium Hypochlorite. 2½, 3, and 4 have socket ends only; NPT available upon request. Locking handles can be added to any valve in the field or at the factory. onsult customer service for more details. 3 HAYWARD TB SERIES TRUE UNION BALL VALVES Hayward True Union Ball Valves can take the day to day abuse of industrial service and continue to function. The true union design makes these valves very easy to maintain by allowing for easy removal from a piping system without breaking down piping connections. A fine pitch seal retainer thread allows for accurate compensation for seat wear. These valves feature a double O-ring stem seal for twice the leakage protection of valves with only a single stem seal. These valves will never corrode. This is because of the valves all plastic construction. They will never rust or corrode and they can survive corrosive environments without the need for painting or expensive epoxy coatings. They are available from 1/4 to 6 in PV, PV and PP and with either FPM or EPDM Seals. They are available in a Z-ball configuration specifically for Sodium Hypochlorite applications. These valves have been designed so that they can be easily converted to an automated valve in the field. Please contact customer service for more details. 3-3

57 HEMKOR BUTTERFLY VALVES hemkor Butterfly valves have a unique Triple Seal design for maximum reliability. They have a full face design assuring positive flange sealing. These valves are up to 50% lighter than metal valves and have a PV disk for optimized strength and reduced pressure drop. hemtrol butterfly valves have a ten position index plate for precise flow control and are pressure rated to 150 psi and service temperatures of up to 140 F. 8, 10, and 12 come complete with a gear box handle. 3 Notes: 150 psi rating at 73.4 F. Temperature rated to 140 F. PV hand Lever Size EPDM Viton 3" " " " " " HEMKOR GEAR BOX BUTTERFLY VALVES hemkor Gear Box Butterfly Valves are corrosion resistant and exhibit excellent flow characteristics. They require lower torque and have greater sealing capacity with a clear indication of the disc opening. The standard stem is made from 304, 316 or 316L stainless steel. They are available in sizes from 3 to 24 upon request. Notes: 150 psi rating at 73.4 F(23 ) Temperature rated to 140 F. Pressure rating for 2 ~10 is 150 PSI, Pressure rating for 12 ~14 is 100 PSI. Pressure rating for 16 is 86 PSI. Pressure rating for 18 is 72 PSI. Pressure rating for 20 ~24 is 51 PSI. PV Gear Box Size EPDM Viton 3" G G 4" G G 6" G G 8" G G 10" G G 12" G G HAYWARD BUTTERFLY VALVES Hayward Butterfly valves are available in PV, PV and PP in a wide variety of sizes. They are available with EPDM, Viton or Nitrile liners. Rated at 150 PSI, Options include stem extensions, lug body design, gear operators, actuators, titanium shaft, 2 square operating nut, and PVDF discs. Features Rated at 150 PSI Stainless Steel Shaft Fully Supported Flange Bolt Holes Full Body, V-Notch Liner Blowout-Proof Shaft Viton, EPDM or Nitrile Liners Wafer Body Design onforms to ANSI B16.10 Face-to-Face Dimensions Also available in sizes from 1 1/2 to 8 Size Part No. 10" " " " "

58 +GF+ TYPE 567 BUTTERFLY VALVES The +GF+ 567 wafer style butterfly valve is available in lever or gear operated versions. Both disc and body are the same material and are exposed to stream for maximum material design capabilities. Available in PV, PV, PP, PVDF with either EPDM or FPM seals up to 8. This valve has a rachet handle for locking in place (5 increments) and can be actuated after installation. They are available with a level handle or gear operator. The double eccentric operating principle ensures low torque and long life. They have specially engineered disc seal and pipeline installation seals. Notes: 150 psi rating at 73.4 F(23 ). Temperature rated to 140 F. Hole patterns are class 150 to ANSI B16.5. onnecting dimension: ISO 7005 PN 10, EN 1092 PN 10, DIN 2501 PN 10, ANSI B 16.5 lass 150, BS 1560:1989, JIS B Overall length according to EN 558-1, ISO We recommend for the dimensions DN250 and DN300 only 6 bar maximum system pressure for the hand lever version. PV Lever PV Gear Size EPDM FPM EPDM FPM 2" /2" " " " " " " " GF+ 568 BUTTERFLY VALVES The +GF+ type 568 Lug-Style Butterfly Valve is available in manual or gear operated. Both disc and body are the same material and are exposed to stream for maximum material design capabilities. Available in PV, PV, PP, PVDF with either EPDM or FPM seals up to 8. This valve has a rachet handle for locking in place (5 increments) and can be actuated after installation. The double eccentric operating principle ensures low torque and long life. They have specially engineered disc seal and pipeline installation seals. Notes: 150 psi rating at 73.4 F(23 ). Temperature rated to 140 F. Hole patterns are class 150 to ANSI B16.5. Outer body in GGG-40.3 epoxy-coated. onnecting dimension ANSI B 16.5 lass 150. Overall length according to EN 558-1, ISO Interface F07 according to DIN/ISO PV Lever PV Gear Size EPDM FPM EPDM FPM 2" /2" " " " " "

59 SUPER OMPAT BALL VALVES The Super ompact Ball Valve features double O-rings, self-lubricating Teflon seats, full flow design. It is available in schedule 80 socket or npt thread and is pressure rated to F(23 ). SIZE GRAY PV EPDM SOKET GRAY PV EPDM WHITE PV EPDM SOKET WHITE PV EPDM SOKET 1/ W W 3/ W W W W 1 1/ W W 1 1/ W W W W 3 OMPAT EONO BALL VALVES The hemkor Econo Ball Valve is cost effective and features a white PV body, santoprene seats, EPDM rings, and a short overall length. This is a full bore, 150 PSI rated (non shock) valve. SIZE PV EPDM SOKET PV EPDM THREADED 1/ W W 3/ W W W W 1 1/ W W 1 1/ W W W W METERING BALL VALVES - TYPE 323 This manual, yet actuatable, metering ball valve provides accurate, low flow values. The scale on the body indicates degrees of opening (0-180) which can be related to flow rate at a known pressure. It is available in socket or threaded true union connections with PTFE ball seat and with EPDM or VITON seals. SIZE PV EPDM SOKET PV EPDM THREADED PV VITON SOKET PV VITON THREADED 3/ / LABORATORY BALL OK VALVE - TYPE 324 This manual PV 2-way, full port, laboratory ball cock valve is available in PV with either socket or threaded end connectors EPDM seals and PTFE ball seats. It can be disassembled for repair or replacement. It exhibits ideal flow characteristics and maintains a long, maintenance-free, life. It is pressure rated to 150 psi at 73.4 F(23 ). SIZE PV EPDM SOKET PV EPDM THREADED 1/

60 TYPE 343/543 HORIZONTAL THREE WAY BALL VALVES Notes: Maximum pressure rating of 232 psi for PV and PV. Temperature rated to 140 F for PV and 200 F for PV. Also available in metric. Also available in PVDF, and PP. This manual true union, full port horizontal, 3-way ball valve permits radial installation or removal. The L port ball provides independent connection of inlets with outlet. The T port ball provides straight through flow and independent connection of inlets with outlets or interconnection of all three parts. It is available in PV, PV, PP, and PVDF with EPDM or FPM seals and PTFE ball seat. It is available with either socket or threaded end connectors. The handle can be used as a tool for seat adjustment and the screwed-in seat carrier has left-hand threads to prevent unscrewing when threaded valve is removed from the line. PV Socket/L-Port Type 343 PV Socket/T-Port Size EPDM FPM EPDM FPM 3/8" /2" /4" " /4" /2" " PV Socket/L-Port Type 543 PV Socket/T-Port Size EPDM FPM EPDM FPM 3/8" /2" /4" " /4" /2" " TYPE 343/543 VERTIAL THREE WAY BALL VALVES This manual, true union, full port vertical, 3-way ball valve permits radial installation or removal. The L-port ball provides independent connection of inlets with outlet. The Diverter ball provides interconnections of two inlets with outlet for mixing or interconnection of outlet for proportional diverter operation. It is available in PV, PV, PP, and PVDF with EPDM or FPM seals and PTFE ball seat. The handle can be used as a tool for seat adjustment and the screwedin seat carrier has left-hand threads to prevent unscrewing when threaded valve is removed from the line. It can be actuated after installation. Notes: maximum pressure rating of 232 psi for PV and PV. Temperature rated to 140 F for PV and 200 F for PV. Also available in metric. Also available in PVDF, and PP. Type 343 PV L-Port Size EPDM FPM 3/8" /2" /4" " /4" /2" " Type 543 PV L-Port Size EPDM FPM 3/8" /2" /4" " /4" /2" "

61 ALIBRATED NEEDLE VALVES The hemtrol calibrated needle valve is ideally suited to the fine regulation of liquid flow required in instrumentation and laboratory work. The flow through the 1/4 valve can be accurately adjusted by observing the knob handle exposing numerals molded on the valve body. It has a positive stop for safe operation and Teflon seats to prevent wear on needle T45N-V 1/4" FPT x 1/4" FPT 3 Knob Position Flow rate psi) HEMTROL PV HEMOK VALVES The hemtrol chemcock valve is ideal for laboratories, monitoring systems, sampling, and a variety of other applications as original equipment. Its calculated fluid flow coefficient (v) is based on the laying length being equivalent to 1/4 Schedule 80 pipe. It opens and closes with only a quarter turn. These valves come complete with replaceable FPM O-ring seats and seals and exhibits no sticking or galling. It is rated at 150 psi at 73.4 F(23 ) water non-shock full port. Part # A45-V M45-V Description 1/4" Hose x 1/4" MPT 1/4" MPT x 1/4" MPT HAYWARD UNIVERSAL STOPOKS For on/off, restricted flow or sampling applications, the Hayward L12 Stopock is easily adaptable to any piping connection. Furnished with the valve is a 1/4 NPT female pipe thread, 1/4 NPT male pipe thread and hose barb end connectors for 1/4 through 7/16 I.D. tubing. These allow the valve to be fitted with up to six different end connection combinations. Simply attach the end connections you need they are all supplied with each valve. Y PATTERN VALVES The hemtrol Y-pattern globe valve exhibits minimal pressure-drop, even when compared with a conventional upright style globe valve. Therefore, it is an excellent choice for combination on-off and throttling applications. One of the more common applications for this valve is as a pump by-pass control valve. It features malleable glass reinforced PTFE (Teflon) seat disk ensuring long-lasting positive sealing and is constructed of PV and FPM seals. The stub acme thread on stem provides rapid openclose operation. Size 1/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" Part # ANGLE VALVES The hemtrol Angle Valve is used where a higher pressure-drop is desirable. One of its more common applications is as a pump by-pass control valve. It features malleable glass reinforced PTFE (Teflon) seat disk ensuring long-lasting positive sealing and is constructed of PV and FPM seals. The stub acme thread on stem provides rapid open-close operation. Size 1/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" Part #

62 PV GATE VALVES This PV Gate Valve is designed with all wetted parts constructed of industrial thermoplastics. All Valves are assembled with silicone-free, water soluble lubricant. It is available in PV upon request. The design allows for straight passage of fluids with very little pressure drop. orrosion resistant PV gate valves are ideal for long service in harsh, corrosive applications. The thermoplastic body is far lighter in weight than a comparable metal valve, saving time on installation as well as the cost of heavier piping supports. Sizes up to 14 available upon request. Notes: Maximum pressure rating of 150 psi for PV and PV. Temperature rated to 140 F for PV and 200 F for PV. SR nomenclature refers to steel reinforced sockets. PV Threaded PV Socket PV Flanged Size Buna-N EPDM Viton Buna-N EPDM Viton Buna-N EPDM Viton 1/2" /4" " /4" /2" " /2" " SR SR SR " SR SR SR PV GLOBE VALVES This PV Globe Valve is heavy duty, extra strong, and is ideal for throttling applications. They are slow closing reducing the likelyhood of water hammer. They are available in sizes ranging from 2 1/2 to 6 in PV and PV with flanged ends. All valves are assembled with silicone-free, water soluble lubricant and are suitable for vacuum service. Notes: Maximum pressure rating of 150 psi for PV and PV. Temperature rated to 140 F for PV and 200 F for PV. PV Flanged Ends PV Flanged Ends Size Buna-N EPDM Viton EPDM Viton Viton 2 1/2" " " "

63 BALL HEK VALVES/FOOT VALVES The hemkor ball check valve features a thermoplastic corrosion resistant design, excellent flow characteristics and union end connector for simplified valve maintenance. It s unique design prevents the ball from sticking or chattering. It contains a long life Viton ball seat and it can be easily converted to a foot valve with the installation of the strainer kit. It is designed for vertical applications. 3 Notes: The 4 valve has a 3 body with end connectors increased to 4. Temperature rated to 140 F. All foot valve strainer kits require solvent cementing. PV/EPDM PV/Viton PV/Viton PP/Viton Size Soc Thread Soc Thread Soc Thread Soc Thread 1/2" //4" " /4" /2" " " " GF+ TYPE 304 Y-HEK VALVES This PV transparent Y-check valve is designed to automatically stop flow when the flow reverses direction. The weighted plunger allows the angle check valve to function when mounted in either the horizontal or vertical plane. It has long working life and is maintenance-free, light weight, with either EPDM or FPM seals. it is available in a size range of 1/2-3 with IPS spigot end connections. It is also available in opaque with either socket, threaded, or flanged end connectors. It is temperature rated for F, non-shock and is temperature rated to 140 F. Size PV/EPDM PV/Viton 1/2' /4' " /4' /2" " "

64 Notes: Designed for both horizontal or vertical usage. Pressure rated F(23 ). lear PV Swing heck Valves available on request. SWING HEK VALVES Swing check valves are used in irrigation systems, waste water lines, sump pump disposal lines, and sewage lift stations or ejector systems. They are also used where minimum heat loss or flow resistance is required, as well as in swimming pools, hot tubs, or spa applications. The PV weighted and shielded flapper will retain backpressure up to 125 PSI. They have an angled seat and weighted flapper design for low pressure seal. They also feature no metallic parts, full flow design, solvent weld or compression ends. These valves are ideal for close working areas, easy pipe alignment. Size 1/2 3/ /4 1 1/ PV Socket onnection PV ompression onnection LARGE DIAMETER SWING HEK VALVES These check valves have up to three times the pressure rating of other valves and can replace metal valves in many applications. This valve has Unique Two-In-One Seat Design which is ideal for slurry applications. It is available with FPM or EPDM seals, flanged connections, two drain ports and can be installed either horizontally or vertically (a counterweight is recommended and available upon request). No flange gaskets are required. Size End onnectors FPM Seals EPDM Seals PV PV PP FPM Seals WAFER HEK VALVE Wafer check valves are economical and lightweight. They are of a space saving design. They are available in PV, PP, and PVDF in sizes from 2 to 20 with Buna N, EPDM, Viton or Teflon O-rings. The spring is available in 316 S.S. standard and in HASTEL- LOY upon request. Spacers are required for installation. EPDM Seals FPM Seals EPDM Seals 3' Flanged SW1300V SW1300E SW2300V SW2300E SW4300V SW4300E 4" Flanged SW1400V SW1400E SW2400V SW2400E SW4400V SW4400E 6" Flanged SW1600V SW1600E SW2600V SW2600E SW4600V SW4600E 8" Flanged SW1800V SW1800E SW2800V SW2800E SW4800V SW4800E PV PP SIZE EPDM EPDM/Spring Viton Viton/Spring EPDM EPDM/Spring Viton Viton/Spring 2" E E V V E E V V 2 1/2" E E V V E E V V 3" E E V V E E V V 4" E E V V E E V V 5" E E V V E E V V 6" E E V V E E V V 8" E E V V E E V V 10" E E V V E E V V 12" E E V V E E V V 14" E E V V E E V V 16" E E V V E E V V 20" E E V V E E V V 3-11

65 PRESSURE REGULATORS The pressure regulator comes in two different configurations; ½ to 1 is a straight thru flow design and the 1½ to 2 is an offset port flow design. They both feature a top entry adjustment knob with lock nut, Viton O-rings (EPDM available on request), Kynar covered stainless springs. It will operate with inlet pressures of up to 100 PSI and is adjustable from 10 psi to 80 psi. It is designed to reduce and stabilize line pressure. 3 Size 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/2" 2" PV F-PR-50 F-PR-75 F-PR-10 F-PR-15 F-PR-20 PP F-PPR-50 F-PPR-75 F-PPR-10 F-PPR-15 F-PPR-20 PVDF F-KPR-50 F-KPR-75 F-KPR-10 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES These adjustable pressure relief valves are available in PV and PVDF in two different body styles. They feature Viton O-rings for durability and easy adjustment. All models are designed to prevent excessive line pressure. Part # Size Range Material F-MPR /4" PSI PV F-MPR /4" PSI PV F-MPR /2" PSI PV F-MPR-75 3/4" PSI PV PRESSURE BY-PASS VALVES These pressure by-pass valve will bypass excess fluid or air whenever the pressure you set with the handle is exceeded. This valve can be controlled from 10 through 100 PSI. Our pressure by-pass valve will permit straight through flow if mounted in a straight line. These valves feature Viton O-rings and adjustment knob and lock nut. Material 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/2" 2" PV F-P-50 F-P-75 F-P-10 F-P-15 F-P-20 PP F-PYP-50 F-PYP-75 F-PYP-10 F-PYP-15 F-PYP-20 PVDF F-KP-50 F-KP-75 F-KP-10 FOOT OPERATED VALVES The foot operated valve features a Kynar coated spring, Viton O-rings (EPDM available), mounting holes, molded body, and an automatic shut-off. It is extremely easy to mount and comes in a normally closed position. The valve is opened by pushing the top with your foot and allowing the spring to close it. 1/2" 3/4" 1" PV F-FOV-50 F-FOV-75 F-FOV-10 PP F-PFOV-50 F-PFOV-75 F-PFOV

66 LIQUID DISPENSING ASSEMBLIES Liquid dispensing assemblies are ideal for distilled, deionized and demineralized water, as well as chemical dispensing. They are available in PV, Natural PP and PVDF. All tips accept 1/8 to 1/2 I.D. tubing. They are frequently used in labs, hospitals, and clean rooms. Part # Type Material Valve Part # Type Valve F-DA-15D 15 PV NEEDLE F-DA-35D 35 T.U. BALL F-DA-15W 15 PV NEEDLE F-DA-35W 35 T.U. BALL F-PDA-15D 15 PP NEEDLE F-PDA-35D 35 T.U. BALL F-PDA-15W 15 PP NEEDLE F-PDA-35W 35 T.U. BALL F-KDA-15D 15 PVDF NEEDLE F-KDA-35D 35 T.U. BALL F-KDA-15W 15 PVDF NEEDLE F-KDA-35W 35 T.U. BALL F-DA-20D 20 PV BALL 3 F-DA-20W 20 PV BALL F-DA-30D 30 PV SNAP F-DA-30W 30 PV SNAP F-PDA-30D 30 PP SNAP F-PDA-30W 30 PP SNAP F-KDA-30D 30 PVDF SNAP +GF+ V786 PRESSURE RETAINING VALVE The Pressure Retaining Valve serves to keep the working or system related pressures constant, to balance out pressure pulsation, and to reduce pressure peaks in chemical process systems. If the inlet pressure rises above the set value, the pressurized valve piston is lifted against the spring force. onsequently, the valve opens and there is a reduction of pressure through the outlet pipe. The valve closes as soon as the inlet pressure sinks below the pre-set spring tension. The use of PRVs in upstream (supply side) UPW applications without a pointof-use filter should be avoided. However, it should be noted that sufficient flow is needed to avoid microbial contamination. Notes: Provides highly accurate and stable pressure control. Size range ½ - 1½. Available in PV, PP and PVDF. Diaphragms in EPDM or PTFE. Female NPT is standard. Also available with IR/BF, socket union and flanged end connections. Spare parts are available for these valves. ontact customer service for more information. Inch Material Set Range Body Type EPDM Seats PTFE Seats ½ PV ¾ PV PV ¼ PV ½ PV

67 +GF+ V185/V85 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 3 The Pressure Relief Valve serves to keep the working or system pressures constant, to balance out pressure pulsation, and to reduce pressure peaks in process systems. The third pipe spigot fitted on the valve body means the valve can be installed directly in the main pipeline. If the inlet pressure rises above the set value, the pressurized valve piston is lifted against the spring force. onsequently, the valve opens and there is a reduction of pressure in the outlet pipe. The excess pressure can exhaust or be redirected via the third outlet. The valve closes as soon as the inlet pressure sinks below the pre-set spring tension. The use of PRVs in upstream (supply side) UPW applications without a point-of-use filter should be avoided. However, it should be noted that sufficient flow is needed to avoid microbial contamination. It provides highly accurate and stable pressure control. Notes: Size range 3/8-4. Available in PV, PP and PVDF. Diaphragms in EPDM or PTFE. Female NPT is standard. Also available with IR/BF, socket union and flanged end connections. Spare parts are available for these valves. ontact customer service for more information. Inch Material Set Range Body Type EPDM Orings PTFE Orings ½ PV ¾ PV PV ¼ PV ½ PV PV ½ PV PV PV GF+ V782 PRESSURE REDUING VALVE The Pressure Reducing Valve reduces the pressure within the system to a pre-set value. By using the differential pressure, the pressure reducing valve adjusts itself to the set working pressure. The outlet pressure (working pressure) is not directly related to the inlet pressure. If the outlet pressure increases or decreases above/below the desired value, the diaphragm is lifted against the spring force or pressed down by the spring force, as the case may be, by the outlet pressure. The pressure reducing valve begins to close/open until a state of equilibrium is re-established; in other words, the outlet pressure remains constant irrespective of an increasing or decreasing inlet pressure. The use of PRVs in upstream (supply side) UPW applications without a point-of-use filter should be avoided. However, it should be noted that sufficient flow is needed to avoid microbial contamination. It provides highly accurate and stable pressure control Notes: Size range ½ - 1½ Available in PV, PP and PVDF Diaphragms in EPDM or PTFE Female NPT is standard. Also available with IR/BF, socket union and flanged end connections Spare parts are available for these valves. ontact customer service for more information. Inch Material Set Range Body Type EPDM Orings PTFE Orings ½ PV ¾ PV PV ¼ PV ½ PV

68 +GF+ V182/V82 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE The Pressure Regulating Valve reduces pressure to a given value. By utilizing the differential pressure, the valve sets itself to the set working pressure and maintains it on the downstream side, irrespective of fluctuations of inlet pressure or changes in flow. The valve is adjusted by a set screw and secured with a locknut. The use of PRVs in upstream (supply side) UPW applications without a point-of-use filter should be avoided. However, it should be noted that sufficient flow is needed to avoid microbial contamination. This valve provides highly accurate and stable pressure control. Notes: Size range ½ - 4. Available in PV, PP and PVDF. Diaphragms in EPDM or PTFE for 2 and 4, V82 design. ½ -1½ V182 body with piston and O-ring design. Female NPT is standard. Also available with IR/BF, socket union and flanged end connections. Spare parts are available for these valves. ontact customer service for more information. Inch Material Set Range Body Type EPDM Orings FPM O-Ring PTFE Diaphragm ½ PV ¾ PV PV ¼ PV ½ PV PV ½ PV PV PV GF+ V186/V86 PRESSURE RETAINING VALVE The Pressure Retaining Valve serves to keep the working or system related pressures constant, to balance out pressure pulsation and to reduce pressure peaks in process systems. If the inlet pressure rises above the set value, the pressurized valve piston is lifted against the spring force. onsequently, the valve opens and there is a reduction of pressure through the outlet pipe. The valve closes as soon as the inlet pressure sinks below the pre-set spring tension. When used as a bypass, it can also function as a relief valve to reduce pressure peaks. The use of PRVs in upstream (supply side) UPW applications without a point-of-use filter should be avoided. However, it should be noted that sufficient flow is needed to avoid microbial contamination. It provides highly accurate and stable pressure control. Notes: Provides highly accurate and stable pressure control. Size range ½ - 4. Available in PV, PP and PVDF Diaphragms in EPDM or PTFE. Female NPT is standard. Also available with IR/BF, socket union and flanged end connections. Spare parts are available for these valves. ontact customer service for more information. Inch Material Set Range Body Type EPDM Orings PTFE Orings ½ PV ¾ PV PV ¼ PV ½ PV PV ½ PV PV PV

69 +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type 231/233 2-way True Union Pneumatically actuated ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. Based on the new Type 546 ball valve, the Type uses the new PA 11/21 pneumatic actuators which can be fitted onto the valve in process. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for over 250,000 cycles. 3 Available in PV and PV sizes 3/8-2 Available in PP and SYGEF -PVDF in sizes 16 mm - 63 mm EPDM and FPM seals Available in fail close, fail open, or double acting onnections: PV/PV (socket, thread, flanged); PP and PVDF (metric socket, IR Plus, threaded, and flanged) Options include declutchable manual override, stroke limiter, and position indicator NSF approved (Type 233) +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type way True Union Pneumatically actuated vertical 3-way ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The PA21 actuators may be fitted onto existing George Fischer Type 343 ball valves in process. Additional accessories available from position feedback to control capabilities. Optional manual override. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for long service life. Available in PV, sizes 3/8-2 (20 mm - 63 mm) EPDM and FPM seals L-port provides independent connection of inlets with outlets Diverter ball provides interconnection of two inlets with outlet for mixing or interconnection of outlets for proportional diverter operation onnections: Socket or threaded +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type 275/276/277 3-way True Union Pneumatically actuated horizontal 3-way ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The PA11/21 actuators may be fitted onto existing George Fischer Type 343 ball valves in process. Additional accessories are available from position feedback to control capabilities. Optional manual override. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for long service life. Available in PV, PV, PP, and SYGEF -PVDF, sizes ½ -2 (20 mm - 63 mm) EPDM and FPM seals L-port provides independent connection of inlets with outlets T-port provides straight through flow, independent connections of inlets with outlets or interconnections of all three ports onnections: PV/PV (socket, thread), PP/PVDF (socket, thread, IR/butt) 3-16

70 +GF+ ELETRI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type 107 Electrically actuated ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. Based on the new Type 546 ball valve, the Type 107 uses the new Type EA 11 actuator which can be fitted onto the valve in process. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for over 250,000 cycles. 40% duty cycle Available in PV and PV, sizes 3/8-2 EPDM and FPM seals 115/230 VA 50/60 Hz or 24VD(optional) PV/PV (socket, threaded, flanged) Manual override standard Options include heater, fail safe unit, and position sensing switches IP67, NEMA 4X rated Approvals include E, SA, UL, and NSF 3 +GF+ ELETRI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type 131, 132, 133 Electrically actuated ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. Based on the new Type 546 ball valve, the Type 133 uses the new Type EA 21 actuator which can be fitted onto the valve in process. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for over 250,000 cycles. 100% duty cycle Available in PV, PV, PP (sizes 3/8-4 ) and PVDF (sizes 3/8-2 ) Available in PP and PVDF, metric sizes 16 mm - 63 mm EPDM and FPM seals 115/230 VA 50/60 Hz or 24 VD (optional) PV/PV/ PP/PVDF (socket, threaded, flanged) Manual override standard Options include heater, fail safe unit, positioner PE 25, cycle counter, cycle time monitoring and extension Approvals include E, SA, UL, NSF (Type 133) +GF+ ELETRI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type 175 / 176 / 177 Electrically actuated vertical ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The EA21 actuators may be fitted onto existing Georg Fischer Type 343 ball valves in process. Additional accessories available from position feedback to control capabilities. Manual override standard. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for long service life. 100% duty cycle (1/2-3 ) Available in PV, PV, PP, and SYGEF -PVDF, sizes 1/2-2 (20 mm - 63 mm) EPDM and FPM seals L-port provides independent connection of inlets with outlets T-port provides straight through flow, independent connections of inlets with outlets or interconnections of all three ports 110 to 230 VA, 50/60 Hz, or 24 VD (optional) onnections are PV/PV (socket, thread), PP/PVDF (socket, thread, IR/butt fusion) 3-17

71 +GF+ ELETRI ATUATED BALL VALVE Type 178 Electrically actuated vertical 3-way ball valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The EA21 actuator may be fitted onto existing George Fischer Type 343 ball valves in process. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. Manual override is standard. This valve is lightweight, corrosion resistant, and maintenance free for long service life. 3 Available in PV, sizes 3/8-2 EPDM and FPM seals L-port provides independent connection of inlets with outlets Diverter ball provides interconnection of two inlets with outlet for mixing or interconnection of outlets for proportional diverter operation Available in socket or threaded connections +GF+ ELETRI ATUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE Type 140 Electrically actuated Type 140 butterfly valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The electric actuators may be fitted onto existing Georg Fischer Type 567 butterfly valves in process. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. Standard is manual override. This valve is corrosion resistant and maintenance free for long service life. 50% duty cycle 2-6 ; 35% duty cycle 8 Available in PV, PV, PP, PVDF in 2 to 8 sizes EPDM or FPM seals VA, 50/60 Hz, or 24 VD (optional) Short face-to-face dimensions, bi-directional flow Double eccentric operating principle for low torque and long life Specially engineered disc seal and pipeline installation seals +GF+ ELETRI ATUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE Type 142 Electrically actuated Type 142 butterfly valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The electric actuators may be fitted onto existing Georg Fischer Type 568 butterfly valves in process. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. Standard is manual override. This valve is corrosion resistant and maintenance free for long service life. 50% duty cycle 2-6 ; 35% duty cycle 8 Available in PV, PV, PP, PVDF in 2 to 8 sizes EPDM or FPM seals VA, 50/60 Hz, or 24 VD (optional) Short face-to-face dimensions, bi-directional flow Double eccentric operating principle for low torque and long life Specially engineered disc seal and pipeline installation seals 3-18

72 +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE Type 240 Pneumatically actuated Type 240 butterfly valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The pneumatic actuators may be fitted onto existing Georg Fischer Type 567 butterfly valves in process. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. This valve has short face-to-face dimensions and bi-directional flow. Wafer style orrosion resistant Available in PV, PV, PP, PVDF EPDM or FPM seals Hole patterns are class 150 to ANSI B16.5 Actuator with Namur/ISO connection standards Available fail close, fail open, or double acting Double eccentric operating principle for low torque and long life 3 +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE Type 242 Pneumatically actuated Type 242 butterfly valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The pneumatic actuators may be fitted onto existing Georg Fischer Type 568 butterfly valves in process. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. This valve has short face-to-face dimensions and bi-directional flow. Lug style Available in PV, PV, PP, PVDF EPDM or FPM seals Hole patterns are class 150 to ANSI B16.5 Actuator with Namur/ISO connection standards Available fail close, fail open, or double acting Double eccentric operating principle for low torque and long life 3-19

73 +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED DIAPHRAGM VALVE Type DIASTAR 025 Pneumatically actuated DIASTAR diaphragm valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The compact actuator is suited to modern, space-saving plant construction. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. This valve is lightweight, compact, and corrosion resistant. 3 All plastic actuator made of PP Easy replacement of diaphragm Available in PV, PV, PP, and SYGEF -PVDF Available in sizes 1/2-6 (20 mm mm) Wide variety of connections available It is available with EPDM and PTFE/EPDM seals Available fail close, fail open, or double acting 150 PSI rating (on both sides) +GF+ PNEUMATI ATUATED DIAPHRAGM VALVE Type DIASTAR 028 Pneumatically actuated DIASTAR diaphragm valve for aggressive fluids and industrial applications. The compact actuator is suited to modern, space-saving plant construction. Additional accessories are available, from position feedback to control capabilities. This valve is lightweight, compact, and corrosion resistant. All plastic actuator made of PP Easy replacement of diaphragm Available in PV, PV, PP, PP-N, and SYGEF -PVDF, Available in sizes 1/2-2 (20 mm mm) Wide variety of connections available It is available with EPDM and PTFE/EPDM seals Available fail close only 150 PSI rating (upstream) 3-20

74 +GF+ MANUAL DIAPHRAGM VALVE Type 314 True Union Diaphragm Valve Manual, weir type diaphragm valve, multi-turn, rising stem, with true union ends. Size range 1/2-2 Diaphragm valves especially suitable for flow control, slurries, and abrasive media EPDM or PTFE (EPDM backed) diaphragms; EPDM end connector O-rings with EPDM diaphragms; FPM with PTFE diaphragms Available in PV (solvent cement socket ends), PP (metric socket fusion or butt fusion ends), and SYGEF PVDF (metric socket fusion, butt fusion, or BF fusion ends) Position indicator and optional locking handwheel +GF+ MANUAL DIAPHRAGM VALVE 3 Type 317 Flanged Diaphragm Valve Manual, weir type diaphragm valve, multi-turn, rising stem, with flanged ends. Diaphragm valves are especially suitable for flow control, slurries, and abrasive media Available in PV, PV, Polypropylene, and PVDF with EPDM or PTFE diaphragms Size range 1/2-6 Loose ring flanges 1/2-2 1/2, integrally molded, fixed flanges 3-6 Flanges are class 150 to ANSI B16.5 Threaded mounting inserts in bottom of body 304 SS exposed bolts, nuts, and washers Position indicator and optional locking handwheel 1/2-2 1/2 +GF+ MANUAL DIAPHRAGM VALVE Type 315 / HTR True Union Spigot Diaphragm Valve Manual, weir type diaphragm valve, multi-turn, rising stem, with spigot ends. Diaphragm valves are especially suitable for flow control, slurries, and abrasive media EPDM or PTFE (EPDM backed) diaphragms (other materials upon - request) Available in PV (solvent cement spigot ends), Polypropylene (metric spigot or butt fusion ends) and SYGEF PVDF (metric spigot, butt fusion, or BF fusion ends) Size range 1/2-2 Threaded mounting inserts in bottom of body 304 SS exposed bolts, nuts, and washers Position indicator and optional locking handwheel +GF+ MANUAL DIAPHRAGM VALVE Type 319 / HTR True Union Branched Diaphragm Valve Zero Static PVDF HP Manual, SYGEF-PVDF HP weir type, Zero static valve, with multi-turn, rising stem. Shortest possible branch geometry for zero dead leg Especially suitable for flow control, an be post-actuated Molded PVDF body with outstanding internal surface characteristics for the ultimate in High purity design Ends for socket, BF or IR fusion Size range 20 x 20 mm to 110 x 63 mm Position indicator Optional locking handwheel 1/2-2 (outlet) 3-21

75 HAYWARD BUS ONTROL SYSTEM 3 Specially equipped Hayward actuated valves, as well as numerous other associated devices, can be linked via standardized communication networks within plants. While conventional communication architecture dictates as many as 8-12 wires run from PL controls to each automated valve, bus architecture allows all actuated valves in the network to be controlled via a pair of daisy-chained wires providing a level of enhanced flexibly and utility while dramatically reducing installation and maintenance costs. Since communication protocols are as varied as the 100 or so manufacturers of programmable logic controllers (PLs), Hayward actuated valves are equipped with AS-I modules that freely communicate with all PL brands regardless of protocol. For modulating applications that require communication modules compatible with the specific PL used, Hayward offers modules compatible with the most popular protocols including Device Net, Profibus, Modbus, Fieldbus, and several others. HAYWARD PMD/PMS PNEUMATI ATUATOR Low cost, heavy duty air-to-air (or air-to-spring) actuator for use with ball valves up to 2 in size. orrosion-resistant construction is designed to stand up to harsh conditions without the need for epoxy coatings. Features Two-Piston Rack & Pinion Design Manual Override Position Indicator Permanent Lubrication Light Weight orrosion resistant HAYWARD PAD/PAS PNEUMATI ATUATOR Air-to-spring (or air-to-air) actuator for use with all ball valves up to 2 in size. A modular mounting system allows addition of options to meet specific application requirements. Both PAD and PAS actuators can be operated manually in the event of air or electrical failure. Features Plastic Housing Proven Vane Design Manual Override Position Indicator High Torque Output Very Light Weight Permanent Lubrication 3-22

76 HAYWARD PKD/PKS PNEUMATI ATUATOR Air-to-air (or air-to-spring) quarter-turn actuator for use with all size ball valves and butterfly valves up to 8 in size. Only one moving part (a vane) provides highly reliable service with minimum maintenance. A modular mounting option makes it easy to add options in the field. Features Proven Vane Design Manual Override Position Indicator Epoxy-oated Housing High Torque Output Lightweight, ompact Permanent Lubrication Adjustable Travel Stops 3 HAYWARD PD/PS PNEUMATI ATUATORS Air-to-spring (or air-to-air) quarter-turn actuator is ideal for use with pneumatically-actuated true union ball valves, three-way ball valves, and butterfly valves. Lightweight and compact, the actuator provides high torque outputs suitable for valves from 1/4 24 in size. Features Four Piston Rack & Pinion Design Manual Override Position Indicator High Torque Output Permanent Lubrication Adjustable Travel Stops NAMUR Solenoid Mounting ISO 5211 Mounting Base HAYWARD EVS/EVT ELETRI ATUATOR Versatile, quarter-turn actuator is designed for on/off and modulating use with all ball and butterfly valves up to 12 in size. The actuator s specially designed circuit board accepts plug-in connectors, and a wide range of options allows configuration to meet virtually any application requirement. Features Extended Duty Motor Multi Option Availability Gold Plated onnectors Modular Internal onstruction Manual Override and position Indicator UL Listed Motor Nema 4/4X Enclosure Permanent Lubrication 115 VA Operation 3-23

77 HAYWARD EAU ELETRI ATUATOR The Hayward EAU Actuator is moderately-priced uni-directional quarter-turn actuator for Hayward ball valve applications only. In addition to providing ample torque for 1/2 2 valve operation, this all plastic actuator offers a molded-in mounting bracket as well as several basic features. 3 Features Plastic Weather Resistant Enclosure 90 (EAU29 True Union Ball Valve) or 180 (EAU28 Three Way ball Valve) Operation UL/SA Listed Motor Permanently Lubricated On/Off Applications Nema 4/4X Housing 115 VA Operation (other voltages available upon request) Auxiliary Limit Switch Standard HAYWARD EVR ELETRI ATUATOR The Hayward EVR Actuator is an economical, high performance actuator for use with all true union ball valves, three-way ball valves, and butterfly valves up to 4 in size. Ideal for on/off applications where there is a need to manually override actuator operation, and use in limited space areas. Features Low Profile Design Manual Override, Position Indicator, and Mechanical Brake UL Listed Motor and Nema 4/4X Enclosure Permanent Lubrication 115 VA Operation (other voltages available upon request. HAYWARD EJM REVERSING ATUATOR ost effective, rugged, quarter-turn actuator designed for use with all ball and butterfly valves up to 24 in size. Ideal for a wide range of applications without costly options. Positioners are available for special throttling or modulating requirements. Features Two Auxiliary Limit Switches Heater with Thermostat NEMA 4/4X Enclosure Position Indicator and Manual Override Self-Locking Gear Train and Permanently Lubricated Thermal Overload Protection E and SA Approved ISO 5211 Mounting Base 3-24

78 SIMONA PV TYPE I SHEET SIMONA VERSADUR and AW PV Type I sheet is extruded to exacting specification for normal impact applications. This type of sheet has excellent corrosion resistance, very good dielectric properties, low moisture absorption, high rigidity, good abrasion resistance and excellent weathering properties. The material is also self-extinguishing. It is available in dark gray, white and blue. It is available in 4 x 8 sheets and two metric sizes in thickness up to 2. Applications hemical processing Semiconductor processing equipment Pollution control equipment Machined and fabricated parts Etching and plating tanks Scrubbers, hoods, ducts and other protective equipment Features Normal Impact Excellent chemical and corrosion resistance Easily to fabricate, weld or machine Showcase quality surface Single- or double-side protective foil Stress relieved, square, flat sheets Accurate to dimensional tolerances olor consistent 4 Grey Wt per Sheet (lbs.) Part # White Wt per Sheet (lbs.) Part # Thickness (inches) Thickness (inches) S110011* 1/ * 1/ S110111* 3/ * 3/ S / * 1/ S / * 3/ S / * 1/ S / * 3/ S / * 1/ S / * 3/ S * Notes: Meets ASTM D Type I Grade I lass Meets Federal Specification L-P 535e. Meets UL 94V-0,94-5V Flammability rating. Meets ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rate 15, Fuel ontribution 0. Maximum application temperature +140 F. ustom lengths, sizes, colors and special requirements available upon request. Gray PV Sheet has no protective foil. White PV Sheet has one side protective foil. Blue PV Sheet is available as a special order with one side embossed or with two sides smooth. The * refers to items that are non-stock. Minimum orders and long leadtimes may be encountered.. AW mm x 1000mm Wt per Part # Thickness (mm) Sheet (lbs.) Part # S * S * AW mm x 1500mm Thickness (mm) Wt per Sheet (lbs.) S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * 9 - S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S * S Notes: ustom lengths, sizes, colors and special requirements available upon request. Also Available in White, Light Grey, and black without protective foil. 4-1

79 SIMONA PV TYPE I SHEET TEHNIAL DATA 4 SIMONA VERSADUR PV Type I Physical ASTM Test Method Unit Typical Value Density D-792 g/cc 1.45 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % 0.04 Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 7,820 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 496,000 Elongation D-638 % 150 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 0.8 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 113 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 66 psi D-648 F 172 at 264 psi D-648 F 162 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 169 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 80 x 10-6 Temperature Range F Electrical +32 to +140 Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm >10 x Flammability ASTM SIMONA AW PV Type I Test Method Unit Typical Value Physical Density D-792 g/cc 1.44 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % NA Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 8,400 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 479,000 Elongation D-638 % 150 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 0.8 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 108 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 66 psi D-648 F 168 at 264 psi D-648 F 154 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 172 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 80 x 10-6 Temperature Range F Electrical +32 to +140 Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm >10 x Flammability Flammability D-635 self-extinguishing UL 94V-0, 94-5V Flammability self-extinguishing 94V-0 low flammability DIN 4102 B1 low flammability 4-2

80 SIMONA VERSADUR PV TYPE II SHEET SIMONA VERSADUR and MZ PV Type II sheet is extruded to exacting specification for high impact applications. This type of sheet has excellent corrosion resistance, very good dielectric properties, low moisture absorption, high rigidity, good abrasion resistance and excellent weathering properties. The material is also self-extinguishing. It is also available in 4 x 8 sheets in light grey and white. Applications Pollution control equipment Machined and fabricated parts Etching and plating tanks Scrubbers, hoods, ducts and other protective equipment Features High Impact (PV-MZ: Increased Impact Resistance) Minimal shrinkage Good corrosion and chemical resistance Easy to fabricate, weld or machine, hot and cold formable Showcase quality surface Stress relieved, square, flat sheets Accurate to dimensional tolerances olor consistent 4 Notes: Meets ASTM D Type II Grade I lass D. Meets ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rate 15, Fuel ontribution 0. Meets UL 94V Standards. Meets Federal Specification L-P 535e. Maximum application temperature 140 F. ustom lengths, sizes, colors and special requirements available upon request. Light Grey and white PV Sheet have no protective foil. Versadur x 8 Thickness (mm) Wt per Sheet (lbs.) 1/ /8 30 3/ /4 60 3/8 90 1/2 120 Notes: ustom lengths, sizes, colors and special requirements available upon request Light Grey MZ sheet is offered without protective foil. 4-3

81 SIMONA PV TYPE II SHEET TEHNIAL DATA 4 SIMONA VERSADUR PV Type II Physical ASTM Test Method Unit Typical Value Density D-792 g/cc 1.33 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % 0.05 Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 6,070 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 345,000 Elongation D-638 % 145 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 14 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 107 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 66 psi D-648 F 165 at 264 psi D-648 F 158 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 162 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 80 x 10-6 Temperature Range F Electrical +32 to +140 Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm >1015 Flammability Flammability self-extinguishing 94V-0 low flammability ASTM SIMONA MZ PV Type II Test Method Unit Typical Value Physical Density D-792 g/cc 1.42 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % NA Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 7,500 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 435,000 Elongation D-638 % 20 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 1.2 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 107 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 N/A at 66 psi D-648 F 162 at 264 psi D-648 F 160 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 167 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 80 x 10-6 Temperature Range F Electrical +32 to +140 Volume Resistivity D-257 Ohm-cm >1015 Flammability Flammability self-extinguishing DIN 4102 low flammability 4-4

82 SIMONA VERSADUR LEAR PV SHEET SIMONA VERSADUR and PV/GLAS Type I sheet are extruded to exacting specification for normal impact applications requiring transparency. This type of sheet has excellent corrosion resistance, very good dielectric properties, low moisture absorption, high rigidity, good abrasion resistance and excellent weathering properties. The material is also self-extinguishing. It is available in 4 x 8 sheets and two metric sizes in thickness up to 3/4. Applications hemical processing Semiconductor processing equipment Machined and fabricated parts Work Stations Features Normal Impact Excellent chemical and corrosion resistance Easy to fabricate, welded and machined Showcase quality surface Single- or double-side protective masking Stress relieved, square, flat sheet Accurate to dimensional tolerances olor consistent 4 Versadur - 4' x 8' sheet Part No. Thickness (inches) Wt. per Sheet (lbs) S / S / S / S / S / Notes: Meets ASTM D Type I Grade I lass Meets ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rate 15, Fuel ontribution 0. Meets UL 94V-0 Standards. Meets Federal Specification L-P 535e. Maximum application temperature +140 F. ustom lengths, sizes, and special requirements available upon request. Versadur is offered complete with 2 sided protective foil. GLAS x 1000 mm Wt. per Sheet (lbs) GLAS x 1500 mm Wt. per Sheet (lbs) Part No. Thickness (mm) Part No. Thickness (mm) S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Notes: ustom lengths, sizes, colors and special requirements available upon request. GLAS sheet is offered with two side protective foil. 4-5

83 SIMONA LEAR PV SHEET TEHNIAL DATA 4 ASTM SIMONA lear PV Sheet Test Method Unit Typical Value Physical Density D-792 g/cc 1.42 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % NA Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 7,500 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 435,000 Elongation D-638 % 20 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 1.2 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 107 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D at 66 psi D-648 F 162 at 264 psi D-648 F 160 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 167 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 80 x 10-6 Temperature Range F Electrical +32 to +140 Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm >1015 Flammability SIMONA PVGLAS Sheet ASTM Test Method Unit Typical Value Physical Density D-792 g/cc 1.38 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % 0.04 Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 10,200 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 426,000 Elongation D-638 % 36 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 115 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 66 psi D-648 F 144 at 264 psi D-648 F 138 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 152 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 80 x 10-6 Temperature Range F +32 to +140 Electrical Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm >1015 Flammability Flammability self-extinguishing Flammability self-extinguishing DIN 4102 low flammability 94V-0 low flammability DIN 4102 B1 up to 4 mm 4-6

84 PV ORZAN SHEET PV- ORZAN Industrial Grade sheet is a high heat, corrosion resistant chlorinated polyvinyl chloride sheet (PV). Because of its excellent corrosion resistance at elevated temperatures, it is ideally suited for self-supporting constructions where high temperatures are a concern. It can be used (depending on chemistry) up to 210 F. It is available in 4 x 8 sheets in thickness up to 3. Applications hemical processing where temperatures are up to 200 F Machine flanges Valves Acid tanks Linings PV - 4' x 8' Wt per Part No. Thickness (inches) Sheet (lbs.) S / S / S / S / S / S / S S / S / S S Notes: Meets ASTM D Type IV Grade II lass B. Meets ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rate 20. Maximum application temperature 200 F. ustom lengths, sizes, and special requirements available upon request. Features Easily to fabricate, weld or machine olor consistent Excellent impact strength, high temperature Excellent chemical and corrosion resistance PV Sheet Technical Data ASTM Test Method Unit Typical Value Physical Density D-792 g/cm³ 1.47 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % 0.03 Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 7,300 Flexural Modulus D-638 PSI 361,000 Flexural Strength D-790 psi 14,300 ompressive Strength D-695 psi 10,100 ompressive Modulus D-695 psi 196,000 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 9 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 116 Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 264 psi D-648 F 198 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. F 3.86 x Electrical Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm 3.4 X Flammability Flammability UL94 V-O, 5VB, 5VA

85 SIMONA HOMOPOLYMER PP SHEET Polypropylene is a member of the polyolefin family of the thermoplastics, polypropylene exhibits properties that make it an excellent choice for corrosion resistant applications. Homopolymer Polypropylene is the most widely utilized. Homopolymer Polypropylene is a crystalline material offering a broad range of good physical, mechanical, thermal, chemical, and electrical properties. The high degree of crystallinity and low density of Hompolymer Polypropylene offers a high strength to weight ratio. ombining the high strength to weight ratio with good chemical resistance and weldability of Homopolymer, Polypropylene allows the material to be used in many corrosion resistant structures. 4 Application Semiconductor processing equipment Machined and fabricated parts Laboratory equipment Wet benches Food grade applications Prosthetics Etching and plating tanks Acid tanks Ducts, fume hoods and other protective equipment Features Excellent chemical and corrosion resistance Easily to fabricate, weld or machine Accurate to dimensional tolerances Stress relieved, square, flat sheets olor consistent Showcase quality surface Meets established ASTM specifications Description Size Feature Protection Size range 500 Natural 48" x 96" Stress Relieved without protective foil 3/4" and 1" 500 Natural 48" x 96" Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 1/16-2" 515 Euro grey 48" x 96" High Gloss/Stress Relieved 1 side protective foil 1/8" to 1" 520 White 48" x 96" High Gloss/Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 1/8" to 1" 520 White 48" x 96" High Gloss/Stress Relieved without protective foil 1/16' 530 Black 48" x 96" High Gloss/Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 1/8" to 1/2" 500 Natural 48" x 120" Stress Relieved without protective foil 1/4" to 1/2" 500 Natural 48" x 120" Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 3/4" to 1" 520 White 48" x 120" High Gloss/Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 1/4" to 1' 500 Natural 48" x 144" Stress Relieved without protective foil 1/4" to 1/2" 500 Natural 48" x 144" Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 3/4" to 1" 520 White 48" x 144" High Gloss/Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 1/4" to 1' 500 Natural 60" x 120" Stress Relieved without protective foil 1/4" to 1/2" 500 Natural 60" x 120" Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 3/4" to 1" 520 White 60" x 120" High Gloss/Stress Relieved 2 side protective foil 1/4" to 1' Notes: ASTM D-4101 Group I lass I Grade I. FDA Regulation Title 21 FR (1.1). Federal Specification LP-394B Type I (GP) Type III Grade IIIA lass III. USDA Approval for direct contact with meat and poultry products (500 Natural and 520 White) Military Standard D/N/A. alifornia Proposition 65 Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act Passes. UV Radiation Exposure 500 hours no visible change (515 European grey). Standards and specifications not valid for 581 Grey Polyester backed. For technical data, please contact customer service. 4-8

86 SIMONA OPOLYMER PP SHEET Polypropylene is a member of the polyolefin family of the thermoplastics, polypropylene exhibits properties that make it an excellent choice for corrosion resistant applications. Homopolymer Polypropylene is the most widely utilized. opolymer Polypropylene involves the introduction of a second monomer to the propylene monomer during the polymerization process. The resin manufacture will introduce a small percentage of ethylene monomer to the propylene monomer resulting in a product that exhibits better impact strength than Homopolymer Polypropylene. When compared to Homopolymer Polypropylene rigidity, chemical resistance and temperature resistance properties of opolymer Polypropylene are slightly lower. Applications Tanks and linings Lab equipment Etching equipment Fume hoods, duct work Battery cases Machined parts Industrial doors Features High impact resistance Excellent chemical and corrosion resistance Excellent impact strength at low temperatures Lightweight Excellent formability Good abrasion resistance Good electrical properties 4 Description Size Protection Size range 570 Natural 48" x 96" without protective foil 1/8" to 1 1/2" 590 Black 48" x 96" 2 side protective foil 1/4" to 1 1/2" 570 Natural 48" x 120" without protective foil 1/4" to 1" 590 Black 48" x 120" 2 side protective foil 1/4" to 1" 570 Natural 60" x 120" without protective foil 1/4" to 1 1/2" 590 Black 60" x 120" 2 side protective foil 1/2" to 1 1/2" Notes: all for custom lengths, other sizes, colors or special requirements. Also available in metric sizes in white grey, euro grey, and black. Technical Data ASTM Test Method Unit Typical Value Physical Density D-792 g/cc 0.91 Water Absorption D-570 % 0.04 (24 73 F) Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 3,800 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 203,000 Elongation D-638 % 70 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. 1.4 Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale 74 Thermal Heat Distortion D-648 Temperature at 66 psi D-648 F 225 at 264 psi D-648 F NA Vicat Softening D-1525 F 190 Temperature oefficient of D-696 in./in. 160 x 10-6 Thermal Expansion Temperature Range F -4 to +176 Electrical Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm >1015 Flammability Flammability normal flammability 4-9

87 HIGH DENSITY PE SHEET Simona Versadur 600 series high density polyethylene has excellent chemical corrosion resistance and is abrasion resistance, impact resistance, and easy for fabrication. It can be used (depending on chemistry) up to 180 F and is available in 4 x 8 sheets in thickness up to 4. This sheet is also available in black upon request. 4 Applications Food processing Tanks and vessels Machined and fabricated parts Laboratory equipment hemical processing orrosion-resistant wall coverings Wear, skid and deflector plates Ducts, hoods, chute liners and other protective equipment Features Excellent chemical and corrosion resistance Excellent impact and abrasion resistance Easily to fabricate, weld, machine or thermoforming High-density, slippery surface, UV-resistant (Black only) Stress relieved Accurate to dimensional tolerances olor consistent HDPE Natural - 4' x 8' Part No. Thickness (inches) Wt. (lbs/ sheet) S / S / S / S / S / S / S S /4 202 S / S / S S / S / S / S S / S / S Notes: Meets ASTM D Type III, lass A (Natural), lass (Black). Meets L-P 512-LP-390, lass H, Type I, Grades 1 and 3. Meets FDA Regulation Title 21 FR (Natural only). Meets Federal Specification LP-390B Type III, lass H, Grade I. Maximum application temperature +180 F. Also available in 48 x 120 and 60 x 120. NSF ertified utting Board material also available in Size 48 x 96, 48 x 120, and 60 x 120. ustom lengths, sizes, and special requirements available upon request. Also Available in metric sizes. ASTM* test Method Physical Unit Typical Value Density D-792 g/cc Water Absorption D-570 % 0.01 (24 73 F) Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 4,500 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 233,000 Elongation D-638 % 450 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./ 3.2 in. Rockwell Hardness D-785 R 65 scale Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 66 psi D-648 F 175 at 264 psi D-648 F 118 Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 260 oefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 in./in. 7 x 10-5 Temperature Range F -58 to +176 Electrical Volume Resistivity D-257 ohm cm > 6 x1016 Flammability Flammability normal flammability 4-10

88 LOW DENSITY PE SHEET Low density polyethylene (LDPE) is more flexible than HDPE, which makes it a good choice for prosthetic devices, most of which are either drape formed or vacuum formed. Its impact resistance makes it a natural for impact pads, while its easy machinability makes it a good choice for fabricated parts where chemical and corrosion resistance is demanded. LDPE is stress relieved and a natural color. It is available in 4 x 8 sheets in thicknesses up to 1. Applications Industrial Medical Thermoforming Die Pads Hinges Impact pads Orthotic and Prosthetic devices Thermoformed parts Features Light-weight Good impact resistance Extremely flexible Easily cleaned Thermoforming performance Meets food handling guidelines No moisture absorption hemical- and corrosion-resistant LDPE Natural - 4' x 8' Part No. Thickness (inches) Wt. (lbs/ sheet) S / S / S / S / S / S / S Notes: Meets ASTM D Type III, lass A (Natu ral), lass (Black). Meets L-P 512-LP-390, lass H, Type I, Grades 1 and 3. Meets FDA Regulation Title 21 FR (Natural only). Meets Federal Specification LP-390B Type III, lass H, Grade I. Maximum application temperature +180 F. ustom lengths, sizes, and special requirements available upon request. LDPE sheet is offered complete with no protective foil. Physical Properties Metric English omments Specific Gravity 0.92 g/cc lb/in³ ASTM D792 Water Absorption Max 0.01 % Max 0.01 % Immersion, 24hr; ASTM D570(2) Water Absorption at Saturation Max 0.01 % Max 0.01 % Immersion; ASTM D570(2) Mechanical Properties Hardness, Shore D ASTM D2240 Tensile Strength, Ultimate 9.65 MPa 1400 psi ASTM D638 Elongation at Break 100 % 100 % ASTM D638 Tensile Modulus GPa 57 ksi ASTM D638 Flexural Modulus 0.2 GPa 29 ksi ASTM D790 Flexural Yield Strength 10.3 MPa 1500 psi ASTM D790 ompressive Strength 9.65 MPa 1400 psi 10% Def., 73 F; ASTM D695 ompressive Modulus GPa 54 ksi ASTM D695 Izod Impact, Notched NB NB ASTM D256 Type A Electrical Properties Surface Resistivity per Square Min Min ASTM D257 1e+015 ohm 1e+015 ohm Thermal Properties Melting Point F rystalline, Peak; ASTM D3418 Maximum Service Temperature, Air F Long Term Flammability, UL94 (Estimated Rating) HB HB 1/8 inch Qualitative Processing Properties ompliance - FDA ompliant Machinability , 1=Easier to Machine Service in Alcohols Unacceptable Service in Aliphatic Hydrocarbons Unacceptable Service in Aromatic Hydrocarbons Unacceptable Service in hlorinated Solvents Unacceptable Service in Ethers Unacceptable Service in Ketones Unacceptable Service in Strong Acids Unacceptable Service in Strong Alkalies Unacceptable Service in Sunlight Unacceptable Service in Weak Acids Unacceptable Service in Weak Alkalies Unacceptable

89 ULTRA HIGH MOLEULAR WEIGHT (UHMW) SHEET UHMW Sheet is resistant to chemical attack and moisture absorption, and retains key physical properties to -30. UHMW is an excellent general-purpose material and is a cost-effective solution for food handling problems, and meets FDA, USDA and 3-A Dairy guidelines for food processing and handling. It is also available in custom colours which also meet FDA and USDA guidelines for food processing and handling. It is available in 4 x 8, 4 x 10 and 5 x 12 sheets in thicknesses up to 6. 4 Applications Agriculture Bottling anning onveyor manufacturers Food processing Packaging Material handling Waste water treatment Features Meets FDA/USDA guidelines; 3-A Dairy-approved (natural) Reduces noise Self-lubricating hemical-, corrosion- and wear-resistant No moisture absorption Non-toxic, low-friction surface UHMW Natural - 4' x 8' Part No. Thickness (inches) Wt. (lbs/ sheet) S /8 20 S /16 30 S /4 40 S /8 60 S /2 80 S /4 120 S S /4 200 S /2 240 S /4 280 S S /4 360 S /2 400 S /4 440 S S /4 520 S /2 560 S Notes: Meets ASTM-D of 4.0 to 5.4-million molecular weight. Maximum application temperature +180 F. ustom lengths, sizes, and special requirements available upon request. UHMW sheet is offered with no protective foil. Also available in 4 x 10 and 5 x

90 FABO ROUND WELDING ROD Rod is available in the configurations shown below. Minimum quantities may be required Welding rod may be available in coils. Add to end of part number. ontact Fabco to check for availability. Part No. Material Designation Dia. mm Dia. IN olour Part No. Material Designation W01203 PV-AW 3 1/8 Gray W06203 PV 3 1/8 Lt. Gray W01204 PV-AW 4 5/32 Gray W06204 PV 4 5/32 Lt. Gray W01205 PV-AW 5 3/16 Gray W06205 PV 5 3/16 Lt. Gray Dia. mm Dia. IN olour 4 W03206 PV-AW 5 Triangular TA90 Gray W18603 HDPE - HWST Natural W03206T PV-AW 5 3-ore Gray W18604 HDPE - HWST Natural W25403 PV - MZ Lt. Gray W18605 HDPE - HWST Natural W25404 PV - MZ Lt. Gray W21603 HDPE - SR-IND /8 Natural W25405 PV - MZ Lt. Gray W21604 HDPE - SR-IND /32 Natural W07303 PV - KD Green W21605 HDPE - SR-IND /16 Natural W07604 PV - KD lear W18903 HDPE - HWU Black W01603 PV - GLAS lear W18904 HDPE - HWU Black W01604 PV - GLAS lear W18905 HDPE - HWU Black W04603 PV - FLEXIBLE 3 1/8 Natural W22603 HDPE - HML Natural W08603 PP -DWST 3 1/8 Natural W22604 HDPE - HML Natural W08604 PP - DWST 4 5/32 Natural W14603 LDPE /8 Natural W08605 PP - DWST 5 3/16 Natural W14604 LDPE /32 Natural W11603 PP - SR-IND 3 1/8 Natural W14605 LDPE /16 Natural W11604 PP - SR-IND 4 5/32 Natural W50602 ETFE Natural W11605 PP - SR-IND 5 3/16 Natural W50603 ETFE Natural W08203 PP - DWU 3 1/8 Tan/Gray W50604 ETFE Natural W08204 PP - DWU 4 5/32 Tan/Gray W50605 ETFE Natural W05205 PP - DWU 5 3/16 Tan/Gray W30603 PVDF Natural W12603 PP - PPS 3 1/8 Gray W30604 PVDF Natural W12604 PP - PPS 4 5/32 Gray W40603 FEP Natural W42603 PFA Natural 4-13

91 ARYLI SHEET Acrylic sheet has been considered the standard of the industry since it was first introduced more than 50 years ago because of its unsurpassed quality, ease of use and wide range of colors, patterns, thickness and sizes. It is paper masked on both sides. 4 Applications Sanitary wear Machine guards Prototypes Furniture Office machines Decorative lighting Displays Glazing Part # Thickness (in.) Thickness (mm) Size S " 3.0 mm 49" x 97" S " 4.5 mm 49" x 97" S " 6.0 mm 49" x 97" S " 9.5 mm 49" x 97" S " 12.0 mm 49" x 97" LEXAN/POLYARBONATE SHEET The major advantages of polycarbonate plastic are breakage resistance, clarity, class I approval (under all three major model building codes), light weight, high temperature, weather resistance and ease of fabrication. It is the only glazing material that is guaranteed unbreakable and is listed by U.L. as burglar resistant. In addition to clear, Lexan is also available in film and sheet form as transparent, opaque and translucent colours, pattern surface textures, mar-resistant surface coated, glass reinforced and U.L. listed bullet resistant. Lexan also has good electrical insulation properties and low moisture absorption. Resistant to both heat and flame, polycarbonates are dimensionally stable and are generally unaffected by greases, oils and acids. Weatherability is good, but not as good as acrylics. Ultraviolet rays cause slight discolouring and embrittlement. Polyfilm masked on both sides. Applications Machine guards Medical equipment Electrical components Light fittings Aircraft parts Safety devices Food equipment Part # Thickness (in.) Thickness (mm) Size S " 3.00 mm 48" x 96" S " 4.50 mm 48" x 96" S " 6.00 mm 48" x 96" S " 9.50 mm 48" x 96" S " mm 48" x 96" 4-14

92 GLASS BAKED SHEET Glass backed polypropylene is a unique material, produced by a unique process, which enables polypropylene sheet to be strengthened with glass-reinforced polyester resins. This material combines interior surfaces having the outstanding anti-corrosion, non-stick and hygenic properties of polypropylene with the external rigidity and lightweight strength of resin/glass mixtures. Polypropylene is well known for its chemical inertness and low coefficient of friction which are so useful in the fabrication of storage and process equipment for critical environments. These properties, however, also make it virtually impossible to bond polypropylene sheet to any of the standard resin/glass mixtures that are used for structural reinforcements. On the other hand there is a limit to the size of fabrication economically and physically practicable with polypropylene, alone. The key for bonding between polypropylene and FRP is provided by a special fabric backing from polyester fibers / polypropylene fibers. This backing is calendered into the sheet at the extrusion stage and the backing is therefore locked into the extruded sheet, giving a mechanical bond between the sheet and the fabric. The backing of the fabric stands out and becomes in effect the first layer of the resin/glass reinforcement. Fabco PVDF Glass Backed Sheeting has a unique stretchable fabric backing calendered into the sheet at the extrusion stage. This stretchable backing allows the most difficult thermoforming operations to be performed with great ease even compound curves such as vacuum formed dished heads. 4 Thickness Part # mm IN Size Wt PP-DWU-SK with stretch backing, grey RAL 7032 S M x 2M 7.94 S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M PP--PK (copolymer) with PP backing, grey S M x 2M 7.94 S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M PVDF SK with Stretch Fabric backing, natural colour S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 3M S M x 2M S M x 2M Thickness Part # mm IN Size Wt E-TFE-GK (HALAR), Glass and Fabric backing, natural colour S M x 2M S ' x 8' S M x 2M S ' x 8' S M x 2M S ' x 8' S /16 4' x 8' Thickness Part # mm IN Width Max Length FEP (TEFLON ) with Fabric Backing S ft. S in. 50 ft. Thickness Part # mm IN Size Wt PFA (TEFLON ) Lining Laminate, with Glass Fabric Backing S m x 15m lengths (49.21" x 49.2 ft.) S m x 10m lengths (49.21" x 32.8 ft.) Mechanical Applications Knitted glass fabric is easily wettable with FRP resins (polyester, vinylester and epoxy resin systems), and is also suitable for lining of concrete, steel and other metal structures, etc. with commercially available adhesives such as epoxies. Backing Material Thermoformable, knitted glassfabric, hot-pressed into surface of FEP/PFA Teflon sheets. 4-15

93 PERFORATED SHEET Perforated sheet is available in Natural Homopolymer Polypropylene and PV. It is ideal for tumbling barrels, distributor plates, plating baskets, overflow weirs, odd size filters, scrubber packing, mesh screens, and support plates. The standard sheet size is 1/8 x 4 x 8 with 1/8 diameter holes on 3/16 staggered centers. These sheets have 40% open area. Perforated Sheet - 4' x 8' Part No. Material Thickness (in) S PV Gray 1/8 S Polypro Nat. 1/8 PVDF NATURAL SHEET 4 Simona PVDF Sheet exhibits excellent chemical and corrosion resistance to virtually all organic and inorganic media at high temperatures. The service temperature ranges from -22 F(-30 ) to +284 F(+140 ). They are flame retardant and self-extinguishing. This sheet is easy to fabricate, weld, machine or thermoform. PVDF is ideal for applications including tanks, vessels, chemical industry, machined and fabricated parts, laboratory equipment, chemical processing, semiconductor and electroplating industry. PVDF Natural Extruded Sheet 2000 mm x 1000 mm Part # Thickness (mm) Wt kg/ sheet S S S S S Red Kynar PVDF Sheet - 4' x 8' Part # Thickness (inches) Wt kg/ sheet S /4" S /8" S /2" S /4" S " S /4" S /2" S " PVDF Natural Pressed Sheet 2000 mm x 1000 mm Part # Thickness (mm) Wt kg/ sheet S S S S S S S S S S S Technical Data Physical Properties Metric English Typical Values Physical Density D-792 g/cm³ 1.78 Water Absorption (24 73 F) D-570 % 0.02 Mechanical Tensile Strength D-638 PSI 8,000 Tensile Modulus D-638 PSI 283,000 Elongation at break D-638 % 30 Izod Impact D-256 ft. lbs./in. NA Rockwell Hardness D-785 R scale NA Thermal Heat Distortion Temperature D-648 at 66 psi D-648 F NA at 264 psi D-648 F NA Vicat Softening Temperature D-1525 F 295 oefficient of Thermal D-696 in./in. 130 x 10-6 Expansion Temperature Range F -22 to +284 Flammability Ratings Flammability FM FM-4910 listed 4-16

94 FLEXIBLE PV DOOR STRIPS AND SHEET Flexible PV door strips protect your employees and goods from adverse environmental conditions such as noise, heat, cold, humidity, dust and drafts. This versatile and economical solution to managing adverse environmental conditions is available in a number of grades. The standard grade is typically used in the manufacture of strip doors, dust and spray screens, factory partitions, heat barriers and acoustic enclosures. It is available with a unique double ribbed design to protect from scratches and abrasions and to reduce static build up. The anti-static grade should be considered in applications where dust, smoke or spray contaminants might be of concern. The low temp (USDA) grade is specifically formulated to retain flexibility in low temperatures. This product is ideal for use in refrigeration plants and cold storage facilities. It is also offered with the unique double ribbed design for longer life or reinforced with high strength nylon cords embedded longitudinally into the strip. The gold/amber weld grade is a transparent gold/amber coloured PV used extensively in the manufacture of welding booths. It is designed to protect against the effects of ultraviolet light created during the arc welding process. Also available in transparent red. Part # TYPE WIDTH THIKNESS ROLL LENGTH LBS./ROLL R&E Standard Smooth 4".060" 300' R&E Standard Smooth 6".060" 300' R&E Standard Smooth 8".080" 300' R&E Standard Smooth 12".120" 200' R&E Standard Smooth 16".160" 100' R&E Standard Smooth 48".080" 60' R&E Standard Smooth 48".120" 60' R&E Standard Smooth 48".160" 60' WIN Standard Smooth 48".240" 60' R&E Low Temp Smooth 4".060" 300' R&E Low Temp Smooth 6".060" 300' R&E Low Temp Smooth 8".080" 300' R&E Low Temp Smooth 12".120" 200' R&E Low Temp Smooth 16".160" 100' R&E Low Temp Smooth 48".080" 60' R&E Low Temp Smooth - Reinforced 8".080" 300' R&E Low Temp Smooth - Reinforced 12".120" 200' R&E Standard Ribbed 8".072" 150' R&E Standard Ribbed 12".110" 150' R&E Low Temp Ribbed 8".072" 150' R&E Low Temp Ribbed 12".110" 150' R&E Black Opaque Smooth 8".080" 300' R&E Orange Opaque Smooth 8".080" 300' R&E Orange Opaque Smooth 12".120" 150' R&E Amber Weld Screen 8".080" 300' WIN Red Weld Screen 8".080" 300' R&E Amber Weld Screen 12".120" 200' R&E Amber Weld Screen 16".160" 100' R&E Amber Weld Screen 48".080" 60'

95 SIMONA PLASTI ROD Diameter (Inches) PV-AW 150 Series (Dark Gray) Type I Length SIMONA plastic rod is available in a variety of sizes and material. Sizes range from 1/4 diameter to 14. This rod is available in PV, PV, Homopolymer Polypropylene and High Density Polyethylene. Technical data is available upon request. Other materials and sizes may be available upon request. Please contact customer Service for more information. PV ORZAN 450 series Industrial Grade Gray Length PP-DWST 500 series Natural Homopolymer Length 600 Series Natural HDPE-HWST Length 1/4 10' 10' 8' 3/8 10' 10' 8' 8' 1/2 10' 10' 8' 8' 5/8 10' 10' 8' 8' 3/4 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 1/8 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 1/4 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 3/8 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 1/2 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 5/8 10' 10' N/A N/A 1 3/4 10' 10' 8' 8' 1 7/8 10' 10' N/A N/A 2 10' 10' 8' 8' 2 1/4 5' 5' 6' 6' 2 3/8 5' 5' N/A N/A 2 1/2 5' 5' 6' 6' 2 3/4 N/A 5' 6' 6' 3 5' 5' 6' 6' 3 1/4 N/A 5' 6' 6' 3 1/2 5' 5' 6' 6' 4 5' 5' 6' 6' 4 1/2 5' N/A 6' 6' 5 5' N/A 6' 6' 5 1/2 5' N/A 6' 6' 6 5' N/A 4' 4' 6 1/2 N/A N/A 4' 4' 7 5' N/A 4' 4' 8 5' N/A 4' 4' 9 N/A N/A 4' 4' 10 N/A N/A 4' 4' 12 N/A N/A 4' 4' 13 N/A N/A 4' 4' 14 N/A N/A 4' 4' Diameter (mm) Natural Homopolymer Polypropylene PP-DWU Length PVDF Length 8 2M 10 2M 2M 12 2M 15 2M 2M 18 2M 20 2M 2M 25 2M 2M 30 2M 2M 35 2M 2M 40 2M 2M 45 2M 50 2M 2M 55 2M 60 2M 2M 65 2M 70 2M 2M 75 2M 80 2M 2M 90 2M 2M 100 2M 2M 110 1M 2M 120 1M 125 1M 2M 130 1M 140 1M 150 1M 2M 160 1M 2M 165 1M 170 1M 180 1M 2M 200 1M 2M 225 1M 250 1M 2M 300 1M 2M 350 1M 2M 400 1M 2M 500 1M 2M 600 1M 700 1M 800 1M

96 UHMW-PE ROD UHMW-PE is a tough, wear resistant plastic that combines an incredibly low coefficient of friction with outstanding impact strength. This self-lubricating polymer has excellent chemical resistance and a broad temperature range making it the perfect choice for engineers in a variety of industries such as conveyor and bulk material handling. APPLIATIONS hute, hopper and truck bed liners Wear strips and guide rails Star wheels, sprockets and conveyor tracks Bumpers and dock fenders Bushings, bearings and rollers Diameter UHMW Rod 1/2 10' 3/4 10' 1 10' 1 1/4 10' 1 1/2 10' 2 10' 2 1/4 10' 2 1/2 10' 2 3/4 10' 3 10' 3 1/2 10' 4 10' 4 1/2 10' 5 10' 6 10' OTHER PLASTI ROD Plastic rod is available in a variety of specialty plastics including: Halar (E-TFE) Moulded and Extruded Teflon Glass filled Moulded and Extruded Teflon Nylon 6/6 Delrin (Acetal) ABS Polycarbonate ULTEM ROD (polyetherimide) NORYL ROD (polyphenylene oxide, modified) PSU ROD (polysulfone) PEEK ROD (polyetheretherketone) 6PAL AST NYLON ROD (Oil-impregnated cast nylon) PET ROD (polyethylene terephthalate) Please contact customer service for further information on these specialty plastic rod products

97 PV AND PV SHAPES This product is provided porosity-free, stress-reduced with optimum physical properties and exacting tolerances, products that consistently machine with ease, part after part. Available products include angle, solid bar, hollow bar, square and hexagonal bar in lear PV, PV, and PV. These materials offer excellent chemical and corrosion resistance, mechanical strength, and good thermal and electrical properties. They are noncontaminating for purity applications, and have excellent flammability characteristics. Other specialty materials such as static dissipative PV, custom colors, additional sizes and special lengths are available upon request. Please contact customer service for more details. 4 Hollow PV and PV O.D. (in.) I.D. (in.) Material (Weight Lbs./ft.) PV PV N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Hexagonal Rod Size Tol. Across Material (Weight Lbs./ft.) (in.) Flats (in.) Gray PV PV 7/16 ± /2 ± /16 ± /8 ± /4 ± /16 ± /8 ± ± /8 ± /4 ± /8 ± /2 ± /4 ± N/A 2 ± Square Rod Size Tol. Across Material (Weight Lbs./ft.) (in.) Flats (in.) Gray PV PV 1/2 ± N/A 5/8 ± N/A 3/4 ± N/A 1 ± N/A 1 1/4 ± N/A 1 1/2 ± N/A N/A PV and PV Angle Size (in.) Material (Weight Lbs./ft.) Gray PV White PV PV lear 1" x 1" x 1/8" /4" x 1-1/4" x 3/16" /2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" /2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4" N/A N/A " x 2" x 1/4"

98 FABOGRATE FRP GRATING Features Will not rust. orrosion resistant. Non-sparking. Fire retardant. Non-conductive. Maintenance free. Molded-in color. Light weight. Easy to install. Impact resistant. Quality appearance. Grating Selection Process 1. Select the proper bar spacing and height to meet your load requirements. 2. Select the proper resin to meet your environmental requirements. 3. Select the proper panel size to meet your requirement. 4. Determine if you want grit top or plain top. 4 Square Mesh Panel Sizes Available Three Heights 1, 1.5 and Weight: 3.75 lb/ft. sq. 1 Weight: 2.5 lb/ft. sq. Tolerances: ±1/16 Bar Spacing: 1.5 X 1.5 Most popular pattern 70% open area Load bearing bars in both directions Easy to fabricate an be used without continuous side support labour savings High material utilization, low waste Uniform appearance Rectangular Mesh Panel Sizes 1 HIGH Bar Spacing: 1 X 4 1 Weight: 2.50 lb/ft. sq. Tolerances: ±1/16 Economical Original pattern 69% open area Widely used for light traffic and shorter spans Thickness Bar Spacing Panel Size (ft.) WT (lbs) 1" 1.5" x 1.5" 4 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 4 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 4 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 3 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 3 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 5 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 4 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 4 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 4 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 3 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 3 X " 1.5" x 1.5" 5 X " 1" x 4" 3 X " 1" x 4" 44" X " 1" x 4" 4 X " 1" x 4" 4 X " 2" x 2" 4 X

99 FABOGRATE FRP GRATING 4 F HEMIAL PROOF (standard colour is dark gray) is a vinyl ester system specifically engineered to provide premium service in highly corrosive environments. It utilizes an advanced resin system which delivers outstanding resistance to a wide range of harsh corrosive environments ranging from acidic to caustic, plus a high degree of solvent resistance. It has a lass I flame spread rating of 25 or less according to the ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test Method. R+HEMIAL PROOF PLUS (standard colour is black). This is our only EF.R.P Grating to offer a flame spread rating of 10 or less on ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test. It has excellent acid and caustic resistance. IF INDUSTRIAL GRADE (standard colour is light gray). This is a premium corrosion resistant isophthalic resin system selected for outstanding acid resistance. It has moderate resistance to caustic and solvent environments. It has a lass I ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test flame spread rating of 25 or less. It is more economical than types F and R+. FF FOOD GRADE (standard colour is safety yellow).agriculture anada approved (all ingredients have been USDA approved) to meet corrosive conditions commonly found in meat production, food processing, bottling and brewing applications. Made with isophthalic polyester. Flame spread rating is 30 or less. AF ARHITETURAL GRADE FIRE RETARDENT (standard colour is light gray). This is a resin system designed for mildly corrosive environments. Best suited to replace metal gratings that require maintenance to maintain an aesthetically pleasing appearance. It has a lass 1, ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test flame spread rating of 25 or less for indoor use. It is more economical than type IF. AN ARHITETURAL GRADE (standard colour is green). Similar resin system as type AF but is not fire retardant or flame spread rated. More economical than AF. Note : All grating types available with or without grit top for slip resistance. RESIN ODE DESRIPTION BASE RESIN ORROSION RESISTANE FLAME SPREAD RATING OLOR F HEMIAL PROOF FIRE RETARDANT VINYL ESTER EXELLENT LASS 1: 25 OR LESS DARK GRAY or ORANGE R+ HEMIAL PROOF FIRE RETARDANT PLUS VINYL ESTER EXELLENT LASS 1: 10 OR LESS BLAK IF INDUSTRIAL GRADE FIRE RETARDANT ISOPHTHALI VERY GOOD LASS 1: 25 OR LESS GREEN or GRAY FF FOOD GRADE FIRE RETARDANT ISOPHTHALI VERY GOOD LASS 2: 30 OR LESS LIGHT GRAY AF ARHITETURAL GRADE ORTHOPHTHALI GOOD LASS 1: 25 OR LESS GREEN AN ARHITETURAL GRADE NON FIRE RETARDANT ORTHOPHTHALI GOOD NOT RATED YELLOW or GREEN 4-22

100 FABOGRATE FRP GRATING Load Deflection tables Deflection to Span Ratios For a resilient, non-fatiguing, comfortable feel use the STANDARD deflection to span ratio of 1:120. For an elevated installation, where a solid feeling is desired, use a deflection to span ratio of 1:180 (NB-85). A deflection to span ratio greater than 1:100 (1%) is not recommended. Do not exceed.5 (13mm). Panel Selection Determine the type of loading concentrated or uniform. Estimate the load and determine the span. Decide what maximum deflection is appropriate solid, standard or 1%. Enter the appropriate 1 (25mm) table. If the deflection is less than the maximum selected, choose the 1 thickness. It is more economical than 1.5 thick panels. If the deflection or span is too great for 1 thick panels, select 1.5 thick FRP Grating and design your support system for the appropriate span. Select the resin system. Panel Installation Panels are designed to be supported on all sides. Use end clips if panel ends cannot be supported. Use hold down clips to prevent panel drift

101 PULTRUDED GRATING DURADEK Standard Pultruded Grating DURADEK is a standard pultruded grating product. It is available with individual bearing bars in either 1 or 1-1/2 I shapes or a 2 T shape. DURADEK is a flame retardant product utilizing a polyester or vinyl ester resin. The bearing bars use both longitudinal (glass roving) and multidirectional (glass mat) reinforcements as well as a synthetic surfacing veil to provide unequaled corrosion resistance. The bearing bars are assembled into 12 panel sizes: 3, 4, and 5 foot widths in each of 8, 10, 12 and 20 foot lengths. Standard panels come with cross-rod spacings of 6 or optional 12 on center. Grids can be ordered with or without an anti-skid grit surface. A variety of grit material and textures can be ordered. 4 DURAGRID ustom Grating DURAGRID custom grid and grating systems are designed to accommodate specific applications that cannot effectively be met by a standard fiberglass grating. DURAGRID offers the customer options such as selection of bar spacing (which creates varying open space in the grating or grid), bar shape, cross-rod placement, custom fabrication, custom resin or color. DURAGRID Heavy Duty Grating DURAGRID Heavy Duty Grating is a pultruded bar type grating that can be designed and used like traditional metal grates. The solid individual bearing bars are designed to take heavy wheel traffic such as fork lifts, tow motors and truck traffic. Heavy duty grating is constructed of the same type composite used in the other DURAGRID products. DURAGRID Phenolic Grating DURAGRID Phenolic grating is a dramatic innovation for markets where fire safety is a major concern; it offers superior resistance to flame and high temperature with low emissions of smoke and toxic fumes. The nonflammable nature of phenolics enable phenolic grating to withstand higher temperatures than polyester or vinyl ester for extended periods of time without major structural damage. ombined with low thermal conductivity, this provides fire protection not available with alternate materials. DURAGRID Phenolic grating was the first composite grating to receive U.S. oast Guard approval. It is accepted for use in locations and applications as allowed in the U.S..G. Policy File Memorandum 2-98 for fire retardant grating meeting structural fire integrity Level 2(L2). Please contact customer service for more information on material properties and technical information. 4-24

102 GRATING AESSORIES Fiberglass overed Grating All Fiberglass Grating is availabe with an integral cover plate to prevent fumes in the work area or where high stiffness over drainage trenches is required. Fiberglass Floor Plate Available to cover all panel sizes. Easy to clean both top and bottom sides. an be used as a splash guard. Available in thickness from 1/16 (1.5mm) to 1 (25mm). Grit top surface is standard for floor plate applications. Fiberglass Stair Treads Fiberglass stair treads come complete with contrasting colored antislip nosing. Available in standard lengths of 24, 30, 36, or 42. Available in widths of 9, 10 1/2, or 12. Fiberglass oncrete urb Angle Pultruded fiberglass urb Angle provides a strong, firm base for bearing bars. Standard urb Angle is produced using a gray, fire retardant vinyl ester resin system and is available in three sizes. Fiberglass Elevated Floor Systems Fixed and adjustable Fiberglass olumns are available to provide elevated dry floor. Strongwell s pultruded fiberglass urb Angle provides a strong, firm base for bearing bars. Standard urb Angle is produced using a gray, fire retardant vinyl ester resin system and is available in three sizes. Floors can be designed to support up to 2,000 pounds per square foot. Grating lips Prevent panel drift - bold, nut and washer included. Use 2 or 3 for each side of each full size panel; 4 for each Stair Thread stainless steel. The following Types are available: Type M lips Restrains movement in all directions. an use self-drilling screws when attaching to metal supports. Type G-G lips Install from top of grating. No hole to drill. Galvanized available. Type J lips For moderate loads. Type For joining two unsupported ends

103 FIBERGLASS STRUTURAL SHAPES AND PLATE EXTREN is a proprietary combination of fiberglass reinforcements and thermosetting polyester or vinyl ester resin systems. It is produced in more than 100 standard shapes and all shapes have a surface veil to protect against glass fibers penetrating the resin surface in service and to increase corrosion and UV resistance. EXTREN is offered in three series designed for different environments and applications. 4 Series 500 An all-purpose series utilizing an isophthalic polyester resin system with a UV inhibitor. olour: Olive Green Series 525 An all-purpose series utilizing a fire retardant isophthalic polyester resin system with a UV inhibitor. olour: Slate Gray (plus certain handrail and fixed ladder components in yellow) Series 625 A premium series both fire retardant and highly corrosion resistant utilizing a vinyl ester resin system with a UV inhibitor. olour: Beige FABRIATING WITH EXTREN JOINING - EXTREN can be fastened mechanically with screws, bolts or rivets. FIBREBOLT fiberglass studs and hex nuts (available from FABO) can also be used with EXTREN. EXTREN can be joined by adhesives. The strongest connections can be made by using a combination of mechanical fasteners with adhesives. Suggested fabrication techniques for EXTREN are covered in MFG s EXTREN Fabrication and Repair Manual. MATERIAL PREPARATION EXTREN shapes and sheet can be sawed, drilled, routed and turned on a lathe or other machine tool. Punching should be limited to thicknesses of 3/16 and under. arbide or diamond-tipped saw blades and tool bits are recommended for faster speeds and longer tool life. ut edges should always be sealed. EXTREN cannot be bent, rolled or pressed, as can steel. Applications Wastewater Treatment Plants hemical Plants Pulp and Paper Plants Greenhouses ircuit Board Plating Trade Show Booths Electrical Switch Gear Flue Gas Desulferization and ooling Tower omponents Offshore Platforms Structural and miscellaneous components near salt water Electrical Equipment Housing able Tray omponents Features orrosion Resistant Low onductivity - Thermally and Electrically Non-Magnetic - Electromagnetic Lightweight High Strength Dimensional Stability Low Maintenance 4-26

104 FIBERGLASS STRUTURAL SHAPES AND PLATE SERIES 500/525 PLATE SERIES 625 PLATE Series Units/ Value 500/525 Shapes SERIES 625 Shapes 1/8" 3/16" - 1/4" 3/8" - 1" 1/8" 3/16" - 1/4" 3/8" - 1" Properties ASTM Test Method MEHANIAL Tensile Stress, LW D638 psi 30,000 30,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 Tensile Stress, W D638 psi 7,000 7,000 7,500 10,000 10,000 7,500 10,000 10,000 Tensile Modulus, LW D psi Tensile Modulus, W D psi ompressive Stress, LW D695 psi 30,000 30,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 ompressive Stress, W D695 psi 15,000 16,000 15,500 16,500 20,000 16,500 17,500 17,500 ompressive Modulus, LW D psi ompressive Modulus W D psi Flexural Stress, LW D790 psi 30,000 30,000 35,000 35,000 30,000 35,000 35,000 30,000 Flexural Stress, W D790 psi 10,000 10,000 13,000 15,000 18,000 13,000 15,000 18,000 Flexural Modulus, LW D psi Flexural Modulus, W D psi Modulus of Elasticity full section 10 6 psi Modulus of Elasticity: W & I shapes > 4" full section 10 6 psi Parallel ompressive Shear Stress, LW D3846 psi 3,000 3,000 Shear Modulus, LW 10 6 psi Short Beam Shear, LW D2344 psi 4,500 4,500 Bearing Stress, LW D953 psi 30,000 30,000 32,000 32,000 32,000 32,000 32,000 32,000 Poisson's Ratio, LW D3039 in/in Notched Izod Impact, LW D256 ft-lbs/in Notched Izod Impact, W D256 ft-lbs/in PHYSIAL Barcol Hardness D hr Water Absorption D570 % Max Density D792 lbs/in oefficient of Thermal Expansion, LW D in/in/ o F Thermal onductivity 177 BTU-in/ft 2 Hr/oF 4 4 ELETRIAL Arc Resistance, LW D495 seconds Dielectric Strength, LW D149 KV/in Dielectric Strength, PF D149 volts/mil N.T N.T 250 N.T N.T FLAMMABILITY Flammability lassification (1/16") UL 94 VO Tunnel Test E Max NBS Smoke hamber E (Typical) Flammability D635 Self Extinguishing UL Thermal Index Generic 130 o British Fire Test BS lass This value is determined from full section simple beam bending of EXTREN structural shapes. 2. The shear stress test results will change radically if the notched orientation is altered. The value in this chart represents the test configuration where the notches are machined parallel to the reinforcing mat. For notches machined perpendicular to the reinforcing mat, this value would be two to three times larger. 3. The Shear Modulus value has been determined from tests with full sections of EXTREN structural shapes. (See Strongwell s Strongwell Design Manual for further information.) 4. Value would be 50 if the surfacing veil were not there. 5. Plate compressive stress/modulus measured edgewise and flexural stress/modulus measured flatwise. Values apply to Series 525 and Measured as a percentage maximum by weight. 7. Span to depth ratio of 3:1; EXTREN angles will have a minimum value of 4000 psi and the I/W shapes are tested in the web. 8. Typical values because these are shape and composite dependent tests. ASTM SPEIFIATIONS ASTM D3917 Standard Specification for Dimensional Tolerance of Thermosetting Glass-Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes. ASTM D3918 Standard Definition of Terms Relating to Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products. ASTM D3647 Standard Practice for lassifying Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes According to omposition. ASTM D4385 Standard Practice for lassifying Visual Defects in Thermosetting Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products. LW Lengthwise PF Perpendicular to laminate face W rosswise N.T. Not Tested 4-27

105 4 FIBERGLASS STRUTURAL SHAPES AND PLATE Equal Leg Angles I-Beams Round Tube Square Tube hannel Foam ore Planks 1 x 1/8 3 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 1 x 1/8 1 x 1/8 3-1/2 x 2 x 7/32 4 x 2 1-1/4 x 3/16 4 x 2 x 1/4 1-1/4 x 1/8 1-1/2 x 1/8 16 x 1/4 x 3 x 1/2 5 x 2 1-1/2 x 3/16 8 x 4 x 3/8 1-1/2 x 1/8 2 x 1/8 hannel (Ladder Rail) (Nonstocked items; standard color orange) 6 x 2 1-1/2 x 1/8 2 x 1 x 1/8 1-1/2 x 1/4 2 x 1/ x.100 x x x 2 1-1/2 x 1/4 6 x 3 x 1/4 (Stock S-525) 2 x 1/8 2 x 1/4 (Yellow; Series 525) x.125 x x.188 Framing Angle 2 x 3/16 6 x 3 x 3/8 2 x 1/4 3 x 1/ x.120 x x x 2 x 1/4 2 x 1/4 6 x 4 x 1/4 2-1/2 x 1/4 4 x 1/ x.128 x x.190 Kick Plate 3 x 1/4 8 x 4 x 1/2 3 x 1/4 1-1/4 x 1/ x.135 x x x 1/2 x 3/16 (Yellow; S-525) 3 x 3/8 10 x 5 x 3/8 1-1/4 x 3/16 1-1/2 x 1/4 4.0 x.125 x x.187 Square Tube 4 x 1/4 10 x 5 x 1/2 1-3/4 x 1/8 1-3/4 x 1/8 orner Post w/round Hole 4 x 3/8 12 x 6 x 1/2 (Stock S-525, S-625) 1-3/4 x 1/4 1-3/4 x 1/4 3-1/4 x 1/4 1" sq. with 3/4" round hole 4 x 1/2 18 x 3/8 x 4-1/2 x 1/2 2-3/4 x 1/4 2-1/2 x 1/4(Stock Yellow;S-525) urb Angle Stair Riser 6 x 1/2 24 x 3/8 x 7-1/2 x 3/4 3 x 1/8 3 x 1/8 1 x 1-1/2 8 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 1-1/4 x 1/8 Wide Flange Beams 3-1/2 x x 3/8 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 Slide Guide 2 x 1/8 3 x 1/4 3-1/2 x 1/2 3-1/2 x 1/4 (Stock S-525) 2 x 1-1/2 2-1/2 x 2-1/4 x 1/4 5 x 1/2 4 x 1/4 4 x 1/8 4 x 3/8 (stocked at hatfield Division) (White; S-500) 6 x 1/4 (Stock S-525) 6 x 1/4 4 x 1/4 6 x 3/8 F-Section Square Tube 6 x 3/8 6 x 3/8 5 x 1/8 Square Bar - Thermal ure lear** 5-1/2 x 1 x 1/4 2 x.156 (Yellow; S-525) hannels 8 x 3/8 5 x 1/4 1/2 6 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 Strut 2 x 9/16 x 1/8 10 x 3/8 (32' lg.) 6 x 1/8 5/8 Flat Strips 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 x 5/32 3 x 7/8 x 1/4 2 x 1/8 6 x 1/4 3/4 1 x 1/4 (Gray; S-525) 4 x 1-3/8 x 3/16 8 x 1/2 8 x 3/ x 3/16 (Stock Yellow; S-525) Top Rail 4 x 1-1/8 x 1/4 10 x 1/2 10 x 3/16 1 1/4 2 x 1/4 2 x 1/4 modified rd. tube 5 x 1-3/8 x 1/4 12 x 1/2 Rectangular Tube 1 1/2 3 x 3/16 Unequal Leg Angles 6 x 1-5/8 x 1/4 Plate* 4 x 1/8 x 2 x 1/4 Rod - Thermal ure lear** 3 x 1/4 (Stock S-525) 1-3/4 x 1-1/4 x 1/4 6 x 1-11/16 x 3/8 (Stock S-525) 1/8 2-1/2 x 1-5/8 x 1/8 1/4 3 x 3/8 Z-Section 8 x 2-3/16 x 1/4 (Stock S-525) 3/16 3-1/4 x 2-1/2 x.160 5/16 3 x 1/2 (Stock S-525) 1-1/4 x 2-1/2 x 1/8 8 x 2-3/16 x 3/8 1/4 6-1/2 x 1/4 x 2 x 1/2 3/8 4 x 1/2 (Stock S-525) 6 x 1/4 10 x 2-3/4 x 1/2 (24' lg.) 3/8 7 x 4 x 1/4 1/2 Flight hannel 1-1/2 x 1 x 3/16 1/2 9 x 6 x 5/16 5/8 5-1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2 x 3/16 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 (Stock S-625) 3/4 9 x 6 x 7/16 3/4 7-1/8 x 1/8 x 2-1/2 x 3/16 2 x 7/8 x 1/4 5/8 13/16 Fluted Tube 2-5/8 x 1/8 x 1-1/4 x 3/16 1 7/8 1 1/4 3 x 1 x 3/ /2 x 1-1/2 x 3/16 (Stock S-525) 1 1/8 4 x 1-1/16 x 1/8 1 1/4 5-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 3/16 (Stock 1 1/2 S-525) 14 x 3-1/2 x 3/ x 2-3/16 x 3/16 24 x 3 x.260 *USDA approved plate available (non-stocked) in all sizes except 1/4 and 3/8. EXTREN plate is stocked in 4 x 8 sheets. **Thermal cure bars and rods were not designed to be machined. ***Not necessarily EXTREN specifications. NOTES: Unless otherwise noted, all dimensions are in inches and stocked lengths are 20 long. All EXTREN Series 500 products can be produced to meet NSF potable water standards in minimum mill run quantities. Only products bearing the NSF logo are certified. 4-28

106 SAFPLATE FIBERGLASS GRITTED PLATE SAFPLATE fiberglass gritted plate, is a tough, corrosion resistant floor plate. SAFPLATE s unique combination of pultruded fiberglass plate with an anti-skid grit surface creates a textured solid sheet flooring that is ideal for both wet and dry environments. Used in a variety of applications, such as trench covers to contain vapors and fumes or pedestrian bridge walkways for sure footing, SAFPLATE provides a long-lasting, maintenance-free alternative to steel plate for severe, corrosive environments. SAFPLATE is available as solid plate or bonded to DURADEK or DURAGRID grating. The standard surface is fine grit. A medium grit or a coarse grit is also available. SAFPLATE with fine grit is stocked in 4 x 8 panels in standard EXTREN plate thicknesses of 1/8 and 1/4. Optional plate thicknesses include 3/16, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4 and 1 sizes. Standard SAFPLATE is Series 525, which is a fiberglass reinforced polyester with fire retardant in a gray colour. Other resin systems and custom colours are available upon request. SAFRAIL INDUSTRIAL FIBERGLASS HANDRAILS SAFRAIL industrial fiberglass handrails are commercial railing systems for stair rails, platform/walkway handrails and guardrails. SAFRAIL systems are fabricated from pultruded fiberglass components produced by Strongwell and molded thermoplastic connectors. The railing systems are particularly well-suited to corrosive environments like those found in industrial, chemical and wastewater treatment plants as well as commercial structures with urban and salt air corrosion. SAFRAIL fiberglass handrail systems are corrosion resistant, easy to field fabricate, structurally strong, low in thermal conductivity, impact resistant, have low electrical conductivity and are lightweight. SAFRAIL systems are the result of more than 40 years of experience in the manufacture, design and fabrication of fiberglass handrail systems. The systems offer the following advantages: Ease of Assembly SAFRAIL systems are produced in lightweight standard sections that include both post and rail. Systems can be prefabricated in large sections and shipped to the site or they can also be fabricated and installed on site with simple carpenter tools. Internal onnection System All connections fit flush, resulting in a pleasing, streamlined appearance. The internal connections allow the construction of continuous handrail systems around circular tanks without special fittings. Safety Features SAFRAIL systems come in a safety yellow colour, feature low electrical conductivity for worker safety and exhibit high strength. Systems meet US federal OSHA standards with a 2:1 factor of safety with a 6-foot (1830mm) maximum post spacing. SAFRAIL systems also comply with international standard AFNOR NF E Low Maintenance orrosion resistant fiberglass with molded-in colour will outlast aluminum or steel systems with virtually no maintenance. ost Effective Fiberglass components and easy-to-assemble design provide savings on labor and maintenance, resulting in longterm savings and elimination of the cost and inconvenience of downtime for repairs in plant operations. 4 SAFRAIL industrial systems can be used in guardrail applications where railing is needed to protect the open side of an elevated walkway. SAFRAIL systems meet OSHA requirements for a height of 42 (1067mm) from the top of walkway to the top of the guardrail. The OSHA loading requirement for both guardrail and handrail is a 200 pound (890 N) concentrated load at any point or direction on the top rail. Other building codes may require different loading conditions. Moulded-in color plus an optional tough polyurethane coating will outlast aluminum or steel systems and requires virtually no maintenance. 4-29

107 SAFRAIL FIBERGLASS LADDERS SAFRAIL fiberglass ladders and ladder cages mounted on the sides of tanks and buildings are a common sight in a wide range of industries. Even in complete immersion applications, fiberglass has outlasted aluminum and steel and required little or no maintenance. SAFRAIL ladders are fabricated in a standard 18 (46mm) rung width configuration with 12 (30mm) rung spacings. Various ladder lengths can be produced as practical. Standard SAFRAIL ladder and ladder cage systems are designed and fabricated to meet the requirements of OSHA ustom colors and custom designed ladders and access cages can be fabricated upon request. Ladders can be shipped pre-assembled for installation in the field. SAFRAIL ladders and ladder cage systems are produced using a premium grade polyester resin system with flame retardant and ultraviolet (UV) inhibitor additives. A vinyl ester resin system is available upon request for additional corrosion resistance. Standard side rails and cages are pigmented OSHA safety yellow. The rungs are a pultruded fiberglass polyester tube with a fluted, non-skid surface. 4 OMPOSOLITE FIBERGLASS BUILDING SYSTEM OMPOSOLITE is an advanced composite building panel system suitable for major load bearing structural applications. Features of OMPOSOLITE include orrosion Resistant, Lightweight, Low Electrical & Thermal onductivity, Easy To Maintain, ost Effective, and Easy To Install Interlocking Joints. The modular construction system consists of six interlocking components. The main component is a 3 thick x 24 wide open-ribbed building panel. 3-way and 45 connectors allow the system components to turn corners and facilitate the joining of walls or sides. Toggles lock panels and connectors together securely. For added flexibility, the system also includes a hanger and an end cap. For permanent structures, joints between panels and connectors are bonded during assembly. This uniquely designed system of interlocking components makes it possible to design fiberglass structures for a broad range of construction applications with an almost unlimited number of configurations.omposolite is available in standard polyester (green), polyester fire retardant (gray) or vinyl ester fire retardant (beige) resin systems. The standard fire retardant resins meet the requirements of lass 1 rating of 25 or less per ASTM E-84 and the self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D-635. The resin contains a UV inhibitor and the composite includes a surface veil on all exposed surfaces for enhanced corrosion and UV protection. Other resins and colors are available upon request. DURASHIELD FOAM ORE BUILDING PANELS DURASHIELD is a tongue-and-groove fiberglass pultruded panel comprised of a pultruded skin over a foam core. Features include integral insulation, lightweight corrosion resistance, low electrical & thermal conductivity, strong, flame retardance and transparency to electromagnetic emissions. The pultruded fiberglass skin is available in either an isophthalic polyester or vinyl ester resin. Both resin systems are flame retardant (UL94 VO). Vinyl ester is utilized in more corrosive applications. A synthetic surfacing veil is incorporated into the skin to improve weathering, corrosion resistance and resistance to degradation from ultraviolet rays. Resistance to weathering can be further enhanced by the application of a polyurethane paint. The core material is rigid closed-cell urethane foam. The foam core provides an insulation R factor of 7 for the 1 panel and 21 for the 3 panel. DURASHIELD panels are available in 1 x 12 and 3 x 24 sizes. The panels can be produced in any length that is practical. Typical lengths would be in the 12 to 32 range. 4-30

108 ZINZER UNITHERM WELDING GUN Zinzer UNITHERM K5.8 RS / K5.16 RS welding torch has Hot air device has electronic temperature control for the professional user. Technical features include an insulated outer sleeve, infinitely variable electronic heat regulation (the adjusted temperature remains constant, independent of the cross-section of the used tip), electronic monitoring of the heating element, and air volume regulation. ommon applications include welding, preheating, forming, and shrinking of thermoplastic materials. Type K5.8RS K5.16RS Temperature infinitely variable up to 600 infinitely variable up to 600 Output 800 W W Air volume* approx. 200 l/min approx. 200 l/min Supply voltage 230 VA / 120 VA 230 VA / 120 VA Order No. 230VA Order No. 120VA ZINZER JUMBOTHERM WELDING GUN The professional in preheating JUMBOTHERM K25.30 / K25.16 welding gun with electronic temperature control for the professional use. Technical features insulated outer sleeve, infinitely variable electronic heat regulation (the adjusted temperature remains constant, independent of the cross-section of the used tip), and electronic monitoring of the heating element. 4 ommon applications include preheating, forming, and shrinking of thermoplastic materials. Type K25.30 K25.16 Temperature infinitely variable up to 600 infinitely variable up to 600 Output W W Air volume* approx 300 l/min with a pressure of 3000Pa approx 300 l/min with a pressure of 3000Pa Supply voltage 230 VA 120 VA Order No

109 ZINZER WELDING AESSORIES Picture Description Part # "Standard welding nozzle curved, screw-on type air outlet Ø5mm, conical. Suitable for slip-on: Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 3 and 4mm Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 5mm Super-Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 3 and 4mm Super-Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 5mm Welding nozzle with integrated guiding roller for welding cord Ø 5mm" "Welding nozzle curved, slip-on type air outlet Ø5mm, conical Suitable for slip-on: Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 3 and 4mm Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 5mm Super-Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 3 and 4mm Super-Rapid nozzle for welding cord Ø 5mm Welding nozzle with integrated guiding roller for welding cord Ø 5mm Tack welding nozzle especially for pre-fixing of thermoplastic material urved welding nozzle with knife for thermoplastic material. air outlet Ø4mm Rapid nozzle, screw-on type for joint welding. With preheating of the welding rod made of plasticized PV, Polyethylene, Polypropylene.urved welding nozzle with knife for thermoplastic material. air outlet Ø5mm Rapid nozzle, screw-on type for joint welding. With preheating of the welding rod made of plasticized PV, Polyethylene, Polypropylene. for plastic filler rod Ø3mm and Ø4mm Rapid nozzle, screw-on type for joint welding. With preheating of the welding rod made of plasticized PV, Polyethylene, Polypropylene. for plastic filler rod Ø5mm / also for fusion welding cord

110 LARAMY BASI HIGH SPEED TORH The basic Model torch is a rugged, high-quality production tool. A lightweight, compact design makes the Model easy on the operator and convenient for tight work areas. It is equipped with 12 of vinyl hose, regulator, gauge, torch rest, Laramy combination tip and your choice of Located Heat element. Specify 250, 350, 450, or 550 watt element with order. The Model is shipped in a plastic carrying case and includes a copy of Laramy s exclusive 56-page manual Making Even Better Plastic Welds. Additional elements and accessories can be added at any time. LARAMY FABRIATING TORH 4 The Model is the welding outfit for production and general shop use. The leading choice of fabricators, the Model includes the basic torch, a new portable welding stand with combination regulator and filter, gauge, thermometer, Laramy combination tip and your choice of two Located Heat elements. Specify 250, 350, 450 or 550 watt elements with order. The Model is shipped in a plastic carrying case and includes a copy of Laramy s exclusive 56-page manual Making Even Better Plastic Welds. Additional elements and accessories can be added at any time. LARAMY TORH AND OMPRESSOR The Model is the industry s first complete, production welding outfit with its own built-in air compressor. All you need is electrical power. The Model s built-in compressor is constructed of the highest quality components throughout for top performance and trouble-free operation with ample air supply for speed welding. The high quality, continuous duty, oil-less rotary compressor provides 2 1/2 cfm at 3 psi and comes equipped with factory wired ON-OFF switches for compressor and torch, interlocked to prevent operation of welder without compressor. The Model includes the basic torch, intake filter/muffler, Laramy combination tip and your choice of two Located Heat elements. Specify 250, 350, 450 or 550 watt elements with order. The Model is shipped in a rugged metal tool case with vibration pads and includes a copy of Laramy s exclusive 56-page manual Making Even Better Plastic Welds. Additional elements and accessories can be added at any time. 4-33

111 LARAMY EONOMY OMPRESSOR/TORH The Model welder is a good, inexpensive, lightweight portable outfit suitable for light field repair work and some light fabrication jobs. The Model comes equipped with a good quality, diaphragm compressor which provides 1 3/4 cfm at 3 psi, the basic torch, Laramy combination tip and your choice of one Located Heat element. Specify 250, 350, 450 or 550 watt element with order. The Model is shipped in a rugged metal tool case and includes a copy of Laramy s exclusive 56-page manual Making Even Better Plastic Welds. Additional elements and accessories can be added any time. LARAMY VARI-FT/RS SELF ONTAINED TORH 4 The Model VARI-FT/RS provides its own air supply from the ambient atmosphere making it ideal for installation, repair and field work on hard and soft PV and similar thermoplastics including plexiglass, polycarbonate, polyisobutylene, polystyrene, etc. The temperature can be steplessly regulated with an electronic controller and the selfcontained supply of air comes from a built-in blower/motor. The Model VARI-FT/RS is equipped with an ON/OFF switch and comes with a universal round tip--ideal for work in tight corners and for short and tack welds. Laramy s exclusive 56-page manual Making Even Better Plastic Welds is included and additional welding tips and accessories can be added at any time. 4-34

112 LARAMY UNIVERSAL HIGH-SPEED TIP A one-hand welding tip that is 6 to 8 times faster than conventional tips. uts off rod as desired. Exclusive Laramy design pre-heats work and rod simultaneously. These tips save a great deal of welding time and should be used for any extensive work on maintenance and fabrication projects. Laramy has Universal High Speed Tips available for both round and triangular rod in the following sizes: NHS-1-1/8 and 5/32 diameter welding rod NHS-2-3/16 diameter welding rod NHS-3-1/4 diameter welding rod NST-1-1/8 triangular rod NST-2-3/16 triangular rod NST-3-1/4 triangular rod The triangular rod tips are available in different profiles. Please contact us for details. LARAMY USTOM WELDING TIPS 4 Laramy ustom Welding Tips are engineered stainless steel tips for all hot-air welding requirements. hoose from the most complete selection of tips in the plastics welding industry. NT-1 ombination Welding & Tacking Tip -A dual purpose design that eliminates the need for separate tips on maintenance and light fabrication work. uts the rod at the end of the weld. NR-1 Universal Round Tip -A tip for tight-corner welding. NT-1 Universal Tacking Tip -A tip used exclusively for tacking your plastic together before welding. WEGENER SPARK TESTERS The A spark testers are typically used for testing the quality of plastic welds. A variety of test kits are available to suit most applications. A powered units are also available for use within production processes for the automatic testing of porosity in non-conductive coatings. A wide assortment of electrodes and accessories are available for just about every need. Please contact customer service for assistance in selecting the most appropriate tester for your application. WEG20 - High frequency spark tester to check welds, joints and surfaces for leaks and air holes in tanks and pipes made of plastics or rubber. WEG21 - The WEG 21 high frequency spark tester is designed for the detection of flaws or holidays in joints or welds, heavy duty glass, rubber or anti-corrosive coatings of tanks, pipes, etc. 4-35

113 WEGENER AIRTHERM HOT AIR WELDING GUN Model Airtherm hot air welding gun with self-contained blower. Standard features include: electronically controlled temperature system which is adjustable from ambient to 1200 F in order to accommodate all types of thermoplastic materials, control board with built-in sensor to prevent heating element burn-outs, plug-in type heating element for easy replacement, motor brushes can be easily checked or changed without opening the gun. Includes a 110V/1300W heating element. Suitable for connection to a standard 110V A electrical outlet. Unit is supplied with adaptor nozzle to accommodate WEGENER welding tips. Nozzles for overlap welding also available. 4 WEGENER DURATHERM HOT AIR WELDING GUN Model Duratherm hot air welding gun with electronic output control incorporated in the handle to ensure continuous adjustment of the welding air temperature without alteration of air volume. Standard features include: control board with built-in sensor to prevent heating element burn-outs, temperature adjustable from ambient to 1200 F to accommodate all types of thermoplastic materials, insulating tube for protection of element, back plate can be rotated 360. Includes 120V/1000W heating element. Suitable for connection to blower model DT 1 or DT 2. AUTOTHERM TEMPERATURE REGULATED WELDING GUN The Autotherm is an electronically controlled temperature regulated welding gun for the highest quality welding. At the very back of the handle is an adjustment of the welding temperature by press buttons and digital display of the actual and set temperature. Electrical and thermal influences such as power surges, air volume changes and intake air temperature variations are automatically compensated for. The electronics quickly adjust the set welding temperature to offset any such changes. Features automatic shut-off in case of air loss. The heating element life is vastly extended since thermal overload is no longer possible. The dual wall of the barrel keeps the outside surface cool to a touch. Back plate can be rotated 360º. Supplied with a 110V, 800W heating element, the Autotherm is suitable for use with clean air blowers model DT 1 or DT

114 WEGENER EXWELD MINI-F EXTRUSION WELDER Power Supply: 120V A Power onsumption: 1680W MAX Maximum Output: 0.7 Kg/hr (1.5 lbs/hr) Weight: 3 Kg (approx 6.5 lbs) Length: 19 Rod Size: 4mm (5/32 ) Suitable for welding PE and PP up to 3/8 thick (Mini SHF/SHF- required for UHMW or PVDF) Barrel temperature controlled by state-of-the-art temperature regulator Electronically controlled drive motor with variable welding speed Self-contained preheater eliminates need for external air supply Solid, durable construction Easy to operate Exchangeable PTFE welding shoes can be easily machined to determine weld size and configuration Optional heavy-duty shipping case available WEGENER EXWELD ALPHA2 E EXTRUSION WELDER Power Supply: 230V Single-Phase Power onsumption: 3960W max. Maximum Output: PE -(5.7 lbs/hr), PP -2.2 Kg/hr (4.8lbs/hr) Weight: 5.9 Kg (approx. 13 lbs) Rod Size: PP/PE 3, 4 or 5mm (1/8, 5/32 or 3/16 ) Suitable for welding PE, PP, PVDF and other thermoplastic materials Dual channel temperature controller for extrudate and preheat, cold start protection Unmatched relation between welding capacity, weight and price Electronically-controlled drive motor with variable welding speed Patented, trouble-free rod intake system Adjustable preheat extension, solid, durable construction, easy operation Exchangeable PTFE welding shoes can be easily machined to determine weld size and configuration Optional heavy-duty shipping/transport case with rollers Special model, ALPHA-P with corrosion-resistant components for PV/PV WEGENER EXWELD BETA2 E EXTRUSION WELDER 4 Power Supply: 230V Single-Phase Power onsumption: 5360W MAX Maximum Output: PE 4.31 Kg/hr (9.5 lbs/hr), PP 4.08 Kg.hr (9.0 lbs/hr) Weight: 8.9 Kg (approx 20 lbs) excl. cable/hose Rod Size: up to 5mm (3/16 ) Suitable for welding PE, PP, PVDF and other thermoplastic materials. PV optional. Temperature controller for extrudate with cold start protection and monitoring of set-point/actual temperatures Quick material changeover, lockable drive motor, and multi-position handle Sophisticated extrusion screw and aluminum melting chamber with cartridge/band heating system allows for smooth and optimum processing of extrudate Trouble-free rod intake system Distance from end of preheat nozzle and material is fully adjustable Streamline design with solid, durable construction Exchangeable PTFE welding shoes are easily machineable to determine weld size and configuration WEGENER EXWELD GAMMA2 E EXTRUSION WELDER Main Supply: 230V Single-Phase Power onsumption: 5760W MAX Maximum Output: PE 6.2 Kg/hr (13 lbs/ hr), PP 5.6 Kg/hr (8.8 lbs/hr) Weight: 9.2 Kg (approx 22 lbs) excl. cable/hose Rod Size: PE/PP 4 or 5mm (5/32 or 3/16 Suitable for welding PE, PP, PVDF and other thermoplastic materials. PV optional Temperature controller for extrudate with cold start protection and monitoring of set-point/actual temperatures Quick material changeover, lockable drive motor, and multi-position handle Sophisticated extrusion screw and aluminum melting chamber with cartridge/band heating system allows for smooth and optimum processing of extrudate Patented, trouble-free rod intake system Distance between end of preheat nozzle and base material is fully adjustable Exchangeable PTFE welding shoes are easily machineable to determine weld size and configuration 4-37

115 FIBERGLASS THREADED ROD AND NUTS Fiberglas threaded rod and and nuts are ideal for applications requiring mechanical fasteners that must be strong, non-corrosive and/or non conductive. They are widely used as a replacement for steel or other metal fasteners in chemical process equipment, air pollution and water pollution control equipment, marine applications and in applications requiring all non metallic materials. The threaded rod is stocked in 4 foot lengths but is available in other lengths by request. 4 APPLIATIONS Scrubber units for chlorine plants Marine applications replacement for 316 stainless steel fasteners Applications requiring non-conductivity Wastewater treatment facilities Packaging hemical manufacturing facilities Description 3/8"-16 1/2"-13 5/8"-11 3/4"-10 1"-8 Threaded Rod Part # UN-16 UN-13 UN-11 UN-10 UN-8 Square Nut Part # UN-16N UN-13N UN-11N UN-10N UN-8N Threaded Rod Length Notes: Technical information available upon request. Features orrosion resistant Easy to fabricate Structurally strong Low maintenance Non conductive an use standard six point socket wrench olor blends with most structural materials 4-38

116 PLASTI BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS Thermoplastic fasteners can be used in a variety of applications that require resistance to chemicals and corrosive environments. When used to join dissimilar metal parts, they help eliminate cathodic corrosion problems. aution should be exercised during assembly since thermoplastic bolts can break by over-tightening. These fasteners are stocked in PV and PV but are also available in polypropylene, Teflon, nylon, Kynar, Lexan, Kel-f and Polyethylene. Machined Hex Head Bolts Machined Hex Head Bolts Dia. And PV Part # Dia. And PV Part # Length (IN) Length (IN) 1/4-20 x 1/ /2-13 x /4-20 x 3/ /2-13 x 1-1/ /4-20 x /2-13 x /4-20 x 1-1/ /2-13 x 2-1/ /4-20 x 1-1/ /2-13 x /4-20 x /2-13 x 3-1/ /4-20 x 2-1/ /2-13 x /4-20 x /8-11 x 1-1/ B 5/16-18 x 1/ /8-11 x /16-18 x 3/ /8-11 x 2-1/ /16-18 x /8-11 x /16-18 x 1-1/ /8-11 x 3-1/ /16-18 x 1-1/ /8-11 x /16-18 x /4-10 x 1-1/ A 5/16-18 x 2-1/ /4-10 x /16-18 x /4-10 x 2-1/ /8-16 x 1/ /4-10 x /8-16 x 3/ /4-10 x 3-1/ /8-16 x /4-10 x /8-16 x 1-1/ /4-10 x 4-1/ /8-16 x 1-1/ /4-10 x /8-16 x /8-16 x 2-1/ A 3/8-16 x PV Threaded Rod SIZE PV Part # PV Part # PP Part # Nylon Part # 1/ / / / / / PV Machine Hex Nuts and washers Size (IN) Nut Part # Washer Part # 1/ / / / / / Notes: Technical information available upon request. Bolts, Nuts and Washers also available in sizes 7/8 and 1 in lengths from 1/2 to 6. PV and PV Rod available in 5 foot lengths, PP and Nylon available in 4 foot lengths. Threaded rods also available in sizes 7/8 and

117 AQUAMETRIX SHARK 120/240 ONTROLLER The Aquametrix Shark 120 and Shark 240 are ideal for ph, ORP, onductivity/resistivity and Flow. It comes complete with a 1/4 DIN, NEMA 4X, Polycarbonate Enclosure. It has a user-friendly design with an interior LD menu making it quick and easy to calibrate. It is able to reduce chemical consumption with cycle timed relays. It has two control relays, two 4-20mA outputs with range expandability and High/Low alarm relay. The SHARK is designed to be the most flexible, easy to use, and easy to see multi-parameter analyzer/controller on the market. You can select the parameter you wish to measure from the easy-to-use LD menu on the inside front cover. It is ideal for a variety of applications including process control, industrial and municipal water treatment, industrial and municipal waste treatment and neutralization, fume scrubbers, plating, circuit board manufacturing, food and beverage, chemical processing, pulp & paper, mining, nuclear energy and pharmaceutical industries. AQUAMETRIX SHARK TX/TXP TRANSMITTER SHARK TX Transmitters are ideal for ph, ORP, onductivity, Resistivity and Flow. it is constructed of 1/4 DIN, NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure. It is powered by 24 VD or 24 VD Loop. It has easy to read 2 X 16 character LD display and is quick and easy to calibrate. It is capable of a single 4-20mA output with range expandability. SHARK TX comes complete with a universal mounting kit for surface, panel and pipe-mount applications (Panel and DIN rail mounting only for the Shark TXP). It is ideal for a variety of applications including process control, industrial and municipal water treatment, industrial and municipal waste treatment and neutralization, fume scrubbers, plating, circuit board manufacturing, food and beverage, chemical processing, pulp & paper, mining, nuclear energy and pharmaceutical industries. 5 AQUAMETRIX 2200P ONTROLLER The Aquametrix 2200P is back. The simple step-through menu design allows for quick & easy setup. It allows for bidirectional control through two control relays with independent setpoints for Relay On and Relay Off as well as high/low alarm relay. The cycle-time option minimizes chemical overshoot. It accepts P60 Series differential ph probes with replaceable salt bridge or standard combination ph probes. The output signal is field-scalable for maximum resolution. The test feature allows simulation of ph readings to test relay setpoints and analog settings and the password protection and watchdog timer provide security. It is extremely easy to operate with a large bright LED display and intuitive user interface, the 2200P microprocessorbased analyzer/controller is packaged in a NEMA 4X fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure and used in a wide variety of industrial and municipal applications. It is also available for conductivity (2200) and ORP (2200R). 5-1

118 AQUAMETRIX 60 SERIES PH /ORP SENSORS The 60 series fixed insertion differential ph and ORP Sensors are Great Lakes replacement probes. They have a built-in amplifier which allows the 60 series probes to transmit a signal up to 3000 feet eliminating the need for the added expense of an amplifier. They have replaceable salt bridges which increase the life and value of the sensor. They come complete with a standard 15ft cable but can be supplied with a cable of virtually any length. The cable is available in 5 wire or with a two wire 4-20 ma output built-in. Due to the quality of this product, the manufacturer offers a 30 month warranty. APPLIATIONS Municipal Water and Sewage Treatment Industrial Waste Water Treatment and Neutralization Plating Food and Beverage Processing and Manufacturing Pulp and Paper hemical Manufacturing Automotive Manufacturing Features Accurate differential measurement Eliminates ground loop interference Transmits up to 3000 ft (900 m) Platinum electrodes are standard Replaceable salt bridge Flow thru or submersible Temperature sensing device in all sensors 5 Enhanced Part # Parameter Measured Electronics Body Type performance Options P-60-8 ph Standard 5 wire sensor 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe None P-60-4 ph Standard 5 wire sensor GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) None P-60-S ph Standard 5 wire sensor Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting None P-65-8 ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe None P-65-4 ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) None P-65-4 ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting None P-60-8-H ph Standard 5 wire sensor 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe Hardened glass P-60-4-H ph Standard 5 wire sensor GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) Hardened glass P-60-S-H ph Standard 5 wire sensor Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting Hardened glass P-65-8-H ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe Hardened glass P-65-4-H ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) Hardened glass P-65-4-H ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting Hardened glass R-60-8 ORP Standard 5 wire sensor 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe None R-60-4 ORP Standard 5 wire sensor GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) None R-60-S ORP Standard 5 wire sensor Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting None R-65-8 ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe None R-65-4 ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) None R-65-4 ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting None R-60-8-H ORP Standard 5 wire sensor 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe Hardened glass R-60-4-H ORP Standard 5 wire sensor GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) Hardened glass R-60-S-H ORP Standard 5 wire sensor Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting Hardened glass R-65-8-H ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output 1-1/2" NPT threaded ends, GLI LP replacement probe Hardened glass R-65-4-H ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output GLI 605IP0 replacement (sensor only) Hardened glass R-65-4-H ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Fixed insertion with sanitary 2-1/2" tri-clover fitting Hardened glass Notes: Standard cable length is 15 ft (5m). For other lengths, please specify. Antimony electrode, used in hydrofloric acid (ph sensors only), add an A to the end of the part number. Hardened glass electrodes available, add an H to the end of the part number. Flat faced glass electrode are available for S body types only, add an F to the end of the part number. Gold electrodes are available for ORP sensors only, add a G to the end of the part number. 5-2

119 60 SERIES HOT TAP PH /ORP SENSORS The 60 series Variable Insertion (Hot Tap) Differential ph and ORP Sensors have a built-in pre-amplifier which allows the 60 series probes to transmit a signal up to 3000 feet eliminating the need for the added expense of an amplifier. They have replaceable salt bridges which increase the life and value of the sensor. They come complete with a standard 15ft cable but can be supplied with a cable of virtually any length. The cable is available in 5 wire or with a two wire 4-20 ma output built-in. Due to the quality of this product, the manufacturer offers a 30 month warranty. Applications Municipal Water and Sewage Treatment Industrial Waste Water Treatment and Neutralization Plating Food and Beverage Processing and Manufacturing Pulp and Paper hemical Manufacturing Automotive Manufacturing Features Accurate differential measurement Transmits up to 3000 ft (900 m) Replaceable salt bridge Flow thru or submersible Temperature sensing device in all sensors 1-1/4 NPT PV compression fitting Semi flushed face 5 Part # Parameter Measured Electronics Body Type Enhanced Electrode Options P-60-6 ph Standard 5 wire sensor Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion None P-60-7 ph Standard 5 wire sensor Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion None P-65-6 ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion None P-65-7 ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion None P-60-6-H ph Standard 5 wire sensor Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion Hardened glass P-60-7-H ph Standard 5 wire sensor Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion Hardened glass P-65-6-H ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion Hardened glass P-65-7-H ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion Hardened glass R-60-6 ORP Standard 5 wire sensor Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion None R-60-7 ORP Standard 5 wire sensor Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion None R-65-6 ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion None R-65-7 ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion None R-60-6-H ORP Standard 5 wire sensor Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion Hardened glass R-60-7-H ORP Standard 5 wire sensor Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion Hardened glass R-65-6-H ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Standard, 7/8" to 5" variable insertion Hardened glass R-65-7-H ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA output Hot Tap, Extended Length, 7/8" to 14" variable insertion Hardened glass Notes: Standard cable length is 15 ft (5m). For other lengths, please specify. Flat faced glass electrodes are available for ph sensor only, add an F to the end of the part number. Gold electrode are available for ORP sensor only, add a G to the end of the part number. Also available with HT hot tap assembly which contains a true union ball valve, add an HT to the end of the part number. 5-3

120 AM SERIES HOT TAP PH /ORP SENSORS The AM Series - Hot Tap Sensors Differential ph and ORP Sensor have a temperature sensing device in all sensors to allow for compensation. They have a built-in amplifier which allows the AM series probes to transmit a signal up to 3000 feet eliminating the need for the added expense of an amplifier. They have replaceable salt bridges which increase the life and value of the sensor. They come complete with a standard 15ft cable but can be supplied with a cable of virtually any length. The cable is available in 5 wire or with a two wire 4-20 ma output built-in. Due to the high quality of this product, the manufacturer offers a 30 month warranty. Applications Municipal Water and Sewage Treatment Industrial Waste Water Treatment and Neutralization Plating Food and Beverage Processing and Manufacturing Pulp and Paper hemical Manufacturing Automotive Manufacturing Features Accurate differential measurement Built-in pre amplifier Replaceable salt bridge Insertion - Hot Tap Temperature sensing device in all sensors Semi flushed face 30-month warranty 5 Enhanced Part # Parameter Measured Electronics Body Type performance Options AM ph 5 wire differential Ball valve insertion sensor None AM ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA differential Ball valve insertion sensor None AM ph 5 wire differential Ball valve insertion with wiper and process seal sensor None AM ph Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA differential Ball valve insertion with wiper and process seal sensor None AM ORP 5 wire differential Ball valve insertion sensor None AM ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA differential Ball valve insertion sensor None AM ORP 5 wire differential Ball valve insertion with wiper and process seal sensor None AM ORP Two wire transmitter, 4-20mA differential Ball valve insertion with wiper and process seal sensor None Notes: Standard cable length is 15 ft (5m). For other lengths, please specify. P0 Standard ph glass electrode is available, add a P0 to the end of the part number. R0 Standard platinum ORP glass electrode is available, add a R0 to the end of the part number. R1 Gold ORP glass electrodes are available, add a R! to the end of the part number. 5-4

121 500 SERIES OMBINATION PH /ORP SENSORS The 500 Series ombination ph and ORP probes are inexpensive so they provide exceptional value for those non-challenging applications. They come complete with a standard 10ft cable but can be supplied with a cable of virtually any length. It comes complete with tinned wire leads and a single junction. The cable is available in 5 wire or with a two wire 4-20 ma output built-in. Due to the quality of this product, the manufacturer offers a 1 year limited warranty. Applications Municipal Water and Sewage Treatment Industrial Waste Water Treatment and Neutralization Plating Food and Beverage Processing and Manufacturing Pulp and Paper hemical Manufacturing Automotive Manufacturing Features Inexpensive 10 ft (3.3m) cable length Flow thru or submersion Industrial strength Tinned wire leads Single junction 1 year limited warranty Enhanced Part # Parameter Measured Body Type Performance Options P-525 ph PV body, 1/2" MNPT threaded front end None P-575 ph PV body, 1" MNPT threaded ends None P-585 ph Epoxy body, variable insertion - includes 3/4" PV compression fitting None R-525 ph PV body, 1/2" MNPT threaded front end None R-575 ph PV body, 1" MNPT threaded ends None R-585 ph Epoxy body, variable insertion - includes 3/4" PV compression fitting None 5 Notes: Standard cable length is 10 ft (3m). For other lengths, please specify. For automatic temperature compensation on the ph probes, add a K to the end of the part number. BN For a nmbn connector, add a BN to the end of the part number. For a GLI Temperature compensation device, PT1000 RTD, add a 1 to the end of the part number. For an AquaMetrix Temperature compensation device, 300 ohm thermister, add a 2 to the end of the part number. 5-5

122 MS SERIES ONDUTIVITY SENSORS Epoxy body Fits 3/4 installations Graphite electrodes Flow thru or submersible Automatic temperature compensation Variable insertion 1 year limited warranty Available in cell constant of 0.01(resistivity), , 0.5, 1, 10, 20 and 50 Available with mounting options of low temperature (3/4 MNPT PV compression fitting), high temperature (3/4 MNPT SS compression fitting), and extended length cell for use with hot tap ball valve MS-HT, and extended cable length Available with GLI Temperature compensation device, PT1000 RTD or AquaMetrix temperature compensation device, 3KΩ thermistor Available with a variety of accessories, contact customer service for more information. ES SERIES ONDUTIVITY SENSORS 5 Electrodeless onductivity Sensors Polypropylene body onvertible style fitting Temperature compensation: PT1000 RTD 20 ft (6.6 m) able 1 year limited warranty Used in processes where conventional contacting sensors may foul or corrode. Each sensors can be mounted in flow through applications or submersion mounted in tanks or open vessels. 8760LP HLORINE & PH ANALYZER Unique, new galvanic chlorine sensor, no reagents required Includes two separate loops: total free chlorine and ph Two chlorine readouts: total free chlorine and free available chlorine Displays ppm chlorine, ph, temperature, alarm setpoints, and calibration status Durable NEMA 4X (IP65) enclosure, two 4-20 ma outputs, two 10 amp SPDT relays This is ideal for samples with fluctuating ph values Temperature compensation is obtained via a temperature sensor in the chlorine sensor. Uses a unique galvanic sensor with a replaceable membrane cartridge that measures Total Free Available hlorine and Free Available hlorine. Temperature compensation is automatic or manual. The advantage of the galvanic cell is that an absolute zero measurement can be obtained The 8760LP analyzer has two isolated and assignable 4-20mA outputs, two 10Amp SPDT relays, and an RS485 port. Pre-mounted on a panel for ease of installation. Replacement membranes, ph probes and chlorine sensors are also available. 5-6

123 IP80 SERIES PADDLE WHEEL FLOW SENSORS Will fit 1/2-8 pipes Sensors are available in brass, 316 stainless steel, PV, PVDF, and Polypropylene. hoices of materials for compatibility with variety of chemicals Fixed depth in fitting ensures proper placement in pipe High level signal can be sent up to 2000 feet Six bladed impeller design High-quality jewel bearings and nickel-bound tungsten carbide shafts are used for extreme low friction and long life. Each fitting individually calibrated and marked with K-factor (Pulses per Gallon) Available with Tee or Saddle fittings IP100 SERIES PADDLE WHEEL FLOW SENSORS Wide flow range Pulsed output Single moving part Six bladed impeller Rugged cast aluminum housing Removable jewel bearings & rotor Easy depth adjustment 3 to 48 pipe sizes Available in brass or 316 stainless models to fit 3 to 48 pipe Installation fittings are standard 1-1/2 (101/201) NPT Fittings such as saddles and weldolets are also available EPDM O-rings KYNAR impeller Ruby jewel bearing Tungsten carbide shaft 5 SPX SERIES PADDLE WHEEL FLOW SENSORS Accurate at low flows Simple and durable ompatible with a variety of chemicals Visual flow monitoring Inexpensive Six blade impeller For small pipe sizes (3/8 to 1 ) Available in 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, and 1 nominal pipe sizes with female NPT threads They employ jewel bearings to allow for very low minimum flow rates and superior life. 5-7

124 3200U ULTRASONI FLOW/LEVEL MONITOR Displays, transmits, totalizes and controls User friendly, 3 key calibration Password protected Isolated 4-20 ma output Three fully programmable relays Dual digital display and optional data logger Automatic temperature compensation Watertight, dusttight NEMA 4X (IP66) polycarbonate enclosure Sensor ranges from 8 inches to 52 feet Easy set up with preprogrammed sizes for weirs, flumes, and tanks Panel mount kit must be ordered separately Available with power supply of VA 50/60 Hz (Standard), VA 50/60 Hz, 24 VD, 12 VD (Battery Power) Available with Standard NEMA 4X (IP66) fiberglass enclosure or optional XJ Explosion proof NEMA 7 enclosure Available with a heater and thermostat as an option for A models only 5 DFM-4.0 DOPPLER FLOW MONITOR Displays, transmits, totalizes and controls Large, 4-digit LD display 10-Digit Totalizer User friendly, 3 key calibration Password protected Isolated 4-20 ma output 3 programmable control relays Optional data logger & intrinsic safety barriers Watertight, dusttight NEMA 4X (IP66) polycarbonate enclosure Digital signal processing system RFI rejection filters Measure flow from outside a pipe. Ideal for difficult liquids that would damage regular flow meters - waste water, slurries, sludge, chemicals, viscous liquids and abrasives. There is no obstruction to flow and no pressure drop. The standard, strap-on ultrasonic sensor fits any pipe 1/2 (12.5 mm) inside diameter or larger. Available with power supply of VA 50/60 Hz (Standard), VA 50/60 Hz, 24 VD, 12 VD (Battery Power) Available with Standard NEMA 4X (IP66) fiberglass enclosure or optional XJ Explosion proof NEMA 7 enclosure Available with a heater and thermostat as an option for A models only Available with a variety of sensors. 5-8

125 AVFM-II AREA VELOITY FLOW LEVEL MONITOR Displays, transmits, totalizes and controls Measures Velocity + Level to calculate Flow Large, 4-digit LD display 16-Digit Totalizer/Menu/Status User friendly, 3 key calibration Password protected 3 Isolated 4-20 ma outputs 2 programmable control relays Optional data logger & intrinsic safety barriers Watertight, dusttight NEMA 4X (IP66) polycarbonate enclosure RFI rejection filters Measures flow in pipes, rectangular, trapezoid and egg-shaped channels Monitors flow through open channels, partially full sewer pipes and surcharged pipes without a flume or weir. 5 STINGRAY LEVEL & VELOITY LOGGER Portable and compact Watertight, airtight, dust proof (IP67) polycarbonate enclosure Runs on 4 alkaline D cell batteries Measures level, velocity and temperature in open pipes, channels, partially full sewer pipes, and surcharge pipes without a flume or weir for extended periods Includes Windows software for Flow analysis and reporting designed for municipal storm water, combined effluent, raw sewage, irrigation water and stream flow. 5-9

126 2200D DISSOLVED OXYGEN ONTROLLER Microprocessor based analyzer & controller for Dissolved Oxygen User-friendly design with menu on the front panel Easy to read with large, bright LED display Quick and easy to calibrate 0 20 ppm and 0 100% ranges Altitude compensation Membrane perforation alarm Two control relays with adjustable deadband and a third relay for high/low alarm NEMA 4X enclosure 0-1 ma and 0-5 VD non-isolated outputs 4-20 ma isolated output with range expand, cycling on/off control Standard enclosure is surface mount, panel and pipe mounting optional Dissolved oxygen probe P91 sold separately. 5 P91 DISSOLVED OXYGEN PROBE Supports up to a 12-foot boom Replaceable sensor Ball float minimizes membrane fouling The sensor consists of a probe (P91) to which is fitted a cartridge that contains a precisely stretched permeable membrane, electrodes and electrolyte (p/n P91D) The inexpensive cartridge (P/n P91) will provide continuous service for 6 to 12 months and is easily replaced in minutes. The cartridge is supplied hermetically sealed for longer shelf life. 5-10

127 SIGNET 8900 MULTI-PARAMETER ONTROLLER The Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter ontroller takes the concept of modularity to the extreme. Each 8900 is field commissioned with the users specified combination of inputs, outputs, and relays using simple-to-install modular boards into the base unit. To assemble a controller, there is a choice of two base units offered with a choice of back-lit LD or vacuum fluorescent display. Then, continue building with a selection of plug-in modules for either two, four, or six input channels which accepts any of the Signet sensors listed below, and/or other manufacturer s sensors via a 4 to 20 ma signal converter (Signet Model 8058). To complete your unit, choose a power module with universal A line voltage or 12 to 24 VD ±10%, regulated. Analog output and relay modules are available and easily installed. Plus, the 8900 will support up to four additional relays via an external relay module. Digital input to the 8900 enables longer cable runs and simplified wiring with minimal noise interference. Advanced relay logic allows users to select up to 3 measurement sources to trigger 1 relay. Derived measurements include difference, sum, ratio, percent recovery, percent rejection, percent passage and BTU. SIGNET PH/ORP ELETRODES The Signet ph and ORP Electrodes features a patented reference electrode design and uses the unique foul-proof patented DryLoc connector. The large area PE reference junction and pathway is constructed to increase the total reference effectiveness and ensures long service life. The robust Ryton threaded sensor body and choice of flat ph, bulb ph, or flat ORP sensing elements provides broad range of chemical compatibility for a wide variety of applications. There are two optional sensing versions, HF and L, available. The quick temperature response is available in either a PT-1000 or 3KΩ temperature sensor and allows compatibility with all Signet ph/orp instruments. The electrodes are general-purpose sensors ideal for a wide range of applications. The sensors incorporate ¾ NPT or ISO 7/1 R¾ threads for installing into standard pipe-tees. They can also be mounted directly into Signet standard fittings. 5 SIGNET PH/ORP ELETRODES The Signet ph and ORP Electrodes feature a unique foul-proof DryLoc connector with gold-plated contacts designed specifically for use with the Signet 2750 and 2760 Sensor Electronics and preamplifiers. These dependable and highly responsive electrodes feature a large reference chamber volume and intelligent positioning of internal elements that combine to extend the service life. The electrodes are offered with either flat or bulb sensing elements. The flat versions allow sediment and particles to sweep past the measurement surface, minimizing the risks of abrasion, breakage and coating. The bulb versions can be used for general purpose applications and are also offered with a glass or plastic body for use with the 3719 Wet-Tap assembly. The choice of a PT-1000 or 3KO temperature sensor allows compatibility with all Signet ph/orp instruments. The electrodes are the flagship sensors of the Signet ph/orp product line. They are all-purpose sensors ideal for a wide range of universal applications. 5-11

128 SIGNET ONDUTIVITY ELETRODES Signet onductivity/resistivity Electrodes are designed to provide versatile installation and accurate sensing across a very broad dynamic range. These electrodes are built with a controlled surface finish to ensure accuracy and repeatability. The standard electrode is constructed 316 SS or Titanium, but there are other materials available for maximum chemical compatibility. Reversible threads or sanitary flanges allow for maximum installation versatility. Sanitary flange versions are available with an optional NIST Traceability ertificate to meet USP requirements. oupled with Signet patented measuring circuitry, a three decade measurement range is achieved without the need for troublesome electrode platinization. A platinum RTD (PT1000) located within the electrode allows optimal temperature sensing ONDUTIVITY SENSOR 5 The Signet 2850 onductivity/resistivity Sensor Electronics are available in various configurations for maximum installation flexibility. The universal mount version is for pipe, wall, or tank mounting and enables single or dual (digital versions only) inputs using any standard Signet conductivity / resistivity sensor. The threaded j-box version can be used with these same Signet sensors for submersible sensor mounting. It is also available as a combined integral system configuration for in-line mounting and includes a conductivity electrode in a choice of 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, or 10.0 cm-1 cell constants. The 2850 is ideal for applications with a conductivity range of to 400,000 μs or a resistivity range of 18.2 MΩ to 10 kω. All 2850 units are available with a choice of two outputs, digital (S3L) or 4 to 20 ma. The digital (S3L) output version allows for up to six sensor inputs directly into the Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter ontroller. The twowire 4 to 20 ma output version is available with eight 4 to 20 ma output ranges for each electrode cell constant. SIGNET 8450 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER The Signet 8450 Pressure Transmitter is a unique instrument that offers local or remote display with current and relay outputs. This model offers exceptional repeatability and accuracy over a wide operating pressure range. The instrument is available in field and panel mount configurations, single or dual channel input and is equipped with a 4 to 20 ma output, fully scaleable and reversible for each input channel. onfigurations include open collector outputs or relays with status indicators for process control or alarming. The unit also has the ability to accept other sensors with 4 to 20 ma output, via the Signet 8058 Signal onverter. The chemical resistant NEMA 4X/IP65 front face is found in both the highly visible field mount or black panel mount instrument, both featuring a self healing window, a standard ¼ DIN cutout and large push buttons for easy navigation. Programming capabilities are available for single point calibration, setting of relays and outputs, and output simulation function for complete system testing. 5-12

129 SIGNET 2450 PRESSURE SENSOR The 2450 Pressure Sensor has a onepiece injection molded PVDF body and ceramic diaphragm for superior compatibility in corrosive liquids. Three pressure versions allow for optimal resolution matched to your sensing needs. Solid state circuitry eliminates drift (no internal potentiometers). Built-in temperature compensation provides outstanding accuracy over wide temperature ranges. These sensors are available with a proprietary digital output (S3L), or field scaleable 4 to 20 ma output. Dual threaded ends allow submersion in process vessels, or in-line installation with conduit connection. Integral adapters (sold separately) may be used to create a compact assembly with a field mount version of the Signet 8250 Level or 8450 Pressure Transmitter. SIGNET 8350 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS The Signet 8350 Temperature Transmitter offers local or remote display with current and relay outputs. This model offers exceptional repeatability and accuracy over a wide operating temperature range. onfigurations include open collector outputs or mechanical relays with status indicators for process control or alarming. The unit also has the ability to accept other temperature sensors which have 4 to 20 ma output via the Signet 8058 Signal onverter. 5 The chemical resistant NEMA 4X/IP65 front face is found on both the highly visible field mount or black panel mount instruments with a self-healing window and a standard 1/4 DIN cutout. Dual input version allows difference calculation (ΔT) and offers cost savings with independent dual outputs. All models offer an output simulation function for complete system testing. SIGNET 2350 TEMPERATURE SENSOR The Signet 2350 Temperature Sensor has a one piece injection molded PVDF body that is ideal for use in high purity applications. It also outlasts metal sensors in aggressive liquids and eliminates the need for costly custom thermowells. These sensors are available with a proprietary digital output (S3L) or field-scaleable 4 to 20 ma output. Dual threaded ends (¾ in. NPT) allow submersion in process vessels, or in-line installation with conduit connection. An integral adapter kit (sold separately) may be used to create a compact assembly with field mount versions of the Signet 8350 Temperature Transmitter. 5-13

130 SIGNET 8250 LEVEL TRANSMITTER Signet 8250 Level Transmitters are compatible with the Signet 2250 Level sensor and 2450 Pressure Sensor. The instrument is available in field and panel mount configurations, single or dual-channel input and equipped with one 4 to 20 ma output, fully scaleable and reversible for each input channel. The unit also features two relays, plus the ability to support two additional externally mounted relays (for a total of four). Relay operation is selectable for High, Low, Window or Off, and includes fully adjustable hysteresis and trigger time delay. The unit also has the ability to accept other level sensors with 4 to 20 ma output via the Signet 8058 Signal onverter. Automatic level-to-volume conversion allows display and control of tank volume and/or level in units such as gallons, kilograms, feet or meters. Simply enter the dimensions of your tank or vessel, and the instrument will calculate volume from the level measurement. SIGNET 2250 HYDROSTRATI LEVEL SENSOR 5 The Signet 2250 Hydrostatic Level Sensor for level and depth control has a one-piece injection molded PVDF body and ceramic diaphragm for superior compatibility in corrosive liquids. Utilizing hydrostatic pressure, the 2250 disregards false level signals from steam vapors, foam or any other debris on the liquid surface. Two pressure ranges allow for optimal resolution matched to your sensing needs. Solid state circuitry eliminates drift (no internal potentiometers) Built-in temperature compensation provides outstanding accuracy over wide temperature ranges. These sensors are available with a proprietary digital output (S3L), or 4 to 20 ma output. The extended cable and capillary tubing with the union connection and a customer supplied conduit, allow submersion in process vessels. SIGNET FLOW SENSORS Fabco carries a complete line of Signet Flow sensors including: 515 Paddlewheel Rotor-X Flow Sensor 2536 Paddlewheel Rotor-X Flow Sensor 2537 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flowmeter 3519 Flow Wet-Tap Valve 525 Metalex Flow Sensor 2000 Micro Flow Sensor 2100 Turbine Flow Sensor 2507 Mini Flow Sensor 2517 Brass Paddlewheel Flow Sensor 2540 High Performance Flow Sensor 2551 Magmeter Flow Sensor 2552 Metal Magmeter Flow Sensor 7000/7001 Vortex Flow Sensor 8150 Battery Powered Flow Totalizer 8550 ProcessPro Flow Transmitter 5075 ProPoint Totalizing Flow Monitor 5090 ProPoint Sensor Flow Monitor 5500 ProPoint Flow Monitor 5600 ProPoint Batch ontroller 5-14

131 FLOWLINE EHOPOD The Flowline EchoPod is an innovative level sensor that replaces floats, conductance and pressure sensors that fail due to dirty, sticking and scaling media in small tanks 49.2 (1.25m) or less. EchoPod, a general purpose sensor, combines non-contact switch, controller and transmitter capabilities in one multi-function sensor. ombining 4 relays, 4-20 ma output and pump/valve control in one small sensor allows EchoPod to be your total solution. Maintenance free, EchoPod reduces tank system hardware through simplicity and consolidation. Additionally, EchoPod is well suited for corrosive and dirty applications with its non-metallic housing and transducer. EchoPod provides a total solution for fluid handling and automation. The time to Think Small and Win Big is now, and it s with EchoPod. It incorporates Webal, an innovative P user inter-face that provides fast and accurate configuration of your EchoPod. The EchoPod enclosure is made of flame retardant Polycarbonate (P/ABS FR). The transducer (black bottom) is made of Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) for maximum corrosion resistance. it is available with metric or imperial thread and with or without computer connection FOB. FLOWLINE EHOSAFE The Flowline EchoSafe is an ultrasonic level transmitter designed for hazardous applications, where an agency certified sensor is needed. A 2-wire (loop-powered) ultrasonic level transmitter that provides non-contact level measurement up to 10 m (32.8 ) in hazardous (classified) bulk storage, day tank, waste treatment and sump applications, and is well suited for challenging corrosive, slurry or waste media. EchoSafe utilizes Flowline s patented digital surface processing (DSP) technology, enabling surface imaging that provides adaptive technology for obstructions that may enter the beam column. This allows for greater dependability and accuracy in installations where obstructions below the sensor can t be avoided. It features accuracy of +/- 0.2% span in air, measurement range from 8 to 32.8, narrow beam diameter and minimum dead band. It is ideal for municipal water treatment, fuel oil storage, petrochemical refinery, industrial waste treatment, bio-diesel process monitoring, chemical storage tanks, pharmaceutical and laboratory waste storage. 5 FLOWLINE EHOTOUH The Flowline EchoTouch is offered in SA and enelec approved intrinsically safe or general purpose configurations. The two-wire ultrasonic transmitter provides noncontact level measurement up to 18 or 5.4m, and is ideally suited for challenging corrosive, slurry or waste liquids. The transmitter is typically selected for atmospheric bulk storage, day tank and waste sump applications located within a classified hazardous area. Media examples include diesel fuel and hydrochloric acid. The transmitter is calibrated in less than a minute using the LD display, 4-button interface and intuitive calibration menu. All user set points are held in non-volatile memory. In the event of acoustic signal loss, the transmitter will hold the current output at the user designated safe state. It is available in either metric or imperial mount thread. 5-15

132 FLOWLINE EHOSPAN This general purpose two-wire ultrasonic transmitter provides non-contact level measurement up to 32 or 10m, and is ideally suited for challenging ultrapure, corrosive or waste liquids. Push button calibrated, the transmitter is broadly selected for atmospheric bulk storage, day tank and waste sump applications. Media examples include wastewater and sodium hydroxide. Setup is fast and simple with push button calibration and LD display. Features include three measurement ranges up to 10m, 2 transducer, 6-segment LD display indicating level in inch or centimeter values, 7.6 cm minimum beam width for applications with restricted space, selectable display indicating level in air gap or liquid height, and PV/ABS enclosure rated NEMA 4X with rugged PVDF transducer. It is available with either metric or imperial mounting thread. FLOWLINE EHOSWITH II 5 This general purpose ultrasonic switch and controller provides non-contact level detection up to 24.6 (7.5 m) with 3 SPDT 60 VA 1A relays. EchoSwitch II features digital push button configuration, eliminating target calibration. Each relay can be configured on a single set point to control pumps, valves or alarms. In addition, all 3 relays can be simplexed, duplexed or triplexed. EchoSwitch II now features an integrated timer with pump/valve delay and timed pump alternation. The switch is well suited for a broad range of corrosive, waste and slurry type media. EchoSwitch II is broadly selected for atmospheric day tanks, pump lift stations and waste sump applications. It features noncontact level detection with integral 3-channel relay control, simple digital push button configuration, pump simplex, duplex and triplex options. It is available in 2.5m (8.2 ) or 7.5m (24.6 ) range with metric or imperial mount thread. It is constructed of a polycarbonate NEMA 4X rated enclosure with a rugged PVDF transducer. FLOWLINE ONTAT LEVEL SENSORS Flowline contact sensors are available in buoyancy, ultrasonic, and vibration form. They are intrinsically safe for use in general purpose or hazardous applications, these switches are broadly applied in chemical, waste, hydrocarbon and petroleum based liquids. Media examples include sulfuric acid, diesel fuel and wastewater. These submersible sensors are universally mounted through the wall or inside the tank. They are available in a variety of corrosion resistant materials making them suitable for a wide variety of applications and fluids. 5-16

133 MINI-MAX LEVEL ONTROL MINI-MAX will control high or low levels of most all liquids. It is designed for use in corrosive atmospheres. This controller is ideal for high or low level alarm service and is compact and easy to install requiring no adjustments. The MINI-MAX is constructed of PV with a Polyethylene float and contains a built-in mounting adapter and conduit connector. It is rated at 20 Amps, 115/120 VA. it is available to open/contact on rising (Part # F-MM-MR) or to close/break on rising (Part # F-MM-BR) FILTERHEM MINI-STAT LEVEL ONTROL Part # F-MT-1 F-KMT-1 F-MTMB F-MTR-6 Material PV/POLYPRO Mini-Stat Switch PVDF Mini-Stat Switch Mounting Bracket 6" Extension with coupling The Mini-Stat is an all plastic miniature level limit control. It is compact and uses mnimum space. It is available in a PV/PP combination as well as an all PVDF design. The PV/PP product is ideal for applications up to 200 F and the PVDF version is ideal for applications up to 285 F. The height is adjustable by means of an extension pipe and mounting bracket. It requires a 115 VA - 20 Amp service and comes complete with 3 feet of wire. A water-tight conduit should be used on all installations. The Mini-Stat uses a magnetically actuated single pole, double throw switch. The Mini-Stat can be used in the following modes: Switch opens when float rises and closes when float falls. Switch closes when float rises and opens when float falls. One switch opens when float rises and one switch closes when float rises. 5 FILTERHEM LEVEL & PUMP ONTROLS Our compact, easy-mounting Flow-ontrol level is designed for trouble-free handling of corrosive liquids. The polypropylene tube and float operate without metallic contact or electric current in solution. Flow- ontrol will maintain high-low liquid levels in your tanks, empty sumps when full, and fill tanks automatically. Other uses include actuating pumps, triggering solenoid valves, plus turning off heaters if fluid is lost from tanks. High or low level alarms or secondary pump starts are also available for any model. onduit connection is standard. Prevention of running pumps dry is a great cost saving for most companies. Part # Load Material F-LL-120P 115V to 20 Amps. (1 HP. or under) POLYPRO F-LL-24P 24 VA (1 HP. or under) POLYPRO F-LL-120HT 115V to 20 Amps. (1 H.P. or under) PV F-LL-24HT 24 VA (1 HP. or under) PV F-LL-120K 115V to 20 Amps. (1 H.P. or under) PVDF F-LL-24K 24 VA (1 HP. or under) PVDF 5-17

134 HANNA HI504 PH/ORP ONTROLLER HI 504 introduces an innovative means of ph and ORP control which enhances the entire line of process controllers. This technology supplies the means to control, from any distance and in real time, one or more installations, allowing the user to optimize operations such as maintenance cycles. RS485 and Windows compatible software provides for two-way communication where the user can control the complete regulation process from the convenience of a P or through his cellular phone with SMS. A battery of self-diagnostic and troubleshooting functions, such as our innovative sensor check feature, guarantees reliability. Any type of industrial probe with a BN connector can be used with this controller. The exclusive fail-safe alarm system protects against problems caused by power supply failure or signal interruption. HI 504 Process ontroller Series complies with the production standards required by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). It is available with single setpoint, dual setpoint, single setpoint & advanced cleaning, or dual setpoint & advanced cleaning. It is available with single or dual analog output. It is available with 115VA, 230 VA and 100VA power supply. HANNA HI700 E ONTROLLER 5 The HI 700 series of regulators offer state-of-the-art specifications for your process control. They can be configured for ON/OFF, Proportional, PI or PID control. They can be customized to best fit your application. A menu-driven display aids the user throughout the operations with running messages and clear prompts. All relevant parameters can be simply adjusted and will remain memorized until overwritten. Bright LED s show the current status even from a distance. With self-diagnostic features and extractable terminals, installation and maintenance are rapid and simple. Password protection guarantees that the calibration and predetermined parameters cannot be altered unnecessarily. The controllers can operate with 4-ring probe or 4-20 ma signal. They accept probes with or without a built-in Pt100 temperature sensor. HI 710 monitors and controls both conductivity and TDS. It is available with 115VA or 230 VA power supply. HANNA PH, ORP, FREE/TOTAL HLORINE ANALYSER The PA 310 series of analyzers check chlorine levels in applications such as pools and spas, drinking water and influent and effluent discharge of water to ensure public safety, prevent waste and protect the environment by reducing over dosage. Features include alarms that can be set for chlorine control, parameters that can be sent through SMS, large graphical display with backlight, user-friendly interface, and it can store up to 3500 pieces of data, that can be displayed or downloaded to a P. PA 320 also measures ph and temperature. PA330 also measures ph, temperature and ORP. 5-18

135 HANNA INDUSTRIAL PROBES HANNA instruments presents a new series of combination ph and ORP electrodes, including more than 300 models, incorporating over 20 years of electrode manufacturing experience. The most advanced feature of this series is the electrode shape with flat tip, which virtually eliminates deposits that can foul the electrode, significantly reducing necessary maintenance. This characteristic makes flat tip electrodes ideal for continuous in-line monitoring, and with solutions containing aggressive chemicals. The PVDF body offers a higher level of mechanical and temperature resistance. Moreover, the PVDF material is nontoxic and compatible with food applications. Each ph and ORP electrode is provided with an internal matching pin that can avoid typical problems caused by grounding loop current, such as, progressive damage of the electrode, fluctuating measurements, and poor process regulation Notes: For the sensor type of ph electrodes specify 1 for LT series(-10 to 80 / 23 to 156 F; 0 to 12 ph), 2 for GP series (General Purpose), 3 for HT series (0 to 100 / 32 to 212 F; 0 to 14 ph) and 4 for HF (Fluoride-resistant) For the sensor type of ORP electrodes specify 1 for Platinum and 2 for Gold. Available with BN connector, wire direct connection, BN + Pt100 temperature sensor, direct wire + Pt 100 temperature sensor, BN + Pt 1000 temperature sensor, direct wire + Pt1000 temperature sensor, BN connector, amplified, and BN + Pt 100 sensor, amplified Available cable length include 5, 10, 15 m for non-amplified electrodes and 15, 25, 50, 75 m for amplified electrodes Part # Measures Junction HI1006 ph PTFE HI1016 ph eramic HI1026 ph Open HI2004 ORP PTFE HI2014 ORP eramic HI2024 ORP Open 5 HANNA POKET TESTERS With these powerful waterproof testers, you can easily measure ph, E/TDS, temperature, and ORP. These instruments feature replaceable electrode technology and stainless steel temperature probes for faster, more precise measurements. The E/TDS meters have graphite probes for fast response and contamination resistance. At startup, each tester performs a self check then displays the remaining battery level assuring proper working condition. A stability indicator tells you when to take the reading and a hold button freezes the display for easy and accurate recording. All information is displayed on a redesigned LD that gives you the complete picture at a glance. Features include Replaceable Electrodes, Rejuvenating ph Junctions, ontamination Resistance, and lose Proximity Temperature Probe. Model Number HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI measures ORP ph/orp phep 4 phep 5 ombo ph/e ombo DiST 5 DiST 6 ph E 0 to 3999 μs/cm 0.00 to ms/cm 0 to 3999 μs/cm 0.00 to ms/cm TDS 0 to 2000 ppm 0.00 to ppt 0 to 2000 ppm 0.00 to ppt ORP ±1000 mv ±1000 mv Temp. 0.0 to to to to to to to to 60.0 Battery Life (hrs)

136 HANNA MULTI PARAMETER METER The HANNA HI multiparameter portable meter with GPS receiver monitors up to 13 different water quality parameters (6 measured, 7 calculated) including ph, ORP, conductivity, temperature, DO and many more. Measurements from specific locations are tracked with detailed coordinate information that can be viewed immediately on the display. GPS information can be transferred to a P using HANNA s HI software. GPS information can also be viewed by GPS mapping software such as Google maps. licking on visited locations using mapping software such as Google Maps displays measurement information. The built-in 12 channel GPS receiver and antenna guarantees a position accuracy of 30 ft (10 m). For measuring points within a 30 ft range or where GPS signals are not available, HI s Fast Tracker is invaluable for associating measurements with their locations. HANNA s exclusive Fast Tracker Tag I.D. System monitors and records data using ibutton s that can be installed at any number of sampling sites. The HI has a graphic, backlit display that automatically sizes the digits to fit the screen and allows full configuration of each parameter measured along with on-screen graphing capability. The meter incorporates comprehensive GLP features and the downloading of data via USB connection. Each parameter is supported by on-screen context sensitive help, both in the calibration mode and during measurement. Designed for outdoor environments, the meter is impact resistant and waterproof. 5 ALIBRATION AND BUFFER SOLUTIONS alibration and buffer solutions are available for ph, ORP, sodium, sodium chloride, total dissolved solids E, fluoride, conductivity, dissolved Oxygen in 20 ml pouches as well as 230 ml and 460 ml bottles. A wide variety of electrode cleaning solutions are also available. 5-20

137 F300 - PITOT TUBE ARYLI FLOWMETERS The F-300 series flowmeter has been a pool industry standard for more than 30 years. It is also well suited to irrigation and municipal water system applications. The F-300 series has a tough, one piece machined acrylic meter body, 316 SS or Teflon float, permanent screen printed scale, and a calibrated pitot tube. Standard F-300 series flowmeters are designed to mount on a horizontal pipe, however, should your system lack the room required for this type of installation, the D & U (downstream or upstream flow) series, for vertical mount, is offered. Part # Pipe Size GPM LPM F-30100T 1 5 to to 160 F-30100TR 1 2 to 10 8 to 38 Flow Part # Pipe Size GPM LPM Direction U-30150P 1-1/2 20 to to 375 UP D-30150P 1-1/2 20 to to 375 DOWN U-30150PR 1-1/2 9 to to 120 UP D-30150PR 1-1/2 9 to to 120 DOWN U-30200P 2 40 to to 550 UP D-30200P 2 40 to to 550 DOWN U-30200PR 2 18 to to 280 UP D-30200PR 2 18 to to 280 DOWN F-30125T 1 1/4 15 to to 280 F-30125TR 1 1/4" 5 to to 130 F-30150T 1 1/2 20 to to 375 F-30150TR 1 1/2" 9 to to 110 F-30200T 2 40 to to 550 F-30200TR 2 15 to to 260 F-30250T 2-1/2 60 to to 900 F-30300T 3 80 to to 1125 F-30300TR 3 40 to to 520 F-30400T to to 2000 F-30600T to to 3900 F-30800T to to

138 F-400N MAHINED ARYLI TUBE FLOWMETER Features Tough machined acrylic meter body, highly polished to a clear finish. Direct reading permanent scale and 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy rod guided floats. White back reflector for easy reading. F/NPT adapters with Viton o-ring seals and aluminum stress ring thread supports. 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy rod guided floats and white back for easy reading. Acceptable in direct sunlight applications Maximum pressure drop: 2 PSI and approximate shipping wt: 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg) Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod\Adapters: Polypropylene or PV (varies per model) O-ring seals:viton (optional EPDM) Float:Standard Series, 316SS or PV (varies per model) K- Series, Hastelloy or PV (varies per model) Guide Rod: Standard Series, 316SS and K- Series, Hastelloy 5 For Liquid Part # Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Adapter Material Float Material 316 SS Guide Rod material F-40250LN to to 1.0 1/4 PV PV F-40250LN to to 1.0 3/8 PP PV F-40050LN to to 2.0 1/4 PV 316 SS F-40050LN to to 2.0 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40375LN to to 4.0 3/8 PP PV F-40375LN to to 4.0 1/2 PP PV F-40376LN to to 7.5 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40376LN to to 7.5 1/2 PP 316 SS F-40377LN to to 11 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40377LN to to 11 1/2 PP 316 SS F-40500LN to to 20 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40500LN to to 20 1/2 PP 316 SS Hastelloy Guide Rod Material F-40250LK to to 1.0 1/4 PV PV F-40250LK to to 1.0 3/8 PP PV F-40050LK to to 2.0 1/4 PV Hastelloy F-40050LK to to 2.0 3/8 PP Hastelloy F-40375LK to to 4.0 3/8 PP PV F-40375LK to to 4.0 1/2 PP PV F-40376LK to to 7.5 3/8 PP Hastelloy F-40376LK to to 7.5 1/2 PP Hastelloy F-40377LK to to 11 3/8 PP Hastelloy F-40377LK to to 11 1/2 PP Hastelloy F-40500LK to to 20 3/8 PP Hastelloy F-40500LK to to 20 1/2 PP Hastelloy Specifications Max. working pressure: 150 PSI ( F (21 ) Max. Fluid Temperature: Polypropylene adapters: 150 F (65 0 PSI PV adapters and floats: 120 F (49 0 PSI Full scale accuracy: +/- 5% alibration fluid: water with specific gravity of 1.0 Scale length: 4 (100mm) For Air Part # Range (SFM) Range (MPH) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Adapter Material Float Material F-40250GN to to 3.2 1/4 PV PV F-40250GN to to 3.2 3/8 PP PV F-40376GN to to 10 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40376GN to to 10 1/2 PP 316 SS F-40377GN to to 20 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40377GN to to 20 1/2 PP 316 SS F-40500GN to to 34 3/8 PP 316 SS F-40500GN to to 34 1/2 PP 316 SS F-40500LK to to 20 3/8 PP Hastelloy F-40500LK to to 20 1/2 PP Hastelloy 5-22

139 F-410N MAHINED ARYLI TUBE FLOWMETER Features Tough machined acrylic meter body, highly polished to a clear finish. Direct reading permanent scale. White back reflector for easy reading. F/NPT adapters with Viton o-ring seals and aluminum stress ring thread supports. 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy rod guided floats. Acceptable in direct sunlight applications. Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod Adapters: Polypropylene Guide Rod Holder: Polypropylene O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Float: Standard Series is 316SS and K- Series, Hastelloy Guide Rod: Standard Series, 316SS and K- Series, Hastelloy For Liquid Part # Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Adapter Material Float Material 316 SS Guide Rod F-40750LN-12 1 to 10 4 to 38 3/4 PP 316 SS F-40750LN-16 1 to 10 4 to 38 1 PP 316 SS F-41017LN-12 1 to 17 4 to 64 3/4 PP 316 SS F-41017LN-16 1 to 17 4 to 64 1 PP 316 SS F-41000LN-12 2 to 20 8 to 80 3/4 PP 316 SS F-41000LN-16 2 to 20 8 to 80 1 PP 316 SS Hastelloy Guide Rod F-40750LK-12 1 to 10 4 to 38 3/4 PP Hastelloy F-40750LK-16 1 to 10 4 to 38 1 PP Hastelloy F-41017LK-12 1 to 17 4 to 64 3/4 PP Hastelloy F-41017LK-16 1 to 17 4 to 64 1 PP Hastelloy F-41000LK-12 2 to 20 8 to 80 3/4 PP Hastelloy F-41000LK-16 2 to 20 8 to 80 1 PP Hastelloy Specifications Max. working pressure: 150 PSI ( F (21 ) Max. Fluid Temperature: 150 F (65 0 PSI Full scale accuracy: +/- 5% alibration fluid: Water with specific gravity of 1.0 Scale length: 5 (127mm) Maximum pressure drop: 2 PSI Approximate shipping wt: 2 lb. (.91 kg) For Air Part # Range (SFM) Range (MPH) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Adapter Material Float Material F-40750GN-12 4 to 45 8 to 80 3/4 PP 316 SS F-40750GN-16 4 to 45 8 to 80 1 PP 316 SS F-41017GN-12 5 to to 125 3/4 PP 316 SS F-41017GN-16 5 to to PP 316 SS F-41000GN to to 140 3/4 PP 316 SS F-41000GN to to PP 316 SS F-40500GN to to 34 1/2 PP 316 SS F-40500LK to to 20 3/8 PP Hastelloy F-40500LK to to 20 1/2 PP Hastelloy

140 F-420N MAHINED ARYLI TUBE FLOWMETER Features Tough machined acrylic meter body, highly polished to a clear finish. Direct reading permanent scale with white back reflector for easy reading. 1 F/NPT or 1-1/2 M/NPT adapters with high grade Viton o-ring seals. 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy rod guided floats. Acceptable in direct sunlight applications. 5 Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod Adapters: PV Guide Rod Holder: Polysulfone O-ring seals:viton (optional EPDM) Float: Standard Series, 316SS and K-Series, Hastelloy Guide Rod: Standard Series, 316SS and K- Series, Hastelloy Specifications Max. working pressure: 130 PSI ( F (21 ) Max. Fluid Temperature: 130 F (54 0 PSI Full scale accuracy: +/- 5% alibration fluid: Water with specific gravity of 1.0 Scale length: 4 (100mm) Maximum pressure drop: 2 PSI Approximate shipping wt: 2 lb. (.91 kg) For Liquid Part # Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Adapter Material Float Material 316 SS Guide Rod material F-42025LN-16 5 to to F/NPT PV 316 SS F-42025LN 5 to to /2 M/NPT PV 316 SS F-42040LN-16 8 to to F/NPT PV 316 SS F-42040LN 8 to to /2 M/NPT PV 316 SS F-42050LN to to F/NPT PV 316 SS F-42050LN 10 to to /2 M/NPT PV 316 SS Hastelloy Guide Rod material F-42025LK-16 5 to to F/NPT PV 316 SS F-42025LK 5 to to /2 M/NPT PV 316 SS F-42040LK-16 8 to to F/NPT PV 316 SS F-42040LK 8 to to /2 M/NPT PV 316 SS F-42050LK to to F/NPT PV 316 SS F-42050LK 10 to to /2 M/NPT PV 316 SS 5-24

141 F-430N MAHINED ARYLI TUBE FLOWMETER Features Tough machined acrylic meter body, highly polished to a clear finish. Direct reading permanent scale. White back reflector for easy reading. 1-1/2 or 2 F/NPT adapters with high grade Viton O-ring seals and aluminum stress ring thread supports. 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy rod guided floats. Acceptable for direct sunlight applications. Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod Adapters: PV Guide Rod Holder: Polysulfone O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Float:Standard Series, 316SS and K-Series, Hastelloy Guide Rod: Standard Series, 316SS and K- Series, Hastelloy Specifications Max. working pressure: 130 PSI ( F (21 ) Max. Fluid Temperature: 130 F (54 0 PSI Full scale accuracy: +/- 5% alibration fluid: water with specific gravity of 1.0 Scale length: 5 (127mm) Maximum pressure drop: 3 PSI Approximate shipping wt: 6 lb. (2.7 kg) For Liquid Part # Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Adapter Material Float Material 316 SS Guide Rod material F-43040LNS 4 to to PV 316 SS F-43040LNS-24 4 to to /2 PV 316 SS F-43060LNS 6 to to PV 316 SS F-43060LNS-24 6 to to /2 PV 316 SS F-43080LNS 8 to to PV 316 SS F-43080LNS-24 8 to to /2 PV 316 SS F-43100LNS 20 to to PV 316 SS 5 F-43100LNS to to /2 PV 316 SS Hastelloy Guide Rod material F-43040LNK 4 to to PV Hastelloy F-43040LNK-24 4 to to /2 PV Hastelloy F-43060LNK 6 to to PV Hastelloy F-43060LNK-24 6 to to /2 PV Hastelloy F-43080LNK 8 to to PV Hastelloy F-43080LNK-24 8 to to /2 PV Hastelloy F-43100LNK 20 to to PV Hastelloy F-43100LNK to to /2 PV Hastelloy 5-25

142 F-550 MAHINED ARYLI BLOK FLOWMETER Features Durable, highly polished, one piece meter body. 316 Stainless steel floats and float guides. Sturdy adapters with Viton O-ring seals. Bulkhead nuts attach directly to inside panel. Separate mounting screws are not required. Adjustable Flow ontrol Valve (F-550A only) easy to disassemble. No special tools. required, ALL FIELD REPLAEABLE. Acceptable for direct sunlight applications. Specifications Temperature: pressure Pressure: 250 psig/17.2 F/21 Full scale accuracy: ± 5% Meter Body material: Machined acrylic Adapter material: Polypropylene O-rings: Viton Float material: #316 SS Approximate shipping wt.: 0.2 lbs. (.907 kg.) 5 For Liquid Part # Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Float Material Float Material F-55250L to to 1 1/4 M/NPT #316 SS F-55375L 0.1 to to 4 3/8 M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-55376L 0.2 to to 7.5 3/8 M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-55500L 0.5 to 5 2 to 20 1/2 M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-55750L 1 to 10 4 to 40 3/4 M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-55005L 1 to 5 3 to 18 1 M/NPT Teflon 316 SS F-55010L 1 to 10 4 to 40 1 M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-55015L 1 to 15 5 to 60 1 M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-55200L 2 to to 75 1" M/NPT #316 SS 316 SS F-43100LNK to to /2 PV Hastelloy For Air Part # Range (SFM) Adapter Size ( F/NPT) Float material Adapter material Float material F-55250G 0.1 to 1.2 1/4 M/NPT #316 SS F-55375G 0.5 to 4.5 3/8 M/NPT #316 SS PV 316 SS F-55376G 1 to 7 3/8 M/NPT #316 SS PV 316 SS F-55500G 2 to 20 1/2 M/NPT #316 SS PV 316 SS F-55750G 4 to 45 3/4 M/NPT #316 SS PV 316 SS 5-26

143 F-440 POLYSULFONE FLOWMETER Features Polysulfone meter body resists high temperatures and pressures. ompact size for tight installation spaces. 316SS or Hastelloy rod guided float. Union connections for easy installation and maintenance. Direct reading permanent scale. Materials of onstruction Meter Body: Polysulfone Adapters: Standard Series: Polysulfone M/NPT Solarmeter Series: Brass F/NPT, M/NPT, or Sweat Guide Rod Holder: Polysulfone O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Union Nuts (non wetted): Standard Series: Polysulfone Solarmeter Series: Anodized Aluminum Float: 316SS, PV or Teflon (varies per model) Guide Rod: Standard Series, 316SS and K- Series, Hastelloy Specifications Max. working pressure:150 PSI ( F (21 ) Max. fluid temperature: Standard units: 212 F (100 0 PSI Units with PV floats: 130 F (54 0 PSI Solarmeter units: 240 F (115 0 PSI Full scale accuracy:+/- 5% alibration fluid: water with specific gravity of 1.0 Scale length: 2 (50mm) Environment: Not for direct sunlight exposure. Maximum pressure drop: 2 PSI Approximate shipping wt: 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg) 5 Pipe M/NPT Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Float Material For Liquid In-Line Mount Part # Panel Mount Part # Panel Mount Adjustable Part # 316 SS Guide Rod 3/8.025 to to 1.0 PV F-44250LH-6 F-44250LHE-6 F-44250LEA-6 1/2.025 to to 1.0 PV F-44250LH-8 F-44250LHE-8 F-44250LEA-8 3/8 0.1 to to SS F-44375LH-6 F-44375LHE-6 F-44375LEA-6 1/2 0.1 to to SS F-44375LH-8 F-44375LHE-8 F-44375LEA-8 3/8 0.2 to to SS F-44376LH-6 F-44376LHE-6 F-44376LEA-6 1/2 0.2 to to SS F-44376LH-8 F-44376LHE-8 F-44376LEA-8 3/8 0.5 to to SS F-44500LH-6 F-44500LHE-6 F-44500LEA-6 1/2 0.5 to to SS F-44500LH-8 F-44500LHE-8 F-44500LEA-8 1/2 1.0 to to SS F-44750LH-8 F-44750LHE-8 F-44750LEA-8 3/4 1.0 to to SS F-44750LH-12 F-44750LHE-12 F-44750LEA-12 Hastelloy Guide Rod 3/8.025 to to 1.0 PV F-44250LHK-6 F-44250LHKE-6 F-44250LKEA-6 1/2.025 to to 1.0 PV F-44250LHK-8 F-44250LHKE-8 F-44250LKEA-8 3/8 0.1 to to 4.0 Teflon F-44375LHK-6 F-44375LHKE-6 F-44375LKEA-6 1/2 0.1 to to 4.0 Teflon F-44375LHK-8 F-44375LHKE-8 F-44375LKEA-8 3/8 0.2 to to 7.5 Hastelloy F-44376LHK-6 F-44376LHKE-6 F-44376LKEA-6 1/2 0.2 to to 7.5 Hastelloy F-44376LHK-8 F-44376LHKE-8 F-44376LKEA-8 3/8 0.5 to to 18.0 Hastelloy F-44500LHK-6 F-44500LHKE-6 F-44500LKEA-6 1/2 0.5 to to 18.0 Hastelloy F-44500LHK-8 F-44500LHKE-8 F-44500LKEA-8 1/2 1.0 to to 37.5 Hastelloy F-44750LHK-8 F-44750LHKE-8 F-44750LKEA-8 3/4 1.0 to to 37.5 Hastelloy F-44750LHK-12 F-44750LHKE-12 F-44750LKEA

144 F-450 POLYSULFONE FLOWMETER Features Polysulfone meter body resists high temperatures and pressures. Taller size for easier reading. 316SS or Hastelloy rod guided float. Union connections for easy installation and maintenance. Direct reading permanent scale. 5 Materials of onstruction Meter Body: Polysulfone Adapters: Standard Series: Polysulfone F/NPT or M/NPT Solarmeter Series: Brass M/NPT or Sweat Guide Rod Holder: Polysulfone O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Union Nuts (non wetted): Standard Series: Polysulfone Solarmeter Series: Anodized Aluminum Guide Rod: Standard Series: 16SS K- Series: Hastelloy For Liquid Specifications Max. working pressure: 150 PSI ( F (21 ) Max. fluid temperature: Standard units: 212 F (100 0 PSI Solarmeter units: 240 F (115 0 PSI Full scale accuracy: +/- 5% alibration fluid: water, specific gravity 1.0 Scale length: 4 (100mm) Environment: Not for direct sunlight exposure. Maximum pressure drop: 2 PSI Approximate shipping wt: 0.5 lb. (.23 kg) Also available in 1, 1 1/2, and 2 sizes Pipe Size Range (GPM) Range (LPM) Float Material In-Line Mount Part # Panel Mount Part # Panel Mount Adjustable Part # 316 SS Guide Rod 3/8 F/NPT 0.1 to to 4.0 Teflon F-45375LHN-6 F-45375LHNE-6 F-45375LEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 0.1 to to 4.0 Teflon F-45375LHN-8 F-45375LHNE-8 F-45375LEA-8 3/8 F/NPT 0.2 to to SS F-45376LHN-6 F-45376LHNE-6 F-45376LEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 0.2 to to SS F-45376LHN-8 F-45376LHNE-8 F-45376LEA-8 3/8 F/NPT 0.5 to to SS F-45500LHN-6 F-45500LHNE-6 F-45500LEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 0.5 to to SS F-45500LHN-8 F-45500LHNE-8 F-45500LEA-8 3/4 M/NPT 0.5 to to SS F-45500LHN-12 F-45500LHNE-12 F-45500LEA-12 3/4 M/NPT 1.0 to to SS F-45750LHN-12 F-45750LHNE-12 F-45750LEA-12 Hastelloy Guide Rod 3/8 F/NPT 0.1 to to 4.0 Teflon F-45375LHKN-6 F-45375LHKNE-6 F-45375LKEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 0.1 to to 4.0 Teflon F-45375LHKN-8 F-45375LHKNE-8 F-45375LKEA-8 3/8 F/NPT 0.2 to to 7.5 Hastelloy F-45376LHKN-6 F-45376LHKNE-6 F-45376LKEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 0.2 to to 7.5 Hastelloy F-45376LHKN-8 F-45376LHKNE-8 F-45376LKEA-8 3/8 F/NPT 0.5 to to 20.0 Hastelloy F-45500LHKN-6 F-45500LHKNE-6 F-45500LKEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 0.5 to to 20.0 Hastelloy F-45500LHKN-8 F-45500LHKNE-8 F-45500LKEA-8 3/4 M/NPT 0.5 to to 20.0 Hastelloy F-45500LHKN-12 F-45500LHKNE-12 F-45500LKEA-12 Pipe Size Range SFM Range MPH Float Material For Air In-Line Mount Part # Panel Mount Part # Panel Mount Adjustable Part # 3/8 F/NPT 1.0 to to SS F-45376GHN-6 F-45376GHNE-6 F-45376GEA-6 1/2 M/NPT 1.0 to to SS F-45376GHN-8 F-45376GHNE-8 F-45376GEA-8 3/4 M/NPT 4.0 to to SS F-45750GHN-12 F-45750GHNE-12 F-45750GEA

145 F-1000 DIGITAL PADDLEWHEEL FLOWMETER F1000 with Machined In-line Fitting Features High accuracy digital paddlewheel technology with very low pressure drop. 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 female pipe threads. Flow rate from.4 to 300 GPM Tamper proof factory programming and the total reset function can be disabled. Easy to read 6 digit LD display, up to 4 decimal places. Battery operated (2 AAA batteries included). Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod Pipe fitting body: Polypropylene (PVDF optional) Adapter onnections: Polypropylene, PVDF, or PV-U Unions: Anodized Aluminum Sensor, paddlewheel, axle: PVDF Sensor O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Enclosure: ABS Specifications Max. working pressure: 300 PSI (20 70 F (21 ) Max. fluid temperature: 200 F (93 0 PSI (for PP, PVDF adapters) and 140 F (60 0 PSI (for PV-U adapters) Max. ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F / -10 to 43 Full scale accuracy: +/- 2% Power requirement: 2 AAA batteries (included) Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP56) Maximum pressure drop: 8 PSI (0.5 bar) Approximate shipping wt: 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 5 Pipe Size F/NPT Flow Ranfge (GPM) Rate Only Part # Total Only Part # For Liquid Rate and Total Part # Flow Range LPM Rate Only Part # Total Only Part # Rate and Total Part # Models with Polypropylene Pipe Fitting material 3/8.8 to 8 RB-375PI-GPM1 TB-375PI-GPM1 RT-375PI-GPM1 3 to 30 RB-375PI-LPM1 TB-375PI-LPM1 RT-375PI-LPM1 3/8.4 to 4 RB-375PI-GPM2 TB-375PI-GPM2 RT-375PI-GPM2 1 to 10 RB-375PI-LPM2 TB-375PI-LPM2 RT-375PI-LPM2 1/2 2 to 20 RB-500PI-GPM1 TB-500PI-GPM1 RT-500PI-GPM1 7 to 70 RB-500PI-LPM1 TB-500PI-LPM1 RT-500PI-LPM1 1/2.5 to 5 RB-500PI-GPM2 TB-500PI-GPM2 RT-500PI-GPM2 2 to 20 RB-500PI-LPM2 TB-500PI-LPM2 RT-500PI-LPM2 3/4 4 to 40 RB-750PI-GPM1 TB-750PI-GPM1 RT-750PI-GPM1 15 to 150 RB-750PI-LPM1 TB-750PI-LPM1 RT-750PI-LPM1 3/4.8 to 8 RB-750PI-GPM2 TB-750PI-GPM2 RT-750PI-GPM2 3 to 30 RB-750PI-LPM2 TB-750PI-LPM2 RT-750PI-LPM2 1 6 to 60 RB-100PI-GPM1 TB-100PI-GPM1 RT-100PI-GPM1 25 to 250 RB-100PI-LPM1 TB-100PI-LPM1 RT-100PI-LPM1 1 2 to 20 RB-100PI-GPM2 TB-100PI-GPM2 RT-100PI-GPM2 7 to 70 RB-100PI-LPM2 TB-100PI-LPM2 RT-100PI-LPM2 1-1/2 15 to 150 RB-150PI-GPM1 TB-150PI-GPM1 RT-150PI-GPM1 60 to 600 RB-150PI-LPM1 TB-150PI-LPM1 RT-150PI-LPM1 1-1/2 10 to 100 RB-150PI-GPM2 TB-150PI-GPM2 RT-150PI-GPM2 25 to 250 RB-150PI-LPM2 TB-150PI-LPM2 RT-150PI-LPM2 1-1/2 6 to 60 RB-150PI-GPM3 TB-150PI-GPM3 RT-150PI-GPM3 40 to 400 RB-150PI-LPM3 TB-150PI-LPM3 RT-150PI-LPM3 1-1/2 2 to 20 RB-150PI-GPM4 TB-150PI-GPM4 RT-150PI-GPM4 25 to 250 RB-150PI-LPM4 TB-150PI-LPM4 RT-150PI-LPM4 1-1/2 1 to 10 RB-150PI-GPM5 TB-150PI-GPM5 RT-150PI-GPM5 7 to 70 RB-150PI-LPM5 TB-150PI-LPM5 RT-150PI-LPM to 300 RB-200PI-GPM1 TB-200PI-GPM1 RT-200PI-GPM1 4 to 40 RB-200PI-LPM1 TB-200PI-LPM1 RT-200PI-LPM to 150 RB-200PI-GPM2 TB-200PI-GPM2 RT-200PI-GPM2 100 to 1000 RB-200PI-LPM2 TB-200PI-LPM2 RT-200PI-LPM to 100 RB-200PI-GPM3 TB-200PI-GPM3 RT-200PI-GPM3 60 to 600 RB-200PI-LPM3 TB-200PI-LPM3 RT-200PI-LPM3 2 6 to 60 RB-200PI-GPM4 TB-200PI-GPM4 RT-200PI-GPM4 25 to 250 RB-200PI-LPM4 TB-200PI-LPM4 RT-200PI-LPM4 2 4 to 40 RB-200PI-GPM5 TB-200PI-GPM5 RT-200PI-GPM5 15 to 150 RB-200PI-LPM5 TB-200PI-LPM5 RT-200PI-LPM5 2 2 to 20 RB-200PI-GPM6 TB-200PI-GPM6 RT-200PI-GPM6 7 to 70 RB-200PI-LPM6 TB-200PI-LPM6 RT-200PI-LPM6 5-29

146 F-1000 DIGITAL PADDLEWHEEL FLOWMETER F1000 with Molded In-line Fitting Features High accuracy digital paddlewheel technology. 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 male pipe threads. Flow rate from.4 to 200 GPM Tamper proof factory programming and very low pressure drop. Easy to read 6 digit LD display, up to 4 decimal places. Battery operated (2 AAA batteries included). The total reset function can be disabled. 5 Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod Pipe fitting: Polypropylene (options: PVDF) Sensor, paddlewheel, axle: PVDF Sensor O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Enclosure: ABS Specifications Max. working pressure: 300 PSI (20 70 F (21 ) Max. fluid temperature: 200 F (93 0 PSI Max. ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F/ -10 to 43 Full scale accuracy: +/- 2% Power requirement: 2 AAA batteries (included) Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP56) Maximum pressure drop: 8 PSI (varies per model) Approximate shipping wt: 2 lb. (.91 kg) Pipe Size F/NPT Flow Range (GPM) Rate Only Part # Total Only Part # For Liquid Rate and Total Part # Flow Range LPM Rate Only Part # Total Only Part # Rate and Total Part # Models with Polypropylene Pipe Fitting material 3/8.8 to 8 RB-375MI-GPM1 TB-375MI-GPM1 RT-375MI-GPM1 3 to 30 RB-375MI-LPM1 TB-375MI-LPM1 RT-375MI-LPM1 3/8.4 to 4 RB-375MI-GPM2 TB-375MI-GPM2 RT-375MI-GPM2 1 to 10 RB-375MI-LPM2 TB-375MI-LPM2 RT-375MI-LPM2 1/2 2 to 20 RB-500MI-GPM1 TB-500MI-GPM1 RT-500MI-GPM1 7 to 70 RB-500MI-LPM1 TB-500MI-LPM1 RT-500MI-LPM1 1/2.5 to 5 RB-500MI-GPM2 TB-500MI-GPM2 RT-500MI-GPM2 2 to 20 RB-500MI-LPM2 TB-500MI-LPM2 RT-500MI-LPM2 3/4 3 to 30 RB-750MI-GPM1 TB-750MI-GPM1 RT-750MI-GPM1 11 to 110 RB-750MI-LPM1 TB-750MI-LPM1 RT-750MI-LPM1 3/4.8 to 8 RB-750MI-GPM2 TB-750MI-GPM2 RT-750MI-GPM2 3 to 30 RB-750MI-LPM2 TB-750MI-LPM2 RT-750MI-LPM2 1 5 to 50 RB-100MI-GPM1 TB-100MI-GPM1 RT-100MI-GPM1 20 to 200 RB-100MI-LPM1 TB-100MI-LPM1 RT-100MI-LPM1 1 2 to 20 RB-100MI-GPM2 TB-100MI-GPM2 RT-100MI-GPM2 7 to 70 RB-100MI-LPM2 TB-100MI-LPM2 RT-100MI-LPM2 1-1/2 4 to 40 RB-150MI-GPM1 TB-150MI-GPM1 RT-150MI-GPM1 15 to 150 RB-150MI-LPM1 TB-150MI-LPM1 RT-150MI-LPM1 1-1/2 6 to 60 RB-150MI-GPM2 TB-150MI-GPM2 RT-150MI-GPM2 25 to 250 RB-150MI-LPM2 TB-150MI-LPM2 RT-150MI-LPM2 1-1/2 10 to 100 RB-150MI-GPM3 TB-150MI-GPM3 RT-150MI-GPM3 40 to 400 RB-150MI-LPM3 TB-150MI-LPM3 RT-150MI-LPM3 2 4 to 40 RB-200MI-GPM1 TB-200MI-GPM1 RT-200MI-GPM1 15 to 150 RB-200MI-LPM1 TB-200MI-LPM1 RT-200MI-LPM1 2 6 to 60 RB-200MI-GPM2 TB-200MI-GPM2 RT-200MI-GPM2 25 to 250 RB-200MI-LPM2 TB-200MI-LPM2 RT-200MI-LPM to 100 RB-200MI-GPM3 TB-200MI-GPM3 RT-200MI-GPM3 40 to 400 RB-200MI-LPM3 TB-200MI-LPM3 RT-200MI-LPM to 200 RB-200MI-GPM4 TB-200MI-GPM4 RT-200MI-GPM4 70 to 700 RB-200MI-LPM4 TB-200MI-LPM4 RT-200MI-LPM to 100 RB-200PI-GPM3 TB-200PI-GPM3 RT-200PI-GPM3 60 to 600 RB-200PI-LPM3 TB-200PI-LPM3 RT-200PI-LPM3 2 6 to 60 RB-200PI-GPM4 TB-200PI-GPM4 RT-200PI-GPM4 25 to 250 RB-200PI-LPM4 TB-200PI-LPM4 RT-200PI-LPM4 2 4 to 40 RB-200PI-GPM5 TB-200PI-GPM5 RT-200PI-GPM5 15 to 150 RB-200PI-LPM5 TB-200PI-LPM5 RT-200PI-LPM5 2 2 to 20 RB-200PI-GPM6 TB-200PI-GPM6 RT-200PI-GPM6 7 to 70 RB-200PI-LPM6 TB-200PI-LPM6 RT-200PI-LPM6 5-30

147 F-2000 DIGITAL PADDLEWHEEL FLOWMETER F2000 with Machined In-line Fitting Features High accuracy digital paddlewheel technology. 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 female pipe threads. Flow rate from.4 to 300 GPM (1 to 1000 LPM) Rate and total flow display with very low pressure drop. Optional Process ontrol alarm or batch processing relay. Optional 4-20mA or 0-10VD output with front panel security lock-out. Large, 8 digit LD display, up to 4 decimal places. Total reset function can be disabled and is field programmable. Materials of onstruction Pipe fitting body: Polypropylene (options: PVDF) Pipe fitting adapters: Polypropylene (options: PVDF, PV) Union Nuts: Anodized Aluminum Sensor, paddlewheel, axle: PVDF Sensor O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Specifications Max. working pressure: 300 PSI (20 70 F (21 ) Max. fluid temperature: 200 F (93 0 PSI Max. ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F/ -10 to 43 Full scale accuracy: +/- 1% Power requirement: 16-24VD Model RT units only: 4 AA batteries or A/D transformer Signal Distance: A sine wave sensor = 200 ft (60 m) Optional Hall Effect sensor = 1 mile (1.6 km) Signal able: 3 conductor shielded. Included 25 ft. (7.6 m) Max pressure drop: 8 PSI (varies per model) Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP56) 5 For Liquid Pipe Size F/NPT Flow Range (GPM) Rate and Total Display Part # Analog Output Part # Process ontrol Part # Flow Range LPM Rate and Total Display Part # Analog Output Part # Process ontrol Part # 115v A Models with Polypropylene Pipe Fitting 3/8.8 to 8 RTP138PG1GM1 AOP138M1GM1 PP138M1GM1 3 to 30 RTP138M1LM1 AOP138M1LM1 PP138M1LM1 3/8.4 to 4 RTP138PG2GM2 AOP138M2GM2 PP138M2GM2 1 to 10 RTP138M2LM2 AOP138M2LM2 PP138M2LM2 1/2 2 to 20 RTP150PG1GM1 AOP150M1GM1 PP150M1GM1 7 to 70 RTP150M1LM1 AOP150M1LM1 PP150M1LM1 1/2.5 to 5 RTP150PG2GM2 AOP150M2GM2 PP150M2GM2 2 to 20 RTP150M2LM2 AOP150M2LM2 PP150M2LM2 3/4 3 to 30 RTP175PG1GM1 AOP175M1GM1 PP175M1GM1 11 to 110 RTP175M1LM1 AOP175M1LM1 PP175M1LM1 3/4.8 to 8 RTP175PG2GM2 AOP175M2GM2 PP175M2GM2 3 to 30 RTP175M2LM2 AOP175M2LM2 PP175M2LM2 1 5 to 50 RTP110PG1GM1 AOP110M1GM1 PP110M1GM1 20 to 200 RTP110M1LM1 AOP110M1LM1 PP110M1LM1 1 2 to 20 RTP110PG2GM2 AOP110M2GM2 PP110M2GM2 7 to 70 RTP110M2LM2 AOP110M2LM2 PP110M2LM2 1-1/2 4 to 40 RTP115PG1GM1 AOP115M1GM1 PP115M1GM1 15 to 150 RTP115M1LM1 AOP115M1LM1 PP115M1LM1 1-1/2 6 to 60 RTP115PG2GM2 AOP115M2GM2 PP115M2GM2 25 to 250 RTP115M2LM2 AOP115M2LM2 PP115M2LM2 1-1/2 10 to 100 RTP115PG3GM3 AOP115M3GM3 PP115M3GM3 40 to 400 RTP115M3LM3 AOP115M3LM3 PP115M3LM3 2 4 to 40 RTP120PG1GM1 AOP120M1GM1 PP120M1GM1 15 to 150 RTP120M1LM1 AOP120M1LM1 PP120M1LM1 2 6 to 60 RTP120PG2GM2 AOP120M2GM2 PP120M2GM2 25 to 250 RTP120M2LM2 AOP120M2LM2 PP120M2LM to 100 RTP120PG3GM3 AOP120M3GM3 PP120M3GM3 40 to 400 RTP120M3LM3 AOP120M3LM3 PP120M3LM to 200 RTP120PG4GM4 AOP120M4GM4 PP120M4GM4 70 to 700 RTP120M4LM4 AOP120M4LM4 PP120M4LM to 150 RB-200PI-GPM2 TB-200PI-GPM2 RT-200PI-GPM2 100 to 1000 RB-200PI-LPM2 TB-200PI-LPM2 RT-200PI-LPM to 100 RB-200PI-GPM3 TB-200PI-GPM3 RT-200PI-GPM3 60 to 600 RB-200PI-LPM3 TB-200PI-LPM3 RT-200PI-LPM3 2 6 to 60 RB-200PI-GPM4 TB-200PI-GPM4 RT-200PI-GPM4 25 to 250 RB-200PI-LPM4 TB-200PI-LPM4 RT-200PI-LPM4 2 4 to 40 RB-200PI-GPM5 TB-200PI-GPM5 RT-200PI-GPM5 15 to 150 RB-200PI-LPM5 TB-200PI-LPM5 RT-200PI-LPM5 2 2 to 20 RB-200PI-GPM6 TB-200PI-GPM6 RT-200PI-GPM6 7 to 70 RB-200PI-LPM6 TB-200PI-LPM6 RT-200PI-LPM6 5-31

148 F-2000 DIGITAL PADDLEWHEEL FLOWMETER F2000 with Molded In-line Fitting Features High accuracy digital paddlewheel technology. 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 male pipe threads. Flow rate from.4 to 200 GPM (1 to 700 LPM) Rate and total flow display, front panel security lock-out, and field programmable. Optional Process ontrol alarm or batch processing relay. Optional 4-20mA or 0-10VD output. Large, 8 digit LD display, up to 4 decimal places. Remote mount display on panel, pipe or wall. Very low pressure drop and front panel security lock-out. Total reset function can be disabled. 5 Materials of onstruction Meter Body: ast Acrylic Rod Pipe fitting: Polypropylene (options: PVDF) Sensor, paddlewheel, axle: PVDF Sensor O-ring seals: Viton (optional EPDM) Enclosure: ABS Specifications Max. working pressure: 300 PSI (20 70 F (21 ) Max. fluid temperature: 200 F (93 0 PSI Max. ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F/ -10 to 43 Full scale accuracy: +/- 2% Power requirement: 2 AAA batteries (included) Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP56) Maximum pressure drop: 8 PSI (varies per model) Approximate shipping wt: 2 lb. (.91 kg) Pipe Size F/NPT Flow Range (GPM) Rate and Total Display Part # Analog Output Part # For Liquid Process ontrol Part # Flow Range LPM Rate and Total Display Part # Analog Output Part # Process ontrol Part # 115v A Models with Polypropylene Pipe Fitting 3/8.8 to 8 RTP138M1GM1 AOP138M1GM1 PP138M1GM1 3 to 30 RTP138M1LM1 AOP138M1LM1 PP138M1LM1 3/8.4 to 4 RTP138M2GM2 AOP138M2GM2 PP138M2GM2 1 to 10 RTP138M2LM2 AOP138M2LM2 PP138M2LM2 1/2 2 to 20 RTP150M1GM1 AOP150M1GM1 PP150M1GM1 7 to 70 RTP150M1LM1 AOP150M1LM1 PP150M1LM1 1/2.5 to 5 RTP150M2GM2 AOP150M2GM2 PP150M2GM2 2 to 20 RTP150M2LM2 AOP150M2LM2 PP150M2LM2 3/4 3 to 30 RTP175M1GM1 AOP175M1GM1 PP175M1GM1 11 to 110 RTP175M1LM1 AOP175M1LM1 PP175M1LM1 3/4.8 to 8 RTP175M2GM2 AOP175M2GM2 PP175M2GM2 3 to 30 RTP175M2LM2 AOP175M2LM2 PP175M2LM2 1 5 to 50 RTP110M1GM1 AOP110M1GM1 PP110M1GM1 20 to 200 RTP110M1LM1 AOP110M1LM1 PP110M1LM1 1 2 to 20 RTP110M2GM2 AOP110M2GM2 PP110M2GM2 7 to 70 RTP110M2LM2 AOP110M2LM2 PP110M2LM2 1-1/2 4 to 40 RTP115M1GM1 AOP115M1GM1 PP115M1GM1 15 to 150 RTP115M1LM1 AOP115M1LM1 PP115M1LM1 1-1/2 6 to 60 RTP115M2GM2 AOP115M2GM2 PP115M2GM2 25 to 250 RTP115M2LM2 AOP115M2LM2 PP115M2LM2 1-1/2 10 to 100 RTP115M3GM3 AOP115M3GM3 PP115M3GM3 40 to 400 RTP115M3LM3 AOP115M3LM3 PP115M3LM3 2 4 to 40 RTP120M1GM1 AOP120M1GM1 PP120M1GM1 15 to 150 RTP120M1LM1 AOP120M1LM1 PP120M1LM1 2 6 to 60 RTP120M2GM2 AOP120M2GM2 PP120M2GM2 25 to 250 RTP120M2LM2 AOP120M2LM2 PP120M2LM to 100 RTP120M3GM3 AOP120M3GM3 PP120M3GM3 40 to 400 RTP120M3LM3 AOP120M3LM3 PP120M3LM to 200 RTP120M4GM4 AOP120M4GM4 PP120M4GM4 70 to 700 RTP120M4LM4 AOP120M4LM4 PP120M4LM to 100 RB-200PI-GPM3 TB-200PI-GPM3 RT-200PI-GPM3 60 to 600 RB-200PI-LPM3 TB-200PI-LPM3 RT-200PI-LPM3 2 6 to 60 RB-200PI-GPM4 TB-200PI-GPM4 RT-200PI-GPM4 25 to 250 RB-200PI-LPM4 TB-200PI-LPM4 RT-200PI-LPM4 2 4 to 40 RB-200PI-GPM5 TB-200PI-GPM5 RT-200PI-GPM5 15 to 150 RB-200PI-LPM5 TB-200PI-LPM5 RT-200PI-LPM5 2 2 to 20 RB-200PI-GPM6 TB-200PI-GPM6 RT-200PI-GPM6 7 to 70 RB-200PI-LPM6 TB-200PI-LPM6 RT-200PI-LPM6 5-32

149 MIRO-FLO DIGITAL FLOWMETER Features High accuracy digital paddlewheel technology. 1/8 F/NPT, 1/4 F/NPT, 1/4 OD Tubing & 3/8 OD Tubing sizes. 6 digit LD, up to 4 decimal positions and displays both rate of flow and total flow. Volumetric field calibration programming system. Non-volatile programming and accumulated flow memory. Total reset function can be disabled. lear PV viewing lens or PVDF chemical resistant lens. 4 model variations: FS (Sensor mounted display), FP (Panel mounted display includes 25 cable), FV (No display. Sensor only. 5vdc current sinking output), and FX (No electronic sensor. Visual indicator only.) Open collector alarm setpoint. User selectable or custom programmable scale factors. Flow units: Gallons, Liters, Ounces, milliliters and time units: Minutes, Hours, Days Weather resistant Valox PBT enclosure. NEMA 4X Specifications Max. Working Pressure: PV lens: 130 psig (9 70 F (21 ) PVDF lens: 150 psig (10 70 F (21 ) Max. Fluid Temperature: PV lens, F/NPT connectors: 130 F (54 0 PSI PVDF lens, tubing connectors:200 F (93 0 PSI Full scale accuracy: +/- 6% Input Power requirement: 9-28 VD (Optional A/D transformers) available Sensor type: Infra-red light beam Sensor only output: 5V D digital square wave (3-wire) Sensor output cable: 3-wire shielded cable, 6ft Enclosure: NEMA type 4X, (IP56) 5 Operating Flow Range (oz/min) Operating Flow Range (ml/min) Sensor Mount Part # For Liquid Panel Mount Part # 115V Models with 1/4 F/NPT connections and clear PV lens Sensor Only Part # Indicator Only Part # 1 to to 300 FS V FP V FV V FX-100-7V 3.5 to to 1000 FS V FP V FV V FX-200-7V 7 to to 2000 FS V FP V FV V FX-300-7V 10 to to 3000 FS V FP V FV V FX-400-7V 17 to to 5000 FS V FP V FV V FX-500-7V 24 to to 7000 FS V FP V FV V FX-600-7V 115V Models with 1/8 F/NPT connections and clear PV lens 1 to to 300 FS V FP V FV V FX-100-5V 3.5 to to 1000 FS V FP V FV V FX-200-5V 7 to to 2000 FS V FP V FV V FX-300-5V 10 to to 3000 FS V FP V FV V FX-400-5V 17 to to 5000 FS V FP V FV V FX-500-5V 24 to to 7000 FS V FP V FV V FX-600-5V 115V Models with 3/8 F/NPT connections and clear PV lens 1 to to 300 FS V FP V FV V FX-100-6V 3.5 to to 1000 FS V FP V FV V FX-200-6V 7 to to 2000 FS V FP V FV V FX-300-6V 10 to to 3000 FS V FP V FV V FX-400-6V 17 to to 5000 FS V FP V FV V FX-500-6V 24 to to 7000 FS V FP V FV V FX-600-6V Materials of onstruction Body, Paddle, Axle material: PVDF onnector material: F/NPT is PV and tubing is PVDF Viewing lens material option: lear see through: PV Opaque chemical resistant: PVDF O-ring seals: Viton (Optional EPDM) ompression seal to pump: PV 5-33

150 UNI-SPRAY HEADERS Using all the components available, Uni-Spray is able to design and build a full array of headers to meet your needs. Whether your header is 1-1/2 diameter or 8, we have the parts and components to build exactly the header you need. Whether you require saddles, quick disconnects on the ends or multiple outlets, our design is user friendly and maintainable. Building headers out of all of the current materials allows us to provide you with a quality product at competitive prices. ustom header systems from Uni-Spray are available in PV, PV, Polypropylene, PVDF, Black Iron and various grades of Stainless steel. This ability allows us to evaluate your system requirements and provide the system that suits your needs the best. Using our custom design form will allow you to give us the needed information to generate a quote for your requirements. UNI-SPRAY RISERS 5 With Uni-Sprays track record of building quality custom riser systems you know your system has the capabilities to perform at its peak efficiency. Uni-Spray s designs make use of their full compliment of components to create a functional yet cost effective wash system. Our ability to bend and form riser pipes in a number of materials allows us to eliminate a number of fittings during construction. This also makes a system that works efficiently with the pumping system. ustom riser systems from Uni-Spray are available in PV, PV, Polypropylene, PVDF, Black Iron and various grades of Stainless steel. This ability allows us to evaluate your system requirements and provide the system that suits your needs the best. From our listing of basic designs select the configuration that best represents your system or your plan. We can then send you a work sheet that allows you to fill in the pertinent details for quoting purposes UNI-SPRAY RISER SUPPORTS Riser supports are a value added component when setting up a pipe system that can be fully maintained. Each riser support is color coded for pipe size and supplied with stai less steel hardware for mounting. The supports, available in the standard design as well as the new mini, can also be configured with either a single or a double spring format and in either polypropylene or PVDF. These brackets create a solid support structure for the pipe and yet, with a simple flip of the spring the pie is free for fast removal. 5-34

151 UNI-SPRAY NOZZLES Uni-Spray Nozzles are injection molded from custom blended polypropylene, a cost effective material that is corrosion and heat resistant and is impervious to most chemicals. The Uni-Mix Tip design resists clogging and buildup due to its smooth shape and low coecient of friction. A wide variety of Uni-Spray lamp- On Nozzles are available to suit your application and are colour coded for easy identication (see table below). All nozzles are available with a Single Spring or an optional Double Spring conguration for pressures over 60 psi (4.0 bar). All of the nozzles are available in three spigot sizes to t 21/32, 9/16 or 19mm diameter holes in the riser. Features: Injection molded from custom blended polypropylene Standard with Single Spring lamp Optional Double Spring lamps for pressures over 60 psi Directional adjustment of nozzle tip anywhere within 45 Tips available in Full one, Hollow one or Flat Spray Tips available with threaded ball onnection in 1/8, 1/4, 3/8 and 1/2 inch NPT or BSP threads Nozzle bodies available in three spigot sizes to t either 21/32, 9/16 or 19mm diameter holes on the riser. apacity (US) GPM at PSI Spray Angle Item # Nozzle Tip Part Number Tip olour Spray Pattern psi 20 psi 30 psi 026 UNI 0030Q DK Green 0 Spray UNI 1550Q Pink 15 Flat Spray UNI 50100Q Gray 50 Flat Spray UNI 5070Q Blue 50 Flat Spray UNI 5060Q Orange 50 Flat Spray UNI 5050Q Pink 50 Flat Spray UNI 65100Q Lt Green 65 Flat Spray UNI 6570Q Red 65 Flat Spray UNI 6560Q Green 65 Flat Spray UNI 6550Q Red 65 Flat Spray UNI 6540Q Yellow 65 Flat Spray UNI 6530Q Purple 65 Flat Spray UNI 8070Q Beige 80 Flat Spray UNI 8040Q Beige 80 Flat Spray UNI 8020Q Yellow 80 Flat Spray UNI 8010Q Black 80 Flat Spray UNI 8006Q Lt Green 80 Flat Spray UNI 9540Q Black 95 Flat Spray UNI 9530Q Grey 95 Flat Spray UNI 9503Q Orange 95 Fine Mist UNI 12010Q Grey 120 Flat Spray UNI 12070Q Black 120 Flat Spray UNI 29HQ DK Green Hollow one UNI 50HQQ Black Hollow one

152 WEBSTER S SERIES IMMERSIBLE PUMPS These rugged, chemical duty pumps are available in PV (orzan ), fiberglass reinforced Polypropylene, and PVDF. Precision moulded, dynamically balanced, enclosed impellers allow pumping of abrasive solutions and operating against closed discharge valves. The pump is quickly and easily serviced since the body stays in-line while the pump core is removed. Optimum chemical resistance is provided with your choice of PV (orzan ) or Fiberglass Reinforced Polypropylene construction. Washdown and Explosion-proof motors are available as well as inlet screens & extended shafts. Viton O ring end cover seal allows for mounting in liquid, or with inlet extension. APPLIATIONS Pumping for aeration, agitation, filtration, recirculation, spraying, transfer in the following industries: Plating Electronics Photo processing Pollution control hemical processing Water treatment Features Seal-less vertical pump Virtually maintenance-free HP: 1/15, 1/3, 1/2, 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 Two-Year Warranty No metal in contact with fluid being pumped Seal-less design eliminates leaking, costly seal replacement and down time Non-overloading, continuous duty totally enclosed motors Teflon fume barrier protects motor end bell & bearings from corrosion caused by vapor or fumes Item Number Material H.P. Volts Phase (FNPT) Suction (MNPT) Discharge 1S1GX0008 PV 1/ /4" 1/2" 1S2GX0008 PV 1/3 115/ " 3/4" 1S2HX0008 PV 1/ / " 3/4" 1S4GX0008 PV 1/2 115/ /4" 1" 1S4HX0008 PV 3/ / /4" 1" 1S5GX0008 PV 3/4 115/ /4" 1" 1SS6GX008 PV 3/4 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1SS6HX008 PV 3/ / /2" 1 1/4" 1S5HX0008 PV / /4" 1" 1SS7GX008 PV 1 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1SS7HX008 PV / /2" 1 1/4" 1S8GX0008 PV 1 1/2 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1S8HX0008 PV 1 1/ / /2" 1 1/4" 1S1GX0006 PP 1/ /4" 1/2" 1 S2GX0003 FRPP 1/3 115/ " 3/4" 1 S2HX0003 FRPP 1/ / " 3/4" 1S4GX0003 FRPP 1/2 115/ /4" 1" 1S5GX0003 FRPP 3/4 115/ /4" 1" 1SS6GX003 FRPP 3/4 115/ /2" 1 1/4" Item Number Material H.P. Volts Phase (FNPT) Suction (MNPT) Discharge 1SS6HX003 FRPP 3/ / /2" 1 1/4" 1S4HX0003 FRPP 3/ / /4" 1" 1SS7GX003 FRPP 1 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1SS7HX003 FRPP / /2" 1 1/4" 1S5HX0003 FRPP / /4" 1" 1S8GX0003 FRPP 1 1/2 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1S8HX0003 FRPP 1 1/ / /2" 1 1/4" 1S1GX0009 PVDF 1/ /4" 1/2" 1S2GX0009 PVDF 1/3 115/ " 3/4" 1 S2HX0009 PVDF 1/ / " 3/4" 1S4GX0009 PVDF 1/2 115/ /4" 1" 1S5GX0009 PVDF 3/4 115/ /4" 1" 1SS6GX009 PVDF 3/4 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1SS6HX009 PVDF 3/ / /2" 1 1/4" 1S4HX0009 PVDF 3/ / /4" 1" 1SS7GX009 PVDF 1 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1S5HX0009 PVDF / /4" 1" 1S8GX0009 PVDF 1 1/2 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 1S8HX0009 PVDF 1 1/ / /2" 1 1/4" 1SS7HX009 PVDF 1 1/ / /2" 1 1/4" 6 6-1

153 WEBSTER S12/S16 IMMERSIBLE PUMPS The S12 and S16 Series are rugged, chemical duty pumps available in PV (orzan ). The precision moulded, dynamically balanced, enclosed impellers with unique tandem design allows for pumping of abrasive solutions, the ability to run dry indefinitely, and to operate against closed discharge valves. Available in ratings of 3 and 5 horsepower for continuous duty operation. The FPM o-ring end cover seal allows mounting in liquid These pumps come complete with non-overloading, continuous duty TEF motors and include mounting bracket, discharge support and discharge piping to top of mounting bracket. APPLIATIONS Pumping for aeration, agitation, filtration, spraying, transfer in the following industries: Electronics Pollution control hemical processing Water treatment Features HP: 3 & 5 PV (orzan ) construction for optimum chemical resistance No metal in contact with fluid being pumped Seal-less design eliminates leaking, costly seal replacement and downtime FPM o-ring end cover seal allows mounting in liquid No pump bearings allows pump to run dry Includes mounting bracket & discharge support and discharge piping Item Number Material H.P. Volts Phase (FNPT) Suction (MNPT) Discharge Shipping Weight 1SOHX0008 PV / " SLIP 1 1/2" 75 1SOHX0100 PV / " SLIP 1 1/2" 75 1 S9HX0008 PV / " SLIP 2" 135 WEBSTER S SERIES QUIK SERVIE PUMPS 6 The S8 Series are rugged, chemical duty pumps available in PV (orzan ). They are precision molded, dynamically balanced, and have enclosed impellers allowing pumping of abrasive solutions, and operation against closed discharge valves. The pump can handle flow rates up to 80GPM and up to 45 TDH. These pumps feature a special teardrop locking design that allows the operator to quickly remove the pump core for service while the pump body stays connected to the piping system. Just loosen the four mounting bolts, turn the pump motor slightly and lift it out of the body for service. Spillage of the process media is eliminated because the pump body stays connected to the piping system. APPLIATIONS Pumping for aeration, agitation, filtration spraying, transfer in the following industries: Electronics Pollution control hemical processing Water treatment Features No metal in contact with fluid being pumped Seal-less design eliminates leaking, costly seal replacement and down time FPM o-ring end cover seal allows mounting in liquid, or with inlet extension Non-overloading, continuous duty totally enclosed motors Viton fume barrier protects motor end bell and bearings from corrosion caused by vapor or fumes. Part No. Material H.P. ycle (Hz) Volts Phase Inlet (FNPT) Outlet (MNPT) Ship Weight 1SS6GX8 PV 3/4 50/60 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 50 Ibs 1SS8HX8 PV 3/4 50/ / /2" 1 1/4" 50 Ibs 1SS7GX8 PV 1 50/60 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 51 Ibs 1SS7HX8 PV 1 50/ / /2" 1 1/4" 51 Ibs 1SS8GX8 PV 1 1/2 50/60 115/ /2" 1 1/4" 52 Ibs 1SS8HX8 PV 1 1/2 50/ / /2" 1 1/4" 52 Ibs 6-2

154 WEBSTER 5, 7, 8 AND 10 ENTRIFUGAL PUMPS The 5, 7 and 8 Series pumps are designed specifically for continuous chemical duty service. They are rugged, precision molded, and feature dynamically balanced, enclosed impellers. Units are available in PV (orzan ), fiberglass reinforced Polypropylene, and PVDF (Solef ) with ratings of 1/3, 1, 1-1/2, 3 and 5 horsepower. The standard mechanical seal is a John rane Type 21 single seal, carbon/ceramic. Other seal materials are available depending on the process fluid. And, water-wash seals are available for especially aggressive or crystallizing liquids. Pump models are also available with a rugged cast iron bearing frame for belt-drive or other coupled drivers. APPLIATIONS Pumping for aeration, agitation, filtration, recirculation, spraying, transfer in the following industries: Plating Electronics Photo processing Pollution control hemical processing Water treatment Features No metal in contact with fluid being pumped Viton seal elastomers and o-rings standard, EPDM available 300 series stainless steel shaft with belt-drive or direct coupled drivers Dynamically balanced, enclosed impellers Totally enclosed motors Available with bearing frame for belt drive or direct coupled driver Notes: 575 Volt motors available upon request. Standard impeller diameters are 5(2.7 ), 7(3.7 ), 8(4.2 ), 3hp 10(5.2 ), &5hp 10(5.7). For variations on impellers, contact customer service. arbon/ceramic seals are standard. special seals( PTFE/ceramic, PTFE/pink ceramic, PTFE/carpenter 20) are available upon request. Water flushed seals available upon request. FPM is standard elastomer. EPDM available upon request. Item Number Material H.P. Volts Phase (FNPT) Suction (MNPT) Discharge 15GX0200 PV 1/3 115/ /4" 1/2" 15HX0200 PV 1/ / /4" 1/2" 17GX0400 PV 1 115/ " 3/4" 17HX0400 PV /575 3 r 3/4" 18GX0600 PV 1 1/2 115/ /4" 1" 18HX0600 PV 1 1/ / /4" 1" 15GX0203 FRPP 1/3 115/ /4" 1/2" 15HX0203 FRPP 1/ / /4" 1/2" 17GX0403 FRPP 1 115/ " 3/4" 17HX0403 FRPP / " 3/4" 18GX0603 FRPP 1 1/2 115/ /4" 1" 18HX0603 FRPP 1 1/ / /4 1" 11HX0500 FRPP / /2 1" 14HX0700 FRPP / /2 1" 15GX0209 PVDF 1/3 115/ /4" 1/2" 15HX0209 PVDF 1/ / /4" 1/2" 17GX0409 PVDF 1 115/ " 3/4" 1 7HX0409 PVDF / " 3/4" 18GX0609 PVDF 1 1/2 115/ /4" 1" 18HX0609 PVDF 1 1/ / /4" 1" 6 6-3

155 WEBSTER D SERIES IMMERSIBLE PUMPS The D1 and DD1 are enhanced replacements for the durable SS1 series pump. The 1/8 HP motor with 1/2 diameter extended shaft and 4 precision machined pump mounting pads ensure trouble free performance for the more demanding industrial applications. This pump is precision moulded, dynamically balanced, and is constructed with semi-open impellers with a unique tandem design allowing for its ability to operate against closed discharge valves. It is available in your choice of PV (orzan ), natural Polypropylene, or PVDF for optimum chemical resistance Features Increased end bell motor protection Larger motor bearings than the SS1 for tighter control Improved capacitor protection Seal-less design eliminates leaking, costly seal replacement and downtime Viton o-ring end cover seal allows mounting in liquid, or with inlet extension Non-overloading, continuous duty TEF motors and body has Integral flange Item Number Material H.P. Volts Phase (FNPT) Suction (MNPT) Discharge 1D1GX0008 PV 1/8 115/ " 1/2" 1DD1GX008 PV 1/8 115/ " 1/2" 1D1GX0006 PP 1/8 115/ " 1/2" 1DD1GX006 PP 1/8 115/ " 1/2" 1D1GX0009 PVDF 1/8 115/ " 1/2" 1DD1GX009 PVDF 1/8 115/ " 1/2" WEBSTER R SERIES MAG DRIVE PUMPS 6 Using the latest, patented pump technology, Hayward s Series R all-plastic, corrosion resistant pumps will stand up to the most aggressive, demanding industrial and commercial applications year in and year out. onstructed of ETFE with rugged epoxy painted motors. With horsepower ratings from 1/3 to 5 HP, applications requiring flow rates from 5 to 140 GPM and with maximum total dynamic head discharges up to 141 feet, you will find a Webster Magnetic Drive Pump to meet your requirements. Because the process media never contacts metal, there is never a danger of pump failure due to corrosion. Because they are magnetically driven, they have no seals, thus no emissions, leaks or expensive seal replacements. Features Leak-proof, seal-less magnetic drive Friction free operation/reduced energy consumption Easy maintenance without special tools All-Plastic pump construction, no rust or corrosion and anti-air lock mechanism Double supported large diameter non-cantilevered shaft, PTFE bushing and ceramic shafts Unique Rifled Impeller Bushing dissipates heat build-up Model No. Material Item No. H.P. Volts Phase Inlet (FNPT) vs. Outlet (MNPT) R03 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1 M035TVT1 1 1/ "X 1" RX05 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M045TVT12 1/2 115/ /2"X 1-1/2" RX07 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M055TVT13 3/ / /2"X 1-1/2" RX10 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M085TVT / /2" X 1-1/2" RX15 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M105TVT35 1/2 230/ "X 1-1/2" RX20 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M105TVT / "X 1-1/2" RX30 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M125TVT / "X 1-1/2" RX50 ARBON REINFORED ETFE 1M145TVT / "X 1-1/2" 6-4

156 HAYWARD FLT SERIES ARTRIDGE FILTERS Designed for the most demanding applications these all plastic cartridge filters are used to filter fine particles from the process fluid. Models are available to accommodate 10, 20 and 30 wound or pleated polypropylene filter cartridges. The filters are designed so that compression seals the filter unit eliminating the need for a center rod. An integral plug on the hand removable filter cover makes for easy bleeding of the unit. The filters feature a 3/4 NPT (female) inlet connection to eliminate the chance for broken NPT (male) connections. An optional mounting base is available for mounting the filter to the floor or work surface. All wound cartridges have a 1 I.D. and 2 1/2 O.D. The pleated cartridges have a 1 I.D. and 2-5/8 O.D. Maximum flow rates for both are 5 GPM per 10 of filter cartridge length. artridges are sold separately. Hayward FLT artridge Filters are small, compact, and a perfect partner to any Webster chemical duty, corrosion resistant pump. APPLIATIONS For 1 to 100 micron filtration in the following industries: Plating Electronics Photo processing Pollution control hemical processing Water treatment Features All Plastic PV onstruction Will Never Rust or orrode ompact, Easy to Install No Metal in ontact with the Process Fluid Quick and Easy Filter artridge hanges FPM O-Ring Seal 6 6-5

157 WEBSTER IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Designed to filter process fluid within a tank; eliminating the time and expense needed to install a stand alone filter and pump. hanging filter cartridges is quick and easy. A simple quick disconnect union is used to connect the filter cartridge to the pump. Simply unscrew the union (no tools are required) and remove the filter cartridge and assembly. The In-Tank Filtration unit comes standard with one 50 micron wound, polypropylene filter cartridge. artridges are also available in 1, 5, 10, 30, 75 and 100 micron ratings and have a 1 I.D. and a 2 1/2 O.D. Single or double cartridge configurations are available in either 10 or 20 lengths. In-Tank Filtration Systems are available with Series S and D pumps that are seal-less and can be run dry. These heavy duty, reliable pumps come with Hayward s unique two year warranty. Features For use with S and D-Series Pumps PV orrosion-resistant onstruction ompact and Easy to Install Immersible, Seal-Less, Bearing Free Pump an Run Dry Quick and Easy Filter hange Single or Double Filter 1/15 HP Model Features a Built-in Power ord 6 APPLIATIONS For 1 to 100 micron filtration in the following industries: Plating Electronics Photo processing Pollution control hemical processing Water treatment 6-6

158 PENGUIN SEALLESS VERTIAL PUMPS Penguin sealless vertical pumps are designed to handle a wide range of chemicals without difficulty. ompletely constructed of PV, polypropylene, or PVDF where in contact with the solution being pumped. Series P pumps have an upper working temperature of 180/150/280 F, respectively, and thus can handle most corrosive, slurries, and abrasive solutions. Series P pumps are easy to install and operate. They have no seals or bushings, can run dry, and are virtually maintenance-free. Available options include: Horsepower: 1/15, 1/6, 1/3, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/2, 2, 3, 5, 7 1/2, 10, 15 onstruction Material/O-Ring: PV/EPR, PP/EPDM, PVDF/Viton Impeller/Housing onstruction: Standard or High Pressure Shaft onstruction: Threaded or Keyway Shaft Material: 316SS or Titanium Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your pump. APPLIATIONS hemical process Sump pumping Fume scrubbing Recirculation pumping Waste treatment Plating solution filtering Transfer pumping Features hoice of PV, PVDF, or Polypropylene Runs dry without damage Self-priming when immersed No metal contact hemical resistant PENGUIN HORIZONTAL ENTRIFUGAL PUMPS Penguin horizontal centrifugal pumps are designed to handle a wide range of chemicals without difficulty. ompletely constructed of PV where in contact with the solution being pumped, Series HV pumps have an upper working temperature of 180 F, and thus can handle most corrosive, slurries, and abrasive solutions. For high temperatures and very corrosive abrasive solutions, a double mechanical seal and water flush are supplied. For higher suction pressure, a single diplo internal seal is supplied. Available options include: 6 Horsepower: 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 3, 5 Seal Type: Single Mechanical, Single Diplo, D = Double Mechanical Seal Material: Ethylene/Propylene, arbon/eramic, Viton arbon/eramic,viton Silicon arbide / Silicon arbide Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your pump. APPLIATIONS Plating, Anodizing, and Electropolishing Fume Scrubbing, Pollution ontrol, and Evaporators Recirculation, Agitation, Spray/Rinse, and Filtering Water and Waste Treatment Photographic Processing and Developers PB Manufacturing hemical Processing Features True Volute Design High Efficiency Energy Saving Higher Flow vs. Pressure No Metal ontact 6-7

159 PENGUIN MAGNETI DRIVE PUMP Penguin magnetic-driven pumps are designed to handle a wide range of chemicals without difficulty. onstructed of polypropylene, Kynar, or stainless steel, Series M pumps have an upper working temperature of 190/220/250 F, respectively, and thus can handle highly corrosive or mild chemicals, acids, or solvents. Series M pumps eliminate the conventional shaft seal found in most pumps. This means that there is no rotating seal to wear out and allow the liquid being pumped to leak out. The pumping action may eventually fail, however, the liquid can never leak out. Series M pumps are easy to install and operate, and are virtually maintenance-free. Available options include: Horsepower: 1/15, 1/10, 1/5, 1/3, 1/2, 3/4, 2, 3, 5 onstruction Material/ O-Ring: Polypropylene, PVDF/Kynar, 316SS, Hastelloy Self Primer: Self Priming Pump and 1 HP Motor Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your pump. APPLIATIONS Transferring Filtering Recirculation Mixing Replenishment Features Sealless No Metal ontact Bearing-Free hemical-resistant Leak-Resistant Available in 316SS, Kynar, and Hastelloy 6 PENGUIN HORIZONTAL VOLUTE PUMP Penguin horizontal volute pumps are designed for larger volume than the Series HV and are able to handle a wide range of chemicals without difficulty. ompletely constructed of PV where in contact with the solution being pumped, Series HN pumps have an upper working temperature of 180 F, and thus can handle most corrosive, slurries, and abrasive solutions. For high temperatures and very corrosive abrasive solutions, a double mechanical seal and water flush are supplied. Available options include: Horsepower: 3, 5, 7 1/2 Seal: Single Seal or Double Seal Seal Material: Ethylene/Propylene arbon/eramic, Viton arbon/eramic, Viton Silicon arbide / Silicon arbide Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your pump. APPLIATIONS Plating Solution Filtration ircuit Etching Recirculation Pumps/ Water Treatment Fume Scrubbing/ Pollution ontrol Features orrosion Resistant Very High Efficiency True Volute Design with enter Discharge No Metal ontact High Flow Rates 6-8

160 PENGUIN MIXERS Penguin mixers are designed to handle a wide range of chemicals for both tanks and drums without difficulty. Series PM propeller mixers are completely constructed of 316SS shafts, couplings, and propellers. Series PM turbine mixers utilize the same 316SS shaft and coupling, but are only available with a polypropylene turbine. For a mixer where no metal is in contact with the solution, a polypropylene propeller and sleeved shaft are supplied. Series PM mixers are available in four different mounting styles including bracket mount, clamp mount, flange mount, and thread mount. Available options include: Dual Propellers: Polypropylene, 316SS Polypropylene Sleeves: Polypropylene Sleeved Shaft Air Motors: 1/20, 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, and 1 hp Propeller/ Turbine: 3 Propeller, 2 Turbine, 4 Propeller, 5 Propeller Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your mixer. PENGUIN PGG PRESSURE GAUGES AND GUARDS Penguin pressure gauge guards have a unique, compact, moulded design. This low profile design fits well in tight spaces such as reel to reel systems or other automatic systems. onsisting of two threaded fluid chambers, there is no possibility of leakage due to uneven screwed components in the Series PGG gauge guards. Each piece contains a matching groove, which confines the true O-ring incorporated on the O.D. of the impermeable diaphragm. The internal parts of the Series PGG gauge guards in contact with the diaphragm have a large radius, thus preventing any damage to or shearing of the diaphragm. The choice of materials permits these gauge guards to be utilized on highly corrosive and ultra-pure solutions. Guards can also be purchased separately from gauges. You have a choice of material with either PV, Polypropylene or PVDF for the body with a Viton Diaphragm 6 Features Maintains System Purity Leak-Resistant Molded Thread onnections Between Joints No Metals Utilized Internally or Externally onfined O-ring Seal and Impermeable Diaphragm Bleed for Filling/No Air Entrapment for Most Accuracy 6-9

161 PENGUIN SERIES FILTER HAMBERS Features Leak-Resistant orrosion-resistant No Liquid Bypass/No External Frame Rods Removes Solid Dirt Particles Quick hange artridge hoice of onstruction Materials Uses Filter artridges, Submicronic Pleated artridges, or Filter Sleeves Penguin filter chambers are offered in PV, polypropylene, and PVDF. The construction of the Series chambers contains no fragile lucite or glass. There is no metal to liquid contact, no springs to lose or break, and no crushed tubes. Penguin PV and polypropylene chambers are recommended for most acid and alkaline solutions. PVDF chambers are recommended for high temperature acids and alkalies, HF, and electroless nickel. All Series chambers can be mounted on a common polypropylene base and manifolded together for greater capacities or space saving requirements. For portability, casters can be added as an option. Penguin Series double open end (D.O.E.) chambers are available in single tube, three tube, five tube, and twelve tube vessels. The Series single open end (S.O.E.) chambers are available in single tube, two tube, four tube and nine tube vessels. Each D.O.E filter chamber is equipped with an initial Penguin 15 micron filter cartridge or set of filter cartridges. Filters for S.O.E chambers are purchased separately. Because of the unique Penguin design, these cartridges ensure maximum particle retention and no liquid bypass. Available options include: hamber Diameter: 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 onstruction Material / O-Ring Material: PV/EPR, Polypropylene/EPR, PVDF/Viton End ap onfiguration: Double Open End or Single Open End Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter hamber. 6 PENGUIN N IN-TANK FILTER HAMBERS Penguin in-tank filter chambers allow for depth filtration that is completely limited to inside the tank. Thus, there is no possibility of solution loss in the Series N chambers. The 3N chambers are completely constructed of PV, polypropylene, and PVDF while the 6N chambers are constructed of PV or polypropylene. This includes the rugged mounting bracket. Penguin models include single and three cartridge vessels in 10, 20, and 30 cartridge lengths. The Series N chambers incorporate all of the unique construction advantages of our style 3 and 6 chambers. The cartridge compressor design in the style 3 chamber and the double labyrinth o-ring sealing, along with the long-sleeved flange on the top of style 6, are also incorporated into our Series N chambers. Available options include: Features Leak-Resistant orrosion-resistant No Liquid Bypass/No External Frame Rods Removes Organic ontaminants and Solid Dirt Particles Easy onversion to Filter hamber hoice of Disposables arbon artridge or Bagged Granular arbon hamber Diameter: 3, 4, 6 onstruction Material / O-Ring Material: PV/EPR, Polypropylene/EPR, PVDF/Viton End ap onfiguration: Double Open End Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter hamber. 6-10

162 PENGUIN T ARBON TREATMENT HAMBERS Features Leak-Resistant orrosion-resistant No Liquid Bypass/No External Frame Rods Removes Solid Dirt Particles Quick hange artridge Rugged PV onstruction including Mounting Bracket omplete In-Tank Filtration Penguin filter chambers are offered in PV, polypropylene, and PVDF. The construction of the Series chambers contains no fragile lucite or glass. There is no metal to liquid contact, no springs to lose or break, and no crushed tubes. Penguin PV and polypropylene chambers are recommended for most acid and alkaline solutions. PVDF chambers are recommended for high temperature acids and alkalies, HF, and electroless nickel. All Series chambers can be mounted on a common polypropylene base and manifolded together for greater capacities or space saving requirements. For portability, casters can be added as an option. Penguin Series double open end (D.O.E.) chambers are available in single tube, three tube, five tube, and twelve tube vessels. The Series single open end (S.O.E.) chambers are available in single tube, two tube, four tube and nine tube vessels. Each D.O.E filter chamber is equipped with an initial Penguin 15 micron filter cartridge or set of filter cartridges. Filters for S.O.E chambers are purchased separately. Because of the unique Penguin design, these cartridges ensure maximum particle retention and no liquid bypass. Available options include: hamber Diameter: 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 onstruction Material / O-Ring Material: PV/EPR, Polypropylene/EPR Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter hamber. PENGUIN B FILTER BAG HAMBERS Penguin filter bag chambers are designed for high volume surface filtration. ompletely constructed of PV, the Series B filter bag chambers allow for filtration down to 1 micron. Filter bag replacement is easy with the removal of one snap ring. There are four sizes incorporating all of the construction advantages of our style 6 and 8 chambers. The double labyrinth o-ring sealing and the long-sleeved flanges, top and bottom, allow these chambers to operate at higher pressures and/or temperatures while eliminating the use of external frame rods. Available options include: 6 hamber Diameter: 6, 8 onstruction Material/O-Ring Material: PV/EPR Features Leak-Resistant No Liquid Bypass/No External Frame Rods PV onstruction Filtration Down to 1 Micron Simple Filter Bag Replacement High Volume Surface Filtration Lower Initial ost/reusable Filter Media Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter hamber. 6-11

163 PENGUIN PF WOUND FILTER ARTRIDGES Penguin wound filter cartridges provide true depth filtration and are available in a wide selection of media and cores, including pre-leached fibrillated polypropylene, to ensure temperature and chemical compatibility. The Series PF cartridges feature porosities from 0.5 micron to 150 micron, lengths from 3 to 40, and a variety of diameters. Available options include: Features True Depth Filtration Various ore and Media Material ombinations including Preleached Fibrillated Polypropylene hemical and Temperature ompatibility Wide hoice of Porosities Filter Media: polypropylene, fibrillated polypropylene, utility grade polypropylene, natural cotton, bleached cotton, rayon, polyester, nylon, modacrylic (dynel), glass Mircron Rating: 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150 Tube O.D.: 2 1/2, 2, 2 3/8, 2 3/4, special Length: 4, 6, 9 3/4, 9 7/8, 10, 12, 19 1/2, 20, 29 1/4, 30, 39 1/4, 40 ore Type: polypropylene, tin steel, 304 SS, 316 SS, special ore over: none or cover compatible with media End Treatment: none or treatment compatible with media Extended ore: none or compatible to core Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter artridges. 6 Features Economical Reuseable Efficient Long Lasting PENGUIN SERIES PS FILTER SLEEVES Penguin filter sleeves are an alternative to standard wound filter cartridges. The Series PS filter sleeves are economical, reusable, and efficient when placed over its one-time purchased polypropylene core and caps. These sleeves can be precoated and backwashed several times before the retention of the sleeve is reduced. Series PS filter sleeves are available in porosities from 2 micron to 100 micron and in lengths from 10 to 40. Available options include: Mircron Rating: 2, 10, 25, 50 Length: 10, 20, 30, 40 Sleeve Media: P = polypropylene ore Material: P = polypropylene ore Length: 10, 20, 30, 40 Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter artridges. HAYWARD FILTER BAGS Hayward Filter Bags are available polypropylene felt filter bags - sewn construction, polypropylene monofilament filter bags - sewn construction, or polypropylene felt filter bags - welded construction. Mircron Rating: 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 400, 600, 800 Lengths: 16 and 32 Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter Bag. 6-12

164 PENGUIN SERIES P ARBON FILTER ARTRIDGES Penguin carbon filter cartridges are a one-step carbon and filtration treatment. These Series P carbon cartridges eliminate the problems associated with loose carbon treatment and the need for a separate filtration system. The standard cartridge measures 2 3/4 O.D. with lengths varying from 4 to 40 and flow rates up to 2 1/2 gpm. These Series P carbon cartridges are designed to be used in either single or multi-tubed vessels. These cartridges are available in 4 different styles. Style G is an outer wound cartridge which utilizes a special high grade activated granular carbon with a very low sulfur content. Style P is also an outer wound cartridge which features layers of paper impregnated with activated powdered carbon. Style is a porous polyethylene shell containing high grade activated granular carbon. Style M features an outer layer of polyolefin webbing with an impregnated carbon powder interior. Available options include: arbon Style: Granular arbon/outer Wound, arbon Paper/Outer Wound, Granular arbon/porous Shell, Impregnated arbon/outer Wound Length: 4, 6, 9 3/4, 9 7/8, 10, 20, 30, 40 ore Material: Polypropylene, 304SS Fiber Material/Shell: porous polyethylene/stand. poly. outer wound, fibrillated FDA outer wound, polypropylene FDA outer wound, bleached cotton FDA outer wound Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter artridges. PENGUIN PP PLEATED FILTER ARTRIDGES Penguin pleated filter cartridges are an alternative to string wound or spun moulded filters. These Series PP pleated cartridges are economical, multi-use, premium quality products that are available in various micron ratings ranging from 50 micron nominal down to.10 micron absolute. End cap configurations include D.O.E. (double open end, flat gasket) and S.O.E. (single open end, external double ring/button end cap). Filter medias available include self-bonded fine diameter polypropylene fibers as well as membranes constructed of polypropylene, nylon, or PTFE. Series PP pleated cartridges contain no surfactants or binders that can break down, leach out, or permit the typical problems of channeling and media migration. Maximum effective open surface areas allow for high flow rates at reduced pressure losses, as well as high dirt holding capacity, long service life, large throughputs, and lower operating costs. Available options include: 6 Features Nominal and Absolute Particle Retention Ratings Superior Flow haracteristics High Dirt Holding apacity Many Lengths and artridge Styles Filter Media: nylon, nominal polypropylene, nominal submicronic polypropylene, absolute polypropylene, absolute submicronic polypropylene, absolute Teflon Mircron Rating: 0.1A, 0.1, 0.2A, 0.2, 0.4A, 0.45A, 0.4, 0.8A, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 25, 30, 50 Length: 9 3/4, 10, 19 1/2, 20, 29 1/4, 30, 39, 40 End ap: black industrial grade vinyl (style D only), blue FDA acceptable (style D only) DOE flat gasket, SOE external double 222 O-ring/ button end cap, DOE internal single 120 O-ring, SOE internal 020 O-ring/ button end cap Gasket or O-Ring Material: Style D, Buna-N, EPR, viton, silicon, Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Filter artridges. 6-13

165 PENGUIN SR PREIOUS METAL REOVERY SYSTEM Penguin precious metal recovery systems are a simple and economical method for reclaiming gold and other precious metals from processing rinse water and drag out tanks. The exchange resin of standard porosity extracts precious metals as well as all positive and negative charged ions from processing wastes. The Series SR systems are used with rinse capacity tanks of 50 gallons and smaller. Up to three troy ounces of precious metal can be recovered per pound, meaning it pays for itself after its initial use. Recommended Applications include Acid and Alkaline Rinse Tanks, Drag out Tanks, Recovery of All Precious Metals (Gold, Silver, and Platinum), Water Demineralization. Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your precious metal recovery system. Features Recovers 99% of Precious Metals Improves Purity of Rinse Low Initial ost Pays for Itself During Normal Plating Sequence Selection of Sizes to Fit All Plating Tanks Longer Life Before Resin hanges Depth Filtration Available 6 PENGUIN MR PREIOUS METAL REOVERY SYSTEM Penguin precious metal recovery systems are a simple and economical method for reclaiming gold and other precious metals from processing rinse water and drag out tanks. The exchange resin of standard porosity extracts precious metals as well as all positive and negative charged ions from processing wastes. The Series MR systems are used with rinse capacity tanks of 50 gallons or larger. Up to three troy ounces of precious metal can be recovered per pound, meaning it pays for itself after its initial use. Series P pumps are also available in conjunction with the resin beds, thus eliminating the magnetic driven pump. Recommended Applications include Acid and Alkaline Rinse Tanks, Drag out Tanks, Recovery of All Precious Metals (Gold, Silver, and Platinum), Water Demineralization Features Recovers 99% of Precious Metals Improves Purity of Rinse Low Initial ost Pays for Itself During Normal Plating Sequence Selection of Sizes to Fit All Plating Tanks Longer Life Before Resin hanges Depth Filtration Available Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your precious metal recovery system. 6-14

166 PENGUIN A-A IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series A-A - Penguin in-tank filter systems are all purpose, compact, fully portable, corrosion resistant, and require no floor space. They are constructed so no metal is in contact with the solution. The Series A-A filter systems are available in PV, polypropylene, and PVDF. These systems incorporate an in-tank pump and a tank lip-mounted filter chamber. The Series A-A filter systems need not be removed from the tank for cleaning or replacing filter cartridges. These systems are available in 6 sizes to serve all small and medium volume tanks. PENGUIN A-B IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series A-B: Penguin in-tank filter systems are all purpose, compact, fully portable, corrosion resistant, and require no floor space. They are constructed so no metal is in contact with the solution. The Series A-B filter systems are available in PV and polypropylene, and certain models in PVDF. These systems are designed to be mounted entirely in-tank, which is especially recommended for precious metal filtration. The Series A-B filter systems need not be removed from the tank for cleaning or replacing filter cartridges. These systems are available in 11 sizes to accommodate larger volume tanks. 6 PENGUIN A IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series A: Penguin in-tank pump/outside filter systems are ruggedly constructed and corrosion resistant. The Series A filter systems are designed for continuous operation with no metal to liquid contact and are versatile and easy to install, since both pump and filter chamber are independent units. Series A filter systems are available in PV and certain models in polypropylene and PVDF. Simple in design and efficient in performance, the Series A filter systems are recommended for all precious metal plating baths, electroless nickel and copper, as well as many acid and alkaline solutions. These systems are simple to clean and are designed for easy filter cartridge replacement. 6-15

167 PENGUIN HF IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series HF - Penguin horizontal pump/filter systems are constructed of high temperature PV, and thus are excellent for most corrosive chemicals and capable of pumping solution to 180 F. Equipped with the Penguin Series HV horizontal volute pump or on larger systems, the Series HN centrifugal pump, and the rugged Penguin PV filter chamber, Series HF filter systems are designed for continuous high temperature operation. Series HF systems provide excellent filtration for electroless nickel and copper solutions. These systems are simple to clean and are designed for easy filter cartridge replacement. PENGUIN MF IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS 6 Series MF: Penguin magnetic-driven pump/filter systems are specifically designed with sealless pumps for filtering and circulating without the worries of mechanical seal leakage. Equipped with the Penguin Series M & MT polypropylene magnetic-driven pump and the rugged Penguin PV or polypropylene filter chamber, Series MF filter systems are designed for continuous trouble-free service. The smaller compact Series MF filter systems are excellent for complete corrosion resistant filtration in laboratories, pilot plants, and production applications. The larger filter systems provide a high volume, high pressure filter system to which casters can be added for portability. Simple in design and efficient in performance, these systems are recommended for acid and alkaline solutions. PENGUIN SM IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series SM: Penguin spacemaker filter systems are designed with sealless pumps to provide a complete, ultra compact, portable filter system without the worries of mechanical seal leakage. Equipped with the Penguin Series M polypropylene magnetic drive pump and the rugged Penguin PV or polypropylene filter chamber, Series SM filter systems are a simple, economical, and efficient method for filtering and circulating acid and alkaline solutions. The smaller compact Series SM filter systems are excellent for complete corrosion resistant filtration in laboratories, pilot plants, and production applications. These systems are simple to clean and are designed for easy filter cartridge replacement. 6-16

168 PENGUIN VF IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Penguin sealless polypropylene filter systems are designed for filtering critical solutions where all metal contact and mechanical seals must be eliminated. Series VF filter systems are equipped with a sealless self-priming pump and heavy duty PV or polypropylene filter chamber. These systems are recommended for continuous filtration to 180 F for most acid and alkaline solutions. Penguin Series VF filter systems are maintenance free, simple to clean, and are designed for easy filter cartridge replacement. PENGUIN BF IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series BF: Penguin bag filtration systems are designed to provide rapid, high velocity solution turnover, while removing contaminants that tend to surface load In the Series BF filtration systems, the larger surface area of the single layered polypropylene filter bag provides significant longer life when compared to a graded density, string wound cartridge filter. Disposable bags are economical to use and may be easily discarded when spent or cleaned for reuse. Traditionally, bag filtration systems have been used with air sparging systems to constantly renew the plating solution that is coming in contact with the parts. A Penductor sparging system does the same thing, but refreshes the chemistry much faster, while giving you other benefits such as keeping solids in suspension for easier removal, more uniform temperature, thickness, and brightness. Since the Series BF bag filtration system is basically an open system, uniform agitation can be achieved without the need of a dedicated sparging pump. 6 PENGUIN A-SF IN-TANK FILTRATION SYSTEMS Series A-SF: Penguin suction filter systems are ruggedly constructed and corrosion resistant. The Series A-SF filter systems are designed for continuous duty operation and trouble-free service. These systems are easy to install and maintain since there is only one moving part. Series A-SF suction filter systems offer filtration rates up to 3400 GPH. They are constructed completely of PV, eliminating any metal contact. 6-17

169 HAYWARD PV/PV SIMPLEX BAG FILTER For application versatility, these all plastic housings will accept most standard 7 diameter filter bags. The single length vessel uses Size 01 bags, 7 x 16, while the double length vessel uses Size 02 bags, 7 x 32. This permits the vessel to be used with thousands of different types of filter bags to exactly match the application requirements. This all plastic housing is designed to stand up to the most demanding industrial and commercial applications around. The rugged, thick wall construction ensures years of trouble free service and the housing is rated at a full 150 PSI. The built-in true union piping and drain connections makes installation and operation quick and easy. With this feature the filter housing can be removed without having to break down the piping system. The integral mounting base also makes for an easy installation and eliminates the need for extra cost support legs. The housing has two bottom outlet connections so that either can be used as a drain connection. This makes possible both in-line or loop piping installations. The one-piece, corrosion resistant plastic body has an extremely smooth interior surface that is very easy to clean. The housing comes standard with a plastic cover vent valve. The hand-removable, no tools required, spin-off cover makes filter bag changing quick and easy. There are no swing bolts to deal with as on a metal filter housing. 6 Options Flanged connections EPDM seals Pressure differential gauge and switch Manifolded housings 1/4 NPT pressure differential gauge tap Metric connections Features All-plastic construction FPM seals Hand-removable cover Integral mounting base True union connections Vent valve on cover In-line or loop flow Two-Year Warranty Part # Material Size End onn. FLT1201 PV Single 2 Socket/Thread FLT1201F PV Single 2 Flanged FLT1202 PV Double 2 Socket/Thread FLT1202F PV Double 2 Flanged FLT2201 PV Single 2 Socket/Thread FLT2201F PV Single 2 Flanged FLT2202 PV Double 2 Socket/Thread FLT2202F PV Double 2 Flanged Notes: All bag filters feature a one piece, seamless, moulded plastic body, have Viton seals and are assembled with silicone free lubricant. Simplex bag filters use single length 7 x 16 No.1 bags or double length 7 x 32 No. 2 bags. Polypropylene felt filter bags are available in 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 200 microns and in either welded or sewn construction. Polypropylene monofilament filter bags are available in sewn construction in 150, 400, and 800 microns. 6-18

170 HAYWARD PP/PVDF SIMPLEX BAG FILTER A metal filter housing will ultimately rust or corrode and contaminate the process media. There is no danger of this happening with a Hayward All Plastic Simplex Bag Filter. It will never rust or corrode and never compromise the quality of the process fluid. Standard features on all models include an integral mounting flange, and on the polypropylene model, a vent/bleed valve is installed on the cover. These filters are designed for easy service. A hand-removable cover and a built-in restrainer basket handle makes bag change-outs fast and easy, reducing expensive downtime. No tools are needed and the filter is back in service in a matter of minutes. The external cover threads are not in contact with the process media, thus eliminating the need for cleaning each time the bag is changed. For extra strength the cover features specially designed buttress style threads. Options Vent gauge with gauge guard Pressure differential gauge Pressure differential switch PPL filter bags Flanged connections EPDM seals Features Hand-removable cover Integral mounting flange Integral basket handle External cover threads In-line or loop flow Vent valve on cover Two-Year Warranty Part # Material Size End onn. FLT4201 PP Single 2 Threaded FLT4201F PP Single 2 Flanged FLT4202 PP Double 2 Threaded FLT4202F PP Double 2 Flanged FLT5202F PVDF Double 2 Flanged Note: Polypropylene felt filter bags are available in 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 200 microns and in either welded or sewn construction. Polypropylene monofilament filter bags are available in sewn construction in 150, 400, and 800 microns. HAYWARD PV/PV/PP DUPLEX BAG FILTER With an all-plastic, corrosion-resistant Hayward Duplex Bag Filter, there is never a need to shut down the line and there is never any downtime necessary when changing filter bags. Just turn the lever handle to divert flow from one filter housing to the other, then spin off the hand-removable cover, remove the dirty bag and install a new one. 6 Features such as a rugged, lightweight fiberglass mounting platform and a vent/bleed valve installed on both filter housing covers are standard with every Hayward All-Plastic Duplex Bag Filter. The retaining basket that holds the bag has a unique, universal seat that works with almost any single or double length filter bag. Features No line shutdown for bag changeout Built-in mounting platform In-line or loop flow Two-Year Warranty Options Vent gauge with gauge guards Pressure Differential Gauges Pressure Differential Switches Automated Operation - Electric or Pneumatic Part # Housing Diverter Valve Size End onn. FLT2DUPA PP PV Double 2 Flanged FLT2DUP1 PV PV Double 2 Flanged FLT2DUP2 PV PV Double 2 Flanged Note: Polypropylene felt filter bags are available in 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 200 microns and in either welded or sewn construction. Polypropylene monofilament filter bags are available in sewn construction in 150, 400, and 800 microns. 6-19

171 HAYWARD 4200 ARTRIDGE FILTERS An Important Advance in artridge Filtration: Now you can have all the benefits of cartridge filtration for industrial and commercial applications while getting complete corrosion resistance. Hayward s one-piece, seamless, plastic-body cartridge filters will never rust or corrode, nor will they contaminate the process fluid. Thousands of Applications: Hayward s Series 4200 all-plastic cartridge filters have been designed to work in the most demanding of applications whether for high purity water or aggressive chemical filtration. These heavy-wall-housing filters will withstand operating pressures of up to 150 PSI with no problem. Series 4200 filters will work in corrosive atmospheres and harsh environments, places where a metal housing would have to be painted or epoxy-coated just to survive. The Right onfiguration for Your Application: Series 4200 cartridge filter housings are offered in three sizes making it easier to choose the exact filter for your application requirements. And you can choose between two types of Hayward cartridges. Hayward H cellulose cartridges are perfect for all types of water filtration up to 165 F. Their special design packs 47 sq ft of filter media into a 16 tall cartridge. Hayward PF polypropylene cartridges are silicone-free and feature graded density construction. Duplex Models: hoose a Hayward Series 4200 duplex cartridge filter for those applications where the pipeline flow cannot be shut down to change out filter cartridges. Duplex filters allow the pipeline flow to be diverted to one of the two filter housings. This permits the off-line housing to be serviced without flow shutdown. 6 Features PPL or PVDF onstruction High Pressure Ratings Threaded or Flanged onnec tions FPM or EPDM Seals Inline or Loop Flow Hand-Removable over Simplex or Duplex Designs Two -Year Warranty Large Filtration Area High Dirt Holding apacity Part # Material Size End onn. Part # Material Size End onn. SB1050ST PV 1/2 Skt/Thd SB2050ST PV 1/2 Skt/Thd SB1050SF PV 1/2 Flanged SB2050SF PV 1/2 Flanged SB1075ST PV 3/4 Skt/Thd SB2075ST PV 3/4 Skt/Thd SB1075SF PV 3/4 Flanged SB2075SF PV 3/4 Flanged SB1100ST PV 1 Skt/Thd SB2100ST PV 1 Skt/Thd SB1100F PV 1 Flanged SB2100F PV 1 Flanged SB1125ST PV 1-1/4 Skt/Thd SB2125ST PV 1-1/4 Skt/Thd SB1125F PV 1-1/4 Flanged SB2125F PV 1-1/4 Flanged SB1150ST PV 1-1/2 Skt/Thd SB2150ST PV 1-1/2 Skt/Thd SB1150F PV 1-1/2 Flanged SB2150F PV 1-1/2 Flanged SB1200ST PV 2 Skt/Thd SB2200ST PV 2 Skt/Thd SB1200F PV 2 Flanged SB2200F PV 2 Flanged SB1250T PV 2-1/2 Threaded SB2250T PV 2-1/2 Threaded SB1250S PV 2-1/2 Socket SB2250S PV 2-1/2 Socket SB1250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged SB2250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged SB1300T PV 3 Threaded SB2300T PV 3 Threaded SB1300S PV 3 Socket SB2300S PV 3 Socket SB1300F PV 3 Flanged SB2300F PV 3 Flanged SB1400T PV 4 Threaded SB2400T PV 4 Threaded SB1400S PV 4 Socket SB2400S PV 4 Socket SB1400F PV 4 Flanged SB2400F PV 4 Flanged SB1600FT PV 6 Flanged SB2600FT PV 6 Flanged SB1800FT PV 8 Flanged SB2800FT PV 8 Flanged Note: Polypropylene felt filter bags are available in 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 200 microns and in either welded or sewn construction. Polypropylene monofilament filter bags are available in sewn construction in 150, 400, and 800 microns. 6-20

172 HAYWARD PLASTI Y-STRAINERS Hayward Y-Strainers protect piping system components from damage caused by dirt or debris in the process media. They cost less than other types of strainers and are light weight and very compact. Because they can often be supported by the pipeline alone, they work in applications where other types of strainers cannot. Hayward Y-Strainers are supplied with a 1/32 perforated plastic screen. This screen is ultrasonically welded, not glued, for superior strength. Screens fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel are also available in openings from 1/2 down to a super fine 325 mesh. All screens have an open area at least twice that of the equivalent pipe size cross-sectional area to minimize pressure drop. All sizes of Hayward Y-Strainers feature a heavy-duty hex cap that permits quick and easy removal of the strainer screen when cleanout becomes necessary. Hayward Y-Strainers work equally well in the horizontal or vertical position, simplifying piping system layout. This strainer is available in clear PV which permits viewing of the strainer screen in operation. This helps determine when it needs cleaning based on a visual check of the amount of debris retained by the screen. These Y- Strainers are available in sizes from 1/2 to 2 with socket or threaded pipe connections. Part # Material Size End onn. Part # Material Size End onn. Part # Material Size End onn. YS10050T PV 1/2 Thread YS20050T PV 1/2 Thread YS00050T lear PV 1/2 Thread YS10050S PV 1/2 Socket YS20050S PV 1/2 Socket YS00050S lear PV 1/2 Socket YS10075T PV 3/4 Thread YS20075T PV 3/4 Thread YS00075T lear PV 3/4 Thread YS10075S PV 3/4 Socket YS20075S PV 3/4 Socket YS00075S lear PV 3/4 Socket YS10100T PV 1 Thread YS10100S PV 1 Socket YS10125T PV 1-1/4 Thread YS20100T PV 1 Thread YS20100S PV 1 Socket YS20125T PV 1-1/4 Thread YS00100T lear PV 1 Thread YS00100S lear PV 1 Socket YS00125T lear PV 1-1/4 Thread 6 YS10125S PV 1-1/4 Socket YS20125S PV 1-1/4 Socket YS00125S lear PV 1-1/4 Socket YS10150T PV 1-1/2 Thread YS20150T PV 1-1/2 Thread YS00150T lear PV 1-1/2 Thread YS10150S PV 1-1/2 Socket YS20150S PV 1-1/2 Socket YS00150S lear PV 1-1/2 Socket YS10200T PV 2 Thread YS20200T PV 2 Thread YS00200T lear PV 2 Thread YS10200S PV 2 Socket YS20200S PV 2 Socket YS00200S lear PV 2 Socket YS10200F PV 2 Flanged YS10250T PV 2-1/2 Thread YS10250S PV 2-1/2 Socket YS20200F PV 2 Flanged YS20250T PV 2-1/2 Thread YS20250S PV 2-1/2 Socket Options Stainless Steel Strainer Screens YS10250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged YS10300T PV 3 Thread YS10300S PV 3 Socket YS10300F PV 3 Flanged YS10400T PV 4 Thread YS10400S PV 4 Socket YS20250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged YS20300T PV 3 Thread YS20300S PV 3 Socket YS20300F PV 3 Flanged YS20400T PV 4 Thread YS20400S PV 4 Socket Features Horizontal or Vertical Installation 2:1 Open Air Ratio Hex ap for Easy Access to Screen Plastic Screen has 1/32 Perforation Two-Year Warranty YS10400F PV 4 Flanged YS20400F PV 4 Flanged Notes: All Y-Strainers have an FPM o-ring seal and are assembled with silicone free lubricant. Each Y-Strainer includes one 1/32 perforated plastic screen. Y-strainers are available with Stainless steel screens. To replace the plastic screen with an all stainless one, there will be a price adder. Screens have some plastic components. Stainless steel screens are available in perforations of 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 3/16, & 1/2. 1/2 perf offered only on 1-1/2 and larger Y-strainers. Stainless steel mesh screens come in sizes 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 200 and

173 HAYWARD SIMPLEX PLASTI BASKET STRAINERS When pipeline system components require protection from dirt and debris and the line can be shut down for basket cleaning, a Hayward All Plastic Simplex Basket Strainer is the ideal choice. Unwanted particles are removed as the process media passes through a perforated strainer basket contained inside the strainer body. The basket traps the unwanted material while allowing the process media to flow freely. hanging or cleaning the strainer basket is quick and easy. The hand-removable, spin-off cover features two angled handles for easy access to the strainer basket. The housing features external cover threads that do not contact the process media and never need cleaning. Venting and draining are made possible by two hand-removable, threaded plugs - one on the top of the cover and the other on the housing side. Options Stainless steel strainer baskets Pressure differential gauge and switch lear, see-through model made of Eastar EPDM seals (add an E to end of part #) Polypropylene and Food-Grade FRP also available Hayward Simplex Basket Strainers can be installed either in-line or with loop piping configurations. This is made possible by a unique design that incorporates three piping connections on the strainer body that are used as inlets and outlets. The unused connection is plugged using a blind fitting (included). True Union connections make it possible to remove the strainer from the piping system without disassembling the piping connections. Plastic Baskets in perforation sizes from 1/32 to 3/16 are available. Stainless steel perforated baskets are available from 1/2 to 1/32. Mesh stainless steel baskets for very fine straining applications are available in sizes from 20 mesh down to 325 mesh. 6 Features External Body Threads Low Pressure Drop In-Line or Loop Piping Design True Union onnections Ergonomic Hand-Removable over FPM Seals Integral, Flat Mounting Base Liquid Displacing over Two-Year Warranty Basket Selection The 1/2 to 1 strainers can be ordered with either a 1/32 or 1/16 perf plastic basket. The 11/2 and 2 with a 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 3/16 perf plastic basket. The 3 and 4 with a 1/16, 1/8 or 3/16 perf plastic basket. The 6 and 8 with a 1/8 or 3/16 perf plastic basket. Stainless steel baskets for all size strainers are available in these perfs: 1/32, 3/64, 1/16, 5/64, 7/64, 1/8, 5/32, 3/16, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 ; and in mesh sizes: 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 200, 325 Part # Material Size End onn. Part # Material Size End onn. SB1050ST PV 1/2 Skt/Thd SB2050ST PV 1/2 Skt/Thd SB1050SF PV 1/2 Flanged SB2050SF PV 1/2 Flanged SB1075ST PV 3/4 Skt/Thd SB2075ST PV 3/4 Skt/Thd SB1075SF PV 3/4 Flanged SB2075SF PV 3/4 Flanged SB1100ST PV 1 Skt/Thd SB2100ST PV 1 Skt/Thd SB1100F PV 1 Flanged SB2100F PV 1 Flanged SB1125ST PV 1-1/4 Skt/Thd SB2125ST PV 1-1/4 Skt/Thd SB1125F PV 1-1/4 Flanged SB2125F PV 1-1/4 Flanged SB1150ST PV 1-1/2 Skt/Thd SB2150ST PV 1-1/2 Skt/Thd SB1150F PV 1-1/2 Flanged SB2150F PV 1-1/2 Flanged SB1200ST PV 2 Skt/Thd SB2200ST PV 2 Skt/Thd SB1200F PV 2 Flanged SB2200F PV 2 Flanged SB1250T PV 2-1/2 Threaded SB2250T PV 2-1/2 Threaded SB1250S PV 2-1/2 Socket SB2250S PV 2-1/2 Socket SB1250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged SB2250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged SB1300T PV 3 Threaded SB2300T PV 3 Threaded SB1300S PV 3 Socket SB2300S PV 3 Socket SB1300F PV 3 Flanged SB2300F PV 3 Flanged SB1400T PV 4 Threaded SB2400T PV 4 Threaded SB1400S PV 4 Socket SB2400S PV 4 Socket SB1400F PV 4 Flanged SB2400F PV 4 Flanged SB1600FT PV 6 Flanged SB2600FT PV 6 Flanged SB1800FT PV 8 Flanged SB2800FT PV 8 Flanged 6-22

174 HAYWARD DUPLEX BASKET STRAINERS When pipeline system components require protection from dirt and debris and the line cannot be shut down for basket cleaning, a Hayward All Plastic Duplex Basket Strainer is the ideal choice. Unwanted particles are removed as the process media passes through a perforated strainer basket contained inside the strainer body. The basket traps the unwanted material while allowing the process media to flow freely. And the flow never has to be shut off for basket cleaning or changing. Options Stainless steel strainer baskets Pressure differential gauge and switch lear, see-through model made of Eastar EPDM seals (add an E to end of part #) Polypropylene also available Features External Body Threads Low Pressure Drop Operates ontinuously, No Shut Down For Basket leaning or hanging True Union onnections and FPM Seals Ergonomic Hand-Removable over Hand-Removable Vent and Drain Liquid Displacing over Two-Year Warranty hanging or cleaning the strainer basket is quick and easy. Turning the operating handle on the diverter valve assembly switches the flow from one strainer housing to the other. Then, the out of service housing can be serviced by opening the hand-removable, spin-off cover that features two angled handles for easy access to the strainer basket. The housings have external cover threads that do not contact the process media and never need cleaning. Venting and draining are made possible by two hand-removable, threaded plugs on the cover and side of the housings. Hayward Duplex Basket Strainers can be installed either in-line or with loop piping configurations. This is made possible by changing the orientation of the bottom outlet connection. Notes: 1/2 thru 2 Strainers are supplied with both socket and threaded end connectors. For 1/2, 3/4 and 1 Basket Strainers, standard perforation is 1/32. For 1-1/2 thru 8 Basket Strain ers, standard perforation is 1/8. All Simplex Basket Strainers are assembled with silicone free lubricant. Each Simplex Basket Strainer includes one plastic basket. If perforation is not specified, then standard basket perforation will be supplied. The 1/2 to 1 strainers can be ordered with either a 1/32 or 1/16 perf plastic basket. The 1-1/2 and 2 with a 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 3/16 perf plastic basket. The 3 and 4 with a 1/16, 1/8 or 3/16 perf plastic basket. The 6 and 8 with a 1/8 or 3/16 perf plastic basket. Stainless steel baskets for all size strainers are available in these perfs: 1/32, 3/64, 1/16, 5/64, 7/64, 1/8, 5/32, 3/16, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 ; and in mesh sizes: 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 200, 325 Part # Material Size End onn. Part # Material Size End onn. DB1050ST PV 1/2 Skt/Thd DB2050ST PV 1/2 Skt/Thd DB1050SF PV 1/2 Flanged DB2050SF PV 1/2 Flanged DB1075ST PV 3/4 Skt/Thd DB2075ST PV 3/4 Skt/Thd DB1075SF PV 3/4 Flanged DB2075SF PV 3/4 Flanged DB1100ST PV 1 Skt/Thd DB2100ST PV 1 Skt/Thd DB1100F PV 1 Flanged DB2100F PV 1 Flanged DB1125ST PV 1-1/4 Skt/Thd DB2125ST PV 1-1/4 Skt/Thd DB1125F PV 1-1/4 Flanged DB2125F PV 1-1/4 Flanged DB1150ST PV 1-1/2 Skt/Thd DB2150ST PV 1-1/2 Skt/Thd DB1150F PV 1-1/2 Flanged DB2150F PV 1-1/2 Flanged DB1200ST PV 2 Skt/Thd DB2200ST PV 2 Skt/Thd DB1200F PV 2 Flanged DB2200F PV 2 Flanged DB1250T PV 2-1/2 Threaded DB2250T PV 2-1/2 Threaded DB1250S PV 2-1/2 Socket DB2250S PV 2-1/2 Socket DB1250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged DB2250F PV 2-1/2 Flanged DB1300T PV 3 Threaded DB2300T PV 3 Threaded DB1300S PV 3 Socket DB2300S PV 3 Socket DB1300F PV 3 Flanged DB2300F PV 3 Flanged DB1400T PV 4 Threaded DB2400T PV 4 Threaded DB1400S PV 4 Socket DB2400S PV 4 Socket DB1400F PV 4 Flanged DB2400F PV 4 Flanged DB1600FT PV 6 Flanged DB2600FT PV 6 Flanged DB1800FT PV 8 Flanged DB2800FT PV 8 Flanged

175 HAYWARD STRAINERS BASKETS 6 Notes: Other perforations may be available upon request. It is recommended that one spare basket per strainer be kept on hand at all times. The old style baskets are available upon request, while supplies last. An adapter is required when using 316 Stainless Steel baskets. FOR 1/2, 3/4, AND 1 PV 316 SS orzan PV 316 SS Perf PART # MESH PART # Perf PART # Perf PART # 1/32 BS11001/32 20 BS /32 BS21001/32 1/32 BS71001/32 1/16 BS11001/16 40 BS /16 BS21001/16 1/16 BS71001/16 1/8 BS11001/8 60 BS /8 BS21001/8 1/8 BS71001/8 3/16 BS11003/16 80 BS /16 BS21003/16 3/16 BS71003/ BS FOR 1-1/4, 1-1/2, AND 2 PV 316 SS orzan PV 316 SS Perf PART # MESH PART # Perf PART # Perf PART # 1/32 BS12001/32 20 BS /32 BS22001/32 1/32 BS72001/32 1/16 BS12001/16 40 BS /16 BS22001/16 1/16 BS72001/16 1/8 BS12001/8 60 BS /8 BS22001/8 1/8 BS72001/8 3/16 BS12003/16 80 BS /16 BS22003/16 3/16 BS72003/ BS FOR 2-1/2, 3, AND 4 PV 316 SS orzan PV 316 SS Perf PART # MESH PART # Perf PART # Perf PART # 1/32 BS14001/32 20 BS /32 BS24001/32 1/32 BS74001/32 1/16 BS14001/16 40 BS /16 BS24001/16 1/16 BS74001/16 1/8 BS14001/8 60 BS /8 BS24001/8 1/8 BS74001/8 3/16 BS14003/16 80 BS /16 BS24003/16 3/16 BS74003/ BS FOR 6 PV 316 SS orzan PV 316 SS Perf PART # MESH PART # Perf PART # Perf PART # 1/32 BS16001/32 20 BS /32 BS26001/32 1/32 BS76001/32 1/16 BS16001/16 40 BS /16 BS26001/16 1/16 BS76001/16 1/8 BS16001/8 60 BS /8 BS26001/8 1/8 BS76001/8 3/16 BS16003/16 80 BS /16 BS26003/16 3/16 BS76003/ BS FOR 8 PV 316 SS orzan PV 316 SS Perf PART # MESH PART # Perf PART # Perf PART # 1/32 BS18001/32 20 BS /32 BS28001/32 1/32 BS78001/32 1/16 BS18001/16 40 BS /16 BS28001/16 1/16 BS78001/16 1/8 BS18001/8 60 BS /8 BS28001/8 1/8 BS78001/8 3/16 BS18003/16 80 BS /16 BS28003/16 3/16 BS78003/ BS

176 PENGUIN PE PENDUTOR SPARGING EDUTORS Penguin Penductor sparging eductors offer a new twist to the current eductor craze. Based on established eductor principles, the Series PE Penductor was designed especially for industrial sparging applications. The nozzle was designed utilizing the same orifice size as a typical 3/8 NPT tank mixing eductor, with a larger connection size, thus giving you the same flow characteristics with less pressure drop. This can reduce the horsepower required on larger systems. The larger connection size allows you to use standard PV reducing tees without extra bushings or reducing couplings, thus saving you valuable tank space. The diffuser was designed with a larger plume dispersion angle for more uniform agitation and a lower profile to allow you to utilize your tank space more efficiently. The result, the Penductor, a more efficient space-saving eductor made specifically for the surface finishing industry. Features Flows omparable with onventional 3/8 Tank Mixing Eductors Lower Profile Helps Save Valuable Tank Space and Makes for Easier Retrofits Larger onnection Sizes Eliminate Need for Multiple Bushings When Using Standard Fittings or P-Series Pump Larger Plume Dispersion Angle Helps Eliminate Dead Spots Between Eductors Maximum Temperature 280 F Part # IPS Size Material PE-3/4B 3/4" FPT PP PE-3/4 3/4" FPT PVDF PE-1B 1" MPT PP PE-1 1" MPT PVDF PENGUIN SERIES PES PENDUTOR SYSTEMS Penguin Penductor systems are designed for in-tank mixing using the tank fluid as the mixing medium for solution agitation. Simple in design, the Series PES Penductor systems are easy to install, operate, and maintain. Penductors utilize the fluid inside the tank reservoir as the motive fluid, which is defined as the fluid flowing through the Penductor nozzle. The high velocity motive fluid entrains the liquid near the suction openings of the Penductor, and mixes this liquid thoroughly as it passes through the diffuser. The resulting plume of mixed fluid, flowing at an intermediate velocity, now proceeds to mix and agitate the remaining tank liquid. The Series PES Penductor systems are completely piped and ready to be attached to the discharge of the motive driving pump. Recommended Applications include leaning Tanks, Phosphating Tanks, Anodizing Tanks, ooling Towers, and Fertilizer Tanks 6 Features Available as systems with pumps, kits or nozzles sold separately Deluxe model features adjustable nozzles No metal to solution contact Perfect solution for large tanks Induces 4 gallons extra for every gallon passing through nozzle Please contact customer service for assistance in sizing your Penductor System. 6-25

177 MAZZEI INJETORS Mazzei Injectors are high efficiency, Venturi-type, differential pressure injectors. A pressure difference between the inlet and outlet ports of the injector creates a vacuum inside the injector body, which initiates suction through the suction port. How a Mazzei Injector Works When a pressurized operating (motive) fluid enters the injector inlet, it is constricted toward the injection chamber and changes into a high velocity jet stream. The increase in velocity through the injection chamber results in a decrease in pressure, thereby enabling an additive material to be drawn through the suction port and entrained into the motive stream. As the jet stream is diffused toward the injector outlet its velocity is reduced and it is reconverted into pressure energy (but at a pressure lower than injector inlet pressure). Mazzei Injectors are extremely efficient. They operate over a wide range of pressures and require only a minimal pressure differential between inlet and outlet sides to initiate a vacuum at the suction for either liquid or gas. Applications hemical Wastewater treatment hlorination Pulp & Paper Slurries Printing inks Oil based fluids Gaseous fluids Shear sensitive fluids austics hemical Slurries Food and Beverage 6 Special Features: onsiderable cost savings versus other injection methods Single unit construction-trouble free operation with no moving parts No electrical connections needed an run dry with no problems Molded of: Polypropylene, PVDF (KYNAR) or 316 L Stainless Steel Flow ranges of 1/2 GPM (2 liters/min.) through 4,000 GPM (15 m3 per min) ISO-R (BSPT) threads available in Kynar models Proven Performance Mazzei Injectors are available in High Performance PVDF (Kynar ) PVDF is an advanced thermoplastic that is superior to other types including PV, Polypropylene & Polyethylene Stronger/Higher pressure and temperature-handling capabilities Resistant to ozone Greater chemical resistance / Resistant to hlorine, Sulfuric and Nitric Acids Abrasion and wear resistant Sunlight (UV) resistant Things you need to know 1. What do you want to inject (i.e. liquid or gas?) 2. How much do you want to inject (i.e. liquid in GPH or gas in scfh?) 3. Motive Flow Rate (i.e. how much water needs to run through the injector?) 4. Inlet Pressure in psi (i.e. what is the pressure upstream from the injector?)** 5. Outlet Pressure in psi (i.e. what pressure will the injector see downstream?)** Mazzei Injectors are of very high quality and are technically designed for exact performance. In order to select the right injector for your application please contact Fabco so that we can match your requirement to the Mazzei performance tables. **Remember, for the injector to operate it must experience a higher inlet pressure than outlet pressure (called the differential pressure). Our injectors are very efficient and begin to operate with as little as 20% differential pressure! 6-26

178 FLEX-PRO TM PERISTALTI PUMPS Applications hemical Wastewater treatment hlorination Pulp & Paper Slurries Printing inks Oil based fluids Gaseous fluids Shear sensitive fluids austics hemical Slurries Food and Beverage Feed rate Peristaltic pump design does not have valves that can clog requiring maintenance. Self priming - even against maximum line pressure. By-pass valves are not required. annot vapour lock or lose prime. Output volume is not effected by changes in back pressure. Two pump tubes supplied with each pump. No extra tubing required. Inputs include: 4-20mA, 0-10VD, and Pulse inputs for external speed control and 0-30 VD contact closure remote start/stop. Operator friendly digital touch pad with menu driven software. VGA Graphic backlit LD displays motor speed, input signal values, service and alarm status. Outputs include: Scalable 4-20mA and pulse, One 10 amp relay and three 30 VD contact closures assignable to monitor TFD, FVS, motor on, operating mode error. Two N machined squeeze rollers and two alignment rollers for optimum squeeze, unparalleled accuracy, and tube life. Heavy duty rotor - single piece rotor design means no flexing and increased accuracy Pump can handle same maximum PSI in either direction. Output rates to: 33.3 GPH ( PSI (8.6 Bar). No maintenance, brushless variable speed motor. Specially engineered tubing for long life at high pressures. Motor reverse feature to increase tube life. Patented Tube Failure Detection (TFD) system. Senses tube failure by detecting chemical in the pump head. Part Numbers GPH LPH ML/Min Max Speed RPM tube type 115V A 230V A 220V A Norprene A3V14-SND A3V15-SND A3V16-SND Norprene A3V24-SND A3V25-SND A3V26-SND Norprene A3V14-SNF A3V15-SNF A3V16-SNF Norprene A3V24-SNF A3V25-SNF A3V26-SNF Norprene A3V14-SNH A3V15-SNH A3V16-SNH Norprene A3V14-SNJ A3V15-SNJ A3V16-SNJ Norprene A3V24-SND A3V25-SND A3V26-SND Norprene A3V24-SNH A3V25-SNH A3V26-SNH Norprene A3V24-SNJ A3V25-SNJ A3V26-SNJ Norprene A3V24-SNK A3V25-SNK A3V26-SNK Tygothane A3V14-SGE A3V15-SGE A3V16-SGE Tygothane A3V24-SGE A3V25-SGE A3V26-SGE Tygothane A3V14-SGG A3V15-SGG A3V16-SGG Tygothane A3V24-SGG A3V25-SGG A3V26-SGG Tygothane A3V14-SGH A3V15-SGH A3V16-SGH Tygothane A3V24-SGH A3V25-SGH A3V26-SGH

179 A-100N PERISTALTI PUMPS Applications hemical Wastewater treatment hlorination and austics Pulp & Paper Slurries Oil based fluids Gaseous fluids Shear sensitive fluids hemical Slurries Food and Beverage Peristaltic pump design does not have valves that can clog requiring maintenance. Self priming - even against maximum line pressure. By-pass valves are not required. annot vapour lock or lose prime. Outputs to 250 ml/min (95.1 GPD). Output pressures to 100 PSI. Output volume is not effected by changes in back pressure. Patented pump tube design installs easily and stays centered on the rollers without manual adjustment. Two pump tubes supplied with each pump. No extra tubing required. Easy to use dial knob speed adjustment. Built-in Tube Failure Detection system (TFD). Senses chemical in the pump head, shuts off the pump and activates an NPN open collector output. ompatible with Blue-White s output flow verification sensor system. Durable housing of chemical resistant Valox (PBT) thermoplastic. 6 Selection Process 1. Select Maximum Motor RPM (See Below) 0 = 14 RPM 1 = 30 RPM 2 = 45 RPM 3 = 60 RPM 2. Select Power Supply 0 = 115V60Hz 1 = 220V50Hz 2 = 230V60Hz 8 = 240V50Hz 3. Select Pump Tube Size and Material (see below) 1 = 1/4 OD Tygothane 2 = 3/8 OD Tygothane 3 = 7/16 OD Tygothane 4 = 1/4 OD Norprene 5 = 5/16 OD Viton 6 = 3/8 OD Norprene 7 = 7/16 OD Norprene 4. Select Tubing onnection Type T = ompression tube nuts Q = Push-on quick connect 5. Select Miscellaneous Options if required Specifications Max. working pressure: 100 psig (6.9 bar) Max. fluid temperature:130 F (54 ) Max. ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F/-10 to 43 Output adjustment range: 5-100% in 1% increments Duty cycle: ontinuous Maximum viscosity: 5,000 entipoise Maximum suction lift: 30 ft. Water 0 psig Maximum Solids: 50% by volume Enclosure: NEMA type 2, (IP21) Voltage (amp draw): 115VA/60Hz, 1ph (.513 amp max) 230VA/60Hz, 1ph (.563 amp max) 220VA/50Hz, 1ph (.660 amp max) 240VA/50Hz, 1ph (.585 amp max) Power ord Plug Type: 115V60Hz = NEMA 5/15 (USA) 230V60Hz = NEMA 6/15 (USA) 220V50Hz = EE 7/VII (EUROPE) 240V50Hz = EE 7/VII (U.K) Approximate shipping wt: 12 lb. (5.4 kg) 14 RPM Model 30 RPM Model 45 RPM Model 60 RPM Model Tubing Material GPH GPD psi GPH GPD psi GPH GPD psi GPH GPD psi 1 = 1/4 OD Tygothane = 3/8 OD Tygothane = 7/16 OD Tygothane = 1/4 OD Norprene = 5/16 OD Viton = 3/8 OD Norprene = 7/16 OD Norprene

180 A-1600 FLEXFLO PERISTALTI PUMPS Economical and versatile. OEM design modifications. ompact housing. Fixed output rate depending on the selected RPM. Specifications Maximum feed rate: 112 GPD Maximum PSI: 25 Maximum fluid temperature: 130 F Maximum viscosity: 500 entipoise Maximum suction lift: 10 ft. water at 0 PSI Turn down ratio: non adjustable Duty cycle: ontinuous Power Requirements: Standard: 115V / 60Hz Optional: 230V / 60Hz or 24V / 60Hz Amperage draw: 115V / 60Hz, starting.74 / running V / 60Hz, starting.36 / running.21 24V / 60Hz, starting 3.4 / running 2.0 Dimensions: 4-3/4 H x 10 W x 6-1/4 D Shipping weight: 8 lbs. Part # P.S.I ML/MIN OZ/MIN G.P.H G.P.D A N A A A A N A A A A n A A A Specifications Max. working pressure: 150 psig Max. fluid temperature: 130 F (54 ) Max. Ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F/-10 to 43 Maximum viscosity: 1,000 entipoise Maximum suction lift: 10 ft. Water 0 psig Output adjustment range: 400:1 Stroke length and motor speed: 5-100% Duty cycle: ontinuous Enclosure: NEMA 3R, (IP23) Voltage (amp draw): 115VA/60Hz 230VA/60Hz Power ord Plug Type: 115V60Hz = NEMA 5/15 (USA) 230V60Hz = NEMA 6/15 (USA) Approximate shipping wt:...12 lb. (5.4 kg) HEM-FEED Diaphragm Metering Pumps Double-ball inlet and outlet cartridge type ceramic check valves. hemical resistant PVDF valve body and fitting, ceramic balls, Viton static seals and TFE/P ball seat O-rings. No metal springs are used. Stroke length & speed adjustment for accurate small injections at a high rate per minute. 400:1 turndown ratio. PVDF suction (foot) valve with Viton and TFE/P O-rings, ceramic check ball and removable polypropylene filter screen. GPD LPH Strokes/MIN Max PSI 115V/60Hz Part # 230V/60Hz Part # V344X000V00 11V364X000V V444X000V00 11V464X000V V441X000V00 11V461X000V V544X000V00 11V564X000V V543X000V00 11V563X000V

181 -1500N HEM-FEED DIAPHRAGM METERING PUMPS 6 Selection Process 1. Maximum Motor RPM 0 = 14 RPM 3 = 60 RPM 1 = 30 RPM 4 = 125 RPM 2 = 45 RPM 2. Select Power Supply (motor protection) 0 = 115V60Hz (IP) 4 = 115V60Hz (TP) 1 = 220V50Hz (IP) 5 = 220V50Hz (TP) 2 = 230V60Hz (IP) 6 = 230V60Hz (TP) 3 = 24V60Hz (IP) 7 = 24V50Hz (none)* 8 = 240V50Hz (TP) IP = impedance protection, P = Thermal protection * intermittent duty only 3. Select am Stroke Length 1 = = = = Select Output ontrol & Electrical X = Standard Equipment I = Analog timer, 5 sec. ycle - 100% duty K = Analog timer, 60 sec. ycle - 100% duty A = Junction box replaces power cord = On/Off switch and junction box P = Power cord and junction box R = 230V Power cord w/nema 6/15 plug T = 230V Power cord and on/off switch Z = Proportional feed system - JBox/ord 5. Select Pump Head Material 0 = Injection molded Polypropylene 4 = Machined Teflon 5 = Machined Acrylic 6. Select Pump Head Style 0 = Large Diaphragm 4 = Large Diaphragm arwash 2 = Small Diaphragm 6 = Small Diaphragm arwash 5 = Large Pressure release 7. Select Diaphragm Style 0 = Large Teflon/EP 6 = Small Teflon / EP 1 = Large Teflon/Viton 7 = Small Teflon / EP 8. Select Elastomer Material V = Viton E = EP 9. Select Injection Fitting 0 = A-014HD (Polypropylene - ½ lb spring) 1 = -395HD (Polypropylene - 6 lb spring) A = A-014-6T (Teflon - ½ lb spring) B = T (Teflon - 6 lb spring) = A-014HDK (PVDF - ½ lb spring) D = -395HDK (PVDF - 6 lb spring) 10. Select Footvalve 0 = -340 (PVDF/PP) 1 = -345 (PVDF/PP - bulkhead mount) 2 = T (Teflon) All ball bearing, permanently lubricated gear motor for smooth and quiet operation. Double-ball inlet and outlet cartridge type ceramic check valves. hemical resistant PVDF valve body and fitting, ceramic balls, Viton static seals and FEP ball seat o-rings. No metal springs are used. Stroke adjustment 5-100% permits accurate small injections at a high rate per minute. Teflon coated EP diaphragm and outdoor rated enclosure. Includes visual flow indicator on the suction line tubing. Durable housing of chemical resistant Valox (PBT) thermoplastic PVDF suction valve with Viton and TFE/P o-rings, ceramic check ball and removable PP filter screen. Includes 3/8 OD suction and discharge tubing, Injection fitting with spring-loaded check valve and all mounting hardware. Specifications Max. working pressure: 125 psig (8.6 bar) Max. fluid temperature: 130 F (54 ) Max. ambient temperature: 14 to 110 F/ -10 to 43 Maximum viscosity: 1,000 entipoise Maximum suction lift: 10 ft. Water 0 psig Duty cycle: ontinuous Enclosure: NEMA type 3R, (IP23) Approximate shipping wt: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) Max Output at 0 PSI GPD GPH LPM Strokes per Min Max PSI 115V/60Hz Part # 230V/60HZ Part # Standard models with Stroke Adjustment (20:1 turndown) N002X026V00 15N022X026V N102X026V00 15N122X026V N302X026V00 15N322X026V N202X000V00 15N222X000V N402X026V00 15N422X026V N402X000V00 15N422X000V N404X000V00 15N424X000V N401X000V00 15N421X000V N443X000V00 15N463X000V00 Deluxe models with Stroke & Time Interval Adjustment (400:1 turndown) N402I026V00 15N422I026V N402I000V00 15N422I000V N401I000V00 15N421I000V

182 -600P HEM-FEED DIAPHRAGM PUMPS All ball bearing, permanently lubricated gear motor for smooth and quiet operation. Double-ball inlet and outlet cartridge type ceramic check valves. hemical resistant PVDF valve body and fitting, ceramic balls, Viton static seals and TFE/P ball seat O-rings, no metal springs are used. Outputs to 516 GPD and output pressures to 125 PSI. Stroke adjustment 4-100% permits accurate small injections at a high rate per min. Teflon coated EP diaphragm and durable metal epoxy coated construction. PVDF suction valve, Viton and TFE/P O-rings, ceramic check ball and PP filter screen. Includes 3/8 OD suction and discharge tubing, Injection fitting with spring-loaded check valve and all mounting GPD GPH LPH OZ/ MIN Strokes/ MIN Max PSI 115V/60Hz Part # 230V/60Hz Part # P-115VA -614P-230VA P-115VA -630P-230VA P-115VA -645P-230VA P-115VA -660P-230VA P-115VA -6125P-230VA P-115VA -6250P-230VA 3 SERIES HEM-PRO TM DIAPHRAGM PUMPS Output, Feed Rate (dosing) up to: 42 GPH, 1,004 GPD, 158 LPH, 3,802 LPD Output pressures to 150 PSI. Operator friendly digital touch pad with easy to read Back Lit LD display and failure alarm Oversized PVDF double ball valves. DFD, Built-in Diaphragm Failure Detection system. Senses chemical in the pump head, shuts off the pump. Priming/degassing valve built into the pumphead Suction tube (8 ft), priming tube (6 ft), injection fitting, foot valve, and mounting brackets supplied with each pump. NEMA 4X and IP66 rated enclosure 6 max Output at 0 psi Max Output at Max PSI Standard Model Deluxe Model Strokes 230V/60Hz part # GPH LPH Max PSI GPH LPH per Min 115V/60Hz Part # 230V/60Hz Part # 115V/60Hz Part # F241XVA 3F251XVA 3V241XVA 3V251XVA F242XVA 3F252XVA 3V242XVA 3V252XVA 6-31

183 PUMP SELETION GUIDE ENTRIFUGAL PUMPS Ideal type for recirculating or transferring large volumes of liquid against modest discharge pressures. entrifugals are generally quiet and vibration-free while operating. Most must be located below the liquid level of the reservoir so that the pump cavity is filled by gravity flow (flooded suction). SELF-PRIMING PUMPS Usually these are positive-displacement pumps of relatively low flow rates against reasonably high discharge pressures. Self-priming pumps normally have higher noise and vibration levels than centrifugals. As the name implies, these pumps have varying abilities to lift liquids from reservoirs below the pump levels and prime themselves. SPEIAL SERVIE PUMPS Many pumps are designed for specific applications even though they may be either centrifugal or self-priming. Included in this are pumps for metering small flows, injecting chemicals into fluid lines, transferring from drums or barrels, partially or completely submersible. These pumps are usually the best options for the types of applications described. ompany Name Date ontact Telephone Address Fax ity Prov Postal lassification End User Dealer Export 6 Liquid Data Liquid to be pumped Pumping Temp Vapor Pressure oncentration % Specific Gravity Viscosity Solids? If So, What % Type Temperature ( F, ) Normal Maximum Minimum Performance Data Flow Rate Normal Minimum Maximum GPM M3/HR LPM Other Discharge Pressure Suction or Static Pressure Diff. Pressure 0 PSIG Any Special Requirements? Total Dynamic Head FEET Suction Lift? Specified Materials Testing Special Data Or Drawings Electric Air Other Motor Data Power A D Air Press. PSI Enclosure TEF ODP EXP Voltage Phase Single Three N/A Hertz

184 OPEN TOP YLINDRIAL TANKS Rugged, natural colour cylindrical tanks are available in a wide range of sizes. All are rotationally moulded of tough polyethylene for years of trouble-free use. Acceptable up to 500 imperial gallon capacity without external support for specific gravity of 1.5 or less at temperatures up to150 F constant, 170 F intermittent. Tanks larger than 500 gallons need external support if temperature exceeds 100 F or specific gravity exceeds 1.2. All tanks regardless of load or temperature must be fully supported on the base, with no overhang. overs available upon request. Standard material of construction is High Density Linear Poyethylene (HDLPE), Medium Density Linear Polyethylene (MDLPE) or Low Density Linear Polyethylene (LDLPE). Other Materials like XLPE black HDLPE may be available. Some tanks are U.V. stablized for sunlight protection in outdoor applications. Moulded covers and hinged covers are available for some sizes upon request. Litres IG USG ID (IN) H (IN) ode Litres IG USG ID (IN) H (IN) ode Litres IG USG ID (IN) H (IN) ode A A R R R S R R A A R A R A A R R A R S A R R A R S A R S A R A A A R R R S A R R R A A R A Notes: Tanks must be placed on floor or solid base. Standard colour is natural. apacities and dimensions are approximate. Tank drawings are available upon request. Some tanks are U.V. stablized for sunlight protection. Please specify if tank is to be stored outdoors. 7-1

185 OPEN TOP YLINDRIAL TANKS Rugged, natural colour cylindrical tanks are available in a wide range of sizes. All are rotationally moulded of tough polyethylene for years of trouble-free use. Acceptable up to 500 imperial gallon capacity without external support for specific gravity of 1.5 or less at temperatures up to150 F constant, 170 F intermittent. Tanks larger than 500 gallons need external support if temperature exceeds 100 F or specific gravity exceeds 1.2. All tanks regardless of load or temperature must be fully supported on the base, with no overhang. overs available upon request. Standard material of construction is High Density Linear Polyethylene (HDLPE), Medium Density Linear Polyethylene (MDLPE) or Low Density Linear Polyethylene (LDLPE). Other Materials like XLPE black HDLPE may be available. Some tanks are U.V. stablized for sunlight protection in outdoor applications. Moulded covers and hinged covers are available for some sizes upon request. 7 Litres IG USG ID (IN) H (IN) ode R R S S R S R S S A R S S S A S Litres IG USG ID (IN) H (IN) ode R S S S R S S S S R S S S R S S R S S S S , S Notes: Tanks must be placed on floor or solid base. Standard colour is natural. apacities and dimensions are approximate. Tank drawings are available upon request. some tanks are U.V. stablized for sunlight protection. Please specify if tank is to be stored outdoors. 7-2

186 OPEN TOP RETANGULAR TANKS Tough and durable, these rectangular containers are available in a broad range of sizes. Sizes up to 50 gallons can be used free-standing. Optional stands are available for added support and versatility. All rectangular tanks containing liquid loads require side support. Tanks up to 50 gallons without support will bulge but will remain structurally sound. Tanks over 50 gallons without support are NOT structurally sound. All tanks, regardless of load or temperature must be fully supported on the base, with no overhang. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. overs available upon request. Notes: Tanks must be placed on floor or solid base. apacities and dimensions are ap proximate. Rectangular tanks are not self support ing, a frame should be used to support the side wall when full of liquid. overs are available upon request. Standard colour is natural. Some tanks available in Polypropylene See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. Tank drawings are available upon request. ode USG IG litres W L H R ode USG IG litres W L H R R R R R R R R

187 OPEN TOP RETANGULAR TANKS Notes: Tanks must be placed on floor or solid base. apacities and dimensions are ap proximate. Rectangular tanks are not self support ing, a frame should be used to support the side wall when full of liquid. overs are available upon request. Standard colour is natural. Some tanks available in Polypropylene See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. Tank drawings are available upon request. ode USG IG litres W L H R R R R R ode USG IG litres W L H R R R R R

188 VERTIAL LOSED TOP TANKS Fabco s self-supporting vertical closed-top tanks are ideal for short or long term storage of a wide variety of liquids. The seamless one-piece, stress-free construction and large filler openings combine strength with versatility of use. All closed top tanks are rated self supporting for 1.5 S.G. at 100 F. All tanks regardless of load or temperature must be fully supported on the base, with no overhang. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. Other sizes are available, please contact customer service for more details. USG L Dia. Ht MW USG L Dia. Ht MW USG L Dia. Ht MW , , , , , Notes: Tanks must be placed on floor or solid base. Standard colour is natural. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. Industrial (ASTM D ) and ommercial design standards available. Material options for a diverse range of application requirements: - High-density linear polyethylene (HDLPE)-black and natural white color - omplies with FDA Regulation and NSF standard ross-linked, high-density polyethylene (XLPE) - black and natural white color. Available with seismic zone 4 and UB 110 mph wind restraint tie-down systems. Systems meet UB-1997, B 2001 and IB 2003 codes. Specific gravity ratings are based on the industry s most severe calculation. Standard specific gravity choices are 1.5 and 1.9, other ratings are available upon request. Some tanks are UV stabilized for long- term outdoor service. Tank shop drawings are available upon request. 7-5

189 DOUBLE WALL ONTAINMENT TANKS Smaller dual-containment tanks provide added safety and environmental protection in more confined or remote storage locations. The advanced double-wall tank design is enclosed to prohibit foreign matter from entering the secondary containment tank, and a unique octagonal shape provides optimal spacing and sealing surface for the industry s most reliable transition fitting. The revolutionary aptor ontainment System is designed to alleviate the ever-changing environmental and safety concerns regarding bulk chemical storage and containment for the 21st century. aptor s unique tank-in-atank design enables users and specifiers to incorporate advanced performance and safety features on a bulk-handling system, which provides total containment protection. aptor s double-wall construction is completely enclosed so that external matter, such as dust, rain and snow is prevented from collecting in the outer containment tank. Besides delivering unparalleled performance benefits, aptor ontainment Systems also contribute to your company s bottom line by significantly reducing installation and procurement cost. aptors are shipped fully assembled on either a standard or wide-load flatbed trailer, which reduces comparable costs by an average of 35 percent. Ladders, fittings, mixer mounts and other accessories must be specified when ordering. 7 USG L Dia. Ht MW

190 HORIZONTAL LOSED TOP TANKS These tanks are available in skids, saddles, cradles and side mounts for a wide range of applications. Many material options are available for a diverse range of application requirements including high-density linear polyethylene (HDLPE)-black and natural white color (omplies with FDA Regulation and NSF standard 61) and crosslinked, high-density polyethylene (XLPE) - black and natural white color. The low-profile designs increase safety factors. They are available in a wide variety of styles from 25 to 13,000 gallons. The horizontal products are available in specific gravities up to 1.9. Some tanks are UV stabilized for long-term outdoor service. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. Other sizes are available, please contact customer service for more details. Notes: Tanks must be placed on floor or solid base. Standard colour is natural. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. Low-profile designs increase safety factors. Available in a wide variety of styles, 25-13,000 gallons. Horizontal products are available in specific gravities up to 1.9. All materials are UV stabilized for long-term outdoor service. Specific gravity ratings are based on the industry s most severe calculation. Tank shop drawings are available upon request. USG L Dia. Angle Ht MW , ,

191 ONIAL BOTTOM TANKS These cylindrical tanks are designed for vertical mounting, and feature a conical bottom for complete drainage and contaminant settlement. The standard material is High Density Linear Polyethylene or ross Linked Polyethylene. Smaller cone bottom tanks are ideal for small mix or batch applications. Other Materials are available upon request. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for details. 7 Notes: Standard colour is natural. See Tank Fittings and Accessories page for more information on accessories. apacities and dimensions are approximate. Dimensions are for tank only, over all height as per tank drawings. Tank drawings are available upon request. Available in 30, 45 and 60-degree slopes, sizes range from 15-13,000 gallons. Material options for a diverse range of application requirements. High-density linear polyethylene (HDLPE)-black and natural white color - omplies with FDA Regulation and NSF standard 61. ross-linked, high-density polyethylene (XLPE) - black and natural white color. Opaque white sodium hypochlorite resin # Sulfuric acid HDLPE resin # Available with seismic zone 4 and UB 110 mph wind restraint tie- down systems. Specific gravity ratings are based on the industry s most severe calculation. Standard specific gravity choices are 1.5 and 1.9, other ratings are available upon request. Maximum operating temperature is 100º F. All materials are UV stabilized for long-term outdoor service. Part # USG L Dia. Angle Ht MW H H H H H , ,

192 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART FOR SNYDER TANKS hemical onc. Resin Design Info Fitting Material Gasket Material Bolt Material Acetic Acid 60 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PP EPDM Hastelloy Acetic Acid 80 HDLPE 1.9/600 PP EPDM Hastelloy Acrylic Emulsions 50 XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS Aluminum Sulfate 50 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Ammonium Sulfate 40 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM Titanium alcium arbonate Saturated HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS alcium hloride 40 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) 32.5 HDLPE & XLPE 1.35/600 PP/PV EPDM 316SS Deionized Water <5 Megohm HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Deionized Water >5 Megohm HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Ethyl Alcohol 100 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Ethylene Glycol 100 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS Ferric hloride 50 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Ferric Sulfate 60 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Ferrous hloride Saturated HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Ferrous Sulfate 20 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Hydrochloric Acid 37 HDLPE 1.9/600 PV Viton Hastelloy Hydrofluoric Acid 48 HDLPE 1.9/600 PP/PV Viton Hastelloy Hydrofluosilicic Acid 26 HDLPE/XLPE* 1.9/600 PP Viton Hastelloy Hydrogen Peroxide 50 HDLPE 1.9/600 PV Viton Hastelloy Isopropyl Alcohol 100 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Magnesium hloride 30 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Methyl Alcohol 100 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Motor Oil 100 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/ SS Viton 316SS Phosphoric Acid 85 HDLPE 1.9/600 PV Viton 316SS Phosphoric Acid 50 HDLPE 1.9/600 PV Viton 316SS Polymers (Deposition) XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Potable Water HDLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Potassium arbonate 50 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS Potassium Hydroxide Saturated HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS Sodium arbonate 30 HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Sodium arbonate Saturated HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM Hastelloy Sodium Hydroxide 50 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS Sodium Hypochlorite-in(Non-UV) <16.5 HDLPE 1.9/600 PV Viton Titanium Sodium Hypochlorite-out (UV) <16.5 HDLPE # /600 PV Viton Titanium Sodium Hypochlorite-out (UV) <16.5 HDLPE Insulated 1.9/600 PV Viton Titanium Sodium Thiosulfate 40 HDLPE & XLPE 1.9/600 PV EPDM 316SS Sulfuric Acid 98 HDLPE #880046* 1.9/600 PV Viton Hastelloy Sulfuric Acid 93 HDLPE #880046* 1.9/600 PV Viton Hastelloy Surfactants XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS Urea Solution 50 HDLPE & XLPE 1.35/600 PP/PV EPDM 316SS Water w/ozone up to 10 PPM HDLPE & XLPE 1.5/600 PV EPDM 316SS 7 Note: Ambient Temperature hart applies to Industrial ASTM designed tanks, refers to ambient temperature. * means chemical may cause material to discolor. High purity chemical applications are limited to natural tank color or special hot compounded resins. For chemicals or chemical blends not listed on the above chart, please contact customer service. 7-9

193 TANK RESIN SELETION GUIDE. Both operating conditions and type of chemical can decrease maximum service temperatures. Some fittings of these resins are FDA acceptable. Regardless of resin, black pigmented tanks are strongly recommended for outdoor use. ontinuous service temperatures in ranges above ambient can affect tanks in at least two ways: 1) the useful life of the tank may be shortened; and 2) the ability of the container to maintain its shape may decrease, perhaps resulting in distortion. hemical resistance (general) Stress-crack resistance1 Brittleness temperature2 Impact resistance2 Abrasion resistance Rigidity Maximum service temperature leanability Translucence Weldability (hot gas) FDA acceptance olour (natural, un-pigmented) Oudoor use Linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) Liquid level Very Good Very Good 140 F/60-94 F/-70 Good Good Fair Very Good observable Weldable Yes3 White No Advantages: Lightweight. Easy to clean. orrosion resistant; no painting/maintenance. Less expensive than stainless steel or fiberglass. Applications: Storage of foodstuffs/liquids/beverages, inorganic chemicals/compounds, or organic/inorganic acids. Plating. Water treatment. Brine storage. Storage of laboratory and photographic chemicals. Not Generally Recommended for: Strong oxidizing agents, aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbons, liquefied petroleum gas, solvents. High-density polyethylene (HDPE) Liquid level Very Good Good 150 F/65-94 F/-70 Good Good Good Very Good observable Weldable Yes3 White No "Advantages: Hard, smooth surface. Easy to clean. Less expensive than stainless steel or fiberglass. Applications: Storage of caustics or organic/inorganic acids. Metal finishing. Water treatment. Storage of laboratory and photographic chemicals. Plating. Not Generally Recommended for: Strong oxidizing agents, aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbons, liquefied petroleum gas, solvents." ross-linked high-density polyethylene (XLPE) Very Good Excellent 150 F/ F/ -118 Excellent Good Good Very Good Liquid level observable Advantages: Excellent impact resistance. Suitable for many corrosives not handled by fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP). Outstanding weatherability. Applications: Storage of many corrosives, including sulfuric, hydrochloric, and hydrofluoric acids, and sodium hydroxide. Storage of organic/inorganic chemicals/compounds. Storage of sodium hypochlorite. Storage of boiler treatment chemicals. Water/sewage treatment. Outdoor use. Not Generally Recommended for: Strong oxidizing agents, aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbons, liquefied petroleum gas, solvents. Not Weldable No Off-White No Notes: 1 XLPE is recommended for use with stress-cracking agents. 2 Brittleness temperature per ASTM test D-746. The impact resistance of most rotomolded tanks declines at freezing temperatures. XLPE tanks are well-suited for outdoor storage in winter. 3 LLDPE and HDPE tanks comply with FDA Regulation ; PVDF tanks comply with FDA Regulation Open-top tanks should be black for outdoor use. Only tanks which are UV-stabilized may be used outdoors

194 HEAVY DUTY BULK HEAD FITTINGS SIZE BLAK PPG NATURAL PP PV PV RED PVDF NATURAL PVDF 1/2" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 3/4" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 1" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 1-1/4" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 1-1/2" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 2" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 3" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT 4" PG DT PP DT P DT P DT PVR DT PV DT Notes: Moulded, with double tapped NPT internal threads. Heavy duty bulkhead fittings feature double tapped internal NPT threads and a unique left hand self tightening nut. omplete with one (1) EPDM gasket (Buna-N and Viton gasketing materials available upon request). Gasket effectively seals against curved or irregular surfaces. TANK FITTINGS AND ADAPTERS To add to the versatility of your shipping, storage and material handling containers, Fabco offers a complete range of accessories. Each is engineered and manufactured to work precisely with the container it s designed for. Accessories include bulkhead fittings with gaskets, welded bosses, ball valves, covers, tank stands and flexible connectors. Notes: Identify fitting and specify its exact location. If installing your own fittings, cut holes at least 1/16 in. larger in diameter than piece to be installed. are must be taken to allow clearance of inside flange. The standard threaded fitting recommended for polyethylene tanks is a removable P.V.. Adaptor (Bulkhead or ompression Fitting) with FEMALE N.P.T. and Neoprene Gaskets. Where chemical reaction does not permit P.V.. and Neoprene Fittings, Polyethylene welded Boss with FEMALE N.P.T. can be used as an alternative. Welded poly bosses full and half couplings, and gusseted flanged nozzles are available for installation on all containers. Fabricated options such as baffles, interior piping, welded covers and tank extensions are available. Special and custom sizes available on request. 7 VALVES AND FITTINGS FITTINGS: The Standard threaded fittings recommended for our polyethylene tanks are the welded polyethylene female Boss and the removable PV Bulkhead fitting. Half and full welded couplings are also available. All threaded fittings are standard NTA. VALVES: PV True Union ball valves and polypropylene gate valves are available. The PV TU ball valve permits easy disconnect without disturbing plumbing and has replaceable seats and seals. An economy tap is available for small tank applications and is used with either a threaded boss or bulkhead fitting. USTOM PLAEMENT OF VALVES AND FITTINGS: FABO is ready to help with your specific requirements and can assemble a tank-accessory package that will uniquely meet your storage, mixing or dispensing application. ORDER INFORMATION: When ordering a tank with fitting(s) installed, identify the connection, type, size, and exact location. If positioning is critical to the installation, it is recommended that a dimensional drawing accompany the order. If installing your own fittings, cut holes at least 1/16 (1.59 mm) larger in diameter than piece to be installed. are must be taken to allow clearance of inside flange or bottom inside radius of tank. 7-11

195 BOLTED FLANGE FITTINGS Bolted Flange Fittings are available in PV and PV. Bolt heads are encapsulated in polyethylene providing chemical resistance. Available bolt materials are 316 Stainless Steel, Titanium, -276 and Alloy 400. Available in a variety of diameters. BOLTED FLANGE BULKHEAD FITTINGS Bolted Flange Bulkhead Fittings are used in strong oxidizing chemical applications such as Sodium Hypochlorite and Sulfuric Acid where the OR-1000 Systems are used. It is designed to protect the cross-section of the tank against chemical attack. Available in a variety of diameters. UNIVERSAL BALL DOME FITTINGS The Universal Ball Dome Fittings are self-aligning which allow for vertical plumbing on the dome of the tank and available in PV or PV. It allows piping to be plumbed vertically and is a economical alternative to UBD flange style (no additional bolts required). Available in a variety of diameters. SELF ALIGNING BALL DOME FITTING The Universal Ball Dome Fittings are self-aligning which allow for vertical plumbing on the dome of the tank and available in PV or PV. It also allows piping to be plumbed vertically and the fitting can be repaired and maintained externally without tank entry. Available in a variety of diameters. 7 FLEXI-JOINT ONNETIONS This unique product is a built-in shock absorber. It can absorb movement & stress, accommodate pipe misalignment, surge force protection, and isolate pump vibration. It allows you to install direct to a tank with confidence. Available in a variety of diameters. 7-12

196 GUIDELINES FOR FATORY-INSTALLED FITTINGS Before ordering a FABO Tank with factory installed welded fittings, consider: space constraints, tank elevation, whether indoor or outdoor use, location, building codes, safety regulations, piping and all other equipment that will be attached to the tank. 1. When a fitting is welded onto the side of a tank that is not elevated, complete drainage is impossible. This applies to flanges, spigots, and bulkheads. Specify that the fitting s centreline must be as close as possible to the bottom of the tank. For maximum drainage, see descriptions below. 2. Fittings welded to tank bottoms will drain to within 1/8 in. of the bottom (bulkheads vary by size). The tank s foundation must have a cut-out or channel for the fitting and its piping. 3. When tanks are elevated, welded fittings can be installed low on the tank wall, providing drainage to within 1/4 in. of the bottom (bulkheads vary with size). The bulkhead must not interfere with the support. 4. Welded fittings are not flush with tank bottom. This prevents complete drainage. How To Specify Fittings And Their Locations When you order factory-installed fittings on your FABO Tanks, you must provide detailed installation information. You must provide Fabco with: 1. The catalogue number for each fitting. 2. The catalogue number for each tank. 3. Two complete views of each tank with its fitting(s). Large clear, freehand drawings - as shown - are acceptable. 7 NOTE: On cylindrical tanks, fittings will be installed 6 inches to the left of the calibration marks, unless otherwise specified. On conical-bottom tanks, fittings will be center-bottom drains installed at the cone tip, unless otherwise specified. SPEIFY ALL X DIMENSIONS IN INHES OR DEGREES 7-13

197 TIGER-FLEX POOL AND SPA HOSE The Tiger-Flex brand of Pool and Spa hose is assurance to your customers that you care about quality installations. In addition to substantially reducing time on each job, you also save up to 50% of the fittings required when compared to using rigid PV pipe. Tiger-Flex Pool and Spa Hose is designed for use with PV schedule 40 solvent weld fittings only. The temperature range is from -4 F to 150 F. Tiger-Flex Pool and Spa Hose is the world s leading and original flexible PV hose. When making pool and spa installations, be sure to apply primer before using solvent cement on the outside of the hose. This hose is very flexible so it is ideal for working in confined areas and permits installer to make smooth, tight turns which saves time and labor. The smooth bore construction allows unrestricted flow. Applications Swimming Pools Spas Hot Tubs Filters Heaters Features Very flexible. Ideal for working in confined areas, it allows installer to make smooth turns. Unbeatable for labor saving. Smooth bore interior for efficient transfer of water. ost savings requires less fittings than rigid pipe when plumbing a normal spa or hot tub. Standard packages are either 50 feet or 100 feet. Part # OD Max. Working Pressure (PSI) Vacuum Rating (IN HG) Solid ream lear Flex/ Burgundy Helix IPS Size (IN) Minimum Bend 68 F (IN) Std Length Approx. Weight (lbs/ft) PFH050 F16MBT 1/2 " / PFH075 F20MBT 3/4" / PFH100 F27MBT 1" / F36MR F36MBT 1 1/4 " / PFH150 F42MBT 1 1/2 " / PFH200 F52MBT 2" / PFH300 3" Notes: Inside diameter is nominal. Tolerance on outside diameters are ±0.20. Vacuum rating on sizes 1 thru 2 is F Not recommended for compressed air or gas service. Like other materials, Spa Hoses can be damaged by rodents or insects, including termites. Our warranty does not cover damages caused by them. Spa Hose should not be used underground in areas infested by termites. This product warning shall be given to every purchaser of Spa Hose. Use with recommended primers and PV cements; consult with glue supplier for recommendations. oils of Tigerflex Spa Hose should not be stacked more than five coils high. Hose which has been stacked high may be damaged over time. 8-1

198 KURI-TE LEAR PV HOSE Fabco clear vinyl tubing is constructed of a lear non-toxic food and crystal clear PV compound which makes it ideal for beverage grade PV tubing. It is formulated with ingredients in compliance with applicable FDA(03) requirements, meets USDA(17), 3A(01), NSF(13), UL(16), RoHS(15) and USP(18) lass VI criteria. The service temperature Range: is between +25 F (-4 ) and +150 F (+65 ). Hose clamps and fittings are also available. See index for types and locations. 8 Features High gloss crystal clear appearance with glass smooth interior to reduce sediment buildup. Non-toxic blue tint to enhance clarity. NSF-51 and NSF-61 certified material. Self-extinguishing. ompound hardness 73 ±3 Shore A. APPLIATIONS Tubing for laboratories. Water distillation lines. Deionized water systems. Air conditioning and refrigeration drainage. Air lines and bottling plants. Beverage dispensing units Ice making machines. High efficiency furnace drainage. Transfer of weak chemicals & acids. Notes: Working Pressure decreases as temperature increases. Pressure ratings can only be obtained with proper coupling procedures. Use of compression fittings with non-reinforced PV tubing is not recommended. Hose claims involving use of these fit tings will be disallowed. STAN- DARD LENGTH (FT) APPROX. WT PER ROLL (LBS.) Part # NOM. I.D. NOM. O.D. WALL THIK- NESS WP/PSI 68 F (20 ) VT037 1/8" 1/4" 1/16" K /16" 1/4" 1/32" VT051 3/16" 5/16" 1/16" K /16" 3/8" 3/32" VT071 1/4" 3/8" 1/16" VT073 1/4" 7/16" 3/32" VT074 1/4" 1/2" 1/8" VT092 5/16" 7/16" 1/16" K /16" 1/2 3/32" K /16" 9/16" 1/8" VT107 3/8" 1/2" 1/16" VT108 3/8" 9/16" 3/32" K /8" 5/8" 1/8" K /16" 9/16" 1/16" VT135 1/2" 5/8" 1/16" VT137 1/2" 11/16" 3/32" VT138 1/2" 3/4" 1/8" K /8" 3/4" 1/16" VT164 5/8" 13/16" 3/32" VT165 5/8" 7/8" 1/8" VT180 3/4" 1" 1/8" K /4" 1 1/8" 3/16" VT185 3/4" 1-1/4" 1/4" K /8" 1 1/8" 1/8" K /8" 1 1/4" 3/16" VT210 1" 1-1/4" 1/8" VT213 1" 1-3/8" 3/16" K " 1 1/2" 1/4" K /4" 1 1/2" 1/8" VT /4" 1-5/8" 3/16" K /4" 1 3/4" 1/4" K /2" 1 7/8" 3/16" K /2" 2" 1/4" K " 2 1/2" 1/4"

199 KURI-TE LEAR BRAIDED PV HOSE Kuri-Tec clear braided PV hose is a lightweight standard wall crystal clear yarn reinforced hose suitable for a wide variety of food and beverage applications. It is constructed of crystal clear PV compound, formulated with ingredients in compliance with applicable FDA(03) requirements, meets USDA(17), 3A(01), NSF(13), UL(16), RoHS(15) and USP(18) lass VI criteria. It is reinforced with spiraled polyester yarn and longitudinal orange tracer yarns for identification. The service temperature Range: is between +25 F (-4 ) and +150 F (+65 ). Hose clamps and fittings are also available. See index for types and locations. APPLIATIONS Food & beverage dispensing. Deionized water. Liquid food products. Air and water lines. Powdered food products. Potable water transfer. Air breathing lines. Pneumatic lines. Packaging machines. Features onstructed with non-toxic compounds. NSF-51 and NSF-61 certified material. rystal clear allows visual confirmation of product flow. Longitudinally-reinforced to reduce elongation under pressure. Light weight. Self-extinguishing. Non-marking. Silicone-free. Non-conductive. One-piece lengths. Resistant to chemicals ompound hardness 73 ±3 Shore A. Notes: Working Pressure decreases as temperature increases. Pressure ratings can only be obtained with proper coupling procedures. Use of compression fittings with braided hose is not recommended. Hose claims involving use of these fittings will be disallowed. WALL THIK- NESS WP/PSI 70 F / (20 ) WP/PSI 122 F / (50 ) STAN- DARD LENGTH APPROX. WT PER ROLL (LBS.) Part # NOMINAL I.D. NOMINAL O.D. NYR-050 3/16" 0.375" 3/16" NYR-055 1/4" 0.438" 1/16" NYR-060 5/16" 0.531" 1/16" NYR-072 3/8" 0.594" 1/16" NYR-080 1/2" 0.750" 3/32" NYR-090 5/8" 0.891" 1/8" NYR-100 3/4" 1.031" 1/16" NYR-110 1" 1.300" 3/32" NYR /4" 1.620" 1/16" NYR /2" 1.938" 3/32" NYR-150 2" 2.490" 1/8" K3150MM04 4 mm 9 mm 2.5 mm k3150mm06 6 mm 11 mm 2.5 mm K3150MM08 8 mm 13.5 mm 2.75 mm K3150MM10 10 mm 16 mm 3 mm K3150MM12 12 mm 18 mm 3 mm k3150mm19 19 mm 26 mm 3.5 mm

200 SERIES K7130 HEAVY WALL PV TRANSFER HOSE Series K7130 Heavy Wall PV Food & Beverage Vacuum/ Transfer Hose is made from crystal clear PV compound, formulated in compliance with applicable FDA(03) requirements, meets USDA(17), 3A(01), NSF(13), UL(16), USP(18) and RoHS(15) criteria. It is reinforced with helically-wound spring steel wire. Hose clamps and fittings are also available. Features 29.9 HG vacuum rating. Spiral wire reinforcement prevents kinking or collapsing, hose diameter will not expand under normal rated working pressures. rystal clear allows visual confirmation of product flow. Glass-smooth interior reduces material buildup. Features Electrogalvanized helical steel wire can be used for static dissipation. ompound hardness 73 ±3 Shore A. Self-extinguishing. Non-marking, non-toxic and silicone-free. Applications Industrial vacuum pumps and lines Food & beverage dispensing. ar wash applications. oolant and air breathing lines. Deionized water systems. Notes: The service temperature range is from +25 F (-4 ) to +150 F (+65 ). NSF 51 certified Series # Size ode Nominal ID (IN) Nominal OD (IN) WP/PSI 70 F WP/PSI 122 F Standard Length of oil Approx. Wt per Roll Min. Bend 70 F K / ft. 10 lbs. 1" K / ft. 13 lbs. 1 1/2" K / ft. 21 lbs. 2" K / ft. 30 lbs. 2 K / ft. 36 lbs. 3" K ft. 44 lbs. 4" K / ft. 37 lbs. 5" K / ft. 42 lbs. 6" K ft. 56 lbs. 8" SERIES K7160 STANDARD WALL PV HOSE Series K7160 Standard Wall PV Food & Beverage Vacuum/ Transfer Hose is made from crystal clear PV compound, formulated with ingredients in compliance with applicable FDA(03) requirements, meets USDA(17), 3A(01), NSF(13) and RoHS(15) criteria. It is reinforced with a helically-wound spring steel wire. Features 29.9 HG vacuum rating. Spiral wire reinforcement prevents kinking or collapsing, hose diameter will not expand under normal rated working pressures. rystal clear allows visual confirmation of product flow. Glass-smooth interior reduces material buildup. Features Electrogalvanized helical steel wire can be used for static dissipation. Self-extinguishing. Non-marking, non-toxic and silicone-free. 8 Applications Industrial vacuum pumps and lines Food & beverage dispensing. ar wash applications. oolant and air breathing lines. Deionized water systems. Notes: The service temperature range is from +25 F (-4 ) to +150 F (+65 ). NSF 51 certified Series # Size ode Nominal ID (IN) Nominal OD (IN) WP/PSI 70 F WP/PSI 122 F Standard Length of oil Approx. Wt per Roll Min. Bend 70 F K / ft. 7 lbs. 1" K / ft. 11 lbs. 1 1/2" K / ft. 15 lbs. 2" K / ft. 19 lbs. 2 K / ft. 24 lbs. 3" K ft. 33 lbs. 4" K / ft. 25 lbs. 5" K / ft. 29 lbs. 6" K ft. 42 lbs. 8" K / ft. 58 lbs. 9" K / ft. 69 lbs. 10" K ft. 81 lbs. 12" 8-4

201 K3130 SERIES BF HEAVY WALL PV HOSE Applications Food & beverage dispensing. oolant and air breathing lines. Deionized water systems. Liquid food products. Powdered food products. Potable water transfer. Pneumatic lines. Packaging machines. Notes: The service temperature range is from +25 F (-4 ) to +150 F (+65 ). NSF 51 certified Working Pressure decreases as temperature increases. Pressure ratings can only be obtained with proper coupling procedures. Use of compression fittings with yarnreinforced hose is not recommended. Hose claims involving use of these fittings will be disallowed. A heavier walled crystal clear yarn reinforced hose suitable for a wide variety of food and beverage applications. It is constructed of crystal clear PV compound, formulated in compliance with applicable FDA(03) requirements, meets USDA(17), 3A(01), NSF(13), UL(16), RoHS(15) and USP(18) lass VI criteria. It is reinforced with spiraled polyester yarn and longitudinal blue tracer yarns for identification. Features onstructed with non-toxic compounds. NSF-51 and NSF-61 certified material. rystal clear allows visual confirmation of product flow. Longitudinally-reinforced to reduce elongation under pressure. Light weight. Features Self-extinguishing. Non-marking and Silicone-free. One-piece lengths. ompound hardness 73 ±3 Shore A. Series # Size ode Nominal ID (IN) Nominal OD (IN) WP/PSI 70 F WP/PSI 122 F Standard Length of oil Approx. Wt per Roll K / ft. 12 lbs. K / ft. 17 lbs. K / ft. 24 lbs. K / ft. 28 lbs. K / ft. 32 lbs. K / ft. 52 lbs. K / ft. 52 lbs. K / ft. 60 lbs. K ft. 76 lbs. K / ft. 64 lbs. K / ft. 75 lbs. K ft. 96 lbs. SERIES UBK ABRASION-RESISTANT PV HOSE Series UBK Polyurethane-lined abrasion-resistant PV material handling hose is ideal for dry applications. The smooth polyurethane lining provides resistance to abrasion and eliminates material build up. The black HMW PV is flexible provides sub-zero flexibility and light weight for easy handling. It is formulated with static-dissipative compounds. Exposed black rigid PV helix is abrasionresistant and allows hose to slide easily and makes it easier handle. Applications Roof rock cleaning Abrasive material transfer Sand/shot blast recovery line. Notes: The service temperature range is from -40 F to +150 F. Actual service temperature range is application-dependent. Spiral Double Bolt lamps Service life may vary depending on operating conditions and type of material being conveyed. Approx. Liner Thickness (IN) WP/ PSI 68 F WP/ PSI 104 F Standard Length of oil Approx. Wt (lbs./ft) Vacuum/ (IN of HG) 68 F Vacuum / (IN of HG) 104 F Min. Bend 70 F Part # Nominal ID (IN) Nominal OD (IN) UBK / Full 28 2" UBK / / Full 28 4" UBK / Full 28 4" UBK / Full 28 6" UBK /50/ " UBK /50/ " UBK / " 8 8-5

202 SERIES E INSTRUMENT GRADE PE TUBING Parflex flexible polyethylene thermoplastic tubing is extruded from high molecular weight resin for increased dimensional stability, uniformity and long-term strength. Its resistance to environmental stress cracking greatly exceeds that of ordinary polyethylene tubing as measured by ASTM D (10% IG- EPAL).Parflex polyethylene tubing is available in black as well as seven coding colours as recommended by the Instrument Society of America. Black (EB) tubing contains an ultra-violet inhibitor which is recommended for use in sunlit areas. Ingredients of natural and colour tubing (except black) listed below meet F.D.A. requirements for food contact applications. All tubing conforms to ASTM D-1248, Type I, lass A, ategory 4, Grade E5. Parker Fast & Tite fittings or Parker Brass fittings are recommended for this type of Tubing. The suggested operating temperature -80F (-62) to +150F (+66). 8 Part No. olour OD (IN) ID (IN) Wall Thickness Length (FT) F Min. Burst 73 F Min. Bend Radius (IN) Weight per 100 FT E Natural 1/ E Natural 1/ E Natural 1/ EB Black 1/ EB Black 1/ EB Black 1/ E-43-R-0100 Red 1/ E-43-R-0500 Red 1/ E-43-B-0100 Blue 1/ E-43-B-0500 Blue 1/ E-43-O-0500 Orange 1/ E-43-Y-0500 Yellow 1/ E-43-P-0500 Purple 1/ E-43-G-0500 Green 1/ E Natural 5/ / EB Black 5/ / E Natural 3/ / E Natural 3/ / EB Black 3/ / EB Black 3/ / E-64-R-0500 Red 3/ / E-64-B-0500 Blue 3/ / E-64-O-0500 Orange 3/ / E-64-Y-0500 Yellow 3/ / E-64-P-0500 Purple 3/ / E-64-G-0500 Green 3/ / E Natural 1/ / EB Black 1/ / E Natural 5/ EB Black 5/ E Natural 5/ EB Black 5/

203 LABORATORY GRADE PP TUBING Parflex polypropylene tubing may be used at higher temperatures and working pressures than polyethylene tubing. Resistance to hot water and hot corrosive acids is excellent. Polypropylene tubing will last many times longer than nylon tubing in hot water service. Parflex polypropylene tubing is available in white or ultra-violet resistant black. Good resistance to vegetable oils. Water absorption is less than.01% and it s resistance to environmental stress cracking is excellent. It meets FDA requirements for food contact. It is flexible and dimensionally stable. The recommended fittings for this pipe are the Parflex Fast & Tite fittings or the Parker Brass fitting. Other sizes available upon request. Notes: Suggested operating temperatures, depending upon conditions are 0 F ( 18 ) to +200 F (+93 ). The recommended fittings for this pipe are the Parflex Fast & Tite fittings or the Parker Brass fitting. oil Length (FT) Working Pressure at 73 F (PSI) Min. Burst at 73 F (PSI) Part # olour O.D. (IN) I.D. (IN) Wall (IN) Min. Bend Radius (IN) PP White 1/ /2.30 PPB Black 1/ /2.30 PP White 3/ /4.70 PPB Black 3/ /4.70 PP White 1/ PPB Black 1/ PP White 5/ /4 2.1 PPB Black 5/ /4 2.1 PP White 3/ /4 2.4 PPB Black 3/ /4 2.4 PP White 1/ /2 3.5 PPB Black 1/ /2 3.5 Weight Per 100 Feet 8 8-7

204 FABO SPEIALTY TUBING 8 Fabco Material Norton ompany learflex 60/V60/M60 Tygon R ) learflex 70 Tygon B ) B-44-4X 3) S-50-HL 4) Resin PV PV FuelFlex 65 Tygon F A 5) PV, FUEL BraidFlex 70 Tygon B- 44-4X I.B./ NT-80 6) PV REIN- FORED Acutech FEP hemfluor FEP TEFLON FEP Acutech PFA Acutech PVDF hemfluor PFA - TEFLON PFA KYNAR- PVDF PurFlex 85 PurFlex 75 PolyFlex 50 Tygothane - - PUR, ESTER PUR, ETHER Available Sizes 1/4-2 1/2 1/8-2 1/8-3/4 3/16-2 1/16-1/2 1/16-1/2 1/8-1 1/8-1 1/8-1 1/8-1 ertifications USDA, FDA, USP VI USDA, FDA, 3-A NSF-51 USP VI USDA, FDA, NSF-51 USDA, FDA USDA, FDA USDA, FDA, 3-A USP VI - - Durometer (Shore) 55 (A) 65 (A) 60 (A) 65 (A) 58 (D) 60 (D) 67 (D) 85 (A) 75 (A) 50 (D) Specific Gravity Operating Temp. Range ( F) Operating Temp. Range ( ) Sterilization* -25 to to to to to to to to to to 205 Autoclave Gas hemical N/A Gas hemical Autoclave Gas hemical Autoclave Gas hemical -454 to to 260 Autoclave Gas hemical -25 to to to 175 LLDPE USDA, FDA -100 to to to to to 79 Autoclave Gas hemical Gas Gas hemical Tensile Strength, psi olour rystal lear rystal lear Transparent Yellow lear Transparent Transparent Translucent Transparent Transparent Translucent Odor Slight Slight Slight Slight None None None Slight None Slight Taste Imparted None None N/A None None None None None None None Tear Strength Good Good Good Very Good Good Good Excellent Excellent Excellent Very Good Bend Radius 4 x O.D. 5 x O.D. 4 x O.D. 6 x O.D. 8 x O.D. 10 x O.D. 10 x O.D. 6 x O.D. 6 x O.D. 8 x O.D. Elongation, (%) Flame Resistance Self-ext. Self-ext. Self-ext. Self-ext. Self-ext. Self-ext. Self-ext. Burns Burns Burns Abrasion Resistance Very Good Very Good Very Good Good Very Good Very Good Very Good Excellent Excellent Good orrosion Resistance Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Permeability** N2 O2 O TYPE: 1) Laboratory tubing 2) Beverage tubing 3) Food, Milk and Dairy Products tubing 4) Surgical and Hospital tubing 5) Fuel and Lubricant tubing 6) Pressure-rated food, milk and dairy products tubing *STERILIZATION GUIDELINES: Autoclaving (121, 15 psig for 20 minutes) lean and rinse item with distilled water before autoclaving. ertain chemicals which have no appreciable effects on resins at room temperature may cause deterioration at autoclaving temperatures unless removed with distilled water beforehand. Gas ethylene oxide formaldehyde. Disinfectants benzalkonium chloride, formalin, ethanol, etc. Dry Heat 170 (338 F). Radiation gamma irradiation at 2.5 Mrad with unstabilized plastic. For additional information, contact FABO PLASTIS Preferred method of sterilization Polyethylene, Polypropylene, Polyurethane, and Nylon Tubing also available upon request. 8-8

205 HOSE LAMPS Fabco tubing and hose clamps are available in two configurations. Type 1 is constructed of 301 stainless steel band with 5/16 Slotted carbon steel hex head screw. Type 2 is constructed of 301 stainless steel bands with 5/16 Slotted 305 stainless steel hex head screw. hart indicates standard sizes. ontact Fabco for availability of non-standard sizes. Notes: Dimensions in brackets in millimeters. Nominal Size Min. Diameter Max. Diameter Standard pack Type 1 Part # Type 2 Part # 1/4" (6.35) 1/4" (6.35) 5/8" (15.87) 10 SL04 SSL04 5/16" (7.94) 5/16" (7.94) 7/8" (22.23) 10 SL05 SSL05 3/8" (9.52) 3/8" (9.52) 25/32" (19.81) 10 SL06 SSL06 1/2" (12.70) 1/2" (12.70) 1" (25.40) 10 SL08 SSL08 5/8" (15.87) 9/16" (14.27) 1 1/8" (28.57) 10 SL10 SSL10 3/4" (19.05) 11/16" (17.47) 1 1/4" (31.75) 10 SL12 SSL12 1" (25.40) 5/8" (15.87) 1 1/2" (38.10) 10 SL16 SSL16 1 1/4" (31.75) 13/16" (20.62) 1 3/4" (44.45) 10 SL20 SSL20 1 1/2" (38.10) 1 1/16" (27.00) 2" (50.80) 10 SL24 SSL24 1 3/4" (44.45) 1 7/16" (36.50) 2 3/8" (60.32) 10 SL28 SSL28 2" (50.80) 1 9/16" (39.70) 2 1/2" (63.50) 10 SL32 SSL32 2 1/4" (57.15) 1 13/16" (46.05) 2 3/4" (69.85) 10 SL36 SSL36 2 1/2" (63.50) 2 1/16" (52.40) 3" (76.20) 10 SL40 SSL40 2 3/4" (69.85) 2 5/16" (58.75) 3 1/4" (82.55) 10 SL44 SSL44 3" (76.20) 2 9/16" (65.10) 3 1/2" (88.90) 10 SL48 SSL48 3 1/4" (82.55) 2 13/16" (71.45) 3 3/4" (95.25) 10 SL52 SSL52 3 1/2" (88.90) 3" (76.20) 3 13/16" (96.85) 10 SL54 SSL54 3 1/2" (88.90) 3" (76.20) 4" (101.60) 10 SL56 SSL56 3 3/4" (95.25) 3 5/16" (84.15) 4 1/4" (107.95) 10 SL60 SSL60 4" (101.60) 3 9/16" (90.50) 4 1/2" (114.30) 10 SL64 SSL64 4 1/2" (114.30) 4 1/8" (104.77) 5" (127.00) 10 SL72 SSL72 5" (127.00) 4 5/8" (117.47) 5 1/2" (139.70) 10 SL80 SSL80 5 1/4" (133.35) 4 3/8" (111.12) 5 11/16" (144.46) 10 SL84 SSL84 5 1/2" (139.70) 5 1/8" (130.17) 6" (152.40) 10 SL88 SSL88 6" (152.40) 5 5/8" (142.81) 6 1/2" (165.10) 10 SL96 SSL96 6 1/2" (165.10) 6 1/8" (155.57) 7" (177.80) 10 SL104 SSL /4" (184.00) 6 7/8" (174.63) 7 3/4" (196.85) - SL116 SSL /2" (190.50) 6 5/8" (168.27) 7 7/8" (200.02) - SL120 SSL /4" (196.85) 6 7/8" (174.63) 8 1/4" (209.55) - SL124 SSL124 8" (203.20) 7 5/8" (193.68) 8 1/2" (215.90) - SL128 SSL /4" (222.25) 7 7/8" (200.03) 9 1/4" (234.95) - SL140 SSL /2" (241.30) 9 1/8" (231.78) 10" (254.00) - SL152 SSL /4" (247.65) 8 7/8" (225.43) 10 1/4" (260.35) - SL156 SSL156 10" (254.00) 9 1/8" (231.79) 10 1/2" (266.70) - SL160 SSL /4" (285.75) 10 7/8" (276.23) 11 3/4" (298.45) - SL180 SSL /4" (298.45) 10 7/8" (276.23) 12 1/4" (311.15) - SL190 SSL /8" (333.38) 12 5/16" (312.74) 13 5/8" (346.08) - SL212 SSL212 14" (355.60) 13 1/4" (336.55) 14 1/2" (368.30) - SL224 SSL

206 FLEXIBLE TUBING EONOMIAL FLEXIBLE TUBING GENERAL PURPOSE FLEXIBLE TUBING Type TDS TD-HS FLEXFLYTE VF BLUE MAX 2N BLUE MAX 2NN SLP-10 onstruction Single Ply Vinyl oated Polyester with Vinyl Scuff Strip Two Ply Vinyl oated Polyester with Vinyl Scuff Strip Single Ply Vinyl oated Fiberglass Two Ply otton Neoprene oated Two Ply Neoprene oated Nylon Single Ply Vinyl oated Fiberglass Sizes 3 12 ID 3 12 ID 2 14 ID 1 24 ID 1 24 ID 2 14 ID Std. Lengths 25 FT 25 FT 25 FT 25 FT 25 FT 25 FT olours BLAK WITH ORANGE WEARSTRIP BLAK WITH ORANGE WEARSTRIP BLAK BLUE OR BLAK BLAK GREY Temperature Range 40 to 200 F 40 to 200 F 20 to 200 F -40 to 250 F -40 to 258 F 0 to 250 F Options Applications Features Odd size diameters and custom lengths available. ustom colour wearstrip available (minimum may apply). Vinyl coated polyester fabric cover, enclosed spring steel wire helix, highly visible extruded vinyl orange scuff strip. Flame retardant to UL94V 0. Excellent flexibility. Odd size diameters and custom lengths available. ustom colour wearstrip available (minimum may apply). Flame retardant to UL94V 0, highly visible extruded vinyl orange scuff strip, vinyl-coated polyester fabric enclosed spring steel wire helix. Ventilation of photo reproduction machines, fine dust collection systems, transfer of low volume cool and warm air. Fiberglass cover with flame retardant vinyl coating each side. Vinyl-coated spring steel wire helix permanently bonded to carcass. Flame retardant to UL94V 0. Excellent flexibility. Available as 1N (One Ply) for temporary service, lighter applications. Non-std ID s and lengths available. uffed ends and additional coatings available. Industry standard for long term applications. Rugged, cost effective hose for dust or fumes under low positive or negative pressures. Excellent tensile strength and crush resistant. ustom ID s available up to 48. Additional Neoprene coatings available for added abrasion resistance. Heavy duty neoprene coated nylon fabric with spring steel wire reinforcement. Toughest material in the General Purpose Line. ustom ID s available up to 48. Ventilation of dry cleaning equipment, air intake and exhaust ducts, low volume air transfer. Flame retardant vinyl coated woven fiberglass cover permanently bonded to PV coated spring steel wire helix. Meets UL 181 class flammability rating. HIGH TEMPERATURE FLEXIBLE TUBING VA U FLEX TUBING Type FLEXFLYTE L 9 (2FS) FLEXFLYTE TFE S FLEXFLYTE R SUPER VA U FLEX TPE TPU onstruction Two Ply Fiberglass Silicone oated "Two Ply Silicone oated Fiberglass with Teflon liner" Two Ply Fiberglass oated Neoprene PV Two Ply Thermoplastic Elastomer Two Ply Urethane 8 Sizes 3/4 12 ID 1/2 12 ID 1 12 ID 1/4 4 ID 3/4" 6 ID 3/4 6 ID Std. Lengths 12 FT (3/4 ID 10 lengths) 1/2 ID - 6 long, 3/4 ID - 10 long, 1-12 ID - 12 long 12 FT 50 FT (25 on 3 and 4 ) 25 FT 25 FT olours RED RED BLAK GREY BLAK LEAR Temperature Range Options/ Applications Features 75 to 500 F (intermit to 600 F) Also avail. as U 9 (one Ply) for lower pressure applications. Non-std lengths avail. uffs avail. U 9: 1 12 ID The standard duct for high temperature air flow and fume removal. The internal ply of L 9 provides a smoother bore for maximum air flow, less friction loss. 75 to 400 F 65 to 300 F -20 to 150 F -40 to 250 F -40 to 250 F Also avail. as TFE N Neoprene coated fiberglass with Teflon linter. Temp range 75 to 300 F. Teflon liner is permanently bonded to inner ply of silicone fiberglass material. Excellent chemical resistance and flow characteristics. Rugged fiberglass base abrasive resistant material with wire reinforced double ply construction that provides a smooth bore for unhampered flow and does not kink in sharp bends. Liner and cover enclose a corrosion resistant spring steel wire helix that are permanently vulcanized together. ommerical or Industrial vacuum cleaners, ventilating or cooling industrial machinery, bilge pumps and bilge ventilation. High strength fiber reinforced PV hose cover bonded to coated spring steel helix. Offers flexibility for ease of handling and installation Pitch, wall thickness and length variations available with minimum order quantity." "Industrial weight, specially formulated thermoplastic elastomer (black) material; coated spring steel helix encapsulated and bonded to hose jacket. Offers flexibility; smooth bore; rubber-like characteristics. Exceptional toughness; resistant to most acids, alkalies, and solvents." "olour, pitch, wall thickness and length variations available with minimum order quantity." "Flexible, smooth bore 100% clear thermoplastic polyurethane material; coated spring steel helix encapsulated and bonded to hose jacket. Offers high abrasion, puncture, and tear resistance; excellent chemical, oil, and fungus resistance. Low temperature flexibility." NOTE: Other sizes and material combinations for Flexible Tubing types shown on this page are available on request. all Fabco for more information. 8-10

207 PV HOSE INSERT FITTINGS Engineered to provide positive grip and ease of installation. A wide variety of PV and PP insert configurations and adapters are available for use with polyethylene pipe sizes 1/2 through 4, plus 6 & 8 ouplings and Adapters for lay-flat type irrigation hose. Special 3/8 barbed configurations allow clamp-free connection to 1/2 I.D. polyethylene irrigation hose. They are manufactured from high quality PV materials to meet or exceed the applicable requirements of ASTM D Available fittings include crosses, Numerous male and female NPT threaded adapters, elbows and tees plus white PV Schedule 40 solvent cement socket and spigot adapters. The special spiral barb allows twist-on connection of hose without need for clamping. They are NSF ertified for Use with Potable Water. Other sizes and materials are also available upon request. Size (IN) Insert Tee (Insert x Insert x Insert) Insert Male Adapter (Insert x MIPT) Insert 90 degree Elbow (Insert x Insert PV Insert 90 degree Elbow (Insert x MIPT Insert oupling (Insert x Insert) Insert Plug (Insert) Insert Female Adapter (Insert x FIPT) Size (IN) Insert Tee (Insert x Insert x Insert) Insert Male Adapter (Insert x MIPT) PP Insert 90 degree Elbow (Insert x Insert Insert 90 degree Elbow (Insert x MIPT Insert oupling (Insert x Insert) Insert Plug (Insert) 1/ / / / /2 PT1G PA1G PE1G PEM1G P1G 3/4 PT2G PA2G PE2G PEM2G P2G 1 PT3G PA3G PE3G PEM3G P3G 1 14 PT4G PA4G PE4G PEM4G P4G PP4G 1 1/2 PT5G PA5G PE5G PEM5G P5G PP5G 2 PT6G PA6G PE6G PEM6G P6G PP6G 2 1/ PV PV PP PP Size (IN) Insert Reducing oupling (Insert x Insert) Size (IN) Reducing Male Adapter (MIPT x Insert) Size (IN) Insert Reducing oupling (Insert x Insert) Reducing Male Adapter (MIPT x Insert) Size (IN) Insert Reducing Tee (Insert x Insert x Insert) 3/4X1/ X1/ X3/ X7/ /4X3/ /4X /2X3/ /2X /2X1-1/ X X1-1/ X1-1/ /2X3/ /2X /4X1/ /4X X3/ X1-1/ X1-1/ /4X3/ /4X /4X1-1/ /2X /2X1-1/ /4X1/2 P21G PA21G 1X1/2 P31G 1X3/4 P32G PA32G 1-1/4X3/4 P42G PA42G 1-1/4X1 PV43G PA43G 1-1/2X1 P52G 1 1/2 X 3/4 P53G PA53G 1-1/2X1-1/4 P54G PA54G 2X1 P63G 2X1-1/4 P64G 2X1-1/2 P65G PA65G 2X1-1/ /4 X 3/4 X 1/2 PT221G 1 X 1 X 1/2 PT331G 1 X 1 X 3/4 PT332G 1 1/2 X 1 1/2 PT551G X 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 X 3/4 PT552G 1 1/2 X1 1/2 X 1 PT553G 2 X 2 X 3/4 PT662G 2 X 2 X 1 PT663G 3/4 X 1/2 X 1/2 PT211G 1 X 3/4 X 1/2 PT321G 1 X 3/4 X 3/4 PT322G 8 2-1/2X1-1/ /2X /2X1-1/

208 PP AM OUPLER FITTINGS The am oupler is a rugged engineered plastic design quick lock style for hose and pipe coupling. The am oupler is moulded of polypropylene to exacting tolerances. It is light weight, corrosion resistant, wear resistant, rugged and interchangeable with other couplers of similar design and size. am couplers are suited for a variety of applications and corrosive materials including chemical handling, agricultural fertilizers, herbicides & irrigation, dry bulk industrial use, and barge and tank unloading. Other features include Positive Action (No springs, ball bearings, snaps or lugs to fit), no maintenance, special tools or techniques required to operate. Buna N Gaskets are standard; EPDM gaskets are available upon request. All handles are zinc plated steel; Stainless steel handles are available upon request. Type A B D E F G DP Size (IN) Female Threaded Adapters Male Threaded ouplers Hose Shank ouplers Female Threaded ouplers Hose Shank Adapters Male Thread Adapters Dust aps Dust Plugs 1/ / / / D F A Type Description 1½" 2" 90 A 90 Male Adapter with Female Thread A A Female oupler with Hose Shank D 90 Female oupler with Female Thread D D 90 F 90 Male Adapter with Male Thread F F Notes: 1/2 couplers and adapters will interchange with 3/4 couplers and adapters. Only the threads and barbs are 1/2. 1-1/4 couplers and adapters will interchange with 1-1/2 couplers and adapters. Only the threads and barbs are 1-1/4. Size (IN) EPDM Gasket Part # Stainless Steel Handle Part # 1/2" - 3/4" " /4" -1-1/2" " " /2" - 1" /4" - 2" "

209 NYLON ABLE TIES This line of self-locking nylon cable ties are for standard and heavy duty, regular and mounting applications. They securely bundles of cables, wires and hoses from 1/16 (1.6 mm) to 15 (31.8 mm) diameters. The special bent tip on standard duty VNT s allow for easy insertion. They are chemically resistant to salt water, weak acids, alcohol, grease, oil, gasoline and common solvents. As well, they are fungus inert. They are available in ultraviolet resistant material for outdoor use. They are constructed of Molded type 6/6 nylon according to ASTM D , flammability classification 94V 2 and temperature index 125 electrical (85 mechanical). Maximum temperature on the part shall not exceed 75. Approx. Length (IN) Max Bundle Diameter (IN) Minimum Tensile Strength Minimum Order Qty Part # Standard Duty (1/16" Min. Bundle Dia.) VNT / VNT / VNT VNT /2 1 1/ VNT / VNT / VNT VNT Heavy Duty (3/16" Min. Bundle Dia.) VNT VNT / VNT32-120** VNT / VNT VNT VNT48-175* Approx. Length (IN) Max Bundle Diameter (IN) Minimum Tensile Strength Mounting Screw Size Minimum Order Qty Part # Standard Duty VMNT / VMNT /2 1 3/ VMNT VMNT / Heavy Duty VMNT / Notes: * Gray colour ** Black colour UV Black available upon request able tie tools available upon request The 4 and 8 (40 lb.) standard duty ties are available in the following colours: blue, brown, gray, green, orange, purple, red and yellow. Fluorescent colours are available in blue, green, orange, pink and yellow. These vibrant ties are available in the 4, 8 (40 lb.) and 11 standard duty ties. 8-13

210 LAY-FLAT DISHARGE HOSE Kuri-Tec Lay-Flat Discharge Hose is a thin-wall flexible PV hose reinforced with a woven synthetic fiber. The sandwich construction provides for vinyl inside and outside for both corrosion and abrasion resistance, yet allows the hose to be rolled up flat for easy-spacesaving storage. It is ideal for portable pump and irrigation use. The Temperature range is - 20 to + 80 (-4 F to F ). Notes: NF125 can be made available upon demand. onstructed of blue P.V.. impregnation reinforced with woven high tensile synthetic yarn Part # I.D. (Inch) Length (Ft.) Package Weight Lb/ft Working Pressure 68 F LFT OIL LFT OIL LFT OIL LFT OIL LFT OIL LFT OIL LFT OIL HIGH PRESSURE LAY-FLAT DISHARGE HOSE The brown high pressure hose is a more rugged version of the blue PV lay-flat discharge hose. It is designed for use where higher working pressures are required. The Temperature range is - 20 to + 80 (-4 F to F ). Notes: NF125 can be made available upon demand. onstructed of blue P.V.. impregnation reinforced with woven high tensile synthetic yarn Part No. I.D. (Inch) O.D. (Inch) Wall (Inch) Length (Ft.) Package Weight (Lbs/ft) Working Pressure 68 F HFT OIL HFT OIL HFT OIL HFT OIL HFT OIL HFT OIL

211 FAST & TITE TUBE FITTINGS The most complete line of plastic fittings for thermoplastic tubing in the industry. FAST & TITE thermoplastic tube fittings from Parker will prove to be the answer to your tubing connector needs. These fittings are available in Black High Density Polyethylene as a standard. White Nylon is also available. A unique 302 stainless steel grab ring, for tube retention, coupled with a Nitrile O -Ring for positive seal assures good tube connection with only hand tight assembly. Vibration or tube movement will not break the seal and cause leakage. Fittings are completely reusable. Parts are easily replaced. Use FAST & TITE fittings with all plastic, metal or glass tubing. All ingredients in FAST & TITE fittings meet F.D.A. and NSF requirements for food contact and potable water. The temperature range is 0 to +212 F for black polypropylene -40 to +200 F for white nylon. Male onnector (Tube x MPT) Male Branch Tee Tube xmpt Male Elbow Tube xmpt Elbow Union (Tube) Female Elbow Tube x FPT Part # OD X MPT (IN) P4M2 1/4 x 1/8 P4M4 1/4 x 1/4 P5M2 5/16 x 1/8 P5M4 5/16 x 1/4 P6M2 3/8 x 1/8 P6M4 3/8 x 1/4 P6M6 3/8 x 3/8 P6M8 3/8 x 1/2 P6M12 3/8 x 3/4 P8M2 1/2 x 1/8 P8M4 1/2 x 1/4 Part # OD x MPT (IN) P4MT2 1/4 x 1/8 P4MT4 1/4 x 1/4 P5MT2 5/16 x 1/8 P5MT4 5/16 x 1/4 P6MT4 3/8 x 1/4 P6MT6 3/8 x 3/8 P8MT6 1/2 x 3/8 P8MT8 1/2 x 1/2 P10MT8 5/8 x 1/2 Tee Union (Tube) Part # OD x MPT (IN) P4ME2 1/4 x 1/8 P4ME4 1/4 x 1/4 P4ME6 1/4 x 3/8 P5ME2 5/16 x 1/8 P5ME4 5/16 x 1/4 P5ME6 5/16 x 3/8 P6ME4 3/8 x 1/4 P6ME6 3/8 x 3/8 P6ME8 3/8 x 1/2 P6ME12 3/8 x 3/4 P8ME6 1/2 x 3/8 Part # Size (IN) P4EU4 1/4 x 1/4 P5EU4 5/16 x 1/4 P5EU5 5/16 x 5/16 P6EU4 3/8 x 1/2 P6EU5 3/8 x 5/16 P6EU6 3/8 x 3/8 P8EU6 1/2 x 3/8 P8EU8 1/2 x 1/2 P10EU10 5/8 x 5/8 Nut and Spacer Set Part # OD x FPT(IN) P4FE2 1/4 x 1/8 P4FE4 1/4 x 1/4 P5FE2 5/16 x 1/2 P6FE4 3/8 x 1/4 P6FE6 3/8 x 3/8 P8FE6 1/2 x 3/8 P8FE8 1/2 x 1/2 P10FE8 5/8 x 1/2 Union onnector (Tube) P8M6 1/2 x 3/8 P8M8 1/2 x 1/2 P8M12 1/2 x 3/4 P10M2 5/8 x 1/8 P10M4 5/8 x 1/4 P10M6 5/8 x 3/4 P10M8 5/8 x 1/2 P10M12 5/8 x 3/4 Female onnector (Tube x FPT) Part # OD X FPT (IN) P4F2 1/4 x 1/8 P4F4 1/4 x 1/4 P6F4 3/8 x 1/4 P6F6 3/8 x 3/8 P6F8 3/8 x 1/2 P8F6 1/2 x 3/8 P8F8 1/2 x 1/2 P10F8 5/8 x 1/2 Part # Size (IN) P4TU4 1/4 x 1/4 P5TU5 5/16 x 5/16 P6TU6 3/8 x 3/8 P8TU6 1/2 x 3/8 P8TU8 1/2 x 1/2 P10TU6 5/8 x 3/8 P10TU10 5/8 x 5/8 O-ring Part # Size (IN) 4OR 1/4 5OR 5/16 6OR 3/8 8OR 1/2 10OR 5/8 P8ME8 1/2 x 1/2 P10ME8 5/8 x 1/2 Male Run Tee Tube xmpt Part # OD x MPT (IN) P4MR2 1/4 x 1/8 P6MR4 3/8 x 1/4 P8MR6 1/2 x 3/8 P10MR8 5/8 x 1/2 Tube Support Part # Size (IN) P4TS3 1/4 x 3/16 P5TS3 5/16 x 3/16 P6TS4 3/8 x 1/2 P8TS6 1/2 x 3/8 P10TS8 5/8 x 1/2 Part # Size (IN) P4NS 1/4 P5NS 5/16 P6NS 3/8 P8NS 1/2 P10NS 5/8 Grab Ring Part # Size (IN) 4GR 1/4 5GR 5/16 6GR 3/8 8GR 1/2 10GR 5/8 Part # Size (IN) P4U4 1/4x 1/4 P5U4 5/16 x 1/4 P5U5 5/16 x 5/16 P6U4 3/8 x 1/4 P6U5 3/8 x 5/16 P6U6 3/8 x 3/8 P8U6 1/2 x 3/8 P8U8 1/2 x 1/2 P10U6 5/8 x 3/8 P10U8 5/8 x 1/2 P10U10 5/8 x 5/

212 BLAK HDPE AND NYLON INSERT FITTINGS Black HDPE and Nylon Insert Fittings are ideal for all types of tubing and are available in a variety of sizes and configurations. Male Elbow (Insert xmpt) Reducing Tee Union (Insert) Male Branch Tee (Insert x Insert x MPT) Hex Pipe Nipple (MPT) Male onnector (Insert x MPT) HDPE Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Part # White Nylon Part # P4MEB4 N4MEB4 1/4 P6TUB4 N6TUB4 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 P4MTB4 N4MTB4 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 P2HPN2 N2HPN2 1/8 P4MB4 N4MB4 1/4 P6MEB6 N6MEB6 3/8 P6TUB8 N6TUB8 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/2 P6MTB6 N6MTB6 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 P4HPN4 N4HPN4 1/4 P6MB6 N6MB6 3/8 P8MEB8 N8MEB8 1/2 P8TUB6 N8TUB6 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 P8MTB8 N8MTB8 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 P6HPN6 N6HPN6 3/8 P8MB8 N8MB8 1/2 P8HPN8 N8HPN8 1/2 P12MB12 N12MB12 3/4 P12HPN12 N12HPN12 3/4 Size (IN) Tee Union (Insert) Union onnector (Insert) Reducing Hex Pipe Nipple (MPT x MPT) Hex Pipe Nipple (MPT) Male onnector (Insert x MPT) Black HDPE Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Black HDPE Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Black HDPE Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Part # White Nylon Part # P2TUB2 N2TUB2 1/8 P2UB2 N2UB2 1/8 P4HPN2 N4HPN2 1/4 x 1/8 P2HPN2 N2HPN2 1/8 P4MB4 N4MB4 1/4 P3TUB3 N3TUB3 3/16 P3UB3 N3UB3 3/16 P6HPN2 N6HPN2 3/8 x 1/8 P4HPN4 N4HPN4 1/4 P6MB6 N6MB6 3/8 P4TUB4 N4TUB4 1/4 P4UB4 N4UB4 1/4 P6HPN4 N6HPN4 '3/8 x 1/4 P6HPN6 N6HPN6 3/8 P8MB8 N8MB8 1/2 P5TUB5 N5TUB5 5/16 P5UB5 N5UB5 5/16 P8HPN2 N8HPN2 1/2 x 1/8 P8HPN8 N8HPN8 1/2 P12MB12 N12MB12 3/4 P6TUB6 N6TUB6 3/8 P6UB6 N6UB6 3/8 P8HPN4 N8HPN4 1/2 x 1/4 P12HPN12 N12HPN12 3/4 P8TUB8 N8TUB8 1/2 P8UB8 N8UB8 1/2 P8HPN6 N8HPN6 1/2 x 3/8 P10TUB10 N10TUB10 5/8 P10UB10 N10UB10 5/8 P12HPN6 N12HPN6 3/4 x 3/8 P12HPN8 N12HPN8 3/4 x 1/2 Size (IN) Hex Head Pipe Plug (MPT) Elbow Union (Insert) 8 Black HDPE Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) Black HDPE Part # White Nylon Part # Size (IN) P2HPL N2HPL 1/8 P4EUB4 N4EUB4 1/4 P4HPL N4HPL 1/4 P6EUB6 N6EUB6 3/8 P6HPL N6HPL 3/8 P8EUB4 N8EUB4 1/2 x 1/4 P8HPL N8HPL 1/2 P8EUB6 N8EUB6 1/2 x 3/8 P12HPL N12HPL 3/4 P8EUB8 N8EUB8 1/2 P10EUB10 N10EUB10 5/8 Note: Other sizes available upon request. Available in PV upon request. 8-16

213 INSTADUT PV VENTILATION DUT PIPE Fabco s Instaduct is available in sizes ranging from 6 to 24 diameters. It is manufactured from high quality PV so it will be in service for a long time and resist corrosive fumes and gasses, in all sorts of industrial ventilation applications. This lightweight piping system is easy to install and features increases flow rates due to the seamless characteristics. Welded construction supplied with socket (belled) ends and fabricated from extruded duct pipe. all Fabco for special or custom manufactured duct fittings. Notes: Available in 20ft lengths Product supplied with plain end. APPLIATIONS Plating shops orrosive fume extraction hemical blending Automotive manufacturing Municipal water treatment FEATURES Resistant to most corrosive fluids and fumes Long life expectation Lower installed cost than stainless steel Light weight so it is easy to ship, install and handle Part # Diameter (mm) Diameter (inches) O.D. (inches) Wall Thickness (inches) WT (lbs/ft) Length (ft)

214 INSTADUT PV VENTILATION DUT FITTINGS 90 SOKET ELBOWS 45 SOKET ELBOWS 45 WYE SOKET TEES SOKET OUPLINGS FLANGES DAMPER ASSEM- BLIES FLEXIBLE VIBRATION SLEEVES IN. MM ' ' ' ' ELBOWS 15 ELBOWS 30 PANT LEGS 45 PANT LEGS 90 PANT LEGS RAIN APS EXHAUST AIR DIFFUSER/ DEFLETOR IN. MM Notes: 4, 7, 9 and 11 fittings can be fabricated on request

215 INSTADUT PV VENTILATION DUT FITTINGS Part No. 45 REDUING LATERAL WYES A x B x Part No. 45 REDU- ING PANT LEGS A x B x DUT SIZE (INH) 90 ELBOWS 45 ELBOWS 30 ELBOWS POR 8" x 6" x 4" POR 10" x 6" x 4" POR 12" x 8" x 6" POR 14" x 10" x 8" POR 16" x 12" x 10" POR 18" x 14" x 12" " x 16" x 14" " x 18" x 14" " x 20" x 16" " x 20" x 18" " x 20" x 18" " x 22" x 20" " x 24" x 18" " x 24" x 20" " x 28" x 18" " x 26" x 20" " x 26" x 24" " x 26" x 20" " x 28" x 20" " x 26" x 22" " x 28" x 24" " x 30" x 20" " x 30" x 18" " x 30" x 24" " x 32" x 20" " x 34" x 18" " x 34" x 20" DAMPER REGULATOR MEHANISM x 6 x x 8 x x 10 x x 8 x x 10 x x 10 x x 12 x x 10 x x 12 x x 14 x x 12 x x 14 x x 16 x x 14 x x 16 x x 18 x x 14 x x 16 x x 18 x 18 Notes: Above fittings are custom fabricated as required 4, 7, 9 and 11 fittings can be fabricated on request. DAMPER REGULATOR MEHANISM This new simple damper regulator is easily installed in plastic ducting featuring a positive action handle that locks into and clearly indicates damper position. Any fabricator or maintenance staff can install the damper regulator. The Fabco damper regulator is made of PV, Polypropylene or Polyethylene. After installation, it is airtight. Part No. Material Description PDR PV DAMPER REGULATOR PPDR PP DAMPER REGULATOR PEDR PE DAMPER REGULATOR OPERATION a) Pull (PT #1) positioning handle, turn to position desired and it locks on release. b) Damper position is indicated on position handle by orientation of two indicating slots. Note: For use with ducts up to 20 in diameter

216 INSTADUT PV VENTILATION DUT PIPE 9 FABO Plastics makes the design, assembly and installation of Industrial Fume Exhaust systems easier with new, seamless, moulded, quick connecting, belled-end, rigid PV INSTADUT Fittings. Now, for the first time, FABO INSTADUT fittings allow ventilation systems, up to 24 in diameter to be assembled by Solvent Welding, substantially reducing installation time and the associated costs. FABO s new INSTADUT Fittings from 3 to 24 in diameter are machine moulded, onepiece construction, with elbows being smooth flowing thus reducing turbulence and static pressure. INSTADUT fittings are extremely robust and sturdy, yet lightweight and easy to handle in the shop or on the job-site. Manufactured of Type I Grade I PV, FABO s INSTADUT Fittings are corrosion resistant and are capable of withstanding temperatures up to 140 F. For special applications involving higher temperatures with abrasive airborne particulate mixed with noxious fumes, FABO INSTADUT can also be moulded using Polypropylene. Applications requiring a fire retardant ventilation system can be designed employing FABO INSTADUT moulded from Fire Retardant Polypropylene. FABO INSTADUT fittings are the ideal foundation for a well designed and well installed ventilation system. To compliment the moulded, one-piece INSTADUT fittings, FABO also offers a full range of ustom Fabricated fittings.. Ducting systems above 24 in diameter will also employ fabricated fittings, manufactured in our modern Thermoplastic Fabrication facility, employing the most up-to-date and efficient manufacturing methods. With over 25 years experience in ustom Plastics Engineering and Fabrication, FABO offers the INSTADUT System, our latest innovation and a part of our Overall ommitment to supply industry with systems of Peerless Quality and Design. FABO s 66,000 square foot Engineering and Manufacturing omplex is located in anada. For more detailed information, please contact our Engineering and Fabrication Sales Division. Distributors welcomed. I. GENERAL APPLIATION This section is intended to present only a broad introductory discussion of the general properties of PV and some of the factors which should be considered in use in air handling systems. It is recommended that for additional information relative to specific applications, that FABO be contacted. PV finds its widest application in air handling systems where it is used to control corrosion in exhaust systems that convey acidic or caustic fumes resulting from the use of chemical solutions. In addition, INSTADUT can be used to provide push air. PV is particularly suitable where wide variations in chemical concentrations, such as in the metal finishing trade, will occur. The material also provides a smooth, hard surface suitable for wash down or water spray, for the removal of contaminants in the duct system. These characteristics combined with its general malleability, make PV ideally suited for many air pollution control systems. Because of its optimal physical properties, chemical resistance and relatively low cost, PV has obtained wide acceptance for use in corrosive fume exhaust systems. Examples of industrial processes requiring source ventilation of fumes are metal cleaning, pickling, plating, halogen gas purging and etching. Other ventilation applications utilizing thermoplastics are fume hoods in research laboratories and education institutions, and exhaust ventilating systems in high humidity areas such as indoor swimming pools. In general, the selection of PV will provide wider corrosion resistance than metal. Proper engineering design and use of an acceptable plastic for the particular environment will result in satisfactory performance. are should be taken to avoid using PV in the presence of ketones, chlorinated hydrocarbons and aromatic solvents.the upper temperature limit is 140 F (approx.). Most of the difficulty experienced with failures, resulted from inadequately constructed units due to a lack of sufficient engineering design data. When proper consideration is given to the corrosive environment, failures are rarely associated with the incompatibility of PV with the materials being exhausted. POLYVINYL HLORIDE (PV) Whenever the terms PV resins and PV compounds are used, they are generally understood to refer to materials made from one of the following: a) poly vinyl chloride b) chlorinated poly vinyl chloride c) vinyl chloride copolymers The resin portion of compounds should contain at least 80 percent vinyl chloride according to ASTM D The compounding ingredients may consist of lubricants, stabilizers, non-poly (vinyl chloride) resin modifiers, and pigments essential for processing, property control and colouring. PV has the ability to be compounded for a wide range of applications. Use of PV in air ventilating systems however, is primarily limited to the rigid material. This material in addition to being used for duct, is also used for structures such as hoods, exhaust fans, and fume scrubbers. Other products, such as sinks, have become standard FABO items. PV Solvent ements - these cements are compounded with PV resins or copolymers, a solvent, and an evaporation retar- 9-4

217 INSTADUT PV VENTILATION DUT PIPE dant. While clear amber cements can be produced, most commercial cements are coloured grey, with inert pigments. There are two grades of solvent pipe cement. One is designed for DWV pipe; the other is of heavier consistency for Schedules 40, 80 and 120 pipe. When cementing is applicable the latter is suggested for structural fabrication. ements are available from FABO (see Section 4). INSTADUT up to 24 diameter can be cemented following proper solvent cementing procedures. Duct and fittings over 24 diameter must be hand welded. II. ORROSIVE RESISTANE Performance rating based solely on advertising data from the reference material, can be made meaningless by the presence of a contaminant. It is essential that close coordination with the manufacturer be maintained, to ensure applicability. orrosion attack is primarily the penetration of the corrosive environment into the surface of the plastic material. This results in a weight gain of the PV. Penetration of the corrosive environment into the plastic proper also changes the physical properties. The degree of weight gain, penetration, and change in physical properties is the manner whereby thermoplastic corrosion is measured. Penetration either occurs relatively rapidly, or does not occur at all. A 30-day immersion test is usually satisfactory to determine whether or not a thermoplastic material will handle the corrosive environment intended.weight gain greater than 7% suggests unsuitability. Borderline environments in liquid service are usually satisfactory for fume exhaust systems, where condensation does not occur. Exhaust duct with adequate drainage can be satisfactory where limited condensation occurs. Further, design of fume exhaust systems usually incorporates 9 to 12 parts of room air to one of fume, thereby diluting the fume concentration and reducing corrosive attack. hanges in physical property occur with corrosion attack and are measured in terms of tensile strength, impact strength, and flexural strength. The degree of attack with organic solvents increases in order with the following common solvents: Alcohols, ketones, esters, aromatic and chlorinated solvents. A very distinct softening of the specimens and some solution occurs in most instances as a result of corrosive attack. Stress cracking can occur with some plastics. However, Type I, Grade 1, rigid polyvinyl chloride has rather rare instance of stress cracking. Higher temperature applications in corrosive environments will result in substantial increases in penetration and becomes apparent as temperatures approach the heat distortion point The decreased corrosion resis- tance, as well as the upper physical operating temperatures compared to working stress, occur simultaneously. III. FLAMMABILITY Polyvinylchloride (PV), contains approximately 56% chlorine by weight, and in its rigid, unplastisized form, it is self-extinguishing when tested per ASTM-635. (Generally, the threshold for vinyl resin to be self-extinguishing is approximately 30% chlorine.) Some PV ductwork is required to be furnished with internal sprinklers, while systems without sprinklers are acceptable as long as the PV does not exceed 1/4 wall thickness, (thin walled PV collapses from the heat of fire and interrupts flame spread by shutting off air flow) and does not contain other combustible deposits. IV. ONSTRUTION OF PV DUT SYSTEMS Designed systems normally include the following: A) Equipment list and system layout. B) Duct sizing information (diameter or width and height) for all ducts. ) Total system design FM and all terminal FM requirements. D) Frequency and/or location of access doors and test holes. E) Location and type of regulating dampers. F) Location and type of all fire and smoke protection devices and equipment as may be desired, or required by local codes and regulations. G) Location of flexible connections. H) Location of all expansion joints. L) Type of PV material from which the duct is to be manufac tured, and details of duct to special requirements not in accordance with this reference material. J) Pressure lassification: (positive or negative) to which each duct system (or each portion of a duct system where applicable) is to be constructed. K) Location and type of drain connections when required. L) Details and location of any acoustical treatment. NOTE: The designer will have responsibility for the following: 1. The PV must not be used to exceed manufacturers temperature and impact ratings. 2. Inspection and maintenance openings provided (clean outs) should be on straight runs and elbows. Equipment and special accessories should be accessible for the service required. 3. Standard and custom fabricated hoods (which have been designed and made by FABO for 25 years) providing proper capture velocities at those points where fumes are generated. 4. ondensate should be collected and drained off. A recommended minimum slope for horizontal ducts pitched downward in the direction of air flow is 1 inch in 40 feet, with the recommended minimum slope for ducts pitched downward in the direction opposite the air flow equal to 1 inch in 10 ft. Drains with traps or valves are to be provided

218 9 REQUIREMENTS 1. MATERIALS 1.1 PV omposed - The PV material used will possess minimum property values equivalent to that designated by ASTM-D Rigid Sheets - Rigid PV sheets used in the fabrication of ductwork and accessories, shall be manufactured from the basic compounds as specified in paragraph 1.1. The manufactured sheet products shall be equivalent to the requirements of ASTM- D Extruded Duct and Shapes - Extruded material, where used, shall be manufactured from the basic compounds as specified in paragraph DUT SIZES AND TOLERANES 2.1 Wall Thickness - The minimum nominal wall thickness shall be as specified in Figures The allowable tolerance on minimum thickness of the duct wall shall be minimum 15% of the specified nominal thickness. 2.2 Round Duct a) Extruded round duct up to 24 diameter shall be determined by the nominal inside diameter. Detailed dimensions of inside diameter, outside diameter and wall thickness are indicated herein Tolerances on extruded duct including out of roundness shall generally be governed by the requirements of ASTM D but in any event tolerance will allow for proper joint fitment and cementing. b) Fabricated duct larger than 24 in diameter shall be determined by the nominal inside diameter. The tolerance including out of roundness shall be the greater of 1% of the diameter or 3/16 of an inch. 2.3 Fittings - Wall thickness of mitered fittings shall be at least that of duct of the same size. 2.4 Squareness of Ends - Individual sections and fittings shall maintain suitable tolerances such that field erection can be accomplished in a neat and workmanship like manner, and such as to maintain essentially air tight construction and structural integrity. 3. ATTAHMENT The attached figures No illustrate the recommended method for attachment of PV and illustrate several acceptable methods of attaching steel reinforcement to PV duct. Where penetration of the ductwall is approved, or specified, hardware shall be plastisol coated. Figure 17 shows rectangular duct reinforcement on two sides of the duct. 4. SOLVENT EMENTING Solvent cementing may be used as method of joining PV ducting. (This process joins the O.D. of the duct to the I.D. of the fitting). The solvents in the cement produce a surface reaction that dissolves the PV. As the surfaces are placed in contact with each other the solvents evaporate, the reaction stops, and the PV hardens to its original state. (This method is suitable only for applications where adequate surface to surface contact area exists.) INSTADUT is closely fitted to insure uniform contact of the mating surface. When used with larger sizes of duct (over 12 inches diameter or width) particular care shall be exercised to insure that the solvent does not set up in any area prior to mating of the parts. When performing solvent welding, care must be taken to follow FABO s instructions precisely with respect to preparing the materials to be joined, applying the cement and placing the materials into contact with each other. 5. LONGITUDINAL SEAMS Thermally formed large diameter round duct sections, shall be machine fusion welded the length of duct. 6. ELBOWS, ROUND DUT Unless otherwise specified in the design documentation, the centerline radius for standard elbows shall be 1 times the diameter. The standard configuration of a 5 segment elbow is illustrated in Figure 14. Segmented elbows shall be joined by butt welding and the number of segments shall be in accordance with Table 1. TABLE 1 Segmented Elbows Duct diameter Minimum Number of Segments or Width (inches) up to 24 Dia. Seamless 24 Dia. and above OFFSETS Unless otherwise specified in the design documentation, the centerline radii for standard offset shall be the same as for elbows. 8. TRANSITIONS AND REDUERS Minimum wall thickness and reinforcement of transitions shall be that required for the larger diameter or width of transition piece. 9. BRANHES ENTERING MAIN Branch ducts shall enter the main duct near the large end of a transition,at an angle not exceeding 45 where ever possible. 9-6

219 Branches shall not be positioned directly opposite one another on a main or a sub-main. The intersection of branches with mains and sub-mains shall be continuously welded. 10. TRANSVERSE JOINTS Hand welded butt joints may be used for connections wherever desirable. For field connections, however, it is recommended that a bell and spigot or flexible connection be used. 11. BUTT JOINT A hand welded butt joint shall have a tensile strength at least equal to 75% of the duct itself. 12. BELL AND SPIGOT INSTADUT Bell and spigot joints, are made by thermal forming of the end of round duct. The straight duct shall be inserted into the bell end a minimum of INSTADUT OUPLING JOINT The coupling joint is thermally formed of a thickness equivalent to or greater than that of the duct. The coupling is cemented to the duct section. 14. FLEXIBLE ONNETIONS Flexible connections shall be provided to form an anti-vibration barrier at the locations indicated on the design drawings and shall be fabricated from flexible plasticized PV material (not less than 3/ 32 inch thick) having corrosion resistance and temperature compatibility suitable for the environment (Figure 10). Longitudinal seams shall be sealed by machine fusion welding. 15. DUT HANGER AND SUPPORTS All horizontal ducts shall be supported as specified in Figures 17-19, illustrating acceptable methods of supporting horizontal duct. Duct shall also be supported independently at other equipment locations and on both sides of an expansion or flexible joint. Hangers and supports shall be securely fastened to the building or structure. are shall be taken to avoid creating conditions of stress on the finished material. Hanger materials and hardware shall be stainless steel or plastisol coated steel for corrosion resistance as necessary. Otherwise, mild steel or equal may be used. 16. FUME HOODS Fume hoods will be properly designed and fabricated to suit installation. FABO design engineers can assist with this requirement. 17. VOLUME DAMPERS Volume dampers shall be installed at the locations indicated on the project drawings for balancing and adjustment of the system. Acceptable damper construction is illustrated in Figure 9. Volume dampers shall be constructed of PV material and provided with suitable corrosion proof attachments for permanently setting dampers in a fixed position after balancing. 18. DRAINS The drains shall be full sized half couplings, preferably 2 in diameter and suitable for receiving standard IPS pipe connections. The fittings shall be continuously welded and trimmed flush with the interior surface of the duct. 19. AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Fans, scrubbers, filters, eliminators, sound traps and other such auxiliary equipment, can be incorporated into the system. Your FABO designer can assist you with these requirements as well. 20. MAINTENANE INSTRUTIONS A full maintenance procedure/check list for individual exhaust ventilation, scrubbing and fan components has been developed and is available on a project- by-project basis from the FABO designer. Note: Figures 1-24 mentioned are illustrations and drawings from the Technical and Dimensional section of the Instaduct program. 9 Electric and Pneumatic Actuated Dampers are available in Fabco s INSTADUT Program 9-7

220 FIRE RETARDANT PP VENTILATION DUT PIPE Fire retardant polypropylene duct is ideal for hoods and duct systems answers the problems of in-plant safety departments. orrosive and toxic fumes are removed safely and down time is eliminated as the fire retardant polypropylene resists corrosion. Fire retardant polypropylene can attain a V-O rating according to UL-94 test for flammability of plastic materials. The incorporation of additives such as organic Bromine or Antimony compounds gives the PPS the fire retardant resistance. PPS is chemical and solvent resistant, has a hard surface and low moisture absorbency. It s temperature resistance is up to 100 (212 F). The material is easily hand welded or fused like normal polypropylene. are should be exercised in outdoor applications due to limited outdoor weathering resistance. APPLIATIONS orrosive fume extraction hemical blending Automotive manufacturing Municipal water treatment Metal Finishing Anodizing Laboratories FEATURES Resists chemical attack replacement and downtime. Safely withstands temperatures of up to 212 F Is extruded to IPS dimensions. Is lightweight allowing easy, low-cost installation. Material has excellent flame resistant Is readily available with fabricated fittings of all configurations. 9 Notes: Standard length is 16.4 ft. (5 metres) olour is light grey with limited UV resistance Fittings are available upon request Product supplied with plain end. Part # OD (mm) Wall Thickness (mm) Wt (lbs/ft)

221 INSTADUT PV VENTILATION DUT PIPE PV Instaduct is available in sizes 6 thru to 24 Diameter for Institutional and Industrial hot fume service. This duct provides superior resistance to corrosion and chemical attack. Its lightweight and high-strength characteristics allow for easy, low-cost installation in a wide range of applications such as waste water treatment facilities, metal finishing and plating operations, anodizing and laboratory uses. Notes: Available in 10 ft and 20ft lengths Product supplied with plain end. Fabricated fittings available upon request. Flammability Properties PV ORZAN ASTM Test Method Average Time of Burning (sec.) <5 D635 Average Extent of Burning (mm) <10 Flame Spread Index <10 E162 Flame Spread 4-18 E84 Flash Ignition 900 F Smoke Developed Limited Oxygen Index (LOI 60) Self-Extinguishing Burning Rate, in./min. Self-Extinguishing Softening Starts, approx. F 295 Material becomes viscous, F 395 Material carbonizes, F 450 D2863 APPLIATIONS Plating orrosive fume extraction hemical blending Automotive manufacturing Municipal water treatment Metal Finishing Anodizing Laboratories FEATURES Resists chemical and corrosive attack replacement and downtime. Meets ASTM material standard D Safely withstands temperatures of up to 180 F Is extruded to IPS dimensions. Is lightweight allowing easy, low-cost installation. an be welded or solvent cemented Material has excellent flame resistant Is readily available with fabricated fittings of all configurations. Duct Part # Duct oupling Part # Duct Size Avg. O.D. (IN) Avg. O.D. Tol. Out of Round Tol.* Min. Wall (IN) Avg. Wall (IN) Max. wall (IN) Nominal wt. per ft.(lb) " ±.020 ± " ±.020 ± " ±.020 ± " ±.020 ± " ±.030 ± " ±.030 ± " ±.040 ± " ±.070 ± " ±.090 ±

222 JAEGER TRI-PAKS PLASTI PAKING Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs is a hollow spherical column packing constructed of a unique network of ribs, struts, and drip rods. Its geometry was totally revolutionary and unprecedented at the time of its 1978 introduction and it continues to be the packing to which all others are compared. Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs are distinguished from other packing by its superior geometric shape. Their spherical shape allows each element to roll into the packed position without forming void areas common to irregular shaped packing or those with excessive pins and appurtenances. With Jaeger Tri-Packs, there is no need for allowances for settling and nesting is virtually impossible. The round Jaeger Tri-Packs offers reliable and predictable loading of your tower which means reliable and predictable performance. In addition to the superior geometric shape, an active surface area is vital to mass transfer. The unique network of ribs, struts and drip rods have proven to give the Jaeger Tri-Packs a distinct advantage in providing excellent wetting qualities and maintaining liquid distribution through the packed bed. Some suppliers claim more surface area, but surface area alone is not an indication of performance. Excessive surface area can impede proper gas and liquid contact and always results in higher pressure drop which increases horsepower requirements and operating costs. The Jaeger Tri-Packs offers an optimum surface area to open area ratio which yields excellent mass transfer efficiency and reduced operating costs. Jaeger Tri-Packs are available in four sizes, 1, 1.25, 2, and 3.5. Jaeger Products uses only prime, virgin resins and no recycled materials are ever used. Jaeger Tri-Packs made of polypropylene (PP) have been certified by NSF to Standard 61 for use in potable water applications. Almost any injection moldable resin is available; the most common include PP, PE, PP-G, PV, PV, Noryl, Kynar, Halar, Teflon and many more. Material Service Temp.(F) ** 1" Diameter 1 1/4" Diameter 2" Diameter 3 1/2" Diameter Polypropylene (PP) Polyethylene(PE) Polypropylene Glass Filled (PP-G * 901GF GF GF GF040 Noryl (PPO) Polyvinylchloride (PV) orzan (PV) Kynar (PVDF) TopEx (LP) Tefzel (ETFE) Teflon (PFA) Halar (ETFE) Physical Properties Size (in.) 1 1 1/ /2 Geometric Surface Area (ft2/ft3) Packing Factor (1/ft.) Void Space (%) Weight (lb/ft3) Number o Pieces/ft3 2,300 N/A Notes: Other plastics are available on request.. * Depending on glass content ** At 1 atm, air/water at max. recommended depth) 9 MASS TRANSFER DATA Absorption System G (lb/ L (lb/ Temp. HTU-Inches System hr-ft2) hr-ft2) ( o F) Hl-H2O Hl-NaOH l2-naoh NO2-Na2S+NaOH NH3-H2SO NH3-H2O NH3-H2O SO2-NaOH HF-H2O H2S-NaOH

223 JAEGER TRI-PAKS PLASTI PAKING /2" -Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs 1" Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs 2" Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs 2" Super Intalox Saddles (eramic) 2" Pall Rings (Plastic) 2" Intalox Saddles (Porcelain) 2" Raschig Ring 1" Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs 2" Super Intolox Saddles (eramic) 2" Intalox Saddles (Porcelain) 2" Raschig Ring (Metal) 2" Pall Ring (Plastic) 2" Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs 3 1/2" Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs K G a, lbs-moles/hr-ft 3 -mole fraction KGa for O2 Absorption in NaOH Solution Data taken under the following conditions: olumn Diameter 24" Packaging Height 10' Gas Rate 500 lbs/hr-ft 2 O 2 onc. in Gas 1% Ln mean Liq. onc. 4% NaOH 25% arbonation Liq. Temp. 75F 0.1 1,000 2,000 4,000 6,000 10,000 20,000 40,000 60, ,000 Liqiud Loading Rate, L, lbs/hr-ft PRESSURE DROP VS GAS RATE Liquid Rate = 5,000 lbs/hr-ft 2 Air-Water System 2" Raschig Rings (Metal) 2" Intalox Saddles (eramic) 2" Intalox Saddles (Plastic) 2" Pall Rings (Plastic) Pressure Drop Per Foot, P/ Z, inches H 2 O/ft of packing " Plastic Jaeger Tri-Packs ,000 2,000 Gas Loading Rate, G, lbs/hr-ft

224 TRANSFERLOX PLASTI SADDLES The high capacity Transferlox plastic saddle offers distinct advantages over conventional saddle design. The serrated edges promote high mass transfer rates through effective liquid surface renewal. The serrated edges of the Transferlox saddle reduce bed settling during operation and assist to maintain packing free space and create lower column pressure drop. The Transferlox Plastic saddles are available in 1, 2, and 3 sizes. They are available in 5 and 10 cubic foot cardboard boxes. The proper installation is by dry dumping with reasonable care. APPLIATIONS Air pollution Scrubbing Liquid - liquid contact Absorption, distillation, extraction, stripping, humidification, dehumidification, decarbonating, de-aerating Biological filtration Material 1" 2" 3" Maximum ontinuous Operating Temperature (F) Specific Gravity General Grade Polypropylene Polypropylene (10% Glass reinforced) High Density Polyethylene Low Density Polyethylene PV PV PVDF Physical Properties Nominal Size 1" 2" 3" No. pcs/m No. pcs/ft Wt.*kg/m Wt.*lb/ft Void Space % TRANSFERPAK PLASTI RINGS The Transferpack Plastic ring is a robust ring featuring an open wall construction which maintains even liquid distribution. Reinforced struts provide additional surface area for gasliquid contact and support the outer ring. The Transferpack Plastic rings are available in 1, 2, and 3 1/2 sizes. They are available in 5 and 10 cardboard boxes. The proper installation is by dry dumping with reasonable care. 9 Material 1" 2" 3" Maximum ontinuous Operating Temperature (F) General Grade Polypropylene Polypropylene (10% Glass reinforced) High Density Polyethylene Low Density Polyethylene APPLIATIONS PV PV Air pollution PVDF Scrubbing Physical Properties Liquid - liquid contact Nominal Size 1" 2" 3" Absorption, distillation, extraction, stripping, humidification, dehumidification, decarbonating, de-aerating Biological filtration No. pcs/m3 No. pcs/ft3 Wt.*kg/m Wt.*lb/ft Void Space % Specific Gravity 9-12

225 MASS TRANSFER TOWER PAKING Mass Transfer Packing is available in bundles, rings, saddles, and other forms in ceramic (Acidur stoneware, Duranit porcelan), arbon Steel, Stainless Steel, Monel, Nickel, Inconel, Hastelloy, Incollloy, Aluminum, opper, and many other materials. They are available in a variety of sizes including 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/2, 2, and 3. If you are looking for a specific type of packing material to replace packing currently in use, please contact customer service for availability. METAL MAX-PAK STRUTURED PAKING Typical applications for FABO Metal Alloy Steel MAX-PAK include Atmospheric crude oil and vacuum columns, F, coker and aromatic fractionators, ethyl benzene/styrene distillation for monomer purification, ethylene oxide absorbers and isomer splitters, caustic/amine absorbers/strippers, glycol dehydrators and contactors, formaldehyde absorption, solvent recovery, and various heat sensitive purifications, such as flavours/fragrances. Nominal Size 1/2 inch Packing Factor Void Fraction 97.45% rimp Side 27/32 inch orrugation Angle 45 degrees Typical HETP 8-16 inches Specific Area 77 ft 2 /ft 3 Weight Density 12.8 lb/ft 3 Nominal Module Height 12 inch DURANIT ATALYST SUPPORT Duranit catalyst support has been widely used as covering and support material for catalysts in reactor installations in the chemical and petrochemical industries. Duranit is in the form of inert ceramic balls. It has had over half a century s proven experience in the field of chemical, petrochemical and related industries. The superiority of Duranit is further evidenced by its superb material strength and its adaptability to an extremely wide range of applications. The material of construction, configuration, form and style of Duranit can be customized to suit specific applications. Please contact customer service for chemical and physical properties, standard sizes and dimensions. Ball Dia (IN) Ball Dia (MM) Duranit eramic Balls Alumina Balls Mullite Balls 1/ / / / / / / Size Duranit Pellets 1/8 x 1/ /16 x 1/ /4 x 3/ /8 x 1/ /2 x 5/ /8 x 3/ /4 x 7/ /8 x 1 1/

226 OLUMN INTERNALS Fabco Plastics offers a wide variety of internals for a given function. The selection among different types of internals (i.e., liquid distributors) is made based on the characteristics of the application. Some internals operate better at high loads, some at low. Some exhibit better turndown than others. The following list summarizes the points to be considered in the selection of the proper internals. Liquid Distributors Tower diameter Pourpoint density Geometric coverage Turndown Presence of solids Pressure drop Liquid pressure Liquid condition Entrainment Type and size of packing Feed inlets Space to top of packing Material selection Packing Supports Tower diameter Pressure drop and capacity Packing type and size ombinations with collector/redistributors Load limitations Material selection Liquid ollector/redistributors Same as for liquid distributors Total and effective mixing Gas redistribution Gas Distributors olumn size Inlet nozzle design Available pressure drop Turndown Space availability Material selection Mist Eliminators Efficiency/capacity Presence of solids Gas velocity and properties Pressure drop Liquid load Mist size and properties 9 LIQUID DISTRIBUTORS Trough type distributors are generally used in towers with high liquid rates and/or fouling service. Liquid is introduced into the parting box which properly distributes the liquid into the troughs. Generally, one parting box is used for smaller towers while multiple parting boxes are used for larger diameters or high liquid rates. Trough distributors can be made in plastics, FRP or metals and ceramics. Orifice type distributors are made in various sizes and designs. Typically all sizes have round or rectangular chimneys with a flat floor sealed to the vessel support ring. These distributors can act as bed limiters by having antimigration bars/rods in the open areas. Orifice type distributors can be made in plastics, metals or ceramics. SUPPORT PLATES/GRIDS Multibeam support plates are composed of corrugated sheets perforated with slots/holes to separate gas and liquid flow paths maximizing total throughput. The slots/holes are laid out in a uniform pattern where the open area approaches or exceeds the cross-sectional area of the tower. The slots/holes sizes are such that the packing do not fall through them. The angle of corrugation, height and width of each beam varies with design and material used. Multibeam support plates are available in various metals, plastics and ceramics. MIST ELIMINATORS Knitted wire filament mist eliminators are available in various densities, filament sizes and surface areas to suit specific process conditions for maximum removal of mist and micron-size droplets. Mist eliminators can be made in various metals and plastics. Additionally, our random and structured packing can be used as mist eliminators. hevron and plate type mist eliminators are suitable for high liquid load, dirty services and high capacities. They can be applied in horizontal flow or used in vertical upflow and they can be made in sections to be installed through a manway. hevron mist eliminators can be made in plastics or metals. USTOM INTERNALS Special internals for liquid and gas distribution can also be provided. Fabco has experience in flashing feed, collector tray, and sparger designs. BED LIMITERS/HOLD DOWN Bed limiters, or holddowns as they are also called, are used to limit the packing bed from moving and getting packing pieces entrained away from the bed. They are secured to the wall or loosely placed on the packing; they are made of rods and bars or in combination with screens or expanded metal, depending on the application. Bed limiters can be made in various metals and plastics. OLLETOR/REDISTRIBUTORS ollector redistributors are similar to the orifice liquid distributors with risers. Our model R01 collector is composed of a flat perforated plate with round or rectangular chimneys. The risers or chimneys have caps to prevent liquid from bypassing. Redistributors are normally used when a long packed bed section has to be split up into smaller sections or when an intermediate feed is inserted in the column. ollector/redistributors can be made in various metals and plastics. JP-7 - A HEMIAL LIQUID FOR PREVENTING FOULING OF SRUBBER PAKING One of the most common problems with air stripping and absorption towers is that over time they become fouled with solids, resulting in the loss of efficiency, capacity and increased pressure drop. Fabco has accumulated a wealth of knowledge in dealing with packing fouling problems while optimizing stripping and absorption efficiencies. The addition of JP-7 as a pretreatment will keep free iron, calcium, manganese and other minerals in suspension, preventing oxidation within the air stripping column, thus preventing a fouling problem. Typical dosages of JP-7 range from 1 to 3 gallons per million gallons of water. JP-7 is furnished in a stable, liquid form and is fed on a continual basis with a low maintenance chemical feed pump. 9-14

227 Notes: Other plastics are available on request.. Heat loss data available upon request. ase quantities are Smaller quantities available on request. Moulded Hollow Balls Part No. Approx. Dia. (inches) Approx. Dia. (mm) Weight (grams) Balls per Pack Quantity Needed per sq. ft. PP 10 3/ PP 20 3/ PP PP / PP PP / PP PP ENERGY-SAVING HOLLOW BALLS You can save money, conserve energy, and reduce air and noise pollution with Fabco hollow balls. They re not only environmentally sound but they pay for themselves up to 6 times over per year. They just pour onto the surface and covering 91% in a single layer. Balls move out of the way for dipping and float back into position automatically. One layer reduces heat loss by 75% and evaporation by 87%; with two layers, reduction is 81% and 90% respectively. Hollow ball blankets are successfully used in many applications including anodizing, food processing, metal processing and finishing, sewage treatment, gas scrubbing, temperature retardation, and more. As well, Fabco Hollow Balls control fumes and smell, reduce evaporation and foul smell with 90%, reduce loss of valuable chemicals and fluids, save 70 75% energy on heated tanks, and reduce oxygen uptake. Precision Ground Solid Balls Diameter Nylon Delrin Acrylic PP HDPE Teflon 1/8 NY125 DL125 - PP125 HDPE125 TEF125 5/32 NY156 DL156 - PP156 HDPE156 TEF156 3/16 NY187 DL187 - PP187 HDPE187 TEF187 1/4 NY250 DL250 AR250 PP250 HDPE250 TEF250 5/16 NY312 DL312 - PP312 HDPE312 TEF312 3/8 NY375 DL375 AR250 PP375 HDPE375 TEF375 1/2 NY500 DL500 AR250 PP500 HDPE500 TEF500 9/16 NY562 DL /8 NY625 DL625 AR625 PP625 HDPE625 TEF625 3/4 NY750 DL750 - PP750 HDPE750 TEF750 7/8 NY875 DL NY1000 DL1000 AR1000 PP1000 HDPE1000 TEF

228 HEATFLON IMMERSION HEATING PANELS Heatflon heating panels are constructed of PTFE and have primarily been developed for heating aggressive liquids by means of an electrical heating process as applied in electroplating, semi-conductor and laboratory technology and chemical engineering. Their flat design makes them comparatively space-saving. The use of the fluoroplastic PTFE for all components having contact with the electrlytes provides the heating panel with an outstanding chemical resistance, rendering it suitable for use in virtually all electroplating baths. The excellent anti-adhesive properties of the fluoroplastic PTFE largely eliminate deposits and render cleaning very simple. Dimensions mm Type Voltage Power input, cold (W) ontinuous output (W) Width and Height Effective Width Min Length H 500/ approx ± ± H 900/ approx ± ± H 1500/ approx ± ± H 3200/ approx ± ± H 500/ approx ± ± H 900/ approx ± ± H 1500/ approx ± ± H 3200/ approx ± ±

229 FABO ELIMINATOR TYPE LTH 2000 The Fabco Mist Eliminator, Type LTH 2000 is a profile eliminator for horizontal gas flow. It operates at high velocity and captures droplets down to approximately 10 micron diameter. An important aspect of this design is that it has a drain channel which positively prevents the captured liquid from being re-entrained into the gas stream. The sophisticated aerodynamic design of the profiles cause the elimination of liquid droplets by inertial forces. The profiles are designed with a main drain channel to capture the bulk of the captured liquid and a number of small drain channels to prevent reentrainment downstream of the venture like throat. By this combination of drain channels the captured liquid droplets are prevented from re-entering. APPLIATIONS Downstream of scrubbers, especially spray scrubbers or towers. Process gas cleaning Evaporators Acids mists from electroplating and electro-deposition plants. FEATURES Removal efficiency 99.9% of limit drop size droplets and larger. High face velocity which results in com pact units. Two profiles available, one with a single drain channel, the other with three to suit different applications. Easy to clean. LTH 2100 BLADES PART NO. MATERIAL LTH2100 PV LTH2400 PP. Notes: We supply modular packs of profiles for installation into existing housings, towers or vessels and complete units with housing for pressure or vacuum operation We recommend operating conditions that consist of an inlet face velocity of m/s, and up to 12 m/s with two stages or more for a single stage of eliminators. Also available in ABS, PVDF, arbon Steel, Galvanized Steel, or Stainless Steel (304, 316) upon request. FABO ELIMINATOR TYPE LTV 1500 Notes: LTV2415 ABS (Black) are Fire Retardant modules. The Fabco eliminator Type LTV 1500 is designed for vertical gas flow. It has been developed to give high efficiency mist elimination with low pressure drop. The multichamber profile causes the liquid droplets caught to be moved out of the gas stream such that they can drain back to the process without re-entrainment. We recommend operating conditions that consist of an inlet velocity of 4 m/s, and operating velocity of between 2.5 and 6 m/s. The LTV 1500 is available in Polypropylene, PVDF, and 304/316 Stainless Steel. Other materials like Polystyrene, Noryl, PV, PV, PPO, and ABS are available upon request. The gas and the entrained liquid droplets are deflected by means of the vanes of the profile. The droplets impinge on the walls of the profiles by inertial forces. Ribs placed on the surface of the profile cause the captured liquid to flow down the sides where it can fall back into the process without re-entrainment. APPLIATIONS FEATURES LTV 1500 ELIMINATOR MODULES PART NO. MATERIAL MODULE WIDTH LTV1500 POLYPRO 12" or 24" LTV1520 PV 12" or 24" LTV1530 PV 12" or 24" LTV1540 PVDF 12 or 24" LTV2415 * ABS (BLAK) 12" or 24" LTV2415 ABS (LEAR) 12" or 24" LTV1520 PV (LEAR) 12" or 24" Downstream of gas scrubbers, especially spray scrubbers and packed columns. Fitted also to acid cool ers, evaporating coolers and evaporators. High efficiency mist elimination combined with very low pressure drop. ompact size finds wide application. an be retrofitted to scrubbers and other process equipment. Available in a full range of corrosion resistant materials

230 HF THERMOPLASTI ENTRIFUGAL FANS Fabco s HF thermoplastic radial fans are designed specifically for exhausting aggressive, low-aerosol gases, explosive atmosphere and ultra-clean air. The HF fan is resistant to attack from most chemicals and as such ideally suited for applications in chemical, pulp and paper, mining, plating, anodizing, fertilizer, pharmaceutical, waste water treatment facilities as well as educational and institutional labs. HF radial fans will accommodate explosive atmospheres. Our product range includes more than 150 standard components which allows for the design and construction of numerous versions of fans. Axial, radial, and radial roof fans are available with direct drive motors for consistent and maintenance-free performance. The housing is fabricated from rotationally moulded Polyethylene (PE s) that is both flame retardant and UV inhibited. Additional thermoplastic materials are available to suit most applications. A condensate drain is provided at the bottom point of the fan housing. The housing is mounted within a rigid hot dipped galvanized frame. All sizes are available in clockwise or counter clockwise rotations as well as six standard discharge positions. Both inlet and outlet diameters are the same sizes for ease of installation of adjacent duct work. In addition, fans can be fitted with optional inlet and outlet flanges. The impeller is manufactured of injection moulded flame retardant polypropylene (PPs), statically and dynamically balanced and keyed to the motor shaft by means of a taper lock bushing. The impeller can be removed without first having to dismantle the housing. All fans are supplied with high efficiency TEF direct drive motors. Explosion and mill & chemical service rated motors are available upon request. Available accessories include vibration isolators, flexible vibration isolators, inlet/outlet flanges, shaft seals, inspection ports, weather covers, starter/disconnect switches, variable frequency drives. Fans are available in sizes ranging from 6 to 20 diameter with a variety of motors up to 3600 rpm and 1/2 hp. These fans can accommodate flow rates of up to 88,000 cfm and static pressure up to 12 W.G. Benefits Fan sizes from 6 up to 20 can attain a maximum efficiency of 81% at the operating point. Impellers are backward inclined providing the highest and quietest operation with non-overloading horsepower characteristic. HF series impellers are 20% larger than the former Oktavent models; providing higher air and pressure specifications. The rotationally moulded housing has greater structural integrity, impact strength, flame retardant and UV inhibited. Available in axial as well. Impeller has massive blades, which are not easily damaged should unforeseen objects enter the intake duct. 9 onstruction Features Standard housing/impellers is made of premium quality flame retardant and UV inhibited polyethylene (PEs). PEs (polyethylene flame retardant gas temperature range is -20 up to 60. Housings are rotationally moulded with a condensate drain at its lowest point. The fan housing exhaust outlet can be rotated in steps of 45 through 360. Normal position is 360. All thermoplastic impellers are injection moulded, statically and dynamically balanced. The impeller is a self-cleaning, backward curved radial tip design allowing for stability at high S.P. and at low to medium flow rates. Metal hub, shaft and stainless steel fasteners are encapsulated in plastic. All belt drives shall have both shaft and belt guards attached which conforms to OSHA standard. Inlet and outlet openings are the same diameter allowing for easy duct connections both to plastic and steel ducting. Base frame is constructed of welded steel, and hot dip galvanized with motor support plate. The impeller is secured directly on the motor shaft by means of a taper lock bushing, which allows the impeller to be removed without first having to dismantle the housing. All bearings are designed for a minimum L-10 life when rated at the fan s maximum cataloged operating speed. Only premium high efficiency TEF motors, which conform to IE/Nema standards, are used. Special motors are available on request. Both the shaft and all supplementary hardware (nuts, bolts and washers) are 316 stainless steel. Air performance ratings are based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMA publication

231 HF THERMOPLASTI ENTRIFUGAL FANS GR90 GR45 GR360 GR315 GR270 GR135 GL90 GL45 GL360 GL315 GL270 GL135 K A R D Xmax J G 90 GL (180 ) (270 ) D H M GR B 45 K L Neoprene Vibration Isolator 1-1/16 Thick E F condensate drain (270 ) (180 ) ondensate drain OD size Type 125 to 315 mm - 3/4 to 1 Type 355 to 500 mm - 1 to 1-1/4 Type D A B E F G H J K L M N R Xmax lbs HF R HF R HF R HF R HF R HF R

232 HF THERMOPLASTI ENTRIFUGAL FANS Standard onstruction Features Housing Rotationally moulded Polyethylene (PE s) that is both flame retardant and UV inhibited as standard. Additional thermoplastic materials are available to suit most applications. A condensate drain is provided at the bottom point of the fan housing. The housing is mounted within a rigid hot dipped galvanized frame. All sizes are available in clockwise or counter clockwise rotations as well as six standard discharge positions. Inlet/Outlet Both inlet and outlet diameters are the same sizes for ease of installation of adjacent duct work. In addition fans can be fitted with optional inlet and outlet flanges. Impeller Injection moulded Polypropylene (PPs) flame retardant impeller, statically and dynamically balanced and keyed to the fan shaft. In the case of direct drive, the impeller is secured directly on the motor shaft by means of a taper lock bushing. With belt drive, the impeller is secured in the same way on a steel shaft, supported by flanged double bearings and ball bearings. The impeller can be removed without first having to dismantle the housing. Drive Arrangements Arrangement 4 Direct Drive Motors Supplied as high efficiency TEF motors. Explosion and mill & chemical service rated motors are optional. Accessories Vibration Isolators All HF fans are design to accommodate vibration isolators in either neoprene pads or housed spring units. Flexible Vibration onnectors Heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride (PV) is available. Inlet/Outlet Flanges Where applications require tight bolted duct connections. Flanges are available with or without prepunched holes. Shaft Seals To limit the air leakage around the housing shaft passage, a felt ring is standard construction. For more stringent applications other shaft seal options are available. Access/Inspection Port All HF fans can be provided with an access port, which allows for examination and cleaning of the housing interior without disassembly, resulting in less downtime. 9 Weather over For outside installation a motor covering hood is available. Starter & Disconnect Switches A wide assortment of both enclosed starters / disconnects from Nema 1 to corrosion resistant boxes are available. Variable Frequency Drives A wide assortment of VFD s is available to meet both motor capability and application. 9-20

233 PV (Polyvinyl hloride) conforming to ASTM D-1784 lass B, formerly designated Type 1 Grade 1, PV is the most frequently specified of all thermoplastic materials. It has been used successfully for over 30 years in such areas as chemical processing, industrial plating, chilled water distribution, deionized water lines, chemical drainage, and irrigation systems. PV is characterized by high physical properties and resistance to corrosion and chemical attack by acids, alkalies, salt solutions and many other chemicals. It is attacked, however, by polar solvents such as ketones, some chlorinated hydrocarbons and aromatics. The maximum service temperature of PV is 140 F. With a design stress of 2,000 PSI, PV has the highest long term hydrostatic strength at 73 F of any of the major thermoplastic being used for piping systems. PV is joined by solvent cementing threading or flanging. PV (hlorinated Polyvinyl hloride) conforming to ASTM D-1784 lass B, formerly designated Type IV, Grade 1, PV has physical properties at 73 F similar to those of PV, and its chemical resistance is similar to that of PV. PV, with a design stress of 2,000 psi and maximum service temperature of 210 F has, over a period of about 25 years, proven to be excellent material for hot corrosive liquids, hot and cold water distribution and similar applications above the temperature range of PV. PV is joined by solvent cementing, threading or flanging. Polypropylene (PP) Polypropylene homopolymer, conforming to ASTM D-4101 lass PP110 B67154, formerly designated Type 1, is a member of the polyolefin family of plastics. Although PP has less physical strength than PV, it is chemically resistant to organic solvents as well as acids and alkalies. Generally, polypropylene should not be used in contact with strong oxidizing acids, chlorinated hydrocarbons and aromatics. Polypropylene has gained wide acceptance where its resistance to sulfur-bearing compounds is particularly useful in salt water disposal lines, crude oil piping, and low pressure gas gathering systems. Polypropylene has also proved to be an excellent material for laboratory and industrial drainage where mixtures of acids, bases and solvents are involved. Polypropylene is joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging. PVDF (Kynar ) (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) PVDF is a strong, tough, and abrasion resistant fluoro carbon material. It resists distortion and retains most of its strength to 280 F. It is chemically resistant to most acids, bases, and organic solvents and is ideally suited for handling wet or dry chlorine, bromine and other halogens. No other solid thermoplastic piping components can approach the combination of strength, chemical resistance and working temperatures of PVDF. PVDF is joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging. PLASTI MATERIAL DIGEST FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORED PLASTIS commonly manufactured by hand lay up (HLU) in accordance with GSB-41- GP-22 in anada and NBS PS in the United States. Also manufactured according to ASTM D-3299 for machine made Filament Wound (FW) construction. FRP constructions are on a custom designed basis allowing the designer to select many different resin systems and laminate constructions. As an engineered system FRP generally displays higher physical properties than thermoplastics with a wide chemical and temperature resistance. Joining methods are by Flanging, Butt and Strap joined or bell and spigot connection. ARMOURPLASTIS These plastics commonly referred to as thermoplastic lined FRP such as PV, PV, PP, PVDF, FEP, ETFE chemically or mechanically bonded to an FRP structural overlay. This custom engineered system offers the unique properties of the thermoplastic liner with the superior physical properties of the FRP. Joining methods include Flanging, Fusion and Solvent ementing of the LINER and OVERLAYING WITH FRP. FPM (Viton or Florel ) (Fluoroelastomer) FPM is inherently compatible with a broad spectrum of chemicals. Because of extensive chemical compatibility which spans considerable concentration and temperature ranges, fluorocarbons have gained wide acceptance as a material of construction for butterfly valve O-rings and seats. Fluorocarbons can be used in most applications involving mineral acids (with the exception of HI), salt solutions, chlorinated hydrocarbons and petroleum oils. EPDM (EPT) EPDM is a terpolymer elastomer made from ethylene-propylene diene monomer. EPDM has good abrasion and tear resistance and offers excellent chemical resistance to a variety of acids and alkalines. It is susceptible to attack by oils and is not recommended for applications involving petroleum oils, strong acids (with the exception of HI), or strong alkalines. Teflon PTFE (Polytetrafluoroethylene) has outstanding resistance to chemical attack by most chemicals and solvents. PTFE has a temperature rating of -200 F to +500 F. PTFE, a self-lubricating compound, is used as a seat material in Fabco Ball Valves. Neoprene (R) Neoprene was the first commercial synthetic rubber. It is a moderately oil-resistant material with good ozone-resisting properties. Neoprene is not recommended for use with aromatic hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents. It is specifically recommended for use with higher concentrations of sodium hydroxide. It can be used in continuous service up to 180 F

234 THERMOPLASTI FABRIATION INTRODUTION 10 INTRODUTION The preparation of thermoplastics for assembly by welding or other fastening methods is similar to the procedures used in metal fabrication. The pieces are laid out, cut, machined and joined with the same tools, equipment, and skills employed in the metal working trades. There are, however, special forming requirements for thermoplastics, not encountered in metal work. The degree of skill and the quality of preparatory work in layout and in various machining operations on components for fit up are very important in assuring accurate assembly and successful fabrication. Fabrication of thermoplastics covers a wide field of operations on sheet, rod, tube, and special shapes in making them into finished products: cutting, sawing, machining, forming and joining or fastening together for the completed object. Machining may include beveling, routing, grinding, turning, milling, drilling, tapping, and threading. Once the different parts are shaped, they then may have to be joined. Assembly techniques include use of self-tapping screws, threaded inserts, press fitting, snap fitting, cold heating, heat joining (like hotplate welding, hot-wire welding, induction heating, thermal-impulse heating, resistance-wire welding, or hot flaring, spin welding), cementing, and hot gas welding. Each operation requires its own tools and equipment. UTTING Thermoplastic rods and shapes can be readily cut with an ordinary hand hacksaw, or power saws can be used. Using a circular power saw, a cutting speed of 6,000 rpm. Using hand pressure is recommended. With bandsaws, this should be reduced to 3,600 fpm with hand pressure. Under some circumstances a lathe can be used. Best results are obtained with fine-toothed saw blades (6 to 9 teeth per in.) and little or no set (maximum in.). THREADING Thermoplastic pipe, rod and shapes can easily be threaded using either standard hand pipe stocks or power operated equipment. For optimum results in threading, use of new taps and dies is recommended; but in any case they should be clean and sharp and maintained in good condition. Power threading machines should be fitted with dies having 5 negative front rake and ground especially for this application, tapered guide sleeves are not required. For hand stocks, the dies should have a negative front rake angle of 5 to 10. Dies which have been designed for use on brass or copper pipe may be successfully used. arboloy dies give longer service. Taps should be ground with a 0 to 10 negative rake, depending upon the size and pitch of the thread. Die chasers should have a 33 chamfer on the lead: a 10 front or negative rake; and a 5 rake on the back of relief edge. Self-opening die heads and collapsable taps, power threading machines and a slight chamfer to lead the tap or dies will speed production, however, taps and dies 10-2 should not be driven at high speeds or with heavy pressure. A tapered plug should be inserted into tubular ends when threading to hold the pipe round and to prevent the die from distorting or digging into the pipe wall. This insures uniform circumferential depth of threads. Pipe for threading should be held in a pipe vice since sawtooth jaws will leave marks. Thermoplastic materials are readily threaded without use of external lubricants. However, ordinary lubrication or cutting oil will be beneficial to the operation. In a pipe-threading machine, water soluble oil or plain cold water is used. learing of cuttings from the die is strongly recommended. HEAT WELDING The most important and most versatile of welding methods is hot gas and air welding which, in principle, is similar to oxyacetylene welding of metals, but with a difference in the technique involved. Specialized welding equipment has been developed in which the pressure and the rate and area of heating are precisely controlled in order to provide strong, tight bonds. Welding rods are available in different sizes to suit the individual jobs. Hot gas welding of thermoplastics is accomplished with a welding torch and tips or tools. It is divided into three basic types of welding: tack welding, hand welding and high speed welding. Each type requires different tips or high speed tools. FUSION WELDING Industrial thermoplastics such as PV, PP, PE, and PVDF can be fusion welded using modern temperature and pressure controlled fusion equipment. This relatively simple equipment is available to fuse PIPE and Tube products to 24 diameter. SHEETS and Plates can also be fused using micro processor controlled fusion machines. Weld efficiency, when using modern equipment, will develop weld strength of up to 98% of the unwelded parent material. SOLVENT EMENT WELDING ementing is a convenient technique for bonding PV and PV (High-Temp) stock. Surfaces to be cemented must be clean and dry. They should be cut square and smooth and wiped clean of dirt, grease, etc. with a small amount of Fabco Pipe leaner. When solvent-cementing, it is important to have close clearances between the surfaces to be joined. Solvent- cement should be applied with an ordinary small paint brush to each member. (Do not use synthetic hair brushes). Then the cemented surfaces should immediately be pushed snugly together. After the cemented joint has been pressed together the initial set takes place within several minutes.

235 Handling strength, however, is not developed for approximately 30 minutes. Relative motion between the cemented surfaces during the initial set period is undesirable. It is good practice to apply no more than 10% of the rated stress for four hours. Full strength of the joint is developed after about 48 hours. FLANGING One of the earliest methods of joining thermoplastics piping, flanging continues to be used extensively for process lines. Thermoplastic flanges and flanged fittings are available in a full size range and may be attached to pipe by solvent welding, by threading, or by thermal bonding, as required by the particular thermoplastics material. MAHINING, UTTING AND SAWING Thermoplastics may be turned, threaded, grooved, milled, or polished to very close tolerances, with the same tools as are used for wood or metal. The only requirement for machining of plastic that differs from metal machining is compensation for heating up of materials due to its poor heat-conductivity. The limitation of heat build-up is accomplished by use of sharp, high-speed tools, streams of air or water/soda cooling, and proper machine feeds. In machining plastics on a lathe, tool bits should be sharpened as for machining brass. The tool should be ground with a front clearance of 10, a 2 negative back-rake and no side rake. The tool should have a 10 side-clearance. hips should be blown or washed away from the work to reduce frictional heat to a minimum. The piece is set up in the lathe for turning or thread cutting as in metal work but with special protection provided for the plastic where it is held in the chuck jaws. The plastic should be wrapped in several heavy layers of heavy cardboard, held in place by masking tape, before being inserted into chuck. machining different diameters of plastic can be calculated as: 4 times the cutting speed (fpm) divided by the diameter of the plastic in inches. Example: With a plastic rod 1- in. diameter, the lathe speed would be 200 times 4 divided by 1 or 800 rpm. Light cuts are recommended to in. cross-feed at a time. In sawing plastic sheet, there is likely to be concentrated heat build-up in the saw blades. To allow for this, the blade used should be selected in accordance with the gauge of the material. The saw blade for cutting thicker materials should be heavier and should be hollow ground. The saw should make a slicing cut in the material: to do this, the teeth should have negative rake, with little or no set. The rate of feed should be very slow. The blade of a circular saw should just show through the material. If it extends too far through, it will increase the heat build-up, by increasing friction. In cutting polyethylene and polypropylene on a circular saw, the saw blade required is different from that used in cutting PV. PE and PP do not require a hollow ground blade and are cut by a well-set saw blade. Shears can be used for cutting of light gauge thermoplastic sheets. All shearing should be accomplished at room temperature. A cold sheet will crack or shatter. A 1/8-in. sheet of Type 1 PV can be sheared easily. Heavier-gauge Type 1 PV will tend to cut off-square and also show stress marks. Type 2 PV, PP, PE and modified high impact PV shear better and to a higher gauge than Type 1 PV. In drilling plastics, the same problems are experienced as in drilling metal. The non-conducting characteristics of the material and the heat concentration in the tool must be allowed for. This is accomplished by grinding the drill differently than for drilling metals. If the holes are to be drilled in the fabrication at hand, the drill should be reground to a negative rake and the lip angle increased for 59 to 70. The margin on the drill should be smooth and highly polished to reduce friction. Drilling speeds should be reduced: 50 to 150 rpm is a safe range, with 120 rpm being optimum. Very slow feeds should be used. A cutting speed of 200 fpm is recommended. Lathe speed for

236 Guidelines For Processing and Machining Plastics General Remarks Non-reinforced thermoplastics can be machined with cutting tools of highspeed steel. For reinforced materials, hard metal tools are required. In all cases, only properly sharpened tools are to be used. Due to the poor thermal conductivity of plastics, provision has to be made for good heat dissipation. Heat is best dissipated via the chips. Dimensional Stability Dimensional stability of parts is conditional on stress-relieved, semi-finished materials which have to be annealed. The heat generated by the cutting tool otherwise inevitably leads to the release of processing stresses and deformation of the part. In the case of high material removal volumes, intermediate heating may be necessary after the main machining operation so as to remove the arising thermal stresses. Materials with high moisture absorption (e.g. polyamides) may require conditioning before machining. Plastics require larger finishing tolerances than metals. Furthermore, allowance has to be made for the many times greater thermal expansion. Machining Operations 1. Turning Guide values for cutting tool geometry are given in the table. For particularly high quality surface finishes, the tip is to be shaped as a broadnosed finishing tool as shown in Figure 1. For cutting off, the tool should be ground to the profile shown in Figure 2 so as to avoid a remaining stump. On thin walled and particularly flexible workpieces, on the other hand, it is better to work with tools that are ground to a knife-like cutting geometry. Figures 3 and Milling For plane surfaces, face milling is more economical than peripheral milling. For perpheral milling and profiling, the cutting tools should not have more than two cutting edges so that vibrations due to the number of teeth are kept to a minimum and chip widths are sufficiently large. Optimum removal rates and surface finish are obtained with single-point tools. 3. Drilling and boring As a general rule it is possible to use twist drills; these should have an angle of twist of and very smooth helical flutes for good chip removal. Larger diameters should be rough-drilled or produced by trepanning or internal turning. On drilling into solid material, care must be taken to ensure that the tools are properly sharpened; otherwise, the developing compressive strain can build up and cause the material to split. Reinforced plastics possess higher residual processing stresses with lower impact strength than unreinforced plastics and are thus particularly susceptible to cracking. Where possible, these should be heated to about 120 before drilling or sawing (heating time approximately 1 hour per 10 mm cross-section). This procedure is also recommended in the case of polyamide 6/6. 4. Sawing Unnecessary generation of heat by friction is to be avoided, since sawing is generally used to cut off thickwalled parts with relatively thin tools. Well-sharpened and heavily crossed sawblades are therefore advised. Note: The information is only to assist and advise you on current technical knowledge and is given without obligation or liability. All trade and patent rights should be observed. All rights reserved. Figure Finishing tip 2 Turning tool 2 Figure 4. Figure 2: Profile prevents remaining stump

237 GUIDELINES FOR PROESSING AND MAHINING PLASTI Turning Milling Drilling and Boring Sawing Special Measures Machining Operations α learance angle ( ) y Rake angle ( ) V utting speedft/ min t Pitch mils α learance angle ( ) y1 Rake angle ( )b Side angle ( ) V utting speed ft/ min S Feed mils/rev The angle of twist β of the drill bit should be approximately 12 to 16. α learance angle ( ) y Rake angle ( ) V utting speed ft/ min The feed can amount to up to in./tooth α learance angle ( ) y Rake angle ( ) X Side angle ( ) V utting speed ft/min S Feed mils/rev The nose radius r must be at least in. α y X V S α y V α y1 b V S α y V t Raw Material Group In the case of fluid cooling only use pure water Polycarbonate In the case of fluid cooling only use pure water ABS (Acrylo- nitrile-butadiene- Styrene) Preheat to 240 F before drilling or sawing PPS (Polyphenylene Sulfide) Preheat to 240 F before drilling or sawing Polysulfone PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Nylon 6/ Acetal Preheat to 240 F before drilling or sawing PET (Polyethylene Terephthalate) Acetal Homopolymer (DEL- RIN ) In the case of fluid cooling only use pure water PPO (Polyphenylene Oxide) (NORYL ) Preheat to 240 F before drilling or sawing Polyetheretherketone (PEEK) 100 In the case of fluid cooling only use pure water Polyetherimide (ULTEM ) Use hard metal cutting tools Reinforced Engineering Plastics*

238 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS INTRODUTION SOPE One of the more important features of industrial thermoplastics is the ease with which they lend themselves to a variety of fabricating techniques. This versatility, plus the wide selection of piping components now available, make possible fast and economical installation, maintenance and modification of industrial piping systems. It is the objective of this section to provide detailed instructions on all known techniques of joining, maintaining and handling thermoplastics in order to permit maximum integrity of your piping system. SOLVENT WELDING The generally preferred method of joining rigid thermoplastics such as PV and PV is solvent welding. This process gives a stronger joint than threading and is also considered faster and simpler. Additionally, solvent welding permits the use of thinner walls when compared to threaded connections for equivalent pressure ratings. THERMO-SEALING (SOKET FUSION) Polypropylene (PP), a thermoplastic polyolefin and PVDF (Kynar), cannot be dissolved by even the strongest of organic solvents. Since solvent attack (or bite) by dissolution is necessary to effect a solvent cement bond with thermoplastics, it is not possible to join polypropylene or PVDF by solvent cementing. Therefore, polypropylene and PVDF pressure systems can only be joined using heat fusion techniques. A thermal sealing procedure is used when joining using heat fusion techniques. A thermal sealing procedure is used when joining 1/2 through 4 sizes. When joining 6 polypropylene systems, which are recommended for drainage applications only, a fillet welding procedure is utilized. THREADING Threaded joints are sometimes used when a piping system must be dismantled for occasional cleaning or modifications. Since threading results in a reduction in the effective wall thickness of the pipe, the pressure rating of threaded pipe is reduced to one-half that of unthreaded pipe, ie. pipe joined by solvent cementing or thermal sealing. This reduction in wall thickness resulting from threading can seriously affect the pressure carrying capability and mechanical strength of Schedule 40 or lighter pipe and therefore, only Schedule 80 or heavier pipe should be threaded when the pipe is used for pressure applications. Also, threading is not recommended for plastic pipe above 4 inches in diameter nor is it recommended for pressure polypropylene piping systems. FLANGING One of the earliest methods for joining thermoplastic piping, flanging continues to be used extensively for process lines. Thermoplastic flanges and flanged fittings are available in a full size range and mat be attached to pipe by solvent welding, by threading, or by thermal sealing, as required by the particular thermoplastic material. STORAGE AND HANDLING OF THERMOPLASTI PIPING OMPONENTS SOPE Industrial thermoplastic piping components are designed and manufactured for use in severe duty systems involving the transport of aggressive liquids. In order to ensure their integrity, once installed, they must be handled with reasonable care prior to installation. STORAGE 1. Pipe - When pipe is received in standard lifts it should remain in the lift until ready for use. Lifts should not be stacked more than three high and should always be stacked wood on wood. Loose pipe should be stored on racks with a minimum support spacing of three feet. Pipe should be shaded but not covered when stored outside in high ambient temperatures. This will provide for free circulation of air and reduce the heat build-up due to direct sunlight exposure. 2. Fittings - Fittings should be stored in their original cartons to keep them free of dirt and reduce the possibility of damage. If possible, fittings should be stored indoors. 3. Solvent ements and Primers - Solvent cements have a definite shelf life and each can and carton is clearly marked with a date of manufacture. Stock should be rotated to ensure that the oldest material is used first. Primer does not have a shelf life but it is good practice to rotate this stock also. Solvent cements and primers should be stored in a relatively cool shelter away from direct sun exposure. AUTION: SOLVENT EMENTS AND PRIMERS ARE OM- POSED OF VARIOUS SOLVENTS AND REQUIRE SPEIAL ONDITIONS FOR STORAGE. BEAUSE OF THEIR FLAM- MABILITY THEY MUST NOT BE EXPOSED TO IGNITION, HEAT, SPARKS OR OPEN FLAMES. HANDLING 1. Pipe and Fittings - are should be exercised to avoid rough handling of thermoplastic pipe and fittings. They should not be dragged over sharp projections, dropped or have objects dropped upon them. Pipe ends should be inspected for cracks resulting from such abuse. Transportation by truck or pipe trailer will require that the pipe be continuously supported and all sharp edges on the trailer bed that could come in contact with the pipe must be padded. 2. Solvent ements and Primers - Keep containers for solvent cements tightly closed except when in use. Avoid prolonged breathing of solvent vapors, and when pipe and fittings are being joined in partially enclosed areas use a ventilating device to attenuate vapor levels. Keep solvent cements, primers and cleaners away from all sources of ignition, heat, sparks and open flames. Avoid repeated contact with the skin by wearing proper gloves impervious to the solvents. Application of the solvents or cements with rags and bare hands is not recommended; natural fiber brushes and other suitable applicators can produce satisfactory results. DANGER: Extremely flammable. Vapor harmful. May be harmfulif swallowed. May cause skin or eye irritation.

239 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS SOLVENT WELDING INSTRUTIONS FOR PV & PV PRESSURE PIPE SYSTEMS SOPE The solvent welding procedure detailed herein applies to all Fabco Polyvinyl hloride (PV) and hlorinated Polyvinyl hloride (PV) pressure piping systems including molded fittings and valves. Belled end pipe can also be joined in this manner. FABO TEHNIAL SERVIES is available for additional solvent welding guidance and recommendations. Joining Equipment and Materials utting Tool Rags (nonsynthetic, ie., cotton) Deburring Tool ement and Primer Applicators Applicator an or Bucket Purple Primer P-70 Solvent ement 705, 707, 711, 717, 719, 714 Tool Tray Notched Boards TYPES OF EMENT AND PRIMER 1. FABO WELD-ON Light Duty Industrial Grade PV Solvent ement #705 is for use with Schedule 40, DWV and lass (SDR rated) piping through FABO WELD-ON Heavy Duty Gray Industrial Grade PV Solvent ement #711 is for use with Schedule 80 piping through 6. The gap-filling high viscous formulation may also be used for Schedule 40, drainage, conduit and all lass (SDR rated) piping through FABO WELD-ON Extra Heavy Duty Gray Industrial Grade PV Solvent #717, #719 ement is for use with all PV piping, especially 6 and larger. When applied, the very heavy bodied formulation maintains a generous coating with minimum change in thickness over the entire pipe circumference. 4. FABO WELD-ON Heavy Duty Light Gray Industrial Grade #714 PV Solvent ement is for use with all sizes of Schedule 40 and 80 PV piping. It may be used in any industrial or commercial applications suitable to PV. 5. FABO Purple Primer #P70 is for use with all PV and PV piping applications. (Purple container label.) All of the products above are listed by IAPMO for pressure and drainage applications, and they are NSF approved for potable water. NOTE: Do not take shortcuts - follow instructions completely. PREPARATION FOR JOINING 1. utting - Plastic pipe can be easily cut with a power or handsaw, circular or band saw. For best results, use fine-toothed blade (16-18 teeth per inch) with little or no set (maximum inch). A circumferential speed of about 6,000 ft./ min. is suitable for circular saws; band saw speed should be approximately 3,000 ft./min. arbide-tipped blades are preferable when quantities of pipe are to be cut. To ensure square-end cuts, a miter box, holddown or jig should be used. Pipe or tubing cutters can be used for smaller diameter pipe when the cutting wheel is specifically designed for plastic pipe. 2. Deburring and Beveling - All burrs, chips, filings, etc., should be removed from both the pipe I.D. and O.D. before joining. Use a knife, deburring tool or half-round, coarse file to remove all burrs. All pipe ends should be beveled to approximately the dimensions shown below for ease of socketing and to minimize the chances of wiping the solvent cement for the I.D. of the fitting as the pipe is socketed: 1/16" to 3/32" The beveling can be done with a coarse file or a beveling tool. 3. Fitting Preparation - Prior to solvent welding, all fittings and couplings should be removed from their cartons and exposed for at least one hour to the same temperature conditions as the pipe in order to assure that they are thermally balanced before joining. 4. leaning - Using a clean, dry cotton rag, wipe away all loose dirt and moisture from the I.D. and O.D. of the pipe end and the I.D. of the fitting. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SOLVENT WELD WET SURFAES. DANGER: Solvent cements and primer are extremely flammable and vapor harmful. Keep away from heat, sparks and open flame. Use only with adequate ventilation. Harmful if swallowed. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapor. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. auses eye irritation. Repeated or prolonged skin contact causes skin irritation. lose container after each use. FIRST AID: In case of skin contact, flush with water; for eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. If swallowed, DO NOT INDUE VOMITING, call a Physician immediately

240 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS PRIMING The function of purple primer is to penetrate and soften the bonding surfaces of PV and PV pipe and fittings. It is a product that penetrates rapidly. It is very effective on the hard-finished, high gloss products now being produced. Priming is a 3-step process as follows: 1. Using a natural bristle brush about one-half the width of the pipe diameter to be jointed, apply Purple Primer freely to the inner fitting socket. A rag is not recommended as repeated contact with skin may cause irritation or blistering. Keep the surface wet by maintaining a brushing motion of the applicator over the entire surface for five to fifteen seconds. Re-dip applicator as necessary but avoid puddling inside the fitting. Natural bristle brushes should always be specified. It is recognized that the recommended brush width may not always be readily available. However, the selection should come as close as possible to the recommended width in order to ensure complete coverage with a minimum number of brush strokes. SOLVENT EMENT APPLIATION Before the primer dries, use a second applicator (see chart on preceding page for specific recommendations) to apply solvent cement in a 3-step process as follows: 1. over the pipe liberally with solvent cement for a length at least equal to that of the fitting socket depth. It is important not to be stingy with cement Apply primer to the pipe surface in the same manner making sure that the length of pipe evenly brushed is at least equal to the fitting socket depth. 3. Re-apply primer to the fitting socket. Alternate applications of Purple Primer, start with the female component. For checking penetration, you should be able to scratch or scrape a few thousandths of the primed surfaces away. Repeated applications to either or both surfaces may be necessary. Weather conditions do affect priming action. In cold weather more time is required for proper penetration. NOTE: The pipe ends can be rested on notched boards to keep them clean and for ease of solvent cement application Recommendations for Solvent ement/primer Application NOMINAL BRUSH PIPE SIZE WIDTH* ROLLER LENGTH DAUBERS (omm./res Piping Only) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) Pressure Joints Non-Press. Joints 1/4 1/4 Not Recommended N/A N/A 1/2 1/2 Not Recommended 3/4 Diameter 3/4 Diameter 3/4 1/2 Not Recommended 3/4 Diameter 3/4 Diameter 1 1/2 Not Recommended 3/4 Diameter 3/4 Diameter 1 1/4 1 Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter 1-1/2 Diameter 1 1/2 1 Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter 1-1/2 Diameter 2 1 Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter 1-1/2 Diameter 2 1/2 1 1/2 Not Recommended Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter 3 1 1/2 Not Recommended Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter Not Recommended 1-1/2 Diameter Not Recommended Not Recommended 10 4 to 6 7 Not Recommended Not Recommended 12 4 to 6 7 Not Recommended Not Recommended ontinuing with alternate surface application, coat the fitting socket thoroughly with a medium layer of solvent cement. Avoid puddling in the socket. On belled end pipe, do not coat beyond the socket depth or allow cement to run beyond the bell. Put a second coat of cement on the pipe. This completes the six steps of alternate surface applications for a joint three of primer and three of solvent cement starting with the female component. ement layers must be without voids and sufficient to fill any gaps in the joints.

241 JOINING 1. Immediately upon finishing cement application and before it starts to set, insert the pipe to the full socket depth while rotating the pipe or fitting a 1/4 turn to ensure complete and even distribution of the cement. Hold joint together for a minimum of 10 to 15 seconds to make sure that pipe does not move or back out of the socket. HANDLING During the initial setting of the cement, which begins about two minutes after application (on small sizes), be careful not to move or disturb the joint. FABO offers, as a non-liability supplier, the following drying times as a guide in aiding the installer, engineer, owner or other decision making party in deciding at his own risk when the joints are sufficiently dry for movement; handling; low pressure, initial joint testing, application of high pressure tests and introduction of working pressure. These drying times are based upon a combination of past field experience and laboratory tests. PV and PV Joint Movement Times 2. For pipe sizes 6 and larger, a joining crew consisting of two men is recommended and the following additional steps necessary: a. Rotation of the pipe in the fitting may be omitted. b. Hold joint together for 1 to 3 minutes depending on pipe size. c. As an aid for joining in these larger sizes, it is recommended that a come-along or pipe joining tool be used. EXESS EMENT Immediately after joining and before joint is set, gently place it back onto a level surface, wipe off all excess cement from the circumference of the pipe and fitting. JOINT INTEGRITY PV and PV piping joint integrity depends greatly upon following exactly and by intent Fabco s specific handling, inspection, storage, shipping, fabrication, installation, testing and operating instructions. Joint integrity also depends greatly upon an infinitely wide, unpredictable and uncontrollable set of product and environmental conditions that go into determining the length of joint drying times before it may be moved; handled; low, high or working pressure tested. These conditions include size of pipe, surface temperature of the joint, dry joint interference fit and relative humidity. Drying times will be faster with smaller pipe, higher surface temperatures, tighter interference fits and lower relative humidity. Drying times will be slower when conditions are reversed. Because of these almost infinite and completely unpredictable variety of drying conditions that can exist from job to job and from time to time, FABO only specifically recommends for its PV and PV products the below solvent welding joining temperatures and joint drying times: The actual joining should not be done in atmospheric temperatures below 40 F or above 90 F when exposed to direct sunlight. FABO recommends that 72 hours of joint drying time should elapse for all sizes of pipe and drying temperatures before the joint is subjected to any appreciable internal or external pressure on a full time basis. NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HOT WEATHER F Surface Temperature MILD WEATHER* F Surface Temperature OLD WEATHER* F Surface Temperature 1/4-1 1/4 12 Min. 20 Min. 30 Min. 1-1/2-2-1/2 30 Min. 45 Min. 1 Hr Min. 1 Hr. 1 Hr. & 30 Min Hr. 1 Hr. & 30 Min. 2 Hrs. & 30 Min Hrs. 3 Hrs. 5 Hrs. *The temperatures above are drying temperatures and should not be confused with atmospheric, joining temperatures recommendations and limitations. See section on JOINT INTEGRITY. PRESSURE TESTING AUTION: AIR OR OMPRESSED GAS IS NOT REOM- MENDED AS A MEDIA FOR PRESSURE TESTING OF PLAS- TI PIPING SYSTEMS. 1. Initial Joint Testing - Initial joint testing of PV and PV pipe could possibly be accomplished to 10% of its hydrostatic pressure rating after the below drying times: NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HOT WEATHER F Surface Temperature MILD WEATHER* F Surface Temperature OLD WEATHER* F Surface Temperature 1/2-1 1/4 4 Hrs. 5 Hrs. 7 Hrs. 1-1/2-2-1/2 6 Hrs. 8 Hrs. 10 Hrs Hrs. 18 Hrs. 24 Hrs Hrs. 24 Hrs. 48 Hrs Hrs. 36 Hrs. 72 Hrs. PV and PV Joint Drying Times at 10% Pressure Testing *The temperatures above are drying temperatures and should not be confused with atmospheric joining temperature recommendations and limitations. See section on JOINT INTEGRITY

242 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS High Pressure Testing - The PV and PV pipe can be pressure tested up to 100% of its hydrostatic pressure rating after drying times listed in the table which follows: NOMINAL PIPE SIZE HOT WEATHER F Surface Temperature MILD WEATHER* F Surface Temperature OLD WEATHER* F Surface Temperature 1/2-1 1/4 4 Hrs. 5 Hrs. 7 Hrs. 1-1/2-2-1/2 6 Hrs. 8 Hrs. 10 Hrs Hrs. 18 Hrs. 24 Hrs Hrs. 24 Hrs. 48 Hrs Hrs. 36 Hrs. 72 Hrs. PV and PV Joint Drying Times for 100% Pressure Testing The temperatures above are drying temperatures and should not be confused with atmospheric, joining temperature recommendations and limitations. See section on JOINT INTEG- RITY. 3. Full-Time Working Pressure - PV and PV joints may be introduced to maximum working pressure on a full-time basis after approximately four times the drying time shown above for 100% pressure testing. DO S AND DON TS Do: Use the proper applicator (See chart for specific recommendations). Use proper type of solvent cement for the job. Apply the cement while the primer is still wet. Follow the instructions completely. Don t: Attempt to solvent weld under the following conditions: 1. If it is raining 2. If atmospheric temperature is below 40 F. 3. If under direct exposure to sun at atmospheric temperatures above 90 F. Discard empty cans of solvent, primer or rags in trench or near piping. oncentrated fumes or dripping cement or primer can cause piping failure. HOT WEATHER EMENTING Since cement contains a solvent, certain precautions or steps should be taken when the atmospheric temperature is above 90 F to avoid excessive evaporation of the solvent from the cement just prior to joining. Such evaporation will cause the cement to prematurely set before joining, thus, adversely affecting the joint integrity. Use one or a combination of the below to reduce the chances of this condition occurring: 1. Shade or shelter the joint surfaces from direct exposure to the sun s rays for at least one hour prior to joining and during the joining process. 2. Make cement joints during early morning hours. 3. Apply cement quickly. On 6 and larger pipe, it is recommended that two men apply cement to pipe surface while the third applies it to the fitting socket. 4. Join pipe to fittings as quickly as possible after applying cement. OLD WEATHER EMENTING Because the solvents in the cement will not evaporate as readily when the temperature is below 40 F, the pipe joints will not set up as rapidly in cold weather. If solvent cementing must be done when the temperature is below 40 F, the following suggestions are offered: Store pipe, fittings, cement and primer in a heated area. Pre-fab as much of the system as possible in a heated work area. Joints that must be made outside should be protected with a portable shelter and heated with indirect heat to surface temperatures about 40 F prior to joining. The shelter and heat should remain in place for at least two hours after joint assembly. Pipe and fittings must be dry prior to joining and the joints should be kept dry until the cement has had sufficient time to set. AUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SPEED THE SETTING OR DRYING OF THE EMENT BY APPLYING DIRET HEAT TO THE SOLVENT WELDED JOINT. Forced rapid drying by heating will cause the cement solvents to boil off, forming porosity, bubbles and blisters in the cement film. HANDLING OF PRIMER AND EMENT NOTE: Observe the use prior to date. ement has a limited shelf life. Do not permit solvent cement can to stand open. Do not use cement that has dried to the point where it become lumpy and stringy. Throw it away. Do not attempt to thin out sluggish cement with thinner or primer. ESTIMATED SOLVENT EMENT REQUIREMENTS The below estimated PV and PV solvent cement requirements should only be considered as a guideline for usage and could vary according to a wide variety of installation conditions. Further, these estimates should in no way be used to restrict the liberal cement application instructions recommended for the pipe.

243 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS Number of Joints Per...* PIPE SIZE PINT QUART GALLON 1/ ,040 3/ / / / N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R 6 *Each joint represents one socket in a fitting. THERMO-SEALING (Socket Fusion) INSTRUTIONS FOR POLYPROPYLENE AND PVDF PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS SOPE The socket fusion joining method which is detailed herein applies to all FABO polypropylene and PVDF pressure piping systems including molded socket fittings, and socket type valve connections. This procedure involves the application of regulated heat uniformly and simultaneously to pipe and fitting mating surfaces so that controlled melting occurs at these surfaces. All recommendations and instructions presented herein for socket fusion are based upon the use of a Thermo-Seal fusion tool for applying uniform heat to pipe and fittings. Joining Equipment and Materials - utting tools - otton rags - Deburring tool - Thermo-Seal tool - Electric Model NA with 1/2-2 tool pieces or - Electric Model NB with 1/2-4 tool pieces - Vise TYPES OF JOINING TOOLS ELETRI MODEL tools are available for making socket fusion joints. They are the preferred socket fusion tools because the thermostatically controlled heat source automatically maintains fusion temperatures within the recommended range Electric Model NA. This tool which is electrically heated and thermostatically controlled, is used to join polypropylene and PVDF pipe, and valves and fittings in sizes 1/2 through 2. This unit operates on 110 VA (6.7 amps; 800 watts) electrically and is fitted with ground wires. Electric Model NB. This tool is also electrically heated and thermostatically controlled and is used to join polypropylene pipe and fittings in sizes 1/2 through 4. This unit operates on 110 VA (1.38 amps; 1650 watts) electrically and is fitted with ground wires. AUTION: SOKET FUSION AND FILLET WELDING INVOLVE TEMPERATURES IN EXESS OF 540 F. SEVERE BURNS AN RESULT FROM ONTATING EQUIPMENT OR MOLTEN PLASTI MATERIAL AT OR NEAR THESE TEMPERATURES. PREPARATION FOR JOINING 1. utting Polypropylene or PVDF can be easily cut with a power or hand saw, circular or band saw. For best results, use the fine-toothed blades (16-18 teeth per inch). A circumferential speed of about 6,000 ft/min. is suitable for circular saws; band saw speed should be approximately 3,000 ft/min. arbide-tipped blades are preferable when large quantities of pipe are to be cut. It is important that the pipe ends be cut square. To ensure square end cuts, a miter box, hold down or jig must be used. Pipe or tubing cutters can also be used to produce square, clean cuts, however, the cutting wheel should be specifically designed for plastic. 2. Deburring and Beveling All burrs, chips, filing, etc., should be removed from both the pipe I.D. and O.D. before joining. Use a knife, deburring tool or half-round, coarse file to remove all burrs. All pipe ends should be beveled to approximately the dimensions shown below for ease of socketing and to minimize the chances of wiping melt material from the I.D. of the fitting as the pipe is socketed. The beveling can be done with a coarse file or a beveling tool. 1/16" to 3/32" leaning Using a clean, dry cotton rag, wipe away all loose dirt and moisture from the I.D. and O.D. of the pipe end and the l.d. of the fitting. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SOKET FUSE WET SURFAES

244 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS 4. Joint Sizing In order to provide excess material for fusion bonding, polypropylene and PVDF components are manufactured to socket dimensions in which the socket I.D. is smaller than the pipe O.D. Therefore, it should not be possible to easily slip the pipe into the fitting socket past the initial socket entrance depth and in no case should it ever be possible to bottom the pipe in the socket prior to fusion. Before making socket fusion joints, fittings should be checked for proper socket dimensional tolerances, based on the above discussion, by attempting to insert the pipe into the fitting socket. If a fitting socket appears to be oversize, it should not be used. 5. Planning onstruction Socket fusion joints are more easily made when there is sufficient space to properly secure the Thermo-Seal tool and to maneuver pipe and fittings into the Thermo-Seal tool. Therefore, it is recommended that the piping system be prefabricated, as much as possible, in an area where there is sufficient room to work, and that as few joints as possible should be made in areas where there is limited working space. Mechanical joints such as flanges or unions may be considered in extremely tight areas. 6. Thermo-Seal Tool Set Up temperature gauge, and tool temperature can be adjusted by turning the thermostat adjustment screw with a screwdriver. (ounterclockwise) to raise the temperature and clockwise to lower the temperature.) NOTE: One turn of the adjustment screw will give approximately a 25 F temperature change IMPORTANT: Good socket fusion joints can be made only when the Thermo-Seal tool is operating at the proper temperature, and only when the length of time that the pipe and fittings remain on the heated tool pieces does not exceed those times recommended for the particular size of pipe and fitting to be joined. Please consult the user manual for your particular system. Excessive temperatures and excessive heating times will result in excessive melting at and below the surfaces of the fitting socket I.D. and pipe O.D. When the pipe is inserted into the fitting socket, excessive melt material needed for socket fusion will be scraped from the socket wall and into the fitting waterway and the resulting joint will be defective. Low temperatures and insufficient heating times will result in a lack of or incomplete melting making it impossible to make a good socket fusion joint. MAKING SOKET FUSION JOINTS a. Install the male and female tool pieces on either side of the Thermo-Seal tool and secure with set screws. 1. Place the proper size depth gauge over the end of the pipe. 10 b. Insert the electrical plug into a grounded 110 VA electrical source, and allow the tool to come to the proper operating temperature. The tool temperature is read directly from the mounted Attach the depth gauging clamp to the pipe by butting the clamp up to the end of the depth gauge and locking it into place. Then remove the depth gauge.

245 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS 6. Once a joint has been completed the clamp can be removed and preparation for the next joint can be started. 3. Simultaneously place pipe and fitting squarely and fully on heat tool pieces so that the I.D. of the fitting and the O.D. of the pipe are in contact with the heating surfaces. are should be taken to insure that the pipe and fitting are not cocked when they are inserted on the tool pieces. 4. Hold the pipe and fitting on the tool pieces for the prescribed amount of time. During this time a bead of melted material will appear around the complete circumference of the pipe at the entrance of the tool piece. 7. The surfaces of the female and male tool pieces are Teflon coated to prevent sticking of the hot plastic. It is important that the tool pieces be kept as clean as possible. Any residue left on the tool pieces should be removed immediately by wiping with a cotton cloth. AUTION: HOT PLASTI MATERIAL AN AUSE SEVERE BURNS; AVOID ONTAT WITH IT. Procedures for making good socket fusion joints can be summarized into five basic principles as follows: 1. The tool must be operated at the proper temperature. 2. The pipe end must be beveled. 3. The fitting must be slipped squarely onto the male tool while the pipe is simultaneously inserted into the female tool. 4. The fitting and pipe must not remain on the heat tool for an excessive period of time. Recommended heating times must be followed. 5. The pipe must be inserted squarely into the fitting socket immediately after removal from the heated tools. 6. The Thermo-Seal tool must be kept clean at all times. PRESSURE TESTING The strength of a socket fusion joint develops as the material in the bonded area cools. One hour after the final joint is made, a socket fusion piping system can be pressure tested up to 100% of its hydrostatic pressure rating. 5. Simultaneously remove the pipe and fitting from the tool pieces and immediately insert the pipe, squarely and fully and without purposeful rotation, into the socket of the fitting. Hold the completed joint in place and avoid relative movement between components for at least 15 seconds. AUTION: AIR OR OMPRESSED GAS IS NOT REOM- MENDED AND SHOULD NOT BE USED AS A MEDIA FOR PRESSURE TESTING OF PLASTI PIPING SYSTEMS. FILLET WELDING SOPE The joining procedure covered herein applies only to 6 polypropylene drainage or non-pressure systems. Fillet Welding is not recommended as a primary joining technique for pressure rated systems. Joining Equipment and Materials - utting and deburring tools - Plastic welding gun with flexible hose, pressure regulator and

246 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS gauge - Welding and tacking tips - ompresses air supply or bottled nitrogen (see note below) - 1/8 welding rod - otton rags Joining NOTE: Fillet welding of thermoplastics is quite similar to the acetylene welding or brazing process used with metals. The fundamental differences are that the plastic rod must always be the same basic material as the pieces to be joined; and heated gas, rather than burning gas, is used to melt the rod and adjacent surfaces. Because of its economy, compressed air is normally the gas of choice for most plastic welding. A welding gun which generates its own air supply is frequently desirable for field-made pipe joints where ultimate weld strength is not required. For welding guns which require compressed gas, nitrogen is preferable when the compressed plant air system does not contain adequate drying and filtration (Presence of moisture in the gas stream causes premature failure in the heater element of the welding gun. Impurities in the gas stream, particularly those in oil, may oxidize the plastic polymer, resulting in loss of strength. Polypropylene is known to be affected in this manner). 1. Insert pipe fully and squarely into the fitting after removing all dirt, oil, moisture and loose particles of plastic material from the welding surfaces by wiping with a clean cotton cloth. NOTE: Tacking required prior to welding. 6 polypropylene joints require a slip fit. Therefore, they must be dry fitted and tack welded to prevent movement of the pipe and fitting prior to the application of welding rod. Special welding gun tips are required for tacking. A low strength bond is accomplished by pulling the heated tacking tip along while directly in contact with the interface of pipe and fitting at an angle of 75 to 80. Initially, joints are tack-fused at four intervals. Then at least one complete revolution around the joint is made to provide a uniform groove for subsequent rod welding. 3. Holding the polypropylene welding rod at an angle of 75 to the joint and while maintaining pressure on the rod, apply heat uniformly to the rod and the pipe and fitting with an arching motion of the welding torch. The degree of heating can be controlled by regulating the nitrogen/ air flow to the welding gun or by regulating the distance from the tip of the welding gun to the work. Too much heat will over melt the polypropylene material and cause it to splash. Too little heat will result in incomplete fusion. Lay three separate weld beads in the following manner for a full fillet weld: A. Pipe to fitting B. Pipe to bead. Fitting to bead When terminating each weld bead, the bead should be lapped on top of (never along-side) itself for a distance of 3/8 to 1/2 insights to hot gas welding see REPAIRING THERMOPLASTI PIPE JOINTS. FLANGED JOINTS Adjust the nitrogen/air pressure between approximately 3 and 8 psi and further adjust the pressure as necessary to control both temperature and rate of welding SOPE Flanging is used extensively for plastic process lines that require periodic dismantling. Plastic flanges are factory flanged valves and fittings in PV, PV, PVDF and polypropylene are available in a full range of sizes and types for joining to pipe by solvent welding, threading or socket fusion as in the case with polypropylene with PVDF. Gasket seals between the flange faces should be an elastomeric full flat faced gasket with a hardness of 50 to 70 durometer. FABO can provide neoprene gaskets in the 1/2 through 12 range having an 1/8 thickness. For chemical environments too aggressive for neoprene another resistant elastomer should be used. When it is necessary to bolt plastic and metal flanges - use flat face metal flanges - not raised face, and use recommended torques shown in table under INSTALLATION TIPS.

247 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS DIMENSIONS Bolt circle and number of bolt holes for the flanges are the same as lass 150 metal flanges per ANSI B16.5. Threads are tapered iron pipe size threads per ANSI B The socket dimensions conform to ASTM D-2467 which describes 1/2 through 8 sizes and ASTM D439 for Schedule 80 PV which gives dimensional data for 1/2 through 6. Internal Fabco specifications have been established for the 10 and 12 PV patterns and 8 PV design, as well as socket designs for polypropylene and PVDF. PRESSURE RATING As with all other thermoplastic piping components, the maximum non-shock operating pressure is a function of temperature. Maximum pressure rating for FABO valves, unions and flanges is 150 psi. Above 100 F refer to the TEMPERATURE ORRE- TION FATOR HART HEREIN. SEALING The faces of flanges are tapered back away from the orifice area at a 1/2 to 1 degree pitch so that when the bolts are tightened the faces will be pulled together generating a force in the water way area to improve sealing. INSTALLATION TIPS Once a flange is joined to pipe, the method for joining two flanges together is as follows: 1. Make sure that all the bolt holes of the mating flanges match up. It is not advisable to twist the flange and pipe to achieve this. 2. Use flat washers under bolt heads and nuts Insert all bolts. (Lubricate bolts.) Make sure that the faces of the mating flanges are not separated by excessive distance prior to bolting down the flanges. The bolts on the plastic flanges should be tightened by pulling down the nuts diametrically opposite each other using a torque wrench. omplete tightening should be accomplished in stages and the final torque values shown in the table should be followed for the various sizes of flanges. Uniform stress across the flange will eliminate leaky gaskets. FLANGE SIZE REOMMENDED TORQUE* 1/2-1-1/ ft.lbs ft.lbs ft.lbs ft.lbs ft.lbs. *For a well lubricated bolt with flat washers under bolt head and nut. The following tightening pattern is suggested for the flange bolts If the flange is mated to a rigid and stationary flanged object, or a metal flange, particularly in a buried situation where settling could occur with the plastic pipe, the adjacent plastic pipe must be supported or anchored to eliminate potential stressing of the flange joint. REPAIRING THERMOPLASTI PIPE JOINTS SOPE The most common method for repairing faulty and leaking joints is hot gas welding at the fillet formed by the junction of the fitting socket entrance and the pipe. Hot gas welding (which is similar to gas welding with metals except that hot gas is used for melting instead of a direct flame) consists of simultaneously melting the surface of a plastic filler rod and the surfaces of the base material in the fillet area while forcing the softened rod into the softened fillet. Welding with plastics involves only surface melting because plastics unlike metal must never be puddled. Therefore, the resulting weld is not as strong as the parent pipe and fitting material. This being the case, fillet welding as a repair technique is recommended for minor leaks only. It is not recommended as a primary joining technique for pressure rated systems. WELDING TOOLS AND MATERIALS - Plastic welding gun with pressure regulator, gauge and hose. - Filler rod - Emery cloth - otton rags - utting pliers - Hand grinder (optional) - ompressed air supply of bottled nitrogen - Source of compressed air WELD AREA PREPARATION Wipe all dirt, oil and moisture from the joint area. A very mild solvent may be necessary to remove oil. AUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ALL LIQUID HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE PORTION OF THE PIPING SYSTEM WHERE THE WELD IS TO BE MADE

248 If the weld is to repair a leaking solvent cemented joint, all residual cement, which is easily scorched during welding, must be removed from the fillet by using emery cloth. If the weld is to seal a threaded joint, a file can be used to remove threads in the weld area in order to provide a smooth surface. WELDING FAULTY JOINTS INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS 4. Make about a 60 angular cut on the lead end of the filler rod. This will make it easier to initiate melting and will insure fusion of the rod and base material at the beginning of the weld. 1. Remove residual solvent cement from the weld area using emery cloth. When welding threaded joints, a file can be used to remove threads in the weld area. 5. Welding temperatures vary for different thermoplastic materials (500 F F for PV and PV, 550 F 600 F for PP, 575 F F for PVDF). Welding temperatures can be adjusted for the various thermoplastic materials as well as any desired welding rate, by adjusting the pressure regulator (which controls the gas flow rate) between 3 and 8 PSI. 2. Wipe the weld area clean of dust, dirt and moisture. AUTION: For welding guns which require compressed gas, nitrogen is preferred when the compressed plant air system does not contain adequate drying and filtration. (Presence of moisture in the gas stream causes premature failure in the heater element of the welding gun. Impurities in the gas stream, particularly those in oil, may oxidize the plastic polymer, resulting in loss of strength. Polypropylene is known to be affected in this manner). 3. Determine the amount for the correct filler rod (see Table No. 1 on page 9-22) necessary to make one complete pass around the joint by wrapping the rod around the pipe to be welded. Increase this length enough to allow for handling of the rod to the end of the pass. 6. With air or an inert gas flowing through the welding torch, insert the electrical plug for the heating element into an appropriate electrical socket to facilitate heating of the gas and wait approximately 7 minutes for the welding gas to reach the proper temperature

249 AUTION: THE METAL BARREL OF THE WELDING TORH HOUSES THE HEATING ELEMENT SO IT AN ATTAIN EX- TREMELY HIGH TEMPERATURES. AVOID ONTAT WITH THE BARREL AND DO NOT ALLOW IT TO ONTAT ANY OMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS. INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS 9. Since the starting point for a plastic weld is frequently the weakest part of the weld, always terminate a weld by lapping the bead on top of itself for a distance of 3/8 to 1/ 2 inches. Never terminate a bead by overlapping the bead side by side. 7. Place the leading end of the filler rod into the fillet formed by the junction of the pipe and fitting socket entrance. Holding the filler rod at an angle of 90 to the joint for PV, PV and Kynar, 75 to the joint for polypropylene, pre-heat the surfaces for the rod and base materials at the weld starting point by holding the welding torch steady at approximately 1/4 to 3/4 inches from the weld starting point and directing the hot gas in this area until the surfaces become tacky. While preheating, move the rod up and down slightly so that the rod slightly touches the base materials. When the surfaces become tacky, the rod will stick to the base material. 10. When welding large diameter pipe, three weld passes may be required. The first bead should be deposited at the bottom of the fillet and subsequent beads should be deposited on each side of the first bead. When making multiple pass welds, the starting points for each bead should be staggered and ample time must be allowed for each weld pass to cool before proceeding with additional welds. 8. Advance the filler rod forward by applying a slight pressure to the rod. Simultaneously applying even heat to the surfaces of both the filler rod and base material by moving the torch with a fanning or arcing motion at a rate of about 2 cycles per second. The hot gas should be played equally on the rod and base material (along the weld line) for a distance of about 1/4 inch from the weld point. IMPORTANT: If charring of the base or rod material occurs, move the tip of the torch back slightly, increase the fanning frequency or increase the gas flow rate. If the rod or base materials do not melt sufficiently reverse the previously discussed corrective procedures. Do not apply too much pressure to the rod because this will tend to stretch the weld bead causing it to crack and separate after cooling. 11. Properly applied plastic welds can be recognized by the presence of small flow lines or waves on both sides of the deposited bead. This indicates that sufficient heat was applied to the surfaces of the rod and base materials to effect adequate melting and that sufficient pressure was applied to the rod to force the rod melt to fuse with base material melt. If insufficient heat is used when welding PV, PV or PVDF, the filler rod will appear in its original form and can easily be pulled away from the base material. Excessive heat will result in a brown or black discoloration of the weld. In the case of polypropylene, excessive heat will result in a flat bead with oversized flow lines

250 INSTALLATION INSTRUTIONS THREADING INSTRUTIONS FOR THERMOPLASTI PIPE SOPE The procedure presented herein covers threading of all IPS Schedule 80 or heavier thermoplastic pipe. The threads are National Pipe Threads (NPT) which are cut to the dimensions outlined in (ANSI) B and presented in the table on the following page. 12. Always unplug the electrical connection to the heating element and allow the welding gun to cool before shutting off the gas or air supply to the gun. WELDING PRINIPLES The procedures for making good thermoplastic welds can be summarized into four basic essentials: 1. orrect Heating Excessive heating will char or overmelt. Insufficient heating will result in incomplete melting. 2. orrect Pressure Excessive pressure can result in stress cracking when the weld cools. Insufficient pressure will result in incomplete fusion of the rod material with the base material. 3. orrect angle Incorrect rod angle during welding will stretch the rod and the finished weld will crack upon cooling. 4. orrect speed Excessive welding speed will stretch the weld bead and the finished weld will crack upon cooling. Rod Size and Weld Passes Filler rod size and the number of weld passes required to make a good plastic weld are dependent upon the size of the pipe to be welded as presented below. Do not use filler rod larger than 1/8 in diameter when welding with PV. Also, when welding PV, the number of passes for pipe sizes 1 through 2 should be increased to three. THREADING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Pipe Dies Pipe Vise Threading ratchet or power machine Tapered plug utting lubricant (soap & water) Strap wrench Teflon tape utting and Deburring tools Pipe Preparation Plastic pipe can be easily cut with a handsaw, power hacksaw, circular or band saw. For best results, use a finetoothed blade (16-18 teeth per inch) with little or no set (maximum ). A circumferential speed of about 6,000 ft./ min. is suitable for circular saws; band saw speed should be approximately 3,000 ft./min. arbidetipped blades are preferable when quantities of pipe are to be cut. To ensure square-ends, a miter box hold-down or jig should be used. Pipe or tubing cutters can be used for smaller diameter pipe when the cutting wheel is specifically designed for plastic pipe. Threading Dies Thread cutting dies should be clean, sharp and in good condition, and should not be used to cut materials other than plastics. Dies with a 5 negative front rake are recommended when using power threading equipment and dies with a 5 to 10 negative front rake are recommended when cutting threads by hand. Table 1 Pipe Size Rod Size Number of Passes 1/2-3/4 3/ /32 1 or 3 2-1/2-4 1/ /8 or 5/ /32 or 3/16 3 Threading and Joining 1. Hold pipe firmly in a pipe vise. Protect the pipe at the point of grip by inserting a rubber sheet or other material between the pipe and vise. 10 Pressure Testing The strength of a plastic weld develops as it cools. Allow ample time for the weld to cool prior to 100% pressure testing. AUTION: Air or compressed gas is not recommended and should not be used as a media for pressure testing of plastic piping systems

251 PIPE AND FITTING THREADS AMERIAN STANDARD TAPER PIPE THREAD, NPT (excerpt from ANSI B1.20.1) (NOTE: Special dies for threading plastic pipe are available). When cutting threads with power threading equipment, self opening die heads and a slight chamfer to lead the dies will speed production. Nominal Size Outside Diameter D Number of Threads Per Inch n Pitch of Thread p Normal Engagement By Hand L1 Normal Engagement By Hand L2 "Wrench Makeup Length For Internal Thread L3" Total Length: End of Pipe to Vanish Point L4 Pitch Diameter at Beginning of External Thread E0 Pitch Diameter at Beginning of Internal Thread E1 Height of Thread (Max.) h IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1/ / / / / / / / / / A tapered plug must be inserted in the end of the pipe to be threaded. This plus provides additional support and prevents distortion of the pipe in the threaded area. Distortion of the pipe during the threading operation will result in eccentric threads, non-uniform circumferential thread depth or gouging and tearing of the pipe wall. See the following Table for approximate plug O.D. dimensions. Reinforcing Plug Dimensions PIPE SIZE PLUG O.D.* 1/ / / / DO NOT THREAD SHEDULE 40 PIPE L 2 L 4 (Imperfect threads due to chamfer on die) *These dimensions are based on the median wall thickness and average outside diameter for the respective pipe sizes. Variations in wall thicknesses and O.D. dimensions may require alteration of the plug dimensions. L 3 L 1 Taper of thread 1 in 16 measured on diameter h p E 0 E 1 D 3. Use a die stock with a proper guide that is free of burrs or sharp edges, so the die will start and go on square to the pipe axis

252 4. 5. Push straight down on the handle, avoiding side pressure that might distort the sides of the threads. If power threading equipment is used, the dies should not be driven at high speeds or with heavy pressure. Apply an external lubricant liberally when cutting the threads. Advance the die to the point where the thread dimensions are equal to those listed in Table No. 1. Do not over thread. Periodically check the threads with a ring gauge to ensure that proper procedures are being followed. Thread dimensions are listed in Table 1 and the gauging tolerance is ± 1-1/2 turns. 7. Thread the fitting onto the pipe and tighten by hand. Using a strap wrench only, further tighten the connection an additional one or two threads past hand tightness. Avoid excessive torque as this may cause thread damage or fitting damage. PRESSURE TESTING Threaded piping systems can be pressure tested up to 100% of the hydrostatic pressure rating as soon as the last connection is made. AUTION: AIR OR OMPRESSED GAS IS NOT REOM- MENDED AND SHOULD NOT BE USED AS A MEDIA FOR PRESSURE TESTING OF PLASTI PIPING SYSTEMS. GENERAL UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION PROEDURES FOR PV AND PV SOLVENT WELDED PIPE SOPE The general installation procedures detailed here apply to Polyvinyl hloride (PV) and hlorinated Polyvinyl hloride (PV) pressure pipe that has solvent welded joints up through 8 in size. These procedures are applicable for all liquids that are conveyed at pressures up to the maximum hydrostatic pressure rating of the pipe or of any component in the piping system, whichever is lowest Brush threads clean of chips and ribbons. Then starting with the second full thread, and continuing over the thread length, wrap TFE (Teflon) thread tape in the direction of the threads. Overlap each wrap by one half of the width of the tape. FABO does not recommend the use of any thread lubricant/ sealant other than TFE (Teflon) tape. Fabco Technical Services should be consulted for installation guidance and recommendation on all sizes of pipe 10 and above and where the installer has had no experience in the installation of PV or PV piping. For additional information, refer to the ASTM D2774, Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping. INSPETION Before installation, all lengths of PV or PV pipe and fittings should be thoroughly inspected for cuts, scratches, gouges, buckling, kinking and any other imperfections (such as splits on I.D. or ends of pipe due to impact) which may have been imparted to the pipe during shipping, unloading, storing and stringing. Any pipe or precoupled fittings containing harmful or even questionable defects should be removed by cutting out the damaged section as a complete cylinder.

253 TRENHING The trench should be of adequate width to allow convenient installation of PV or PV pipe, at the same time being as narrow as possible. The following trench sizes have been used with success. However, actual sizes may vary with terrain and specific application. Minimum trench widths may be utilized by joining pipe outside of the trench and lowering it into the trench after adequate joint strength has been obtained. Trench widths will have to be wider where pipe is joined in the trench, or where thermal expansion and contraction is a factor. See section title Snaking of Pipe. PIPE SIZE TRENH WIDTH LIGHT TRAFFI GROUND OVER MINIMUM HEAVY TRAFFI GROUND OVER MINIMUM 3 & Under & The trench bottom should be continuous, relatively smooth and free of rocks. Where ledge rock, hardpan or boulders are encountered, it is advisable to pad the trench bottom using a minimum of four (4) inches of tamped earth or sand beneath the pipe as a cushion and for protection of the pipe from damage. Sufficient cover must be maintained to keep external stress levels below acceptable design stress. Reliability and safety of service may assume major importance in determining minimum cover. Local, provincial and national codes may also govern. Pipe intended for water service should be buried at least 12 below the maximum expected frost penetration. SIZE OF JOINING REW Field practice has shown that the size of the joining crew will depend upon a number of variables, such as, size and length of the pipe, the atmospheric temperature, construction conditions, construction time element, amount of pipe to be layed, construction workers experience in laying PV or PV pipe, etc. Although it is possible for one man to join the smaller sizes of pipe (2 and under) by himself, it is not necessarily practical to do so. Therefore, the crew sizes presented here are intended as a guide for those PV or PV pipe users who have not had a great deal of experience in the installation of such buried pipe: 1 MAN Size Pipe 1-1/4 and under. Size Pipe 1-1/2 and 2 maximum 20 lengths. 2 MEN 1-1/2 and 2 where lengths are over 20 or atmospheric temperature is over 90 F. 2-1/2 and 3 pipe in maximum lengths of MEN* 2-1/2 and 3 pipe where lengths are over 20 or atmospheric temperature is over 90 F. 4 through 8 size pipe. 4 MEN** 6 and 8 size pipe where atmospheric temperature is over 90 F. * Two men do the priming and solvent welding while the third man is positioned at the end of the pipe in order to assist in pushing it into its fully bottomed position in the fitting socket. **Two men do the priming and apply the cement to the pipe surface while a third man does the same to the fitting socket. The fourth man is positioned at the end of the pipe in order to assist in pushing it into its fully bottomed position in the fitting socket. NOTE: The need for an extra man when the temperature is over 90 F, is necessary in order to quickly complete the solvent cement application and joining process before rapid evaporation of the cement s solvent causes it to prematurely set. SOLVENT WELDING For joining recommendations, see the section titled Solvent Welding instructions for PV and PV Pressure Pipe Systems SNAKING OF PIPE After the PV or PV pipe has been solvent welded, it is advisable to snake the pipe according to the below recommendations beside the trench during its required drying time. BE ESPEIAL- LY AREFUL NOT TO APPLY ANY STRESS THAT WILL DISTURB THE UNDRIED JOINT. This snaking is necessary in order to allow for any anticipated thermal contraction that will take place in the newly joined pipeline. OFFSET LOOP LENGTH PIPE SNAKING PIPE 2 LOOP LENGTHS ENTERLINE OFFSET Loop Offset In Inches For ontraction Maximum Temperature Variation, F, Between Time of Solvent Welding and Final Use PIPE SIZE TRENH WIDTH LIGHT TRAFFI GROUND OVER MINIMUM HEAVY TRAFFI GROUND OVER MINIMUM 3 & Under & Snaking is particularly necessary on the lengths that have been solvent welded during the late afternoon of a hot summer s day, because their drying time will extend through the cool of the night when thermal contraction of the pipe could stress the joints to the

254 point of pull out. This snaking is also especially necessary with pipe that is layed in its trench (necessitating wider trenches than recommended) and if back-filled with cool earth before the joints are thoroughly dry. BENDING OF PLASTI PIPE Whenever a change of direction is required in a pipeline, it is best accomplished using straight lengths of pipe and factory-made fittings. Bending of pipe leaves residual stresses and consequently bending is not recommended as a normal practice, particularly if the line is intended to operate at or near maximum temperatures and/or pressure depending on the size of the pipe and the radius of the bend. Therefore, the pipe should be cut to lengths slightly greater than the total length of the bend and the tangents. A straight section of at least two pipe diameters should be left at either side of the bend to insure a round, low stress section with which to make joints. Highly crystalline thermoplastics such as PVDF should never be formed in this way due to the potential detrimental effect of the process on the molecular structure and properties of the material. 10 If field bending is required to meet special conditions the following techniques should be employed to give the best results Heating Media: The heating media may be hot air in a circulating oven operating at approximately 360 F. The heating media may also be radiant heat in which case the pipe must be rotated to ensure uniform heating over the entire pipe surface in the area of the bend or the pipe may be immersed in hot oil. An open flame should never be used. Heating times will range from approximately one to five minutes or until it becomes soft and pliable enough to bend, depending upon pipe size and type of heat source. To maintain the cross sectional area of the I.D. of the pipe in the area of the bend it must be supported during the bending operations. There are three suggested methods for supporting the pipe. a. The I.D. can be supported by filling with preheated sand and plugging both ends. b. A heated reinforcing spring can be placed inside the pipe after it has been heated to a soft, pliable condition. The spring should be made with 3/32 diameter wire and the O.D. of the spring should be slightly less than the nominal I.D. of the pipe to be bent. Springs can be custom made by any local spring manufacturer. c. When the pipe becomes soft and pliable it can be placed in a forming jig or form and bent as quickly as possible to prevent weakening or deforming of the pipe. The minimum radius to which a bend should be made, measured from the inner edge of the curve, should be 8 pipe diameters for 3/4 pipe size and below and 6 pipe diameters for larger pipe. The initial forming bend will have to be slightly greater to allow for spring back. The bend should be kept in the bent form until the pipe cools and becomes rigid enough to be handled without deforming. It should then be immediately immersed in water to complete the cooling process. The sand or spring should not be removed until final cooling is completed. When plastic pipe is heated and then bent, it will shrink with the degree of shrinkage The above discussion covers only the basics involved with bending plastic pipe. Experience and some trial-and-error will be required to develop an expertise in bending pipe. ontact FABO with further questions. LEANING Even though care should be exercised at all times to prevent the entry of dirt, water and other foreign material into the PV or PV pipe and fittings, it is advisable that the pipeline be thoroughly cleaned before working pressure is applied. TESTING See section titled Solvent Welding Instructions for PV and PV Pressure Pipe Systems. BAKFILLING Ideally, backfilling should only be done early in the morning during hot weather when the line is fully contracted and there is no chance of insufficiently dried joints being subject to contraction stresses. The pipe should be uniformly and continuously supported over its entire length on firm, stable material. Blocking should not be used to change pipe grade or to intermittently support pipe across excavated sections. Pipe is installed in a wide range of sub-soils. These soils should not only be stable but applied in such a manner so as to physically shield the pipe from damage. Attention should be given to local pipe laying experience which may indicate particular pipe bedding problems. Backfill materials free of rocks with a particle size of 1/2 or less should be used to surround the pipe with 6 to 8 of cover. It should be placed in layers. Each soil layer should be sufficiently compacted to uniformly develop lateral passive soil forces during the backfill operation. It may be advisable to have the pipe under pressure, 15 to 25 psi during the backfilling. Effects of ground freezing should be considered when pipe is installed at depths subject to frost penetration. Vibratory methods are preferred when compacting sand or gravels. Best results are obtained when the soils are in a nearly saturated

255 condition. Where water flooding is used, the initial backfill should be sufficient to insure complete coverage of the pipe. Additional material should not be added until the water flooded backfill is firm enough to walk on. are should be taken to avoid floating the pipe. Sand and gravel containing a significant proportion of fine-grained material, such as silt and clay, should be compacted by hand or, preferably by mechanical tamper. The remainder of the backfill should be placed and spread in approximately uniform layers in such a manner to fill the trench completely so that there will be no unfilled spaces under or about rocks or lumps of earth in the backfill. Large or sharp rocks, frozen clods and other debris greater than 3 in diameter should be removed. Rolling equipment or heavy tampers should only be used to consolidate the final backfill. Additional information on underground installation is given in ASTM D2321 Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe and ASTM D2774 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping. ONNETING PIPE SETIONS Sections of PV or PV pipe that have been backfilled or plowed in during the heat of the day should be sufficiently overlapped to allow for contraction and not joined up to one another or any stable connection or fitting until the morning following their night of cooling and thermal contraction. See the section Expansion and ontraction of Plastic Pipe for calculating anticipated contraction. PIPE LOATING The location of all PV and PV pipelines should be accurately and precisely recorded. onductive wire can be trenched or plowed in with the pipe as an aid for future locating purposes. BELOW GRADE VALVES, ANHORS OR OTHER ONNETIONS As a rule of thumb in designing and installing a PV or PV underground piping system, it is pointed out that pipe made from these materials is not designed to be used for any structural applications beyond withstanding normal soil loads and internal pressures up to its hydrostatic pressure rating. Anchors, valve boxes, etc. must be independently supported so as to not introduce additional bending or sheer stress on the pipe. ROADWAYS AND RAILROAD TRAKS It is recommended that plastic pipe be run within a metal or concrete casing when it is installed beneath surfaces that are subject to heavyweight or constant traffic; such as roadways, railroad tracks, etc. ONRETE ANHORS oncrete anchors can be poured around PV or PV pipe at direction changes. If the purpose for anchoring is to restrain axial movement of the pipe, this can be done by solvent welding split collars around the pipe O.D. to provide a shoulder against the concrete wall. Solvent welding surface between collar and pipe O.D. must dry 48 hours prior to pouring of concrete. RISERS Although PV or PV pipe has excellent weathering resistance, it should never be brought above grade under the following circumstances: 1. If it is expected to provide structural strength, such as supporting an above-grade metal valve. The metal valve should be installed with an independent support. 2. If it is subject to external damage. This could be remedied by sleeving the pipe with an independently and rigidly supported steel pipe. 3. If it is subject to high temperature environments; i.e., summer sun that could lower the pipe s pressure rating below an acceptable level. Such a situation might be remedied by insulating the PV or PV pipe

256 Engineering Data 10 Pressure Ratings of Fabco Products The pressure carrying capability of any pipe at a given temperature is a function of the material strength from which the pipe is made and the geometry of the pipe as defined by its diameter and wall thickness. The following expression, commonly known as the ISO equation, is used in thermoplastic pipe specifications to relate these factors: P = 2S / (Do/t 1) where: P = maximum pressure rating, psi S = maximum hydraulic design stress (max. working strength), psi Do = average outside pipe diameter, in. t = minimum wall thickness, in. The allowable design stress, which is the tensile stress in the hoop direction of the pipe, is derived for each material in accordance with ASTM D 2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials, at 73 F. The pressure ratings below were calculated from the basic Hydraulic Design Stress for each of the materials. Pipe and Fittings In order to determine the pressure rating for a product system, first find the plastic material and schedule of pipe and fittings in the heading of the Maximum Non-Shock Operating Pressure table below. Then, locate the selected joining method in the subheading of the table and go down the column to the value across from a particular pipe size, listed in the far left column. This will be the maximum non-shock operating pressure at 73 F for the defined product system. Maximum Non-Shock Operating Pressure (psi) at 73 F 1 Schedule 40 PV & PV Schedule 80 PV & PV Schedule 80 Polypropylene Schedule 80 PVDF Nom. Pipe Size Socket End Socket End Threaded End Thermo Seal Joint Threaded Thermo Seal Joint Threaded 1/ / / / / N.R N.R N.R. 140 N.R. 190 N.R N.R N.R N.R. 1. For more severe service, an additional correction factor may be required PV Tee, 90 ELL and 45 ELL rated at 1/2 of value shown. Pressure rating of 175 psi can be obtained by factory overwrapping with glass and polyester. onsult ustomer Service for delivery information. 3. Recommended for intermittent drainage pressure not exceeding 20 psi. N.R. Not Recommended. Valves, Unions, and Flanges The maximum pressure rating for valves, flanges, and unions, regardless of size, is 150 psi at 73 F. As with all other thermoplastic piping components, the maximum non-shock operating pressure is related to temperature. Above 100 F refer to the chart below. Maximum Non-Shock Operating Pressure (psi) vs. Temperature Temperature ( F) PV PV PP PVDF N.R N.R N.R N.R N.R. 60 N.R N.R. 50 N.R N.R. N.R. N.R N.R. N.R. N.R. 25 N.R. Not Recommended. Temperature Ratings of Fabco Products Since the strength of plastic pipe is sensitive to temperature, the identical test method is used to determine the material strength at elevated temperature levels. The correction factor for each temperature is the ratio of strength at that temperature level to the basic strength at 73 F. Because the hoop stress is directly proportional to the internal pressure, which created that pipe stress, the correction factors may be used for the temperature correction of pressure as well as stress. For pipe and fitting applications above 73 F, refer to the table below for the Temperature orrection Factors. To determine the maximum non-shock pressure rating at an elevated temperature, simply multiply the base pressure rating obtained from the table in the preceding column by the correction factor from the table below. The allowable pressure will be the same as the base pressure for all temperatures below 73 F.

257 Engineering Data Temperature orrection Factors Operating Factors Temperature ( F) PV PV PP PVDF N.R N.R N.R N.R * N.R N.R N.R N.R N.R. N.R. N.R N.R. N.R. N.R * Recommended for intermittent drainage pressure not exceeding 20 psi. N.R. Not Recommended. Pressure Rating of Fabco Products Fabco Products in Vacuum or ollapse Loading Situations Thermoplastic pipe is often used in applications where the pressure on the outside of the pipe exceeds the pressure inside. Suction or vacuum lines and buried pipe are examples of this type of service. As a matter of practical application, gauges indicate the pressure differential above or below atmospheric pressurehowever, scientists and engineers frequently express pressure on an absolute scale where zero equals a theoretically perfect vacuum and standard atmospheric pressure equals psia. Solvent cemented or thermo-sealed joints are particularly recommended for vacuum service. In PV, PV, PP, or PVDF vacuum systems, mechanical devices such as valves and transition joints at equipment will generally represent a greater intrusion problem than the thermoplastic piping system will. Experience indicates that PV vacuum systems can be evacuated to pressures as low as 5 microns with continuous pumping. However, when the system is shut off, the pressure will rise and stabilize around 10,000 microns or approximately 10 mm of Mercury at 73 F. The following chart lists the allowable collapse loading for plastic pipe at 73 F. It shows how much greater the external pressure may be than the internal pressure. (Thus, a pipe with 100 psi internal pressure can withstand 100 psi more external pressure than a pipe with zero psi internal pressure.) For temperatures other than 73 F, multiply the values in the chart by the correction factors listed in the temperature correction table on the preceding page. The chart also applies to a vacuum. The external pressure is generally atmospheric pressure, or 0.0 psig, while the internal pressure is normally identified as a vacuum or negative gauge pressure. However, this negative value will never exceed 14.7 psig. Therefore, if the allowable pressure listed in the chart (after temperature correction) is greater than the difference for internal-to-external pressure, the plastic system is viable. Pipe Size Sch. 40 PV Sch. 80 PV Sch. 80 PV Sch. 80 PP Sch. 80 PVDF 1/ / / / / Pressure Losses in a Piping System Piping alculations As a fluid flows through a piping system, it will experience a headloss depending on, among other factors, fluid velocity, pipe wall smoothness and internal pipe surface area. The Tables on pages 9 and 10 give Friction Loss and Velocity data for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 thermoplastic pipe based on the Williams and Hazen formula. H= x (100/) x (q /d ) Where: H = Friction Head Loss in Feet of Water/100 Feet of Pipe = Surface Roughness onstant (150 for all thermoplastic pipe) q = Fluid Flow (gallons/min.) d = Inside Diameter of Pipe Fittings and valves, due to their more complex configurations, contribute significant friction losses in a piping system. A common method of expressing the losses experienced in fittings is to relate them to pipe in terms of equivalent pipe length. This is the length of pipe required to give the same friction loss as a fitting of the same size. Tables are available for the tabulation of the equivalent

258 Engineering Data 10 pipe length in feet for the various sizes of a number of common fittings. By using this Table and the Friction Loss Tables, the total friction loss in a plastic piping system can be calculated for any fluid velocity. For example, suppose we wanted to determine the pressure loss across a 2 Schedule 40, 90 elbow, at 75 gpm. From the lower table we find the equivalent length of a 2 90 elbow to be 5.5 feet of pipe. From the Schedule 40 Pipe Table we find the friction loss to be 3.87 psi per 100 feet of pipe when the flow rate is 75 gpm. Therefore, the solution is as follows: 5.5 Feet/90 Elbow x 3.87 psi/100 Feet = 0.21 psi Pressure Drop/90 Elbow which is the pressure drop across a 2 Schedule 40 elbow. But, what if it were a 2 Schedule 80 elbow, and we wanted to know the friction head loss? The solution is similar, except we look for the friction head in the Schedule 80 Pipe Table and find it to be feet per 100 feet of pipe when the flow rate is 75 gpm. The solution follows: 5.5 Feet/90 Elbow x Feet/100 Feet = 0.68 Feet Friction Head/90 Elbow which is the friction head loss across a 2 Schedule 80 elbow. For a copy of the tables mentioned in this section, please contact customer service. Valve alculations As an aid to system design, liquid sizing constants (v values) are shown for valves where applicable. These values are defined as the flow rate through the valve required to produce a pressure drop of 1 psi. To determine the pressure drop for a given condition the following formula may be used: P=(Q 2 S.G.)/(V 2 ) Where: P = Pressure drop across the valve in psi Q = Flow through the valve in gpm S.G. = Specific gravity of the liquid (Water = 1.0) v = Flow coefficient See the solution of the following example problem. For v values for specific valves, contact customer service or consult the manufacturers catalog. EXAMPLE: Find the pressure drop across a 1 1/2 PV ball check valve with a water flow rate of 50 gpm. The v is 56. P=(50 2 x 1.0)/56 2 P=(50/56) 2 P=0.797 psi Hydraulic Shock Hydraulic shock is the term used to describe the momentary pressure rise in a piping system which results when the liquid is started or stopped quickly. This pressure rise is caused by the momentum of the fluid; therefore, the pressure rise increases with the velocity of the liquid, the length of the system from the fluid source, or with an increase in the speed with which it is started or stopped. Examples of situations where hydraulic shock can occur are valves which are opened or closed quickly or pumps which start with an empty discharge line. Hydraulic shock can even occur if a highspeed wall of liquid (as from a starting pump) hits a sudden change of direction in the piping, such as an elbow. The pressure rise created by the hydraulic shock effect is added to whatever fluid pressure exists in the piping system and, although only momentary, this shock load can be enough to burst pipe and break fittings or valves. Proper design when laying out a piping system will limit the possibility of hydraulic shock damage. The following suggestions will help in avoiding problems: 1. In a plastic piping system, a fluid velocity not exceeding 5 ft./ sec. will minimize hydraulic shock effects, even with quickly closing valves, such as solenoid valves. (Flow is normally expressed in GALLONS PER MINUTE GPM. To determine the fluid velocity in any segment of piping the following formula may be used: V=(0.4085xGPM)/Di 2 Where: v = fluid velocity in feet per second Di = inside diameter GPM = rate of flow in gallons per minute Flow apacity Tables are available for the fluid velocities resulting from specific flow rates in Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipes. The upper threshold rate of flow for any pipe may be determined by substituting 5 ft./sec. Fluid velocity in the above formula and solving for GPM. Upper Threshold Rate of Flow (GPM) = Di Using actuated valves, which have a specific closing time, will eliminate the possibility of someone inadvertently slamming a valve open or closed too quickly. With air-to-air and air-tospring actuators, it will probably be necessary to place a flow control valve in the air line to slow down the valve operation cycle, particularly on valve sizes greater than 1 1/2. If possible, when starting a pump, partially close the valve in the discharge line to minimize the volume of liquid that is rapidly accelerating through the system. Once the pump is up to speed and the line completely full, the valve may be opened.

259 Engineering Data 4. A check valve installed near a pump in the discharge line will keep the line full and help prevent excessive hydraulic shock during pump start-up. Before initial start-up the discharge line should be vented of all air. Air trapped in the piping will substantially reduce the capability of plastic pipe withstanding shock loading. Shock Surge Wave Providing all air is removed from an affected system, a formula based on theory may closely predict hydraulic shock effect. Where: p = maximum surge pressure, psi v = fluid velocity in feet per second. = surge wave constant for water at 73 F. *SG = specific gravity of liquid, *if SG is 1, then p = v EXAMPLE: A 2 PV Schedule 80 pipe carries a fluid with a specific gravity of 1.2 at a rate of 30 gpm and at a line pressure of 160 psi. What would the surge pressure be if a valve were suddenly closed? From table below: c = 24.2 v = 3.35 p = (3.35) (26.6) = 90 psi Total line pressure = = 250 psi Schedule 80 2 PV has a pressure rating of 400 psi at room temperature. Therefore, 2 Schedule 80 PV pipe is acceptable for this application. Surge Wave onstant() Pipe PV PV PP PVDF Sch. 40 Sch. 80 Sch. 40 Sch. 80 Sch. 80 Sch. 80 1/ / / / / / / AUTION: The removal of all air from the system in order for the surge wave analysis method to be valid was pointed out at the beginning of this segment. However, this can be easier said than done. Over reliance on this method of analysis is not encouraged. Our experience suggests that the best approach to assure a successful installation is for the design to focus on strategic placements of air vents and the maintenance of fluid velocity near or below the threshold limit of 5 ft./sec. Expansion and Thermal ontraction of Plastic Pipe alculating Dimensional hange All materials undergo dimensional change as a result of temperature variation above or below the installation temperature. The extent of expansion or contraction is dependent upon the coefficient of linear expansion for the piping material. These coefficients are listed below for the essential industrial plastic piping materials in the more conventional form of inches of dimensional change, per F of temperature change, per inch of length. They are also presented in a more convenient form to use. Namely, the units are inches of dimensional change, per 10 F temperature change, per 100 feet of pipe. Expansion oefficient Material (in/in/ Fx10-5 ) Y(in/10 F/100 ft.) PV PV PP PVDF The formula for calculating thermally induced dimensional change, utilizing the convenient coefficient (Y), is dependent upon the temperature change to which the system may be exposed between the installation temperature and the greater differential to maximum or minimum temperature as well as, the length of pipe run between directional changes or anchors points. Also, a handy chart is presented at the bottom of this column, which approximates the dimensional change based on temperature change vs. pipe length. L=Yx(T 1 -T 2 )/10 X L/100 L = Dimensional change due to thermal expansion or contraction(in) Y = Expansion coefficient (See table above) (in/10 /100 ft) (T 1 -T 2 ) = Temperature differential between the installation temperature and the maximum or minimum system temperature, whichever provides the greatest differential ( F). L = Length of pipe run between changes in direction (ft.)

260 Engineering Data EXAMPLE 1: How much expansion can be expected in a 200 foot straight run of 3 inch PV pipe that will be installed at 75 F when the piping system will be operated at a maximum of 120 F and a minimum of 40 F? L=(120-75)/10 X 200/100 = X 4.50 X 2.0=3.24 inches Temp Length of Pipe to losest Anchor Point (ft.) T( F ) 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 60' 70' 80' 90' 100' * Temperature change ( T) from installation to the greater of maximum or minimum limits. To determine the expansion or contraction for pipe of a material other than PV, multiply the change in length given for PV in the table above by for the change in PV, by for the change in PP, or by for the change in PVDF. alculating Stress If movement resulting from thermal changes is restricted by the piping support system or the equipment to which it is attached, the resultant forces may damage the attached equipment or the pipe itself. Therefore, pipes should always be anchored independently at those attachments. If the piping system is rigidly held or restricted at both ends when no compensation has been made for thermally induced growth or shrinkage of the pipe, the resultant stress can be calculated with the following formula. S t = E (T 1 -T 2 ) S t = Stress (psi) E = Modulus of Elasticity (psi) (See table below for specific values at various temperatures) = oefficient of Expansion (in/in/ F x 105) (see physical property chart on page 2 for values) (T 1 -T 2 ) = Temperature change ( F) between the installation temperature and the maximum or minimum system temperature, whichever provides the greatest differential. Modulus of Elasticity 73 F 90 F 100 F 140 F 180 F 210 F 250 F PV N/A N/A N/A PV N/A PP N/A N/A PVDF N/A - Not Applicable The magnitude of the resulting longitudinal force can be determined by multiplying the thermally induced stress by the cross sectional area of the plastic pipe. F = S t x A F = FORE (lbs) S t = STRESS (psi) A = ROSS SETIONAL AREA (in 2 ) EXAMPLE 2: What would be the amount of force developed in 2 Schedule 80 PV pipe with the pipe rigidly held and restricted at both ends? Assume the temperature extremes are from 70 F to 100 F. S t = E (T 1 T 2 ) S t = E (100 70) S t = (3.60 x 105) x (3.0 x 10-5) (30) S t = 324 psi The Outside and Inside Diameters of the pipe are used for calculating the ross Sectional Area (A) as follows: (See the Pipe Reference Table for the pipe diameters and cross sectional area for specific sizes of schedule 80 Pipes.) A = π/4 (OD 2 ID 2 ) = /4 ( ) = in. 2 The force exerted by the 2 pipe, which has been restrained, is simply the compressive stress multiplied over the cross sectional area of that pipe. F = S t x A F = 324 psi x in.2 F = 504 lbs. Managing Expansion/ontraction in System Design Stresses and forces which result from thermal expansion and contraction can be reduced or eliminated by providing for flexibility in the piping system through frequent changes in direction or introduction of loops as graphically depicted on this page

261 Normally, piping systems are designed with sufficient directional changes, which provide inherent flexibility, to compensate for expansion and contraction. To determine if adequate flexibility exists in leg (R) (see Fig. 1) to accommodate the expected expansion and contraction in the adjacent leg(l) use the following formula: R = D L SINGLE OFFSET FORMULA Engineering Data Where: R = Length of opposite leg to be flexed (ft.) D = Actual outside diameter of pipe (in.) L = Dimensional change in adjacent leg due to thermal expansion or contraction (in.) Keep in mind the fact that both pipe legs will expand and contract. Therefore, the shortest leg must be selected for the adequacy test when analyzing inherent flexibility in naturally occurring offsets. EXAMPLE 3: What would the minimum length of a right angle leg need to be in order to compensate for the expansion if it were located at the unanchored end of the 200 ft. run of pipe in Example 1 from the previous page? R = x 3.24 = 9.69 ft. Flexibility must be designed into a piping system, through the introduction of flexural offsets, in the following situations: 1. Where straight runs of pipe are long. 2. Where the ends of a straight run are restricted from movement. 3. Where the system is restrained at branches and/or turns. Several examples of methods for providing flexibility in these situations are graphically presented below. In each case, rigid supports or restraints should not be placed on a flexible leg of an expansion loop, offset or bend. An expansion loop (which is fabricated with 90 elbows and straight pipe as depicted in Fig. 2) is simply a double offset designed into an otherwise straight run of pipe. The length for each of the two loop legs (R ), required to accommodate the expected expansion and contraction in the pipe run (L), may be determined by modification of the SINGLE OFFSET FORMULA to produce a LOOP FORMULA, as shown below: R = D L LOOP FORMULA EXAMPLE 4: How long should the expansion loop legs be in order to compensate for the expansion in Example 1 from the previous page? R = x 3.24 = 6.87 ft. Minimum old Bending Radius The formulae above for Single Offset and Loop bends of pipe, which are designed to accommodate expansion or contraction in the pipe, are derived from the fundamental equation for a cantilevered beam in this case a pipe fixed at one end. A formula can be derived from the same equation for calculating the minimum cold bending radius for any thermoplastic pipe diameter. Minimum old Bend Radius R B = D O ( E/S B 0.5) Where: R B = Minimum old Bend Radius (in.) DO = Outside Pipe Diameter (in.) E * = Modulus of Maximum Operating Temperature (psi) S B * = Maximum Allowable Bending Maximum Operating Temperature (psi) *The three formulae on this page provide for the maximum bend in pipe while the pipe operates at maximum long-term internal pressure, creating maximum allowable hydrostatic design stress (tensile stress in the hoop direction). Accordingly, the maximum allowable bending stress will be one half the basic hydraulic design stress at 73 F with correction to the maximum operating temperature. The modulus of elasticity, corrected for temperature may be found in the table in the second column of the preceding page

262 Engineering Data EXAMPLE 5: What would be the minimum cold radius bend, which the installer could place at the anchored end of the 200 ft. straight run of pipe in Examples 1 and 3, when the maximum operating temperature is 100 F instead of 140 F? RB = ( x 360,000/ 1/2 x 2000 x ) =1,420.8 in. or ft PIPE SUPPORT SPAING orrect supporting of a piping system is essential to prevent excessive bending stress and to limit pipe sag to an acceptable amount. Horizontal pipe should be supported on uniform centers, which are determined for pipe size, schedule, temperature, loading and material. Point support must not be used for thermoplastic piping and, in general, the wider the bearing surface of the support the better. Supports should not be clamped in such a way that will restrain the axial movement of pipe that will normally occur due to thermal expansion and contraction. oncentrated loads in a piping system, such as valves must be separately supported. The graphs on this page give recommended support spacing for hemtrol thermoplastic piping materials at various temperatures. The data is based on fluids with a specific gravity of 1.0 and permits a sag of less than 0.1 between supports. For heavier fluids, the support spacing from the graphs should be multiplied by the correct factor in the table below. Specific Gravity orrection Factor PV Schedule 80 Temperature F /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 / 41 1 / / Support Spacing (Feet) PV Schedule Temperature F Polypropylene Schedule Temperature F /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 / 4 1 / / Support Spacing (Feet) 60 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 / 4 1 / Support Spacing (Feet) PV Schedule PVDF Schedule Temperature F /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 / 41 1 / / Support Spacing (Feet) Temperature F /2 3/4 1 11/ Support Spacing (Feet) 10 The above data is for uninsulated lines. For insulated lines, reduce spans to 70% of graph values. For spans of less than 2 feet, continuous support should be used

263 PLASTI PIPING STANDARDS Many commercial, industrial and governmental standards or specifications are available to assist the design engineer in specifying plastic piping systems. Standards most frequently referred to and most commonly called out in plastic piping specifications are ASTM Standards. These standards also often form the basis of other standards in existence. Below is a list and description of those standards most typically applied to industrial plastic piping. ASTM Standard D-1784 (American Society for Testing and Materials) This standard covers PV and PV compounds used in the manufacture of plastic pipe, valves, and fittings. It provides a means for selecting and identifying compounds on the bases of a number of physical and chemical criteria. onformance to a particular material classification in this standard requires meeting a number of minimum physical and chemical properties. ASTM Standards D-1785 and F-441 These standards cover the specification and quality of Schedule 40, 80 and 120 PV (D-1785) and PV (F-441) pressure pipe. Outlined in these standards are dimensional specifications, burst, sustained and maximum operating pressure requirements and test procedures for determining pipe quality with respect to workmanship and materials. ASTM Standards D-2464 and F-437 These standards cover PV (D-2464) and PV (F-437) Schedule 80 threaded pressure fittings. Thread dimensional specifications, wall thickness, burst, material quality, and identification requirements are specified. ASTM Standard D-2466 These standards cover Schedule 40 PV (D-2466) threaded and socket pressure fittings. Stipulated in the standard are thread and socket specifications, by lengths, wall thickness, burst material, quality and identification requirements. ANSI B (was B2.1) (American National Standards Institute) This specification details the dimensions and tolerance for tapered pipe threads. This standard is referenced in the ASTM standard for threaded fittings mentioned above. ANSI B16.5 This specification sets forth standards for bolt holes, bolt circle, and overall dimensions for steel 150# flanges. NSF Standard 14 (National Sanitation Foundation) This standard provides specifications for toxilogical and organoleptic levels to determine the suitability of plastic piping for potable water use. It additionally requires adherence to appropriate ASTM Standards and specifies minimum quality control programs. To meet this standard, a manufacturer must allow third party certification by NSF of the requirements of this standard. Technical assistance regarding standards, applications, product performance, design, and installation tips are available from FABO. FABO is also able to provide: Material and Performance ertification Letters Returned Product Evaluation Product, Installation, and Design Seminars Technical Reports on a variety of Subjects ASTM Standards D-2467 and F-439 Standards D-2467 (PV) and F-439 (PV) cover the specification of Schedule 80 socket type pressure fittings, including dimensions and physical requirements. ASTM Standard D-4101 (Formerly D-2146) This standard covers the specifications for propylene (PP) plastic injection and extrusion materials. ASTM Standard D-3222 This standard covers the specifications for PVDF fluoroplastic molding and extrusions materials. ASTM Standard D-2657 This standard covers the procedures for heat-fusion bonding of polyolefin materials. ASTM Standards D-2564 and F-493 These standards set forth requirements for PV (D-2564) and PV (F-493) Solvent ement including a resin material designation and resin content quality standard. Also included in these standards are test procedures for measuring the cement quality by means of burst and lap shear tests. ASTM Standard F-656 This standard covers the requirements for primers to be used for PV solvent cemented joints of pipe and fittings. ASTM Standard D-2855 This standard describes the procedure for making joints with PV pipe and fittings by means of solvent cementing. The following are standards of other groups that are commonly encountered in industrial thermoplastic piping design

264 HEMIAL RESISTANE GUIDE FOR VALVES & FITTINGS This chemical resistance guide has been compiled to assist the piping system designer in selecting chemical resistant materials. The information given is intended as a guide only. Many conditions can affect the material choices. areful consideration must be given to temperature, pressure and chemical concentrations before a final material can be selected. Thermoplastics and elastomers physical characteristics are more sensitive to temperature than metals. For this reason, a rating chart has been developed for each. MATERIAL RATING FOR THERMOPLASTIS & ELASTOMERS Temp. in F = A rating, maximum temperature which material is recommended, resistant under normal conditions. B to Temp. in F = onditional resistance, consult factory. = Not recommended. Blank = No data available. MATERIAL RATINGS FOR METALS A = Recommended, resistant under normal conditions. B = onditional, consult factory. = Not recommended. Blank = No data available. Temperature maximums for thermoplastics, elastomers and metals should always fall within published temp/pressure ratings for individual valves. THERMOPLASTIS ARE NOT REOMMENDED FOR OMPRESSED AIR OR GAS SERVIE. This guide considers the resistance of the total valve assembly as well as the resistance of individual trim and fitting materials. The rating assigned to the valve body plus trim combinations is always that of the least resistant part. In the cases where the valve body is the least resistant, there may be conditions under which the rate of corrosion is slow enough and the mass of the body large enough to be usable for a period of time. Such use should always be determined by test before installation of the component in a piping system. In the selection of a butterfly valve for use with a particular chemical, the liner, disc, and stem must be resistant. All three materials should carry a rating of A. The body of a properly functioning butterfly valve is isolated from the chemicals being handled and need not carry the same rating. 10 ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene) lass conforming to ASTM D1788 is a time proven material. The smooth inner surface and superior resistance to deposit formation makes ABS drain, waste, and vent material ideal for residential and commercial sanitary systems. The residential DWV system can be exposed in service to a wide temperature span. ABS-DWV has proven satisfactory for use from -40 F to 180 F These temperature variations can occur due to ambient temperature or the discharge of hot liquids into the system. ABS-DWV is very resistant to a wide variety of materials ranging from sewage to commercial household chemical formulations. ABS-DWV is joined by solvent cementing or threading and can easily be connected to steel, copper, or cast iron through the use of transition fittings. PV (hlorinated Polyvinyl hloride) lass B, formerly designated Type IV, Grade 1 conforming to ASTM D-1784 has physical properties at 73 F similar to those of PV, and its chemical resistance is similar to or generally better than that of PV. PV, with a design stress of 2000 psi and maximum service temperature of 210 F, has proven to be an excellent material for hot corrosive liquids, hot and cold water distribution, and similar applications above the temperature range of PV. PV is joined by solvent cementing, threading or flanging P.P. (Polypropylene) (PP) Type 1 Polypropylene is a polyolefin which is lightweight and generally high in chemical resistance. Although Type 1 polypropylene conforming to ASTM D-2146 is slightly lower in physical properties compared to PV, it is chemically resistant to organic solvents as well as acids and alkalies. Generally, polypropylene should not be used in contact with strong oxidizing acids, chlorinated hydrocarbons, and aromatics. With a design stress of 1000 psi at 73 F, polypropylene has gained wide acceptance where its resistance to sulfurbearing compounds is particularly useful in salt water disposal lines, crude oil piping, and low pressure gas gathering systems. Polypropylene has also proved to be an excellent material for laboratory and industrial drainage where mixtures of acids, bases, and solvents are involved. Polypropylene is joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging. At 180 F., or when threaded, P.P. should be used for drainage only at a pressure not exceeding 20 psi. PV (Polyvinyl hloride) lass B, formerly designated Type 1, Grade 1. PV is the most frequently specified of all thermoplastic materials. It has been used successfully for over 30 years in such areas as chemical processing, industrial plating, chilled water distribution, deionized water lines, chemical drainage, and irrigation systems. PV is characterized by high physical properties and resistance to corrosion and chemical attack by acids, alkalies, salt solutions, and many other chemicals. It is attacked, however, by polar solvents such as ketones, some chlorinated hydrocarbons and aromatics. The maximum service temperature of PV is 140 F. With a design stress of 2000 psi, PV has the highest long term hydrostatic strength at 73 F of any of the major thermoplastics being used for piping systems. PV is joined by solvent cementing, threading, or flanging.

265 HEMIAL RESISTANE GUIDE FOR VALVES & FITTINGS PVDF (KYNAR ) (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) is a strong, tough and abrasion resistant fluorocarbon material. It resists distortion and retains most of its strength to 280 F. It is chemically resistant to most acids, bases, and organic solvents and is ideally suited for handling wet or dry chlorine, bromine and other halogens. No other solid thermoplastic piping components can approach the combination of strength, chemical resistance and working temperatures of PVDF. PVDF is joined by the thermo-seal fusion process, threading or flanging. EPDM EPDM is a terpolymer elastomer made from ethylenepropylene diene monomer. EPDM has good abrasion and tear resistance and offers excellent chemical resistance to a variety of acids and alkalines. It is susceptible to attack by oils and is not recommended for applications involving petroleum oils, strong acids, or strong alkalines. It has exceptionally good weather aging and ozone resistance. It is fairly good with ketones and alcohols and has an excellent temperature range from -20 F to 250 F. HYPALON (SM) Hypalon has very good resistance to oxidation, ozone, and good flame resistance. It is similar to neoprene except with improved acid resistance where it will resist such oxidizing acids as nitric, hydrofluoric, and sulfuric acid. Abrasion resistance of Hypalon is excellent, about the equivalent of the nitriles. Oil and solvent resistance is somewhat between that of neoprene and nitrile Salts have little if any effect on Hypalon. Hypalon is not recommended for exposure to concentrated oxidizing acids, esters, ketones, chlorinated, aromatic and nitro hydrocarbons. Hypalon has a normal temperature range of -20 F to 200 F. NEOPRENE (R) Neoprenes were one of the first synthetic rubbers developed. Neoprene is an all purpose polymer with many desirable characteristics and features high resiliency with low compression set, flame resistance, and is animal and vegetable oil resistant. Neoprene is principally recommended for food and beverage service. Generally, neoprene is not affected by moderate chemicals, fats, greases, and many oils and solvents. Neoprene is attacked by strong oxidizing acids, most chlorinated solvents, esters, ketones, aromatic hydrocarbons, and hydraulic fluids. Neoprene has a moderate temperature range of -20 F to 160 F. NITRILE (NBR) (BUNA-N) is a general purpose oil resistant polymer known as nitrile rubber. Nitrile is a copolymer of butadiene and acrylonitrile and has a moderate temperature range of -20 F to 180 F. Nitrile has good solvent, oil, water, and hydraulic fluid resistance. It displays good compression set, abrasion resistance and tensile strength. Nitrile should not be used in highly polar solvents such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone, nor should it be used in chlorinated hydrocarbons, ozone or nitro hydrocarbons. FLUOROARBON (FKM) (VITON ) (FLUOREL ) Fluorocarbon elastomers are inherently compatible with a broad spectrum of chemicals. Because of this extensive chemical compatibility, which spans considerable concentration and temperature ranges, fluorocarbon elastomers have gained wide acceptance as a material of construction for butterfly valve O-rings and seats. Fluorocarbon elastomers can be used in most applications involving mineral acids, salt solutions, chlorinated hydrocarbons, and petroleum oils. They are particularly good in hydrocarbon service. Fluorocarbon elastomers have one of the broadest temperature ranges of any of the elastomers, -20 F to 300 F, however, are not suitable for steam service. TEFLON (PTFE) Polytetrafluoroethylene has outstanding resistance to chemical attack by most chemicals and solvents. PTFE has a temperature rating of -20 F to 400 F in valve applications. PTFE, a self lubricating compound, is used as a seat material in ball valves. VITON is a registered trademark of the DuPont ompany TEFLON is a registered trademark of the DuPont ompany HYPALON is a registered trademark of the DuPont ompany KYNAR is a registered trademark of the Pennwalt ompany FLUOREL is a registered trademark of the 3M ompany

266 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Acetaldehyde H3HO onc B B B A B B A A A A A Acetamide H3ONH B A A A A A A A A A A A A Acetic Acid H3OOH 25% A A A A A A Acetic Acid H3OOH 60% A A A A A A Acetic Acid H3OOH 85% A A A A A A Acetic Acid H3OOH Glacial Acetic Anhydride (H3O)2O A B A A A B 70 B B B B B A Acetone H3OH B 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Acetophenone 6H5OH Acetyl hloride H3OI A A A A A A A A A A Gas Acetylene H H A A A A A A A A A A A A A 100% Acetylnitrile A A A Acrylic Acid H2:HOOH 97% Acrylonitrile H2:HN B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Adipic Acid OOH(H2)4OOH Sat'd B A B Allyl Alcohol H2=HH2OH 96% B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Allyl hloride H2HH2I Aluminum Acetate Al(2H4O2)3 Sat'd B 70 A A B Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate (Alum) AINH4(SO4)212H2O Sat'd A B B B B B B A A A Aluminum hloride Aqueous AII3 Sat'd A A A A Aluminum Fluoride Anhydrous AIF3 Sat'd B B A Aluminum Hydroxide AIO3 3H2O Sat'd B B B B A A A B Aluminum Nitrate Al(NO3)3 9H2O Sat'd A A A Aluminum Oxychloride Aluminum Potassium Sulfate (Alum) AIK(SO4)2 12H2O Sat'd A B B B B B B A A A Aluminum Sulfate (Alum) Al2(SO4)3 Sat'd B A Ammonia Anhydrous NH A A A A A A A Ammonia Gas NH3 100% B B B A A A A A A A Ammonia Liquid NH3 100% B A A A A A A A A Ammonium Acetate NH4(2H3O2) Sat'd B B Ammonium Bifluoride NH4HF2 Sat'd Ammonium Bisulfide (NH4)HS Ammonium arbonate H2O3 2H3N Sat'd B 212 B 70 B 70 B 200 B B B B A 140 B B 200 B B B B B A A

267 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA Ammonium hloride NH4I Ammonium Dichromate (NH4)2r2O7 Ammonium Fluoride NH4F Ammonium Flouride NH4F Ammonium Hydroxide NH4OH Ammonium Nitrate NH4NO3 Ammonium Persulphate (NH4)2S2O8 Ammonium Phosphate (Monobasic) NH3H3PO4 Ammonium Sulfate (NH4)2SO4 Ammonium Sulfide (NH4)2S Ammonium Thiocyanate NH4SN Amyl Acetate H3OO5H11 Amyl Alcohol 5H11OH n-amyl hloride 5H11I ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) Sat'd B B B B B % % % B 70 SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON B B A A A B A Sat'd A A A A B A A A All B B B B A A A A B A B B B B B B B A B A Dilute A B B B 50-60% B A A A B A B A B B B B B B B A B A A A A A A A B A A A A A B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Aniline 6H5NH B B B B A A A A B A Aniline hlorohydrate A Aniline Hydrochloride 6H5NH2 HI Sat'd A Anthraquinone 14H8O ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Anthraqunone Sulfonic Acid 14H7O2 SO3H 3H2O Antimony Trichloride Sbl Sat'd A A Aqua Regia (Nitrohydrochloric Acid) IHHNO B B B B Argon Ar Dry A A A A A A A A A Arsenic Acid H3AsO4 1/2H2O Aryl Sulfonic Acid 6H5SO3H 80% B A B A A A Asphalt B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A Barium arbonate BaO3 Sat'd A A A A B B B B B A A A A A Barium hloride Bal2 2H2O Sat'd A A A A A B B B B B A A A Barium Hydroxide Ba(OH)2 Sat'd B B B A A A A A A Barium Nitrate Ba(NO3)2 Sat'd A A A A A A Barium Sulfate BaSO4 Sat'd B B B B B B A B A A A A A Barium Sulfide BaS Sat'd B B B A A A A A Beer A A A A A A A A A A A

268 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Beet Sugar Liquors Benzaldehyde 6H5HO A A B B B A A A A % A A A A A B A A A A B A 140 Benzene 6H6 Benzene Sulfonic Acid 6H5SO3H Benzoic Acid 6H- 5OOH 10% All 73 Benzyl Alcohol 6H- 5H2OH Bismuth arbonate (BiO)2O B to B to 140 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B A A A A A A Black Liquor Sat'd B B B B B A B A B Bleach 5% Active l B A B A A A Bleach 12% Active l B A B A A A Blood Borax Na2B4O7 10H2O Sat'd B B B A A A A A 200 A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A A Boric Acid H3BO3 Sat'd B B B B B B A B A A A Brake Fluid B B B A B A A A A A Brine Sat'd A A A B B A B A A A Bromic Acid HBrO Bromine Br2 Liquid A Bromine Br2 Vapor A A A Bromine Water old Sat'd Bromotoluene 7H7Br Bromotoluene 6H- 5H2B2 175 Butadiene H2:HH:H2 50% B to A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Butane 4H10 50% 73 Butyl Acetate H3OOH(H3) (2H5) Butyl Alcohol H3(H2)2H2OH A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B A A A A A A B to Butyl ellosolve 73 HOH2H2O4H n-butyl hloride 4H9I Butylene () Liquid H3H:HH Butyl Phenol 4H- 96H4OH B to B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A Butyl Phthalate Butyl Stearate H3(H2)16O2 (H2)3H A A A A B B B A A A A Butynediol HOH2:H2OH B to 70

269 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Butyric Acid H3H- 73 2H2OOH A A A A B A A A A admium yanide d(n) alcium Bisulfide a(hs)2 6H2O A A alcium Bisulfite a(hso3) B A A A alcium arbonate ao A B B B B A A A A A A alcium hlorate a(io3)2 2H2O B B B B B B B B B B A A A alcium hloride al B B B B B A A B A B A A B A alcium Hydroxide 70 a(oh) A A A A A A alcium Hypochlorite 30% 70 a(oi) B B B B B alcium Nitrate a(no3) B B B B B B B B A A A ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY alcium Oxide ao alcium Sulfate aso A A B A A A A A B B B A A B A A A A A A A A A amphor 10H16O ane Sugar 73 12H22O aprylic Acid H3(H2)6OOH arbitol 73 arbon Dioxide O Dry 100% B B B B B B B B A A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A B B B B B B B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A arbon Dioxide O2 Wet A A A A A A B B B B B A A A A A A A arbon Disulfide S B to B B B B A A A A A A A A A arbon Monoxide O Gas A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A arbon Tetrachloride I B A A A A A A A A A A A arbonic Acid H2O3 Sat'd B B B B B A A A A A B astor Oil A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A austic Potash KOH 50% B A A A A A austic Soda NaOH (Sodium Hydroxide) Up to 40% B B B B B B B A A A A A ellosolve 4H10O2 73 ellosolve Acetate H3OOH2H2O 2H5 hloral Hydrate I3H(OH)2 All A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B A B to 70 hloramine NH2I Dilute B B B B B B B hloric Acid 10% HIO3 7H2O B A hloric Acid 20% HIO3 7H2O A hlorine Gas (Dry) (Moisture ontent) 0-20 PPM 73 Note: * Ratings are for body material only B A* A* B B B A A A A

270 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA hlorine Gas (Moisture ontent) hlorine Gas (Moisture ontent) ONENTRATION PPM 50+ PPM ABS PV PP PV hlorine Liquid hlorinated Water 10 ppm 73 hlorinated Water Sat'd 73 hloroacetic Acid H2IOOH hloroacetyl hloride IH2OI 50% PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE B to 70 B to 70 B to FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL A* A* A A A A B B B B B B A A A A A A B A B A B B 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY hlorobenzene 6H5I Dry 73 hlorobenzyl hloride I6H4H2I hloroform HI3 Dry A A A A B A A A A A A A A 70 A A A A A A A A A A hloropicrin I3NO2 hlorosulfonic Acid ISO2OH hromic Acid H2rO4 10% hromic Acid H2rO4 30% hromic Acid H2rO4 40% hromic Acid H2rO4 50% hromium Potassium Sulfate rk(so4)2 12H2O B B B B A A B to 212 B to 212 Ato 70 B to 70 B to 70 B to 70 Ato 125 Ato 125 B to 212 B B A B B A A A B itric Acid 6H8O7 Sat'd B A A A A A ocunut Oil B to B B B B B B A A B offee oke Oven Gas 73 opper Acetate u(2h3o2)2 H2O opper arbonate uo3 Sat'd Sat'd B to opper hloride ui2 Sat'd opper yanide u(n) opper Fluoride uf2 2H2O opper Nitrate u(no3)2 3H2O opper Sulfate uso4 5H2O 2% 30% Sat'd B to 70 B to A A A A A A A A A A B B B B A A A A A A A A B B A A B A B A A A B A A B A A B A A B B A A A A A A A orn Oil A B B B B B B B B B A A A A B orn Syrup ottonseed Oil reosote A B B B B B B B B A A A A B B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A

271 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY resol H36H4OH 90% B to B B resylic Acid 7H8O 50% A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A roton Aldehyde H3H:HHO rude Oil B A A A A B umene 6H5H(H3) B B B B A upic Fluoride uf upric Sulfate uso4 5H2O Sat'd uprous hloride ui Sat'd yclohexane 6H A A A A B B A B A A A A A A A yclohexanol 6H11OH A A A A A A A yclohexanone 73 6H10O B B B B B B B B B A A B A Decahydronaphthalene 10H Detergents (Heavy Duty) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Dextrin (Starch Gum) Sat'd A A A A A B B B A A Dextrose 6H12O6 Diacetone Alcohol H- 3OH2 (H3)2OH Dibutoxyethyl Phthalate 20H30O n-dibutyl Ether 4H9O4H A A A A A 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B to A A A A A A A A A A Dibutyl Phthalate 6H4(OO4H9) A A A A A A A A A Dibutyl Sebacate 4H9OO(H2)8 OO4H Dichlorobenzene 6H4l A A A A A Dichloroethylene 2H4l B B B A Diesel Fuels 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Diethylamine A A A A A A B 4H10NH 200 Diethyl ellosolve A A A A A 6H14O Diethyl Ether 4H10O Diglycolic Acid Sat'd O(H2OOH) Dimethylamine 75 A A (H3)2NH Dimethyl Formamide B B B B B B B A A A HON(H3) Dimethylhydrazine (H3)2NNH2 Dinonyl Phthalate 6H4(OO9H19)2 Dioctyl Phthalate 6H4(OO8H17)2 75 Note: * Ratings are for body material only B to 10 B to A A A A

272 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Dioxane O:(H2)4:O A A A A A A A A A A Diphenyl Oxide Sat'd (6H5)2O A A A A A A Disodium Phosphate Na2HPO B B B B B B A A B Dow Therm A 12H10 12H10O 212 A A A A B A A A A A A A A A ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Ether 4H10O 73 A A A A B B B A A A A A A A A 125 Ethyl Acetate H- 70 A A B A A A A A A A A B A 3OO2H Ethyl Acetoacetate H- 73 3OH2OO2H Ethyl Acrylate A A A A A A A A A A A A A H2:HOO2H5 350 Ethyl Alcohol (Ethanol) 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 2H5OH Ethyl Benzene 70 B B B B B B A A A A 6H52H Ethyl hloride 2H5I Dry 73 Ethyl hloroacetate H2IO22H5 Ethylene Bromide BrH2H2Br Ethylene hloride IH2H2I Ethylene hlorohydrin IH2H2OH Ethylene Diamine NH2H2H2NH2 Ethylene Dichloride 2H4I2 Ethylene Glycol H2OHH2OH Dry Dry Dry B to B to B to 70 A A B A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A 70 A A A A A A A A B A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Ethylene Oxide H2H2O 400 A A B A A A A A B A Ethyl Ether (2H5)2O Ethyl Formate HOO2H5 2-Ethylhexanol H3(H2)3H2H5 H2OH A A A A A A A A Ethyl Mercaptan 75 A A A A A 2H5SH Ethyl Oxalate (OO2H5)2 140 Fatty Acids R-OOH 73 Ferric hloride (Aqueous) FeI3 Sat'd Ferric Hydroxide Sat'd Fe(OH) Ferric Nitrate Sat'd Fe(NO3)3 9H2O Ferric Sulfate Fe2(SO4) Ferrous hloride FeI2 Sat'd Ferrous Hydroxide Sat'd 73 Fe(OH) Ferrous Nitrate 73 Fe(NO3) A A A A A A A B A A A A B A A A B A A A A A to

273 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Ferrous Sulfate FeSO B B A A A A A A Fish Oil A A A B A A A A A A A A A Flue Gas A A A A A A A A A A A A Fluoboric Acid HBF B B A A A Fluorine Gas (Dry) F2 100% B B A A A A A A Fluorine Gas (Wet) F A A A A Fluosilicic Acid H2SiF6 50% B B B B B A A A Formaldehyde HHO Dilute A A B B A A A A A A Formaldehyde HHO 35% A A B B A A A A A A Formaldehyde HHO 37% A A B B A A A A A A Formaldehyde HHO 50% B B B B B A A A A A Formic Acid HOOH B B A A A A A A Formic Acid Anhydrous HOOH A A A Freon 11 I3F 100% A A A A A B B B B A A A A A Freon 12 I2F2 100% A A A A A B B B B A A A A Freon 21 HI2F 100% A A A A A B B B B A A A A Freon 22 HIF2 100% A A A A A B B B B A A A A Freon 113 2I3F3 100% A A A A A B B B B A A A A Freon 114 2I2F4 100% A A A A A B B B B A A A A Fructose 6H12O A A A A A A A A Furfural 4H3OHO 75 Gallic Acid 6H2(OH)3O2H A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B A A A A A A Gasoline, Leaded A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Gasoline, Unleaded A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Gasohol A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Gasoline, Sour B B A A A A B A A A A Gelatin Glauber's Salt 70 Na2SO4 10H2O Glucose 6H12O6 H2O B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Glue A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Glycerin 3H5(OH) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Glycol OHH2H2OH A A A A A A A A A A A A

274 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Glycol Amine A A A A A A Glycolic Acid OHH- Sat'd OOH B B A A B Glyoxal HOHO 70 B B B A A A B ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Grape Sugar 6H12O Grease A A A A A A A A A A Green Liquor A A A A A A A A Gypsum aso4 2H2O Slurry A A A B B A A B A A A A A A A A Heptane 7H A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A n-hexane 6H Hexanol H3(H2)4H2OH Hydraulic Oil (Petroleum) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B to A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A A Hydrazine H2NNH2 Hydrobromic Acid HBr 20% 73 Hydrobromic Acid HBr 50% A A A B to 70 B to Hydrochloric Acid HI 35% B B Hydrochloric Acid HI 37% B B Hydrocyanic Acid HN 10% A B A A A Hydrofluoric Acid HF Dilute B A A Hydrofluoric Acid HF 30% B A A Hydrofluoric Acid HF 40% B B A Hydrofluoric Acid HF 50% Hydrofluosilicic Acid H2SiF6 50% B B A B B B B B A A Hydrogen H2 Gas A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Hydrogen yanide 70 HN A Hydrogen Fluoride 73 Anhydrous HF A A A A Hydrogen Peroxide 50% H2O B A A A A A Hydrogen Peroxide 90% 73 H2O B A A A A B B Hydrogen Phosphide PH Hydrogen Sulfide H2S Dry B B B B A B A A A Hydrogen Sulfide H2S Wet A A B B Hydrogen Sulfite H2SO A A A Hydroquinone 6H4(OH)2 Sat'd A A A A

275 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Hydroxylamine sulfate (NH2OH)2 H2SO Hypochlorous Acid HOI 10% Inks A A A A A A Iodine I2 10% B A A Iron Phosphate B A A A A FeH3PO4 180 Isobutane (H3)2HH Isobutyl Alcohol (H3)2HH2OH Isooctane (H3)3H2H(H3) Isophorone (O) H(H3)H2 175 (H3)2H2 B to 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Isopropyl Acetate H3OOH(H3) A A A A A A A A A A A A Isopropyl Alcohol (H3)2HOH A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Isopropyl hloride H3HIH Isopropyl Ether (H3)2HOH(H3) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A JP-3 Fuel A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A JP-4 Fuel A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A JP-5 Fuel A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A JP-6 Fuel A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Kelp Slurry B B B B B B B B A A A A A A Kerosene B to A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Ketchup B to B A A A A Ketones 200 A A A A A A A A A A A A A Kraft Liquors A A Lactic Acid H- 3HOHOOH 25% B B A A A A A Lactic Acid H- 3HOHOOH 80% B B A A A A A A Lard Oil B B B B A A B Latex (2H6OSi)x Lauric Acid H3(H2)10OOH Lauryl hloride 12H25I Lead Acetate Sat'd Pb(2H3O2)2 3H2O A A A A A A A 100 A A 200 A A A A A Lead hloride Pbl Lead Nitrate Pb(NO3)2 Sat'd A A A Lead Sulfate PbSO B B B B B

276 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Lemon Oil B A A A A Ligroin Lime Slurry ao A A A A A A Lime Sulfur (as)x A A A A A A A Linoleic Acid H3(H2)4H:HH2H: H(H2)7OOH B to B B A A A Linoleic Oil Linseed Oil B to A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Liqueurs Lithium Bromide LiBr Lithium hloride Lil B B B B B B A A A Lithium Hydroxide LiOH A A A A A B Lubricating Oil (ASTM #1) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Lubricating Oil (ASTM #2) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Lubricating Oil (ASTM #3) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Ludox SiO2 A A A A A A A Magnesium arbonate MgO B B B B B B A A A A A Magnesium hloride Mgl2 Sat'd Magnesium itrate MgH6H5O7 5H2O A A A B B B A A Magnesium Fluoride MgF B Magnesium Hydroxide Sat'd Mg(OH) Magnesium Nitrate 70 Mg(NO3)2 2H2O Magnesium Oxide MgO Magnesium Sulfate MgSO4 7H2O Maleic Acid Sat'd 70 HOOH:HOOH Malic Acid OOHH2H(OH) OOH Manganese Sulfate MnSO4 4H2O B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B A B A B A A B B A A A A A A A A B A A A Mercuric hloride Hgl B A Mercuric yanide Hg(N)2 Sat'd A A Mercuric Sulfate HgSO4 Sat'd Mercurous Nitrate HgNO3 2H2O Sat'd A A A A Mercury Hg A A A A A A A A B A Methane H A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

277 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA Methanol (Methyl Alcohol) H3OH Methoxyethyl Oleate H3OH2H2 (OO17H33)2 ONENTRATION ABS Methyl Acetate H3O2H PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON B to 70 NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B A A A A Methyl Acetone 3H6O 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Methyl Acrylate H2:HOOH3 Tech. Pure B to 70 A A A 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Methyl Amine H3NH A A B A A A Methyl Bromide H3Br B B B B B Methyl ellosolve HOH2H2OOH A A B B B B A A A A A A Methyl hloride H3l Dry A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Methyl hloroform H3l A A A A A Methyl Ethyl Keytone (MEK) H3O2H A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Methyl Formate HOOH A A A A A A A A A A A A Methyl Isobutyl arbinol (H3)2HH2H (H3)OH Methol Isobutyl Keytone (H3)2HH2OH3 Methyl Isopropyl Keytone H3OH(H3)2 Methyl Methacrylate H2:(H3)OOH3 Methyl Sulfate (H3)2SO4 Methylene Bromide H2Br A A A A A A Methylene hloride H2l B B B B B B A A A A A Methylene hlorobromide H2lBr A A A A Methylene Iodide H2l Methylsulfuric Acid H3HSO Milk 70 Mineral Oil B to A B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Molasses 73 Monochloroacetic Acid H7IOOH Monochlorobenzene 6H5I Monoethanolamine HOH2H2NH2 50% Tech. Pure A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B A A B Motor Oil A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Morpholine 4H8ONH 75 Naphtha Naphthalene 10H8 B to 70 B to B B B B B B B B B B B A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A

278 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Natural Gas 73 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Nickel Acetate Ni(OOH3)2 4H2O Nickel Ammonium Sulfate A A NiSO4 (NH4)2SO4 6H2O Nickel hloride Nil2 Sat'd B A A A Nickel Nitrate Ni(NO3)2 6H2O Sat'd A A A A Nickel Sulfate NiSO4 Sat'd A B A Nicotine 10H14N B A A B 140 Nicotinic Acid sh4n- 70 A B B B B B B B OOH Nitric Acid HNO3 10% B A A A Nitric Acid HNO3 30% B A A Nitric Acid HNO3 40% B A A Nitric Acid HNO3 50% B A A Nitric Acid HNO3 70% B A A Nitric Acid HNO3 100% 70 B A A Nitrobenzene 6H5NO Nitroethane H3H2NO2 Tech. Pure B B A A A A A A A 70 A Nitrogen Gas N2 Nitroglycerin H2NO3H- NO3 H2NO A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B A A B Nitroglycol Nitromethane H3NO2 Tech. Pure A Nitrous Acid HNO2 10% B B B B Nitrous Oxide N2O B to B B B B A A A n-octane H8H B to A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Oleic Acid H3(H2)7H:H (H2)7OOH B to B to A B B A B B B A A A A A Oleum xh2so4 yso3 Olive Oil Oxalic Acid HOOOOH 2H2O Oxygen (Gas) O2 50% A A A B to 70 B to A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Ozone O A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Palm Oil A A A Palmitic Acid H3(H2)14OOH 10% A B B B A B B B B B A A A A Palmitic Acid H3(H2)14OOH 70% A B B B A B B B B B A A A A

279 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS HEMIALS AND FORMULA ONENTRATION ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Paraffin 36H74 B to A A A A B A A B B A A A A A A A Peanut Oil A A A A A A A n-pentane H3(H2)3H3 Peracetic Acid H- 3OOOH A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 40% 73 Perchloric Acid HIO4 10% A A A Perchloric Acid HIO4 70% B B A Perchloroethylene I2:I B B B B B B A A A A A A Perphosphate Phenol 6H5OH A A A A A A A A Phenylhydrazine 6H5NHNH2 125 B to 70 Phospate Esters 100 A A A Phosphoric Acid H3PO4 10% B A A A Phosphoric Acid H3PO4 50% B A A A Phosphoric Acid H3PO4 85% B A B A Phosphoric Anhydride P2O B A A Phosphorus (Red) A A Phosphorus (Yellow) Phosphorus Pentoxide P2O B A A Phosphorus Trichloride PI A A A Photographic Solutions A A Phthalic Acid 6H4(OOH)2 Picric Acid 6H2(NO2)3OH A A A B B B A A A B A 10% B A A A Pine Oil B B B B B A A A A A Plating Solutions (Brass) Plating Solutions (admium) Plating Solutions (hrome) Platings Solutions (opper) Platings Solutions (Gold) Platings Solutions (Lead) Platings Solutions (Nickel) Platings Solutions (Rhodium) Platings Solutions (Silver) A A A A* A A A Note: A* rating for Electroless Plating only

280 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Platings Solutions (Tin) A A Platings Solutions (Zinc) B Polysulfide Liquor B B B B B B Polyvinyl Acetate B B B A A A B B B B B ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Potash KOH B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A Potassium Alum ALK(SO4)212H2O " Potassium Aluminum Sulphate Potassium Amyl Xanthate Potassium Bicarbonate KHO3 Potassium Bichromate K2r2O7 Potassium Bisulfate KHSO4 Potassium Borate K2B4O75H2O " Potassium Bromate KBrO B B B B A A A 73 Sat'd A A A A Sat'd B A A B B B A A B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A Potassium Bromide KBr B B B A A A Potassium arbonate K2O B B B B B A A A A A A A A A A A Potassium hlorate KIO3 (Aqueous) B to B B B A A A A A A A A A A Potassium hloride KI B A A B B B B B B B A A A A A Potassium hromate K2rO A A B B B B B A A A A Potassium yanide KN B B B B A A A A A A Potassium Dichromate K2r2O7 Potassium Ethyl Xanthate KS2O2H5 Potassium Ferricyanide K3Fe(N)6 Potassium Ferrocyanide K4Fe(N)63H2O " Sat'd B B B B A A A A A B B A A A B B B A A A Potassium Fluoride KF A A A Potassium Hydroxide KOH 25% B to B B B B A A A A A Potassium Hypochlorite KIO A A Potassium Iodide KI B B B B A A A Potassium Nitrate KNO A A A B B B B B B A A A A A A A Potassium Perborate Potassium Perchlorate KIO Potassium Permanganate KMnO4 10% B B A A A A A A A A A Potassium Permanganate KMnO4 25% B B A A A A A A A A A

281 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Potassium Persulfate K2S2O Potassium Sulfate K2SO A A A B B A A A A B A A A A A A A Potassium Sulfide K2S B B B B B A Potassium Sulfite K2SO32H2O " B B B A A B Potassium Tripolyphosphate K5P3O B A A A A A A ABS PV Propane 3H Propargyl Alcohol H:H2OH Propionic Acid H3H- 2O2H Propyl Acetate 3H7OOH3 Propyl Alcohol H3H- 2H2OH n-propyl Bromide H3H2H2Br Propylene Dichloride H3HIH2I Propylene Oxide H3HH2O n-propyl Nitrate 3H7NO3 Pyridine N(H)4H 73 PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON B to 70 NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B to 70 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 300 B to B B B B B B A A B B to A A A A A A A A B to 70 B B B B B B B A B Pyrogallic Acid 6H3(OH) A A A A A A A A A A A A A Pyrrole HNH(H)2H B B B B B B B B B Quinone 6H4O2 100 A A A A A ARBON STEEL A 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL A STELLITE HASTELLOY Rosin A A A A A Salicylaldehyde 6H4OHHO Salicylic Acid 6H4(OH)(OOH) B B A A B Selenic Acid H2SeO Silicic Acid SiO2nH2O " Silicone Oil A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Silver hloride AgI Silver yanide AgN Silver Nitrate AgNO B A A Silver Sulfate Ag2SO Soaps B B A B B B B A A A A B A Sodium Acetate Na2H3O2 Sat'd A A B B B B B A A A A Sodium Alum AINa(SO4)212H2O " Sodium Aluminate Na2Al2O3 Sat'd B B B A B A A A A Ato 100 Ato 70 Ato 70 A A

282 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Sodium Benzoate 6H5OONa A Sodium Bicarbonate NaHO A A A B B A A A A A A A A A A Sodium Bichromate Na2r2O72H2O " Sat'd A A A A A Sodium Bisulfate NaHSO B A A A Sodium Bisulfite NaHSO B B A A A Sodium Borate (Borax) Na2B4O710H2O " Sat'd A A B B B A A A A A Sodium Bromide NaBr Sat'd B B A A A Sodium arbonate Na2O A A B B A A A A A A A A A B A Sodium hlorate NaIO3 ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON Sat'd EPDM B to 140 BUNA-N B to 70 HYPALON NEOPRENE B to 140 FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON 100 A A B B B B B A A A Sodium hloride NaI B A A A B B B B A B B B B A A A A Sodium hlorite NaIO2 25% Sodium hromate Na2rO410H2O " A A B B B B A A A A A Sodium yanide NaN A A A A A A A A A Sodium Dichromate Na2r2O72H2O " 20% B B B A A B Sodium Ferricyanide Na3Fe(N)62H2O " Sat'd A A Sodium Ferrocyanide Na3Fe(N)610H2O " Sat'd A A A Sodium Fluoride NaF A A B A A A Sodium Hydroxide NaOH 15% A A A A B A A A A A A A ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Sodium Hydroxide NaOH (austic Soda) 30% A B B B B A A A A A Sodium Hydroxide NaOH Sodium Hydroxide NaOH Sodium Hypochlorite NaOI5H2O " 50% B B B B B B B A A A A A 70% B B B B B B A A A A A A A A A Sodium Iodide NaI Sodium Metaphosphate (NaPO3)n A A B Sodium Nitrate NaNO3 Sat'd B A A B B A A A A A A A A A A B A Sodium Nitrate NaNO A A B B B A A A Sodium Palmitate H3(H2)14OONa Sodium Perborate NaBO23H2O " 5% B B B A A A A A A Sodium Perchlorate NaIO Sodium Peroxide Na2O Sodium Phosphate NaH2PO4 Sodium Phosphate NaH2PO4 B to 70 B to B A A A A A B Acid B B B B B B B B A B A A A A B A Alkaline B B B B B B B B A B A A A A B A

283 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Sodium Phosphate NaH2PO4 Neutr al B B B B B B B B A B A A A A B A Sodium Silicate 2Na2OSiO2 " B A A A A A A A A A A A Sodium Sulfate Na2SO4 Sat'd A A A B B A A A A A A A A A A A A Sodium Sulfide Na2S B B B B A A A A A ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM Sodium Sulfite Na2SO A A B B B B B A A A A OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Sodium Thiosulphate Na2S2O35H2O " A B B A A A Sour rude Oil A A A B A A A A A A A Soybean Oil A A B A A B A A A A A A A A Stannic hloride SnI A Stannic hloride SnI2 15% A A Starch B B B B B B B B A A A A A Steam (Low Pressure) A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Steam (Medium Pressure) 400 B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A Steam (High Pressure) B A B A A A A A Stearic Acid H3(H2)16OOH A A A B B A A A A A A Stoddard's Solvent A A A A A A A A A A A A A Styrene (6H5HH2)n B B B B B B B A A A A Succinic Acid O2H(H2)2O2H A A A A A A A A A A A A A Sugar 6H12O B B A A A A A Sulfamic Acid HSO3NH2 20% A B B B A A B Sulfate Liquors (Oil) B A A A A A Sulfite Liquors 6% B A A Sulfur S B B B B B A A A A Sulfur hloride S2I B Sulfur Dioxide SO2 Dry A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A Sulfur Dioxide SO2 Wet B B B A A A A Sulfur Trioxide SO B B A A A Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 Up to 30% A B A A A Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 50% A A A A Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 60% B B A B A Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 70% B A A Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 80% A A

284 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 90% A A Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 93% Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 94% Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 95% Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 96% Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 98% Sulfuric Acid H2SO4 100% ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON B to 200 B to 200 B to 200 B to 200 B to 200 B to 200 EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON B A 150 B A 150 B A 140 B B 70 B B B B Sulfurous Acid H2SO3 Sat'd B A A A A A DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Tall Oil B to B B B B B B B A A A A B A Tannic Acid 76H52O46 10% A A B B B B B A A A A A Tanning Liquors A A A B A A Tar A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Tartaric Acid HOO(HOH)2OOH B A A A A A A A A Terpineol 10H17OH 70 Tetrachloroethane HI2HI2 Tetrachloroethylene I2:I2 Tetraethyl Lead Pb(2H5) A A A A B B A A A Tetrahydrofuran 4H8O Tetralin 10H Tetra Sodium Pyrophosphate N94PzO710H2O " 140 Thionyl hloride SOI2 Thread utting Oils A A A A A A A A A A A Titanium Tetrachloride Til4 Toluene (Toluol) H36H B B B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Tomato Juice A B B A A A A Transformer Oil A A A A A A A A A Transformer Oil DTE/ A A A A A A A A A Tributyl itrate Tributyl Phosphate (4H9)3PO4 Trichloroacetic Acid I3OOH Trichloroethylene HI:I2 Triethanolamine (HOH2H2)3N B B B A A A B A A A B to B B B A A A A A A B B B A A A A A A A A A A

285 HEMIAL RESISTANE HART PLASTIS AND ELASTOMERS AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ( F) METALS ONENTRATION HEMIALS AND FORMULA Triethylamine (2H5)3N A A A Trimethylpropane (H2OH)33H Trisodium Phosphate NaPO412H2O " B B A A A A A Tung Oil B B B B B B B A A A A A ABS PV PP PV PVDF TEFLON EPDM BUNA-N HYPALON NEOPRENE FLUOROARBON ALUMINUM Turpentine A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Urea O(NH2) B B A A B Urine A A A A A Varnish A A A B B B A A A A A OPPER BRONZE (85% u) SILION BRONZE ALUMINUM BRONZE BRASS GRAY IRON DUTILE IRON ARBON STEEL 3% NI/IRON NI PLATED DUTILE 400 SERIES S.S. 316 S.S PH ALLOY 20 MONEL STELLITE HASTELLOY Vaseline (Petroleum Jelly) A A A A A A A A A A Vegetable Oil A A A A A A A A A A A Vinegar B A A A A A A Vinyl Acetate H3OOH:H B B B B B A A B Water, Acid Mine H2O A A A A B B B Water, Deionized H2O A A B B B A A A A A Water, Distilled H2O A A A A B B B A A A A A B A Water, Potable H2O B A A A A A B B B A B A A A A A A A Water, Salt H2O B B B B B A A A A B A Water, Sea H2O B B B B B B A A A A Water, Soft H2O A A A A A B B B A A A A A A A Water, Waste H2O B B B B B B B B B B B B A A A A Whiskey A B B A A A A White Liquor A A A Wine B A A A Xylene (Xylol) 6H4(H3)2 Zinc Acetate Zn(2H3O2)22H2O " A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Zinc arbonate ZnO B B B A B Zinc hloride Znl B B A A Zinc Nitrate Zn(NO3)26H2O " Zinc Sulfate Zn- SO47H2O " Trichloroacetic Acid I3OOH Trichloroethylene HI:I2 Triethanolamine (HOH2H2)3N A A A A B B A A A A A A B to B B B A A A A A A B B B A A A A A A A A A A To the best of our knowledge the information contained herein is accurate. However, neither Fabco nor any of its affiliates assumes any liability in whatsoever for the accuracy or completeness of the information contained herein. Final determination of the suitability of any information or material for the use contemplated, the manner of use, andwhether there is any infringement of patents is the sole responsibility of the user

286 Glossary of Terms 10 Adhesive a substance capable of holding materials together by surface attachment. Adhesive solvent an adhesive having a volatile organic liquid as a vehicle. See Solvent ement. Aging (1) The effect on materials of exposure to an environment for an interval of time. (2) The process of exposing materials to an environment for an interval of time. Antioxidant a compounding ingredient added to a plastic composition to retard possible degradation from contact with oxygen (air), particularly in processing or exposure to high temperatures. Artificial weathering the exposure of plastics to cystic laboratory conditions involving changes in temperature, relative humidity, and ultraviolet radiant energy, with or without direct water spray, in an attempt to produce changes in the materials similar to those observed after long-term continuous outdoor exposure. Note: The laboratory exposure conditions are usually intensified beyond those encountered in actual outdoor exposure in an attempt to achieve an accelerated effect. This definition does not involve exposure to special conditions such as ozone, salt spray, industrial gases, etc. Bell end the enlarged portion of a pipe that resembles the socket portion of a fitting and that is intended to be used to make a joint by inserting a piece of pipe into it. Joining may be accomplished by solvent cements, adhesives, or mechanical techniques. Beam loading the application of a load to a pipe between two points of support, usually expressed in pounds and the distance between the centers of the supports. Burst strength the internal pressure required to break a pipe or fitting. This pressure will vary with the rate of build-up of the pressure and the time during which the pressure is held. ement see adhesive and solvent, cement. hemical resistance (1) The effect of specific chemicals on the properties of plastic piping with respect to concentrations, temperature and time of exposure. (2) The ability of a specific plastic pipe to render service for a useful period in the transport of a specific chemical at a specified concentration and temperature. leaner medium strength organic solvent such as methyl ethyl katone to remove foreign matter from pipe and fitting joint surfaces. ompound the intimate admixture of a polymer or polymers with other ingredients such as fillers, softeners, plasticizers, catalysts, pigments, dyes, curing agents, stabilizers, antioxidants, etc. opolymer see Polymer. reep the time-dependent part of strain resulting from stress, that is, the dimensional change caused by the application of load over and above the elastic formation and with respect to time. Deflection Temperature the temperature at which a specimen will deflect a given distance at a given load under a prescribed conditions of test. See ASTM D648. Formerly called heat distortion. Deterioration a permanent change in the physical properties of a plastic evidenced by impairment of these properties. Note a. Burst strength, fiber stress, hoop stress, hydrostatic design stress, longterm hydrostataic strength, hydrostatic strength (quick), long-term burst, ISO equation, pressure, pressure rating, quick burst, service factor, strength, stress and sustained pressure test are related terms. Elasticity that property of plastics materials by virtue of which they tend to recover their original size and shape after deformation. Note if the strain is proportional to the applied stress, the material is said to exhibit Hookean or ideal elasticity. Elastomer a material which at room temperature can be stretched repeatedly to at least twice its original length and, upon immediate release of the stress, will return with force to its approximate original length. Elevated temperature testing tests on plastic pipe above 23 (73 F). Environmental stress cracking cracks that develop when the material is subjected to stress in the presence of specific chemicals. Extrusion a method whereby heated or unheated plastic forced through a shaping orifice becomes one continuously formed piece. Note this method is commonly used to manufacture thermoplastic pipe. Failure, adhesive rupture of an adhesive bond, such that the plane of separation appears to be at the adhesive-adherend interface. Fiber stress the unit stress, usually in pounds per square inch (psi), in a piece of material that is subjected to an external load. Filler a relatively inert material added to a plastic to modify its strength, permeance, working properties, or other qualities, or to lower costs. Fungi resistances the ability of plastic pipe to withstand fungi growth and/or their metabolic products under normal conditions of service or laboratory tests simulating such conditions. Heat joining making a pipe joint by heating the edges of the parts to be joined so that they fuse and become essentially one pipe with or without the addition of additional material. Hoop stress the tensile stress, usually in pounds per square inch (psi), in the circumferential orientation in the wall of the pipe when the pipe contains a gas or liquid under pressure. Hydrostatic design stress the estimated maximum tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the circumferential orientation due to internal hydrostatic pressure that can be applied continuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur. Hydrostatic strength (quick) the hoop stress calculated by means of the ISO equation at which the pipe breaks due to an internal pressure build-up, usually within 60 to 90 seconds. Long-term burst the internal pressure at which a pipe or fitting will break due to a constant internal pressure held for 100,000 hours (11.43 years). Impact, Izod a specific type of impact test made with a pendulum type machine. The specimens are molded or extruded with machined notch in the center. See ASTM D256. ISO equation an equation showing the inter-relations between stress, pressure and dimensions in pipe, namely: S = P (ID + t) or S = P (OD t) 2t 2t Where: S = stress P = pressure ID = average inside diameter OD = average outside diameter t = minimum wall thickness (Note a) Reference: ISO R Pipes of Plastics Materials for the Transport of Fluids (Outside Diameters and Nominal Pressures) Part I, Metric Series. Joint the location at which two pieces of pipe or a pipe and a fitting are connected together. The joint may be made by an adhesive, a solvent-cement or a mechanical device such as threads or a ring seal. Long-term hydrostatic strength the estimated tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the circumferential orientation (hoop stress) that when applied continuously will cause failure of the pipe at 100,000 hours (11.43 years). These strengths are usually obtained by extrapolation of log-log regression equations or plots. Molding, injection a method of forming plastic objects from a granular or powdered plastics by the fusing of plastic in a chamber with heat and pressure and the forcing part of mass into a cooler chamber where it solidifies. Note: this method is commonly used to manufacture thermoplastic fittings. Outdoor exposure plastic pipe placed in service or stored so that it is not protected from the elements of normal weather conditions, i.e., the sun s rays, rain, air and wind. Exposure to industrial and waste gases, chemicals, engine exhausts, etc. are not considered normal outdoor exposure. Permanence the property of a plastic which describes its resistance to appreciable changes in characteristics with time and environment. Plastic a material that contains as an essential ingredient an organic substance of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state, and, at some stage in its manufacture or in its processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow. Plastics pipe a hollow-cylinder of plastic material in which the wall thicknesses are usually small when compared to the diameter and in which the inside and outside walls are essentially concentric. See plastics tubing. Plastics tubing a particular size of plastics pipe in which the outside diameter is essentially the same as that of copper tubing. See plastics pipe. Polypropylene plastics plastics based on polymers made with propylene as essentially the sole monomer. Poly (vinyl chloride) a resin prepared by the polymerization of vinyl chloride with or without the addition of small amounts of other monomers. Poly (vinyl chloride) plastics plastics made by combining poly (vinyl chloride) with colorants, fillers, plasticizers, stabilizers, lubricants, other polymers, and other compounding ingredients. Not all of these modifiers are used in pipe compounds. Pressure when expressed with reference to pipe the force per unit area exerted by the medium in the pipe. Pressure rating the estimated maximum pressure that the medium in the pipe can exert continuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur. Primer strong organic solvent, preferably tetrahydrofuran, used to dissolve and soften the joint surfaces in preparation for and prior to the application of solvent cement. Primer is usually tinted purple. Quick burst the internal pressure required to burst a pipe or fitting due to an internal pressure build-up, usually within 60 to 90 seconds. Schedule a pipe size system (outside diameters and wall thicknesses) originated by the iron pipe industry. Self-extinguishing the ability of a plastic to resist burning when the source of heat or flame that ignited it is removed. Service factor a factor which is used to reduce a strength value to obtain an engineering design stress. The factory may vary depending on the service conditions, the hazard, the length of service desired, and the properties of the pipe. Solvent cement in the plastic piping field, a solvent adhesive that contains a solvent that dissolves or softens the surfaces being bonded so that the bonded assembly becomes essentially one piece of the same type of plastic. Solvent cementing making a pipe joint with a solvent cement. See Solvent ement. Stress when expressed with reference to pipe the force per unit area in the wall of the pipe in the circumferential orientation due to internal hydrostatic pressure. Sustained pressure test a constant internal pressure test for 100 hours. Thermoplastic a plastic which is thermoplastic in behavior. apable of being repeatedly softened by increase of temperature and hardened by decrease of temperature. Vinyl hloride Plastics plastics based on resins made by the polymerization of vinyl chloride or copolymerization of vinyl chloride with other unsaturated compounds, the vinyl chloride being in greatest amount by weight. Weld-orKnit-line a mark on a molded plastic formed by the union of two or more streams of plastic flowing together. ABBREVIATIONS ASA American Standards Association ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials PV hlorinated Poly (Vinyl hloride) plastic or resin. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Technical Officials ISO International Standards Organization NSF National Sanitation Foundation PP Polyproylene plastic or resin PPI Plastic Pipe Institute PS Product Standard when references to a specification for plastic pipe and fittings. These specifications are promulgated by the U.S. Department of ommerce and were formerly known as ommercial Standards. PSI pounds per square inch PV Poly (Vinyl hloride) plastic or resin SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.

287 OLLAPSE PRESSURE - PV DUT Graph I: alculated ollapse Pressures with Safety Factor of 5, FABO Type I Grade I PV Seamless Duct (minimum F vs Length of Span/Nominal O.D. The Sheet Metal & Air onditioning ontractors National Association (SMANA) sponsored a physical testing program on both rectangular and round Type I Grade I PV fabricated duct, as well as a theoretical analysis of the test work. Equations were developed for collapse pressures of varying I/D ratios (I = distance between reinforced stiffeners (inches) and D = OD (inches)) as well as for collapse of a very long tube. Round duct sizes ranged from 18 O.D. to 48 O.D. with wall thicknesses of.137 to.282. Test values correlated within a 10% range. calculated from the very long tube equation. (Note: ollapse values for all sizes with ratios exceeding 10 approach values for a very long tube). This graph can be utilized to determine reinforcement spacing distance for higher negative pressures than shown in the SMANA publication(1) for the sizes and minimum wall thicknesses shown. Example: 16 duct at 20 water I/D = 4 Fabco ran actual collapse tests on 4 sizes of extruded seamless duct from 6 through 12 with I/D ratios exceeding 10 which confirmed the values l = 16 x 4 = 64 between reinforcing stiffeners. (1) Thermoplastic Duct (PV) onstruction Manual, SMANA

288 OLLAPSE PRESSURE - PV DUT Graph II: alculated ollapse Pressure with Safety Factory of 5, FABO Type I Grade I PV Seamless F vs Nominal O.D./Wall 10 This calculated collapse pressure graph with a safety factor of 5 for Type I Grade PV duct has been experimentally confirmed for D/I ratios from The 5-1 safety factor is believed to be sufficient for reasonable out of roundness due to storage and handling. Use of this graph for lower D/I ratios of Type I Grade I PV pressure pipe should provide collapse pressures of greater than a 5-1 safety factor, since out of roundness will be appreciably less due to heavier walls of pipe produced under ASTM standards 1785 and Use of minimum wall thicknesses as shown in Fabco s Specification for Duct and the ASTM Standards mentioned above are recommended when utilizing this graph for operating temperatures of and below. Values of collapse pressures above 407 of water exceed a complete vacuum and should be considered as external collapse pressure. onversion to PSI collapse pressure can be obtained by multiplying the inches of water by.0361; inches of water to inches of mercury by

289 Pump Data I. STANDARDS FOR MEASURING HEADS AND APAITY. Head is measured in feet, pounds per square inch (PSI), or in inches of mercury. However, so that a common means of head measurement is understood, it is recommended that all heads be expressed in feet of water. Measurement of liquid should be expressed in U.S. gallons. II. ATMOSPHERI PRESSURE. At sea level it is 14.7 PSI. This will maintain a column of mercury 29.9 inches or a column of water 33.9 ft. high. This is the theoretical height of which water may be lifted by suction. The practical limit for cold water (60 F) is 25 feet. III. SUTION AND DISHARGE HEAD. 1. Static Suction Lift Is the vertical distance from the center line of the pump s suction inlet to the constant level of the water. This is added to discharge head to obtain total dynamic head. 2. Positive Suction Head Is the vertical distance above the center line of the pump s suction to the constant level of the water. This is subtracted from the discharge head to obtain total dynamic head. 3. Dynamic Suction Head Is the suction lift (or head) plus suction line friction loss. May be positive or negative. 4. Static Discharge Elevation Is the vertical distance from the pump s discharge to the highest point in the discharge line. 5. TDH (Total Dynamic Head) Is the total head and is the total of static suction lift (head), friction loss in suction line, static discharge elevation, friction loss in discharge line and fittings, plus discharge pressure, if any. To be hydraulically correct, we should not include Static Head in total dynamic head. Dynamic means moving and Dynamic Head only includes velocity head and friction loss. However, most pump people use TDH interchangeably with TH (Total Head). 6. Friction Head Is the heat loss experienced by the movement of the liquid through the suction and discharge lines. harts are available showing loss in feet of head at various flows through various pipe or hose sizes. harts also show velocity in feet/ sec, which is particularly important when pumping liquids with solids in suspension. Fittings, valves, etc. must be considered. IV. NPSH. Net Positive Suction Head is defined as head that causes liquid to flow through the suction line and enter the impeller eye. This head comes from either atmospheric pressure or from a static suction head plus atmospheric pressure. Two types of NPSH will be considered. 1. Required NPSH Is a function of pump design. It varies between different makes, between different models, and with capacity of any one pump. This value is supplied by the manufacturer, if available. Refer to pump curves or contact the factory. 2. Available NPSH Is a function of the system in which pumps operate. an be calculated for any installation. For a pump to operate properly, available NPSH should be greater than the required NPSH, plus 2 feet for safety factor, at a desired head and capacity. In simple terms, available NPSH is calculated by deducting from barometric pressure, in feet, the static suction head (+ or -), friction loss, and the vapor pressure (ft.) of liquid being pumped. Velocity heads should also be deducted. NPSH does not indicate the priming capabilities of self-priming centrifugal pumps. This capability is shown, generally on engine driven pumps, by respective break-off lines representing 10, 15, 20, 25 static suction lifts. V. USEFUL FATORS OR FORMULAS. a) Feet head x.433 = PSI (pounds per square inch). b) PSI (water) x 2.31 = Ft. Head c) Specific gravity of water (sp.gr.) = 1.0. d) PSI (water) x 2.31/sp.gr. = Ft. Head e) Weight of one U.S. gallon of water = 8.33 pounds f) One cubit foot (cu.ft.) of water contains 7.48 gallons. g) GPM = Gallons Per Minute. h) Imperial gallon x 1.2 = U.S. gallon; U.S. GPM x.833 = Imp. GPM. i) TDH = Total Head or total dynamic head. j) WHP = Water Horsepower. k) BHP = Brake Horsepower. I) EFF = Pump Efficiency. m) WHP = Ft.Head x GPM/3960 n) BHP = WHP/EFF or BHP = Ft. Head x GPM/3960 x EFF (Pump) o ) EFF = WHP/BHP x 100 p) For liquids having different specific gravity other than 1.0. WHP = Ft. Head x GPM x sp.gr./3960 BPH = Ft. Head x GPM x sp.gr./3960 x EFF BHP (for liquids other than water) = BHP (for water) x sp.gr. VI. EFFET ON ENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ON HANGE OF SPEED OR HANGE OF IMPELLER DIAMETER. Three rules govern the operation of centrifugal pumps: a) apacity varies directly with changes of speed or of the impeller diameter. GPM 1 /GPM 2 = RPM 1 /RPM 2 or GPM 1 /GPM 2 = Dia. 1 /Dia. 2 GPM 2 = GPM 1 /RPM 1 xrpm 2 and GPM 2 = GPM 1 /Dia. 1 xdia. 2 b) Head varies as the square of the speed or the impeller diameter. Head 1 /Head 2 = RPM 1 2 /RPM2 2 or Head 1 /Head 2 = Dia. 1 2 /Dia.2 2 Hd 2 = Hd 1 /RPM 1 2 /RPM2 2 and Hd 2 = Hd 1 /Dia. 1 2 /Dia.2 c) Power (BHP) varies as the cube of the speed or impeller diameter BHP 1 /BHP 2 = RPM 1 3 /RPM1 3 or BHP 1 = Dia 1 3 /Dia2 3 BHP 2 = BHP 1 3 /RPM1 3 xrpm2 3 and BPH 2 = BHP 1 3 /Dia.1 3 xdia

290 Pump Data Vll. EFFET OF ALTITUDE ON PUMPS At elevations above sea level, suction lift should be reduced accordingly to insure that the same amount of water can get into the pump as would occur at an equivalent sea level lift. Lower atmospheric pressure reduces horsepower output of gas engines, thus causing a drop in speed which reduces pump performance. Engine power will decrease 3.5% for each 1000 ft. above sea level and 1% for each 10 F above standard temperature at 60 F. Altitude Above Sea Level ATMOSPHERI PRESSURE ONDITIONS ELEVATIONS ABOVE SEA LEVEL Atmospheric Pressure Pounds/sq.in. Barometer Reading Ins. of Mercury Equivalent Head or Water, Ft. Reduction to Max. Practical Dyn.Suction Lift ft VIII. GUIDELINES FOR PUMPING WARM WATER MAXIMUM PRATIAL DYNAMI SUTION LIFTAND VAPOR PRESSURE Altitude Above Sea Level WATER HARATERISTIS Atmospheric Pressure Pounds/sq.in. Barometer Reading Ins. of Mercury Equivalent Head or Water, Ft. Reduction to Max. Practical Dyn.Suction Lift ft IX. EFFET OF SPEIFI GRAVITY The specific gravity of a substance is the ratio of the weight of a given volume to the weight of an equal volume of water at standard conditions A centrifugal pump will always develop the same head in feet no matter what the specific gravity of the liquid pumped; however, the pressure (in pounds per square inch) will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the specific gravity. The brake horsepower (BHP) of a pump varies directly with specific gravity. If the liquid has a specific gravity other than water (1.0), multiply the BHP for water by the sp.gr. of liquid handled. X. VISOSITY The viscosity of a fluid is the internal friction or resistance to motion of its particles. The coefficient of viscosity of a fluid is the measure of its resistance to flow. Fluids having a high viscosity are sluggish in flow, for example: heavy oil or molasses. Liquids such as water or gasoline have relatively low viscosity and flow readily. Viscosity is a fluid property independent of specific gravity. Viscosities vary with temperature; as temperature increases, viscosity decreases. Pressure changes have negligible influence on viscosity. There are many types of viscometers and expressed in many terms. ommonly used is SSU (Seconds Saybolt Universal). This is actually the time in seconds required for a given quantity of fluid to pass through a standard orifice under standard conditions. Viscous liquids tend to reduce the capacity, head, and efficiency, and increase the BHP. Kinematic Viscosity (in entistokes) = Absolute Viscosity (in centipoise)/specific Gravity entistrokes = SSU/4.64 This is an approximation for Viscosities greater than 250 S.S.U.The approximated performance for pumping fluids more viscous than water is determined from the following formula: BHP vis = Q vis X H vis X S.G./3960/E vis HOW ENTRIFUGAL PUMPS WORK Liquid is supplied to the inlet at the center of the pump head. Since centrifugal pumps are not self-priming, liquid must be supplied by gravity feed or the pump must be primed. The spinning impeller propels the liquid outward by centrifugal force, providing the motive force required to move the liquid. The specially shaped volute receives the liquid and converts the radial motion to a smooth pulseless flow. Easily adjust the flow rate by restricting the flow at the outlet. ENTRIFUGAL PUMP TERMS IMPELLER A rotating vaned disck that provides the pumping force. VOLUTE The body of the pump that is shaped to receive liquid from the inlet and direct it through the outlet.

291 LIQUID PUMP TERMINOLOGY HEAD The ability of a pump to push a column of water vertically in a pipe. As the column lengthens, the flow rate decreases until the column s weight just balances the pump s force and there is no flow. This height is the total head (usually expressed as feet of head). FLOW RATE Usually expressed in gallons per minute (GPM) for large-volume pumps; in gallons per hour (GPH) for small-volume pumps. DYNAMI SEAL Seal located at the shaft end of the pump drive. HEK VALVE Allows liquid to flow in one direction only. Generally used in discharge line to prevent reverse flow. DEAD HEAD Ability of a pump to continue running without damage when discharge is closed off. Only recommended with centrifugal pumps. DENSlTY (specific weight of a fluid) Weight per unit volume, often expressed as pounds per cubic foot or grams per cubic centimeter. FLOODED SUTION Liquid flows to pump inlet from an elevated source by means of gravity. Recommended for centrifugal pump installations. FLOW A measure of the liquid volume capacity of a pump. Given in gallons per hour (GPH), gallons per minute (GPM), liters per minute (I/min), or milliliters per minute (ml/min). FLUIDS Include liquids, gases, and mixtures of liquids, solids, and gases. For the purposes of this catalog, the terms fluid and liquid are both used to mean a pure liquid or a liquid mixed with gases or solids that acts essentially like a liquid in pumping applications. FOOT VALVE A type of check valve with a built-in strainer. Used at point of liquid intake to retain liquid in system, preventing loss of prime when liquid source is lower than pump. HEAD A measure of pressure, expressed in feet of head for centrifugal pumps. Indicates the height of a column of water being moved by the pump, assuming negligible friction losses. PRESSURE The force exerted on the walls of a container (tank, pipe etc.) by a liquid. Normally measured in pounds per square inch (psi) for positive displacement and metering pumps. LIP A flexible ring (usually rubber or similar material) with the inner edge held closely against the rotating shaft by a spring. MEHANIAL Has a rotating part and a stationary part with highly polished touching surfaces. Has excellent sealing capability and long life, but can be damaged by dirt or grit in the liquid. PAKED Multiple flexible rings mounted around the pump shaft and packed together by tightening gland nuts; some leaking is essential for lubrication. RELIEF VALVE Usually used at the discharge of a positive displacement pump. An adjustable, spring-loaded valve opens when a preset pressure is reached. Used to prevent excessive pressure buildup that could damage the pump or motor. SEALLESS (MAGNETI DRIVE) No seal is used; power is transmitted from motor to pump impeller by magnetic force. SELF-PRIMING Refers to pumps that draw liquid up from below pump inlet (suction lift), as opposed to pumps requiring flooded suction. SPEIFI GRAVITY The ratio of the weight of a given volume of liquid to the same volume of pure water. Pumping heavier liquids (specific gravity greater than 1.0) will require more drive horsepower. STATI DISHARGE HEAD Maximum vertical distance (in feet) from pump to point of discharge with no flow. STRAINER A device installed in the inlet of a pump to prevent foreign particles from damaging the internal parts. SUMP A well or pit in which liquids collect below floor level sometimes refers to an oil or water reservoir. TOTAL HEAD Sum of discharge head, suction lift, and friction loss. VISOSITY The thickness of a liquid, or its ability to flow. Most liquids decrease in viscosity and flow more easily as they get warmer. Impeller Discharge PRIME A charge of liquid required to begin pumping action when liquid source is lower than pump. May be held in pump by a foot valve on the intake line, or by a valve or chamber within the pump. SEAL A device mounted in the pump housing and/or on the pump shaft, to prevent leakage of liquid from the pump. There are three types: Inlet Volute (body)

292 PUMP DATA HEAD IN FEET ORRETION FATORS 10 VISOSITY ORRETION HART Example - Viscosity Determine BHPvis when pumping 66 usgpm at 80 ft. of 50% NaOH with a pump at 48% Eff. with water. *S.G. = 1.53 *Given from other tables *Visc = 78cSt = 120 P/1.53 Qw = 66 usgpm H.W. = 80 ft. E.W. = 48% =.48 q =.84 ) h = 1.00 ) From above chart e =.58 Qw x q = 66 x.84 = Hw x h = 80 x 1.00 = 80.0 Ew x e =.48 x.58 =.2784 BHPvis = x 80.0 x 1.53/3960/ = 6.16 H.P APAITY IN GALLONS PER MINUTE (at bep) WHERE BHPvis = Viscous brake horsepower S.G. = Specific Gravity 3960 = onstant Qw = apacity pumping water (USGPM) q = apacity correction factor (Fig 1) Qvis = Viscous apacity (USGPM) = q X Qw Hw = Head pumping water (ft.) H = Head correction factor (Fig 1) Hvis = Viscous head (ft) = h X Hw Ew = Efficiency pumping Water e = Efficiency correction factor (Fig 1) Evis = Viscous Efficiency = e X Ew BHPvis = (cq X Qs) X (Hw X h) X S.G./3960/e/Evis

293 PUMP DATA HEAD IN FEET (FIRST STAGE) ORRETION FATORS APAITY AND EFFIIENY HEAD APAITY IN 100 GPM PERFORMANE ORRETION HART

294 onversion Factors

295 INDEX Symbols 60 Series Hot Tap Ph / ORP Sensors Series ombination Ph / ORP Sensors D Dissolved Oxygen ontroller onductivity Sensor U Ultrasonic Flow/Level Monitor LP hlorine & Ph Analyzer 5-6 A A-100N Peristaltic Pumps 6-28 A-1600 Flexflo Peristaltic Pumps 6-29 Acrylic Sheet 4-14 Actuated Valve Am Series Hot Tap Ph /ORP Sensors 5-4 Angle Valves 3-8 Aquametrix 60 Series Ph /ORP Sensors 5-2 Aquametrix 2200P ontroller 5-1 Aquametrix Shark-120/240 ontroller 5-1 Aquametrix Shark Tx/Txp Transmit 5-1 Autotherm Temperature Regulated Welding Gun 4-36 AVFM-II Area Velocity Flow Level Monitor 5-9 B Bag Filters 6-18 Ball heck Valves/Foot Valves 3-10 Basket Strainers 6-22 BF Plus Fusion Machine 2-18 Black Hdpe And Nylon Insert Fittings 8-17 Bolted Flange Bulkhead Fittings 7-12 Bolted Flange Fittings 7-12 Buffer Solutions 5-20 Butterfly Valves Series hem-protm Diaphragm Pumps P hem-feed Diaphragm Pumps hem-feed Diaphragm Metering Pumps N hem-feed Diaphragm Metering Pumps 6-30 alibrated Needle Valves 3-8 alibration And Buffer Solutions 5-20 am ouplers 8-12 artridge Filters 6-20 atalyst Support 9-13 ement 1-21 entrifugal Pumps 6-3, 6-7 heck Valves 3-10 hemical Resistance hart For Snyder Tanks 7-9 hemkor Butterfly Valves 3-4 hemkor PV Pipe 1-15 hemkor Gear Box Butterfly 3-4 hemkor Schedule 80 PV Pipe 1-1 hemkor Schedule 40 Gray PV Fittings 7, 1-8 hemkor Schedule 40 Gray Pipe 6 hemkor Schedule 40 White PV Fittings 1-10, 1-11 hemkor Schedule 40 White PV Pipe 1-9 hemkor Schedule 80 PV Fittings 1-16 to 1-19 hemkor Schedule 80 PV Fittings 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5 hemkor Schedule 80 PV Pipe 1-1 hemkor Single Union Ball Valves 3-1 hemkor Super Bloc True Union Ball Valves 3-1 hemtrol True Union Ball Valves 3-2 hlorine Analyser 5-6, 5-18 lamp-it PV Tapping Saddles 1-23 lear Braided PV Hose 8-3 lear PV Hose 8-2 lear PV Pipe 1-12 lear PV Sheet 4-5 losed Top Tanks 7-5 olumn Internals 9-14 ompact Econo Ball Valves 3-6 omposolite Fiberglass Building System 4-30 onductivity Sensor 5-6 onductivity Sensors 5-12 onical Bottom Tanks 7-8 ontroller, ph, ORP, onductivity 5-1 ontroller, Oxygen 5-10 onventional Butt Fusion Machine 2-19 PV Fittings PV Pipe 1-15 PV Sheet 4-7 PV Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-9 D DFM-4.0 Doppler Flow Monitor 5-8 Door Strips 4-17 Double Wall ontainment Tanks 7-6 Dual ontainment Pipe 2-8 Duct Fittings 9-2 Duct Pipe 9-1, 9-4, 9-5, 9-8, 9-9 Duranit atalyst Support 9-13 Durashield Foam ore Building Panels 4-30 E Eductors 6-25 Energy-Saving Hollow Balls 9-15 Es Series onductivity Sensors 5-6 Expansion Joints, PV PV

296 INDEX 10 F F300 - Pitot Tube Acrylic Flowmeters 5-21 F-400N Machined Acrylic Tube Flowmeter 5-22 F-410N Machined Acrylic Tube Flowmeter 5-23 F-420N MachiNed Acrylic Tube Flowmeter 5-24 F-430N Machined Acrylic Tube Flowmeter 5-25 F-440 Polysulfone Flowmeter 5-27 F-450 Polysulfone Flowmeter 5-28 F-550 Machined Acrylic Block Flowmeter 5-26 F-1000 Digital Paddlewheel Flowmeter 5-29 F-2000 Digital Paddlewheel Flowmeter 5-31, 5-32 Fabco Eliminator Type LTH Fabco Eliminator Type LTV Fabcograte FRP Grating 4-21, 4-22, 4-23 Fabco Round Welding Rod 4-13 Fabco Specialty Tubing 8-8 Fast & Tite Tube Fittings 8-15 Fiberglass Structural Shapes And Plate 4-26 to 4-28 Fiberglass Threaded Rod And Nuts 4-38 Filter artridges 6-5, Filter hambers 6-10 Filterchem Level & Pump ontrols 5-17 Filterchem Mini-Stat Level ontrol 5-17 Fire Retardent PP Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-8 Fittings, Bulk Head 7-12 Fittings, lear PV 1-13 Fittings, PV Fittings, LXT 2-3 Fittings, Metric 1-14 Fittings, PP 1-27 Fittings, PP 1-26 Fittings, PV 1-2 Fittings, PVDF 1-29 Fittings, Self Aligning 7-12 Fittings, Tube 8-16 Fittings, White PV 1-10 Flange Gaskets 1-24 Flexible PV Door Strips And Sheet 4-17 Flexible Tubing 8-10 Flexi-Joint onnections 7-12 Flex-Protm Peristaltic Pumps 6-27 Flowline ontact Level Sensors 5-16 Flowline Echopod 5-15 Flowline Echosafe 5-15 Flowline Echospan 5-16 Flowline Echoswitch Ii 5-16 Flowline Echotouch 5-15 Flowmeters Flow Monitors 5-8 Flow Sensor 5-7 Flow Sensors Foot Operated Valves 3-12 FRP Grating 4-21 FRP Handrails 4-29 FRP Plate 4-29 FRP Structural Shapes 4-26 Fuseal Schedule 40 Polypro Pipe 2-5 Fuseal Schedule 80 25/50 PVDF Pipe 2-7 Fuseal Schedule 80 Polypro Pipe 2-6 Fusion Machines G Gaskets 1-24 Gate Valves 3-9 GF 375 True Union Ball Valves 3-2 GF 546 True Union Ball Valves 3-3 GF 568 Gearbox Butterfly Valves 3-5 GF ontain-it 2-8 GF Electric Actuated Ball Valve 3-17, 3-18 GF Electric Actuated Butterfly Valve 3-18 GF Manual Diaphragm Valve 3-21 Gf Metric PV Fittings 1-14 GF Pneumatic Actuated Ball Valve 3-16 GF Pneumatic Actuated Butterfly Valve 3-19 GF Pneumatic Actuated Diaphragm Valve 3-20 GF Type 304 Y-heck Valves 3-10 GF Type 567 Butterfly Valves 3-5 GF V182/V82 Pressure Regulating Valve 3-15 GF V185/V85 Pressure Relief Valve 3-14 GF V186/V86 Pressure Retaining Valve 3-15 GF V782 Pressure Reducing Valve 3-14 GF V786 Pressure Retaining Valve 3-13 Glass Backed Sheet 4-15 Globe Valves 3-9 Grating Accessories 4-25 Grating, FRP 4-21 Grating, Pultruded 4-24 Guidelines For Factory-Installed Fittings 7-13 GVS-65 Gas Venting System 2-1 H Hanna HI504 ph/orp ontroller 5-18 Hanna HI700 E ontroller 5-18 Hanna Industrial Probes 5-19 Hanna Multi Parameter Meter 5-20 Hanna ph, ORP, Free/Total hlorine Analyser 5-18 Hanna Pocket Testers 5-19 Hayward 4200 artridge Filters 6-20 Hayward Bus ontrol System 3-22 Hayward Duplex Basket Strainers 6-23 Hayward EAU Electric Actuator 3-24 Hayward EJM Reversing Actuator 3-24

297 Hayward EVR Electric Actuator 3-24 Hayward EVS/EVT Electric Actuator 3-23 Hayward Filter Bags 6-12 Hayward FLT Series artridge Filters 6-5 Hayward PAD/PAS Pneumatic Actuator 3-22 Hayward PD/PS Pneumatic Actuators 3-23 Hayward PKD/PKS Pneumatic Actuator 3-23 Hayward Plastic Y-Strainers 6-21 Hayward PMD/PMS Pneumatic Actuator 3-22 Hayward PP/PVDFSimplex Bag Filter 6-19 Hayward PV/PV/PP Duplex Bag Filter 6-19 Hayward PV/PV Simplex Bag Filter 6-18 Hayward Simplex Plastic Basket Strainers 6-22 Hayward Strainers Baskets 6-24 Hayward TB Series True Union Ball Valves 3-3 HDPE Insert Fittings 8-17 HDPE Pipe 2-9 HDPE Sheet 4-10 Headers 5-34 Heatflon Immersion Heating Panels 9-16 Heating Panels 9-16 Heavy Duty Tank Adapters 7-11 HF Thermoplastic entrifugal Fans High Density PE Sheet 4-10 High Pressure Lay-Flat Discharge Hose 8-14 Hollow Balls 9-15 Horizontal losed Top Tanks 7-7 Hose, Abrasion Resistant 8-5 Hose lamps 8-9 Hose, lear Braided 8-3 Hose, lear PV 8-2 Hose, Lay Flat 8-14 Hose, PV 8-5 Hose, PV Transfer 8-4 Hose, Spa 8-1 HDPE Pipe 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12 I Immersion Heating Panels 9-16 Insert Fittings 8-17 Instaduct pvc Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-9 Instaduct Pvc Ventillation Duct Fittings Instaduct Pvc Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-1, 9-4, 9-5 In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-6, 6-15 IP80 Series Paddle Wheel Flow Sensors 5-7 IP100 Series Paddle Wheel Flow Sensors 5-7 IR Plus Fusion Machine 2-18 K K3130 Series BF Heavy Wall Pvc Hose 8-5 Kuri-Tec lear Braided PV Hose 8-3 INDEX Kuri-Tec lear PV Hose 8-2 L Laboratory Ball ock Valve - Type Laboratory Grade PP TubIng 8-7 Laramy Basic High Speed Torch 4-33 Laramy Fabricating Torch 4-33 Laramy Torch And ompressor 4-33 Laramy ustom Welding Tips 4-35 Laramy Economy ompressor/torch 4-34 Laramy Plastic Bending Bars 4-34 Laramy Universal High-Speed Tip 4-35 Laramy Vari-FT/RS Self ontained Torch 4-34 Large Diameter Swing heck Valves 3-11 Lay-Flat Discharge Hose 8-14 LDPE Sheet 4-11 Level Monitors 5-8 Level Sensor 5-14 Level Transmitter 5-14 Level Transmitters 5-15 Lexan Sheet 4-14 Liquid Dispensing Assemblies 3-13 Low Density Pe Sheet 4-11 LXT Schedule 80 Fittings 2-3 LXT Schedule 80 Pipe 2-2 LXT Valves And Accessories 2-4 M Mag Drive Pumps 6-4, 6-8 Mazzei Injectors 6-26 Mcelroy 824 Fusion Machine 2-20 Metering Ball Valves - Type Metering Pumps Micro-Flo Digital Flowmeter 5-33 Mini-Max Level ontrol 5-17 Mist Eliminator 9-17 Mixers 6-9 Model 75 1/2-2 Fusion Tool 2-19 MSA250-SE Electrofusion Machine 2-19 MS Series onductivity Sensors 5-6 Multi Parameter Meter 5-20 N Natural Polypropylene Pipe 1-25 Natural Polypropylene Schedule 80 Fittings 1-26, 1-27 Natural Pvdf Fittings 1-30 Nylon able Ties 8-13 Nylon Insert Fittings

298 INDEX 10 O Open Top ylindrical Tanks 7-2 Open Top Rectangular Tanks 7-3, 7-4 ORP Probe 5-2 ORP ontrollers 5-18 ORP Probes 5-11 Other Plastic Rod 4-19 P P91 Dissolved Oxygen Probe 5-10 Packing 9-13 Packing 9-10, 9-11 Penguin A-A In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-15 Penguin A-B In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-15 Penguin A In-Tank Filtration SystemS 6-15 Penguin A-SF In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-17 Penguin BF In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-17 Penguin B Filter Bag hambers 6-11 Penguin N In-Tank Filter hambers 6-10 Penguin T arbon Treatment hambers 6-11 Penguin HF In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-16 Penguin Horizontal entrifugal Pumps 6-7 Penguin Horizontal Volute Pump 6-8 Penguin Magnetic Drive Pump 6-8 Penguin MF In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-16 Penguin Mixers 6-9 Penguin MR Precious Metal Recovery System 6-14 Penguin PE Penductor SpargIng Eductors 6-25 Penguin PF Wound Filter artridges 6-12 Penguin PGG Pressure Gauges And Guards 6-9 Penguin PP Pleated Filter artridges 6-13 Penguin Sealless Vertical Pumps 6-7 Penguin Series Filter hambers 6-10 Penguin Series P arbon Filter artridges 6-13 Penguin Series PES Penductor Systems 6-25 Penguin Series PS Filter Sleeves 6-12 Penguin Sm In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-16 Penguin SR Precious Metal Recovery System 6-14 Penguin VF In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-17 Perforated Sheet 4-16 PE Tubing 8-6 Ph ontrollers 5-18 Ph Probe 5-2 Ph Probes 5-11, 5-19 Pipe, Acid Waste Pipe, ore Sampling 2-13 Pipe, PV 1-15 Pipe, Dual ontainment 2-8 Pipe, Fuseal 2-5, 2-6, 2-7 Pipe, Gas Vent 2-1 Pipe, HDPE Pipe, LXT 2-2 Pipe, PP 1-25 Pipe, PROGEF PP 2-14 Pipe, PV 6 Pipe, PV 1-1 Pipe, PV S40 6 Pipe, PV White 1-9 Pipe, PVDF 1-28 Pipe, SDR 1-20 Pipe, SYGEF PVDF 2-16 Plastic Bolts, Nuts And Washers 4-39 Plastic Fans Plastic Fans 9-18 Plastic Liner / ore Sampling Pipe 2-13 Plastic Packing 9-10, 9-11 Plastic Rings 9-12 Plastic Saddles 9-12 Plexiglas Sheet 4-14 Pocket Testers 5-19 Polycarbonate Sheet 4-14 Pool And Spa Hose 8-1 PP am oupler Fittings 8-12 PP Fittings 1-26, 1-27 PP Pipe 1-25 PP Sheet 4-8 PP Sheet, opolymer 4-9 PP Tubing 8-7 PP Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-8 Precious Metal Recovery System 6-14 Pressure By-Pass Valves 3-12 Pressure Gauges 6-9 Pressure Regulators 3-12 Pressure Relief Valves 3-12 Pressure Sensors 5-13 Pressure TransMitter 5-12 Pressure Valves 3-12 Primer 1-21 Probe, ORP 5-2 Probe, ph 5-2 Probes, ORP 5-11 Probes ph 5-11 Probes, ph 5-19 PROGEF Natural PP Piping System 2-15 PROGEF STD (Beta PP) Piping System 2-14 Pultruded Grating 4-24 Pumps, entrifugal 6-7 Pumps, entrifugal 6-3 Pump Selection Guiide 6-32 Pumps, Mag Drive 6-4 Pumps, Mag Drive 6-8 Pumps, Metering 6-27 Pumps, Vertical Immersible 6-1

299 PV And PV S80 Expansion Joints 1-24 PV And PV Shapes 4-20 PV hemcock Valves 3-8 PV Fittings PV Fittings, lear 1-13 PV Fittings, Gray 1-7 PV Fittings, Metric 1-14 PV Fittings, White 1-10 PV Gate Valves 3-9 PV Globe Valves 3-9 PV Hose Insert Fittings 8-11 PV Pipe 1-1, 1-6 PV Pipe,lear 1-12 PV Pipe, Sdr 1-20 PV Rod 4-18 PV SDR Pressure Pipe 1-20 PV Sheet 4-1 PV Sheet, lear 4-5 PV Ventillation Duct Fittings 9-2, PV Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-1, 9-4, 9-5 PVDF Fittings PVDF Natural Sheet 4-16 PVDF Pipe 1-28 PVDF Schedule 80 Pipe 1-28 R Rectangular Tanks 7-3 Red PVDF Fittings 1-29 Ring Packing 9-12 Rings 9-12 Risers 5-34 Riser Supports 5-34 Rod, Other 4-19 Rod, PV 4-18 Rod, UHMW 4-18 Rod, Welding 4-13 S Saddles 1-23, 9-12 Saddles Packing 9-12 Safplate Fiberglass Gritted Plate 4-29 Safrail Fiberglass Ladders 4-30 Safrail Industrial Fiberglass Handrails 4-29 Schedule 40 lear PV Fitting 1-13 Schedule 80 Pipe 1-1 Self Aligning Ball Dome Fitting 7-12 Series E Instrument Grade Pe Tubing 8-6 Series K7130 Heavy Wall PV Transfer Hose 8-4 Series K7160 Standard Wall PV Hose 8-4 Series UBK Abrasion-Resistant PV Hose 8-5 SG 110 Socket Fusion Machine 2-18 INDEX Shapes, PV And PV 4-20 Shark 5-1 Sheet, Acrylic 4-14 Sheet, lear PV 4-5 Sheet, opolymer PP 4-9 Sheet, PV 4-7 Sheet, Glass Backed 4-15 Sheet, HDPE 4-10 Sheet, LDPE 4-11 Sheet, Lexan 4-14 Sheet, Perforated 4-16 Sheet, Polycarbonate 4-14 Sheet, PP Homopolymer 4-8 Sheet, PV Sheet, PVDF 4-16 Sheet, UHMW 4-12 Signet 2250 HydrostraTic Level Sensor 5-14 Signet 2350 Temperature Sensor 5-13 Signet 2450 Pressure Sensor 5-13 Signet ph/orp Electrodes 5-11 Signet ph/orp Electrodes 5-11 Signet onductivity Electrodes 5-12 Signet 8250 Level Transmitter 5-14 Signet 8350 Temperature Transmitters 5-13 Signet 8450 Pressure Transmitter 5-12 Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter ontroller 5-11 Signet Flow Sensors 5-14 Simona lear PV Sheet Technical Data 4-6 Simona opolymer PP Sheet 4-9 Simona pvc orzan Sheet 4-7 Simona Homopolymer PP Sheet 4-8 Simona Plastic Rod 4-18 Simona Pvc Type II Sheet Technical Data 4-4 Simona Pvc Type I Sheet 4-1 Simona Pvc Type I Sheet Technical Data 4-2 Simona Versadur lear Pvc Sheet 4-5 Simona Versadur Pvc Type II Sheet 4-3 Small Open Top ylindrical Tanks 7-1 Solvent ement And Primer 1-22 Solvent ement And Primer 1-21 Spa Hose 8-1 Spray Nozzles 5-35 Spx Series Paddle Wheel Flow Sensors 5-7 Stingray Level & Velocity Logger 5-9 Strainers, Basket 6-22 Strainers, Y 6-21 Super ompact Ball Valves 3-6 Swing heck Valves 3-11 SYGEF PLUS PVDF Piping System 2-17 SYGEF STD PVDF Piping System

300 INDEX T Tank Adapters 7-11 Tank Adaptersd 7-11 Tank Fittings And Adapters 7-11 Tank Resin Selection Guide 7-10 Tanks, losed Top 7-5, 7-7 Tanks, onical Bottom 7-8 Tanks, ontainment 7-6 Tanks, Open Top 7-1 Tanks, Rectangular 7-3 Tapping Saddles 1-23 Temperature Sensor 5-13 Temperature Transmitters 5-13 Thermoplastic entrifugal Fans 9-18 Three Way Ball Valves 3-7 Tiger-Flex Pool And Spa Hose 8-1 Tracstar 630 Fusion Machine 2-20 Transferlox Plastic Saddles 9-12 Transferpack Plastic Rings 9-12 Transition Unions 1-23 Tri-Packs Plastic Packing 9-10, 9-11 Trueseal Thermoplastic Tube Fittings 8-16 Tube Fittings 8-16 True Union Ball Valves Tube Fittings 8-15, 8-16 Tubing, PE 8-6 Tubing, PP 8-7 Tubing, Specialty 8-8 Type 343 Horizontal Three Way Ball Valves 3-7 Type 343 Vertical Three Way Ball Valves 3-7 U UHMW Rod 4-19 UHMW Sheet 4-12 Ultra High Molecular Weight (UHMW) Sheet 4-12 Uni-Spray Headers 5-34 Uni-Spray Nozzles 5-35 Uni-Spray Risers 5-34 Uni-Spray Riser Supports 5-34 Universal Ball Dome Fittings 7-12 Valves, Pressure 3-12 Valves, Three WaY 3-7 Valves, True Union 3-1 Ventillation Duct Pipe 9-1, 9-4, 9-5, 9-8, 9-9 Vertical losed Top Tanks 7-5 Vertical Pumps 6-7 Verticle Immersible Pumps 6-1 W Wafer heck Valve 3-11 Webster 5, 7, 8 And 10 entrifugal Pumps 6-3 Webster D Series Immersible Pumps 6-4 Webster In-Tank Filtration Systems 6-6 Webster R Series Mag Drive Pumps 6-4 Webster S12/S16 Immersible Pumps 6-2 Webster S Series Immersible Pumps 6-1 Webster S Series Quick Service Pumps 6-2 Wegener Airtherm Hot Air Welding Gun 4-36 Wegener Duratherm Hot Air Welding Gun 4-36 Wegener Exweld Alpha2 E Extrusion Welder 4-37 Wegener Exweld Beta2 E Extrusion Welder 4-37 Wegener Exweld Gamma2 E Extrusion Welder 4-37 Wegener Exweld Mini-F Extrusion Welder 4-37 Wegener Spark Testers 4-35 Welding Guns And Accessories Welding Rod 4-13 White PV Pipe 1-9 Y Y Pattern Valves 3-8 Y Strainers 6-21 Z Zinzer Jumbotherm Welding Gun 4-31 Zinzer Unitherm Welding Gun 4-31 Zinzer Welding Accessories V Valves , 3-8 Valves, Actuated 3-16 Valves, Butterfly Valves, heck 3-10 Valves, Gate 3-9 Valves, Globe 3-9 Valves, LXT

301 onditions of Sale TERMS PRIES All prices shown are subject to change without notice and should be confirmed with FABO. These prices do not constitute an offer to sell. All are based on standard domestic packaging and do not include special overseas packaging or other requirements. Dealer, ontractor and OEM discounts for volume orders are available for most product lines. PLAING ORDERS To expedite handling of your order, please use the combination of part number, size and brief description. Our minimum order is $25.00 net. SHIPPING All shipments are FOB shipping point except those qualified materials which carry mill shipment freight allowances. The term FOB shipping point means the carrier accepts all responsibility upon accepting the shipment at our dock. Therefore, any claims for damage or loss must be settled between you and the carrier without delay. BILLING TERMS Prior credit approval and nondelinquent status are necessary before shipping on open account. Our open account terms are net 30 days. A 2% per month (24% per annum) charge is made on accounts exceeding 30 days. All taxes required by law are computed and added to your invoice. Our minimum billing is $25.00 net. EXPORT SHIPMENT FABO will be happy to handle your export order. We will offer prompt replies on your inquiry including Pro Forma Invoice, IF Port of Unloading, and export crating on all our products. Terms and Letter of redit drawn on a anadian bank. Address your inquiry to Export Dept. at our Maple, Ontario office. LAIMS & RETURNS laims for shortages or inaccurate filling of orders must be made to FABO within ten days after receipt of goods. Include a copy of the invoice or shipper on which the goods were purchased. You will then receive a Returned Goods (RG) authorization number. There is a 25% restocking charge on any standard goods returned for credit or exchange, when the error is not ours, providing such goods that are returned are in new and saleable condition, are returned on a prepaid basis and the returned goods do not exceed ten percent of the original ordered quantities. Goods returned without the RG authorization will be refused. Any custom fabricated, hand fabricated or specially ordered products are non returnable. NOTIE TO BUYER INFORMATION FABO will endeavour to furnish such advice as it may be able to supply with reference to the use by buyer of any materials purchased, but FABO makes no guarantees and assumes no obligation or liability for the advice given verbally or in print or the results obtained. Buyer assumes all risk and liability which may result from the use of any material, whether used singly or in combination with other products. No suggestion for product use shall be construed as a recommendation for its use in infringement on any existing patent. PRODUT WARRANTY All products not manufactured by FABO carry the original manufacturer s warranty. opies are available on request. All products manufactured by FABO will be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from shipment from FABO. If found to be defective by us, we will repair or replace the nonconforming parts or goods at our option or return the purchase price at our option. Notice of a defective product must be given to FABO in writing immediately upon the discovery of such defect and include a copy showing proof of purchase. FABO will not be liable for special or consequential damages in any claim, suit or proceedings arising under this warranty, nor will FABO accept any liability for claims for labor, loss of profit, repairs or other expenses incidental to replacement. The Product Warranty expressed above is our only warranty and may not be verbally changed or modified by any representative of FABO. The offer to repair or replace nonconforming goods within warranty does not cover defects caused by shipping damages, damages caused by improper use or installation, or by the buyer s attempts to use the products beyond their mechanical, thermal or electrical capacity. All freight costs incurred in shipping parts to or from FABO, or to the manufacturer if necessary, are at the expense of the customer. FABO reserves the right of product substitution to meet market shortages

302 NOTES

303 NOTES

304 NOTES

305 NOTES

306 APPLIATION FOR REDIT

307 HWY. 27 TESTON RD. MAJOR MAKENZIE HWY. 400 JANE ST. KEELE ST. MAPLE, ONT. HWY. 7 HWY. 11 FABO PLASTIS WHOLESALE LTD Teston Road, Maple ON L6A 1T3 Telephone: (905) (800) Fax: (905) (800) info@fabcoplastics.com HWY. 401 Laval Autoroute (440) FABO PLASTIQUES IN., 5000 Autoroute (440) Laval O homedey, Quebec H7T 2Z8 Telephone: (450) (888) Fax: (450) montreal@fabcoplastics.com 149 ST. 137 AVE. 131 AVE. 148th ST. ST. ALBERT TRAIL FABO PLASTIS WESTERN LIMITED Street, Edmonton, Alberta T5L 2H8 Telephone: (780) (800) Fax: (780) edmonton@fabcoplastics.com 128th AVE. YELLOWHEAD HWY. # ST. (HWY 15) 96 AVE TRANSANADA HWY. 88 AVE 192 ST. TELEGRAPH TRAIL 194A ST. 200 ST. FABO PLASTIS WESTERN (B) LIMITED A Street, Surrey, B.. V4N 4G4 Telephone: (604) (800) Fax: (604) surrey@fabcoplastics.com

308 Toronto - Edmonton - Vancouver - Montreal Teston Road, Maple(Toronto), Ontario, anada, L6A 1T3 Telephone: (905) Toll Free (800) Fax: (905) info@fabcoplastics.com Street, Edmonton, Alberta T5L 2H8 Telephone: (780) Toll Free (800) Fax: (780) , edmonton@fabcoplastics.com A Street, Surrey, B.., V4N 4G4 Telephone: (604) Toll Free (800) Fax: (604) surrey@fabcoplastics.com 5000 Autoroute (440), Laval Ouest, homedey, Quebec, H7T 2Z8 Telephone: (450) Toll Free (888) Fax: (450) montreal@fabcoplastics.com